JP7779527B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

There are currently gaming machines capable of executing effects (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-195760 A

However, there was room for further improvement in the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines.

The present invention aims to increase the enjoyment of games.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming control means capable of executing a game, the gaming control means includes an arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing according to a program, a read-only storage means for storing the program, and a rewritable storage means for storing information updated with the execution of the predetermined arithmetic processing, the arithmetic processing means being configured to be able to execute a first branch instruction and a second branch instruction for branching an execution address of an instruction included in the program, the first branch instruction being a branch instruction of a predetermined instruction length, and the second branch instruction being a branch instruction of a shorter instruction length than the first branch instruction and for determining a specific flag to perform branching with a limited range of branch destination addresses, and the read-only storage means being configured to have a first use area set as a use area for storing data, a second use area set as a use area, and a rewritable storage means for storing information updated with the execution of the predetermined arithmetic processing. the program is stored in the first area of use and includes a specific processing routine and a specific subroutine called from the specific processing routine, the specific processing routine placing a first instruction capable of changing a specific flag at a first address, placing a second branch instruction capable of branching the execution address to a third address after the second address at a second address after the first address, making it possible to execute the second branch instruction without going through processing capable of changing the specific flag after execution of the first instruction, and placing a second instruction that calls the specific subroutine between the second address and the third address.

One aspect of the present invention can increase the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front side. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation control system of a gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing a procedure of a main process. 10 is a second flowchart illustrating the procedure of the main process. 10 is a flowchart (part 3) illustrating the procedure of the main process. A diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a gaming microcomputer. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device information initialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance display editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an output process. A flowchart showing the steps of the prize slot switch/status monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fraud and winning monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the number of winnings counter. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of a gaming machine status check process. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting change/confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special game processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the start port switch monitoring process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for common processing of the special chart start port switch. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a specific area switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps for the special chart 1 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps for the special chart 2 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps for setting the jackpot flag 1. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot determination process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the small hit determination process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the support hit determination process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of a special chart information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a two-byte allocation process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a distribution process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the fluctuation start information setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during special chart change. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a time-saving end setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the presentation mode information check process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the first half of the processing during special chart display. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the latter half of the processing during special chart display. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a support operation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a bonus game. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of reels. This is a flowchart showing the steps for processing the end of a jackpot. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 1. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 2. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for general game processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for gate switch monitoring processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the regular power winning switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the normal map change processing transition setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during normal map changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during normal map display. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a normal hit. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a normal power operation transition setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing normal residual balls. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal winning end processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of an external information editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process. 10 is a time chart showing the transmission of external information or a test signal. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device-related process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an outside-area integration process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a performance display device control process. A flowchart showing the steps of the difference ball confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device operation monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a received command check process. 10 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart showing a single command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading symbol command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead variation command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pattern command process. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a hit-related command. 10 is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions in game states. 10 is another example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions in game states. This is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reserves corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart change display game. This is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol A. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol B. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol F. 10 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart variable display game. This is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, this is a timing chart showing the game state, special chart change display game (special chart change), normal chart state, normal power state, number of special chart 2 reservations, etc., from the time-saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state in which remaining reservations are consumed). FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified number of remaining reservations (specified number of remaining reservations) corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart variable display game. This is a table summarizing the operation status of time-saving when a new trigger for time-saving operation occurs from each game state in the third embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating the display of a collective display device according to a third embodiment. A figure showing the features of the general map variation display game in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the features of normal power operation in the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart information setting process according to the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variable start information setting process according to the third embodiment. This is a table showing the setting status of the variable pattern table in the third embodiment for each game state and special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rendering screen of a display device according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. This is a time chart showing the on/off state of the jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information in the third embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing the output of a test signal to a test firing test device in the third embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating examples of easy-to-win state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support in the third embodiment. 11 is a table showing the output of a launch position designation signal according to the third embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing the output of a launch position designation signal according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large prize opening and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid in the case of a small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game. This is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large prize opening and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid in the third embodiment in the case of a small win result in the special chart 2 variable display game. 13 is a table showing the state of a performance-related device according to the state of a safety device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (part 1); FIG. 20 is a second example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment; 13 is another example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram illustrating different operation notification displays depending on the game status in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of an operation preview display before and after a reach during a variable display in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation advance notice display while waiting for customers in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, a display screen of the display device in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is illustrated. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of a specific model display displayed other than as a video in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a specific model display displayed other than as a video in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a CPU according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a flag register according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a memory map according to the fifth embodiment. 10 is an instruction table (example 1-1) illustrating an LD instruction for transferring 1 byte of data among transfer instructions. 10 is a command table (example 1-2) illustrating an LD command that transfers two bytes of data among transfer commands. The instruction table (example 1-3) illustrates an LDW instruction that transfers two bytes of direct value among transfer instructions, and the instruction table (example 1-4) illustrates other transfer instructions (LDD instruction, LDY instruction). 10 is an instruction table (Example 2-1) illustrating a CP instruction, among comparison instructions, that compares one byte of data with another. 10 is an instruction table (Example 2-2) illustrating a CP instruction that compares two bytes of data among comparison instructions. 10 is an instruction table (example 2-3) illustrating a CPJ instruction among comparison instructions. 10 is an instruction table (example 2-4) illustrating a CPW instruction, among comparison instructions, that compares two bytes of data. 3-1 is an instruction table illustrating a JRR instruction that jumps to a nearby address, and FIG. 3-2 is an instruction table illustrating a JR instruction that can jump to a distant address. An instruction table (Example 4-1) illustrates a CALL instruction that can call a subroutine at any address, and an instruction table (Example 4-2) illustrates a CALLT instruction and a CALLR instruction that cannot call a subroutine at any address. 5A and 5B are instruction tables (Example 5-1 and Example 5-2) illustrating return instructions for returning from a subroutine, an interrupt process, etc. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an output process according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of outside-area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a test signal output process according to the fifth embodiment. 1 is a program listing showing the program structure of a part of a main processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of a timer interrupt processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of a special game processing program and a program list explaining a special game sequence branch table. This is a program list showing the program structures of a 2-byte decrement processing program, a 2-byte data acquisition processing program, a 1-byte data acquisition processing program, and a special drawing status check processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a part of a start port switch monitoring processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of a hardware random number acquisition processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of the special chart start port switch common processing program. This is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special chart reservation information determination processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of the jackpot determination processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of the special normal processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of part of the processing program during special chart display. This is a program list showing the program structure of another part of the special chart display processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of a start port signal editing processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a safety device-related processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of an outside-area integration processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a test signal output processing program. This is a program listing showing the program structure of a portion of the difference ball confirmation processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a safety device operation monitoring processing program. 10 is a command table illustrating comparison commands executed by a CPU of a performance control device. FIG. 20 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 1); 23 is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in time series in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 2); 13 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in time series in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 3); FIG. 13 is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in time series in the sixth embodiment (part 4); FIG. 13 is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order (part 5) according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 13 is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in time series in the sixth embodiment (part 6); FIG. 13 is another example (example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in time series (part 1) in relation to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is another example (example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in time series in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 2). FIG. 13 is another example (example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in time series (part 3) in relation to the sixth embodiment. 13 is a table illustrating the expected probability of winning based on panel combinations in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a table illustrating the expected probability of winning based on panel combinations in the sixth embodiment. This is a table explaining the expected probability of winning due to the effect presentation when an over-winning occurs in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a table illustrating the content of the dialogue effects (dialogue effects) corresponding to the color of the hand icon in the icon movement effect in the sixth embodiment. 20 is a table illustrating the contents of meter outer periphery effect colors corresponding to the colors of the meter scales of a meter in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a table illustrating the color of the meter decrease number (display color of the decrease number) displayed on the display screen in accordance with the decrease number of the meter scale of the meter in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a table illustrating the meter decrement corresponding to the color of the hand icon that moves in the icon movement effect in the sixth embodiment. This figure shows a case in which, in the seventh embodiment, the stopped pattern becomes a time-saving pattern in the final special pattern change display game (final game of time-saving) in the specific game state, and then the game enters the specific game state (time-saving state) again.

[First embodiment]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Preferred embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the terms front, back, left and right refer to directions as seen by a player playing a game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 has an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via hinges 16 and can be rotated open and closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). The left end of the opening/closing frame is the shaft end attached to the hinge, and the right end is the open end that opens when rotated. The frame 11 and front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that allows a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be viewed. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened separately. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, it is possible to access the game area 32 of the game board 30. Furthermore, by opening the front frame 12 without opening the glass frame 15, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30.

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c that can emit light depending on the game status are arranged at the center, right side, and left side of the upper part of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c are as follows:
These decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c each contain an LED or other lighting element, and emit light according to the game state. The lighting elements disposed inside the decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c constitute a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

The decorative device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 above the glass frame 15 (or the opening and closing frame) and protrudes diagonally upward toward the front. The decorative device 18a has a substantially flat front surface 456 that has various indications such as the model name.
In this embodiment, 8a is fixed and does not move, but to reduce the sense of oppression felt by the player, it may protrude from its retracted initial position (normal position) to a forward, upward, or diagonal operating position only when necessary, or may move in the front-to-back or up-to-down direction. Note that when the decorative device 18a (here, the top unit) operates (moves), it becomes a frame effect device (movable accessory) that can move from its initial position to an operating position.

The decorative device 18b is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. The decorative device 18c is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of the glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. The decorative devices 18b and 18c irradiate light toward the player toward the center (inside) of the gaming machine 10, and the light leaks out of the gaming machine 10 from multiple openings.

Upper speakers 19a are disposed in the upper right and upper left corners of the glass frame 15. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are disposed in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a and lower speakers 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc. The left and right upper speakers 19a are covered by right and left speaker decoration members 470, respectively.

An upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls (game media) is attached to the bottom of the glass frame 15. The upper tray 21 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to the ball launcher.

The upper tray unit 20 includes a performance operation device that receives input operations from the player, a ball dispensing operation device that receives input operations from the player, and a decoration device 2 that performs light-emitting effects according to the game status.
2 and further comprising:

The effect operation device is an operation device including the effect button 25, the cross key switch 450, and the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and is provided at the top center and on the left side of the upper tray unit 20 so that the player can easily operate it. The effect button 25 is connected to the operation panel 49.
The operation panel 490 is disposed in the opening of the operation panel 490 so as to be surrounded by the
The button 25 can be made to reflect light by plating the surface with metal or by being made entirely of metal, and has a metallic luster of, for example, silver. When the button 25 emits light, the light from the button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 490, making the button 25 emit light more effectively.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b are connected to the operation panel 69 of the upper tray unit 20.
The cross key switch 450 (cross key SW) is located on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20, adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and is used to adjust the brightness of the LEDs for effects, for example. The cross key switch 450 may also be called a directional key switch, and may be a general type consisting of multiple (for example, four) switches arranged in the front, back, left, right, etc. For example, while waiting for customers and/or while playing (during a game),
In a predetermined state such as above, the volume control button switches 451a and 451b may be pressed to adjust the volume of the speaker 19, and a switch before or after the cross key switch 450 may be pressed to adjust the amount of light (brightness, luminance) of an LED for effect, etc.
The volume of the speaker 19 may be adjustable by pressing the left or right switch 50 .

When the player operates the effect operation device (particularly the effect button 25), the display device 41
In the special symbol variable display game displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 2), it is possible to perform effects that involve player operation. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to perform a preview effect that notifies in advance the outcome of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes the special symbol variable display game, and when simply referred to as the variable display game, this specification refers to the special symbol variable display game.

In addition, the presentation pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being played, but also when the game is not being played, by the player operating the presentation operation device.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of multiple game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. The special game state may be, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the probability of a special result (for example, a jackpot) occurring in the variable display game is high (probability change state, probability change state), a jackpot state (
In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a plurality of gaming states with different probabilities of occurrence of special results, and the gaming control device 100 (gaming state selection means,
The setting means can select (set) one game state from the plurality of game states to be the current game state.

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) may continue until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), continue until a predetermined number of variable display games have been played (number-cut type, ST), or continue until a predetermined probability drop lottery is won (drop lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate a probability variable state may not be determined by the jackpot pattern random number, but may be configured so that the probability variable state is always generated when a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that a player operates when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20. The ball lending operation device is equipped with a balance display unit 490a, a ball lending button 27, and a return button 28.
is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card, etc. is displayed. The ball lending button 27 is a button that a player operates when borrowing game balls, and the return button 28 is a button that a player operates when ejecting a prepaid card, etc. from a card unit (not shown) that is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10.

The decoration device 22 contains an illumination element such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs illumination effects according to the game status, and is provided on the upper tray unit 20. The illumination element disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes part of the frame decoration device 18 (see Figure 4).

Below the glass frame 15 containing the above-mentioned upper tray unit 20, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is provided an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown), and a lower tray unit 29 containing a lower tray 23, etc., in which game balls can be stored. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are compatible in shape and are arranged side by side, stacked vertically. By operating the upper tray operating part 435 of the upper tray unit 20, game balls on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23.

The operating handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12, below the right-side lower speaker 19b. When a player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launcher launches game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the play area 32 of the play board 30. The launch speed of the game balls launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the rotation amount of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher can change the launch force, which is the force (speed) with which the game balls are launched into the play area 32, in response to the player's operation of the operating handle 24, and can launch game balls in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch modes include a left-handed shot (normal shot), in which the game balls flow down the left side of the play area 32, and a right-handed shot, in which the game balls flow down the right side of the play area 32.

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is disposed below the upper tray unit 20 at a predetermined distance. The lower tray 23 has a ball ejection hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball ejection hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball ejection hole 23a, the lower tray 2
The game balls stored in the storage unit 3 can be discharged to the outside through the ball ejection hole 23a.

In addition, on the back side of the front frame 12, there are arranged a power supply unit 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed on the island equipment, and a payout device (payout unit) that pays out game balls that flow down from the upper tank 448 onto the upper tray 21.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 3 serving as a mounting base for various components.
The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine 10.
The game is played by launching game balls from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle spikes, etc. are arranged as components for changing the direction in which the game balls flow, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing their rolling direction due to these components.

A center case (front structure) 40 is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32, forming a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, there is a performance display device (variable display device) that displays (variably displays) multiple pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is provided as a display device for displaying the game board 30. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is provided so that the displayed content can be seen from the front side of the game board 30 through a window in the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to a display with a liquid crystal display, and may be a display with an EL or CRT display, etc.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that create the variable display game. In addition, the display screen displays images based on the progress of the game (jackpot display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.).

In addition, the center case 40 has a structure for trapping game balls flowing down the game area 32.
The center case 40 has an inlet 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game balls to the inside of the warp passage 40e, and a stage portion 40b on which the game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is located above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper performance unit 40c and a side performance unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively.
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board performance device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the normal symbol start gate 34 to detect a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start gate 34. When a game ball that has been shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, a normal symbol variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and another general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball into these general winning openings 35 is controlled by a winning opening switch (SW
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3).

A start winning hole (start winning hole 1, first start winning area) 36 that provides the start conditions for the special symbol variable display game is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40.
In the game area 32 on the right side of the normal game start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric device, normal electric) equipped with a second starting winning port (starting port 2, second starting winning area) is provided below the normal game start gate 34. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that rotates forward to change the state so that game balls can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in a closed state, game balls cannot win into the normal variable winning device 37. When a game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special game change display game is executed as an auxiliary game. Note that game balls are more likely to win into the starting winning port 36 when hit from the left, and game balls are more likely to win into the normal variable winning device 37 when hit from the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type normal electric device, and when the result of the normal variable display game reaches a predetermined stop display mode, it operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) to open, changing to an open state (a state where it is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player) in which the game balls can easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37. If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (a state where it is easy to win),
The start winning port 36 is in a closed state (a state where it is difficult to win a prize) in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the normal variable winning device 37. In this embodiment, the start winning port 36 is different from the normal variable winning device 37 in that
It does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), but it can also be configured to have a movable member (opening/closing member).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game or by making the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game higher than normal, or by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state without special play, thereby generating the time-saving state (normal power support state) as the above-mentioned specific game state. Note that the time-saving state (normal power support state) also occurs overlappingly in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state).

In the game area 32 to the right of the starting winning hole 36, there is a lower large winning hole solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3).
The system is equipped with a first special variable prize winning device 38 (special electric device) with an attacca-style door 38c that opens the lower large prize winning opening by retracting from the front to the back. The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the large prize winning opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a game state advantageous to the player) based on the results of the special variable prize display game, facilitating the flow of game balls into the lower large prize winning opening, thereby awarding the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls, the number of time-saving/probability-change events after the end of a jackpot). A lower large prize winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is located within the lower large prize winning opening as a detection means for detecting game balls that enter the large prize winning opening. The first special variable prize winning device 38 facilitates game balls entering the opening when hit from the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, an upper large winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is provided.
The second special variable prize winning device 39 has an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper large prize winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction that falls to the right by a force of the second special variable prize winning device 39.
The second special variable prize device 39 converts the special prize opening from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) depending on the results of the special game display game, facilitating the flow of game balls into the special prize opening, thereby awarding the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls or the number of time-saving/probability-change events after a jackpot). The special prize opening is equipped with an upper special prize opening switch 39a (count switch) (see Figure 3) as a detection device for detecting game balls that enter the special prize opening. The second special variable prize device 39 also facilitates game balls entering the special prize opening when the player hits the right side. The lower special prize opening switch 38a and the upper special prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the special prize opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning port) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. A big win is confirmed when a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning port) after the opening and closing door 39c is opened by a small win. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long period of time only during a small win, so that the game ball can easily pass through. The game control device 100
The passage of the game ball into the specific area 86 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described below), and when a V winning is detected, it is determined that the game will transition to a big win state after the small win ends, and information indicating that a V winning has occurred (specific area passing command, etc.) is sent to the performance control device 300 described below.The performance control device 300 can then notify the V winning on the display device 41, etc.

That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine (type 1+2 machine). In this embodiment, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small win,
A game ball V-enters a specific area 86 (V entry port) in the special variable entry device 39, causing a big win.

General winning slot 35, start winning slot 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
When a gaming ball enters one of the large winning slots 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning slot from the payout device onto the upper tray 21. In addition, the lower gaming area 32 is provided with an outlet 30b for collecting gaming balls that do not enter the winning slots. In addition, the general winning slot 35, the start winning slot 36, the normal variable winning slot 37, and the special variable winning slots 38, 39, or their vicinity, are provided with LEDs (part of the board decoration device 46 described below) that can emit light when a gaming ball enters a winning slot, etc.

In addition, a collective display device 50 that executes a special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game, special chart 2 change display game) and a normal chart change display game is provided in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, outside the game area 32. The collective display device 50 has display units 51 to 60 that are made up of LED lamps (light-emitting units, light-emitting members) and display information such as the current game status.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special chart change display unit 51 (special chart 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special chart change display unit 52 (special chart 2 display, lamp D2) for a change display game, which are configured with a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like, a change display unit 53 (normal chart display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for a normal chart change display game, and a memory display unit (special chart 1 hold display 54, special chart 2 hold display 55, normal chart hold display 56) for informing the start (hold) memory number of each change display game.
) and. The special diagram 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special map 2 reservation indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14.
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

The collective display device 50 also includes a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp D7) that notifies the player when hitting to the right (when the player should hit to the right) or when hitting to the left (when the player should hit normally).
There are provided a second game status display unit 58 (second game status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-shortened state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time-shortened state, a third game status display unit 59 (third game status indicator, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the probability state of a jackpot is in a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38, 39 are opened and closed).

In the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display that repeatedly turns on and off (flashes) the identification information (for example, the central segment). Note that the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment-type display units,
It may be configured by a group of multiple LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as a display may be turned on and off (all LEDs flashing simultaneously), or may be turned on and off in a cyclic manner (starting with any one LED, turning on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined intervals), or may be turned on and off (flashing) or turned on and off in a cyclic manner by a predetermined number of LEDs among the multiple LEDs. In the normal map display 53, the variable display game is also performed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal map display 53 and the special map display 5
1. It can be configured appropriately in the same way as the special diagram 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) that repeatedly turns on and off the symbols (the fourth special symbol and the fourth symbol described below), and lamp display units 3-6 (LEDs) for announcing the start (hold) memory number of each special symbol variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the performance control device 300 (described below).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 flash at a predetermined flashing cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. That is, the lamp display units 1 and 2 are switched on and off at a flashing cycle of 200 msec (milliseconds).
The time for the display of the special picture 1 display 51, the special picture 2 display 52, and the normal picture display 53 of the collective display device 50 is changed by the game control device 1.
00, whereas the fluctuation time of lamp display units 1 and 2 of lamp display device 80 is measured by performance control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (Special Chart 1 Reserve LED 1, Special Chart 1 Reserve LED 2) display the number of reserved special charts 1 (first start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Similarly, lamp display units 5 and 6 (Special Chart 2 Reserve LED 1, Special Chart 2 Reserve LED 2) display the number of reserved special charts 2 (second start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Lamp display units 3-6 stop displaying the number of reserved numbers when a jackpot occurs, but continue to display the number of reserved numbers when not in a jackpot state (including when a reach occurs on display device 41, as described below).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the regular chart change display game and the special chart change display game will be explained.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched gaming ball flows down the gaming area 32 while changing its rolling direction due to obstacles, windmills, etc., arranged in various places within the gaming area 32, and enters or wins in a normal start gate 34, a normal winning hole 35, a start winning hole 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, or goes out an outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32.
and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball enters a general winning slot 35, a start winning slot 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning slot is discharged to the upper tray 21 via a payout device.

The normal map start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects a game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and a normal map variation display game is executed based on the result of the judgment of the random number value for winning judgment that is extracted at this time.

In a state where the normal map variation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variation display game has already been played and has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variation display game is a win and the normal variation winning device 37 has been converted to an open state, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, if the normal map start memory number (normal map reserve number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number will be incremented (+1).

The normal map start memory (normal map reserve) stores a random number value for determining whether the normal map fluctuation display game is a win or a loss, and when this random number value for determining whether the game is a win or a loss matches the judgment value, the normal map fluctuation display game is a win and a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The normal map display device 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a win when lit as normal identification information (normal map) and a loss when unlit, and displays the variation of the normal identification information by flashing this LED, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, displays the result by turning the LED on or off.

If the random number value of the normal symbol extracted when passing through the normal symbol start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol (normal symbol) displayed on the normal symbol display 53 stops in the winning state, and the state becomes a winning state.
When the normal solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), allowing the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37.

The entry of the game ball into the start entry hole 36 and the entry into the normal variable entry device 37 is detected by the start entry hole 1 switch 36a (see Figure 3) and the start entry hole 2 switch 37a (see Figure 3).
The game ball that entered the start winning hole 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special chart 1 variable display game,
The number of winning balls is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game balls that have won in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls for the special chart 2 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When detecting the starting winning ball of the special symbol variation display game, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, the random number value of each variation pattern, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special symbol reserve memory area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special symbol starting winning memories up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of memories in the special symbol starting winning memories is displayed on the special symbol 1 reserve display 54 and the special symbol 2 reserve display 55 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 4.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 variable display game on the special symbol 1 display 51 based on a win in the start winning slot 36 or the first start memory (special symbol 1 start memory, special symbol 1 reserve). Also, the game control device 100 executes a special symbol 2 variable display game on the special symbol 2 display 52 based on a win in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special symbol 2 start memory, special symbol 2 reserve).

The special chart 1 variable display game (first special chart variable display game) and the special chart 2 variable display game (second special chart variable display game) are played by displaying the identification information (special pattern, special chart) on the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result pattern.

In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special chart variable display game that displays multiple types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) in a variable manner corresponding to each special chart variable display game.

The decorative special symbol variable display game on the display device 41 begins by displaying (scrolling) the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the aforementioned numbers, etc., in the order of left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and center (third special symbol), and then, after a predetermined time, the changing symbols are stopped sequentially to display the results of the special symbol variable display game. The display device 41 also displays a variety of effects, such as the appearance of characters, to enhance entertainment value. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variable display game, another decorative special symbol (identification information) is a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol), which changes by repeatedly turning on and off (flashing) in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. After a predetermined time from the start of the variable display, the lamp display units 1 and 2 stop displaying "off" if there is a miss, or "on" if there is a big win or small win.

When the game ball enters the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value), a specific result state (special result state) is derived by the displayed pattern as a result of the special chart variable display game, and the jackpot state (
In response to this, the display state of the display device 41 changes to a special result state (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are lined up).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the large winning port solenoids (38b and 39b) (
3), the special variable prize winning device 38, 39 converts the large prize winning port from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the large prize winning port provided in the special variable prize winning device 38, 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls have won, and during this time the player is granted the privilege of winning many game balls.

When a game ball enters the first start winning slot 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is a small win value), a specific result mode (small win result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols as a result of the special symbol variable display game, and a small win state is achieved. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small win result mode. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small win, but the small win value (small win determination value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 operate the large winning port solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 3).
By applying electricity to the power supply (see reference), the large prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short period of time.
In addition, the full opening time of the large prize opening is shorter in the small win state (small win game state) than in the big win state (special game state), so the game value (number of balls acquired) that the player can acquire in the small win state is less than in the big win state. In addition, the large prize opening is in the open state in both the small win state and the big win state, but the big win state may be called the first special game state, and the small win state may be called the second special game state. In addition, for simplicity, in this embodiment, in the small win state, the special variable prize opening device 39 (
This section explains a configuration in which only the upper large prize entry port is converted to an open state, and in a jackpot state (including a jackpot state due to a V prize during a small prize), only the special variable prize entry device 38 (lower large prize entry port) is converted to an open state.

Here, we will explain the difference between a big hit and a small hit.

A jackpot is a special result that accompanies the activation of a conditional device, and a minor jackpot is a specific result that does not accompany the activation of a conditional device. The conditional device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special variable display game (a jackpot symbol stops displaying). The activation of the conditional device means, for example, that a jackpot state occurs and a specific flag is set to activate the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 as special electric devices in succession. Also, the activation of the conditional device means that the specific area 86
It may also mean that a game ball has passed through (V entry) to the ball. The condition device not being activated means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of simply winning a small win lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if a V entry occurs during a small win state, the condition device will be activated. The "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. The "condition device" may also be,
This term is commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines to refer to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric devices, and it is used in this specification as a term with the same meaning.

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the big win flag is set and the special variable winning device is opened, whereas in the case of a small win, the small win flag is set and the special variable winning device is opened.

The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but are set so that the special chart variable display games are not executed simultaneously. The special chart 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special chart 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory for the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and when it becomes possible to execute the special chart variable display game, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed (special chart 2 reserved priority consumption, special chart 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the special symbol 1 variation display game and the special symbol 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or may be executed on the same display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special symbol variation display games corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation display game and the special symbol 2 variation display game may not be executed simultaneously.

In the following description, when there is no distinction between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, they will simply be referred to as the special chart variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the start gate 1 switch 36 in the start winning gate 36
The start gate 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning gate switch 35a, and count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 use non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) that have a magnetic detection coil and detect game balls by utilizing the phenomenon in which the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Also, a microswitch with mechanical contacts can be used for the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game overall, and is composed of a CPU section 110 having a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC 32V, DC 12V, DC 5V, etc., generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to the device to make it operable.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as 12 V or 5 V from the DC voltage of 32 V, and a gaming microcomputer 11.
The device is equipped with a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM inside the device 1 in the event of a power outage, a power outage monitoring circuit, and a control signal generating unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100.
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 are provided on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board.
By providing a value of 0, it is possible to exclude the part from the scope of replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with a single large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor.
The power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply 410 (especially the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generating unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The game control device 100 is also provided with a RAM initialization switch 112.
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read when the gaming microcomputer 1
The reset signal is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by the CPU 11. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal, which resets the entire control system.

The game control device 100 (main board) also includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by the operator through a rotation operation or the like, to make it possible to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the settings related to the game conditions (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big win or a small win, but other game conditions (such as presentation) other than probability can also be changed according to the probability setting value. For example, the larger the probability setting value, the higher the winning probability may be. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are used to change the settings related to the game conditions (
The setting change means (setting change device 42, setting means) is configured to be able to change the probability setting value. Note that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a dedicated, independent setting value change switch may be provided.

The setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are therefore located in a position where they cannot be operated (inaccessible position) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. In other words, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered from a power outage, power restored), the gaming machine 10 can transition to various states, such as a setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed (set), and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, depending on the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

In this embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in six stages, for example, and the probability setting value is set to 1 (setting 1).
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the setting that is least favorable to the player, and setting 6 is the setting that is most favorable to the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (medium settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is set to a setting value of 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (
The setting value is changed as follows: setting 4 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), working setting values 0 to 5 are set to correspond to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, but the working setting values and the probability setting values may be aligned to the same numerical range (i.e., 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) and treated as the same (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position. Furthermore, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value (0-5) is displayed on the performance display device 152, which is, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment display (eight-segment display including the dot Dp). Information regarding setting values, such as the display probability setting value (e.g., a display that can read probability setting values 1-6), may also be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (e.g., the collective display device 50). Information regarding setting values, such as the display probability setting value, may also be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (e.g., the collective display device 50) not only during the setting variable state or setting confirmation state, but also during game control execution (during execution of the game processing described below).

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and a read/write RA (read-only memory) 111c.
The memory 111 includes a random access memory (M) 111c.

The ROM 111b stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a working area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers, and stores information related to the game (game information), serving as a storage means that can retain the stored information even in the event of a power outage. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

The ROM 111b also stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that specifies, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the presentation content, and whether or not a reach state occurs. The variation pattern table is a table that the CPU 111a uses to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory. The variation pattern table also includes a miss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables (such as a second-half variation group table and a second-half variation pattern selection table) for determining a second-half variation pattern, which is a variation pattern after a reach state has been reached, and tables (such as a first-half variation group table and a first-half variation pattern selection table) for determining a first-half variation pattern, which is a variation pattern before a reach state has been reached.

Here, reach (reach state) refers to a game state advantageous to the player (special game state) when a display device with a variable display state is provided, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results become a predetermined special result pattern.
In the gaming machine 10, when some of the display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
It refers to a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result state. In other words, a reach state refers to a display state in which the display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches a stage just before being derived and displayed, but does not deviate from the display conditions for becoming a special result state. For example, a reach state also includes a state in which a variable display is performed using multiple variable display areas while maintaining a state in which all special result states are present (a so-called full rotation reach). The reach state refers to a display state in which the display control of the display device progresses and reaches a stage just before the display result is derived and displayed, and in which at least some of the display results in the multiple variable display areas that have been determined before the display result is derived and displayed satisfy the conditions for becoming a special result state.

Therefore, for example, if a decorative special symbol variable display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special symbol variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the variable display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, a reach state is reached when the variable display stops in the left and right variable display areas and the conditions for a special result state are met (for example, the same identification information). Alternatively, once the variable display in all variable display areas is stopped, a reach state is reached when the conditions for a special result state are met in any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information, excluding the special result state), and the remaining variable display area is displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach effects, and there are different types (types) of reach effects that have different possibilities (different expectations) for deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode). These include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and special 2 reach (SP
There are three types of reach: Special 2 Reach (SP3 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premium Reach.
The expected probability (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach < premium reach. Also, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special chart variable display game (when a jackpot occurs). In other words, it may also be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that a special result mode is not derived in the special chart variable display game (when a miss occurs). Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot compared to when a reach state does not occur.

The expected degree of a performance (preview) indicates the probability of a jackpot if that performance is selected, and can be calculated based on the selection rate of that performance when there is a jackpot and the selection rate of that performance when there is no jackpot (when there is a miss).

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, and controls the entire gaming machine 10. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 also generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special symbol variable display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern random number for determining a small jackpot pattern, a support jackpot pattern random number for determining a time-saving pattern (a stop pattern for a support jackpot) described later,
A random number generating circuit for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern in a special pattern variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and no reach variation displays), and a random number generating circuit for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern in a special pattern variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and no reach variation displays), and a random number generating circuit for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern in a special pattern variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and no reach variations ...
The timer 11a is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) and a clock that provides update timing for the random number generating circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a performs processing related to the special chart variable display game.
Specifically, the CPU 111a selects and acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the game result (jackpot or miss) of the special chart variation display game, the probability state of the special chart variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of start memories, etc. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when a special chart fluctuation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and controls the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to drive and pay out prize balls in accordance with prize ball payout instructions (commands and data) from the game control device 100.
In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a loan ball request signal from the card unit 600, and controls the payout of loan balls.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal start gate 34, a start gate 1 switch 36a in the first start winning gate 36, a start gate 2 switch 37a in the second start winning gate 37 (normal variable winning device), a winning gate switch 35a of the normal winning gate 35, and a special variable winning device 38.
, 39 large prize entrance switch 43 (lower large prize entrance switch 38a, upper large prize entrance switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as the above and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Furthermore, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball outlet switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74.
detects the passage (V entry) of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V entry port). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball outlet that discharges game balls from the special variable entry devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls that have been launched into the play area and have finished playing (i.e., all game balls that have passed through the entry port or out port 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in the sensor or switch is detected are input to a second input port 123 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

The second input port 123 also receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud that is provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 that is provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) that is provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) or the like, and a signal from a vibration sensor 6
5 is input.

In addition, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable this level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation.

The data held by the third input port 124 is output as an enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also receives signals output from the payout control device 200, such as a frame radio wave invalid signal, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, a touch switch signal based on an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, a RAM initialization switch 1
12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 has more than a predetermined amount of game balls stored therein (is full). The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal that is output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) detects radio waves, and the payout busy signal is a signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply unit 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 has the function of removing noise from these input signals.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply unit 400 is first input to the first input port 122 and then taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches mentioned above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that can receive signals from outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also output to the output unit 13
0. The reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.

The reset signal RST may be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is input to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124. The data set by the gaming microcomputer 111 to each port of the output unit 130 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input is discarded by the reset of the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the presentation control device 300 and on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the gaming control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200 via serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication that prevents signals from being input from the presentation control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to include a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the test firing device of a certification organization (not shown) of special symbol information for the variable display game and signals indicating the probability of winning via a relay board 70. The buffer 133 is a component that is not installed in the game control device (main board) of the actual pachinko gaming machine (mass-produced product) installed in an amusement parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as the start switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing device as they are, such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and are then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing device, and a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the switch detection signal without passing through the buffer.
A chip enable signal CE output from the port 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

In addition, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 for outputting opening/closing data for a solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 and opening the normal variable winning device 37, a lower large winning port solenoid 38b (large winning port solenoid 1) opening the first special variable winning device 38, an upper large winning port solenoid 39b (large winning port solenoid 2) opening the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b operating a lever to open the specific area 86.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data for the segment lines to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and a third output port 136 for outputting on/off data for the digit lines to which the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 are connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also has a sixth output port 141 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected, depending on the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152, and a seventh output port 142 for outputting on/off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the performance display device 152 is connected.

The output unit 130 also outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71.
The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device (hall computer)) installed in the gaming facility, so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device. In addition, the fifth output port 137 also outputs a launch permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output section 130 has a normal current solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
There are provided a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives opening/closing data signals from the main display device 50 and the large prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b, generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a third driver 138c that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current draw side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a performance display device 152 output from a sixth output port 141.
A performance display segment driver 150a outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152, and a performance display digit driver 150b outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current sink side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142.

The first driver 138a is supplied with a DC 32V power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V.
The second driver 138b that drives the segment lines is supplied with DC 12 V. The third driver 138c that drives the digit lines draws current from the digit lines according to the display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12 V or 5 V.

The second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, feeds current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c, which outputs ground potential, draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected sequentially by the dynamic drive method in the collective display device 50, causing them to light up. The performance display segment driver 150a, which outputs 12V, feeds current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the performance display digit driver 150b, which outputs ground potential, draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, causing the power supply voltage to flow to the LEDs selected sequentially by the dynamic drive method in the performance display device 152, causing them to light up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a 12V level. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134,
The first driver 138a etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., on the relay board 70 side, rather than on the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500.
9 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data via serial communication with the inspection device 500. Note that, since the sending and receiving of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal that the gaming microcomputer 111 has, like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is a plurality (four) of seven-segment type (dot Dp
It consists of a display (LED lamp) of 8 segments including the driver for performance display 1
Reference numerals 50a and 150b denote LED drivers, but are not limited to these.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, a combination ratio, a payout rate, and the number of dispensed balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
The number of balls discharged is calculated by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc.
In this embodiment, the winning slots include a general winning slot 35, a start winning slot 36 (first start winning slot, start slot 1), and a normal variable winning slot 37 (second start winning slot, start slot 2).
), and special variable winning devices 38, 39 (large winning slots).

The ball payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of prize balls to the number of dispensed balls (or the number of shot balls introduced into the play area 32), and is calculated as (number of acquired balls ÷ number of dispensed balls) × 100 (%). In other words, the ball payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 dispensed balls.

For example, the role ratio is the percentage (%) (= so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by each role) acquired by winning a large prize slot during a jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by winning a prize slot during a predetermined period (for example, from when the gaming machine 10 was powered on to the present). Note that the role ratio may be the percentage (= large prize slot ratio) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot (during a jackpot state and a small prize state) out of the total number of prize balls, or it may be the percentage (= so-called role ratio (total role ratio)) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot and a normal variable prize slot 37 (second start prize slot)

Furthermore, the game control device 100 also functions as a safety device. The safety device is a game stop means (stop means) that, upon the establishment of operating conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls, can generate a game stop state (a game-prohibited state, a game-prohibited state) in which games such as special game display games, normal game display games, and round games (games played during big wins or small wins) cannot be played. In the game stop state, new special game display games and new normal game display games cannot be started. The safety device can appropriately take measures against fraud in cases such as when an abnormally high number of safe balls is generated due to fraud, and may also be able to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. Reducing addiction allows players to play with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the safety device is implemented by software (program) in the game control device 100.
This function is realized by the above and is also called a completion function (or ending function, or stop function). Of course, the safety device may be provided as hardware such as an electric circuit or a circuit board.

In this embodiment, the activation condition of the safety device is (1) that the difference in the number of balls between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls reaches the difference in balls standard value (predetermined value), and (2) that the game is neither a big win nor a small win. The difference in the number of balls is the number of safe balls minus the number of discharged balls (difference in the number of balls = number of safe balls - number of discharged balls). In this way, the activation condition of the safety device is a two-stage condition (1)
(2). The difference in number of balls for condition (1), as primarily described in this embodiment, can be simply the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of dispensed balls from the time the power was turned on until the present, with the number at power-on being set to zero. However, the difference in number of balls for condition (1) can also be the difference in number of balls over a predetermined period from the time the power was turned on to the present, i.e., the difference in number of balls based on the minimum value (the increase in the difference in number of balls from the minimum value), and can correspond to the maximum increase in the difference in number of balls during one day of operation (so-called MY). Other activation conditions are also possible. For example, condition (1) can be configured such that the number of safe balls reaches a predetermined value. Condition (2) can also be configured such that the special variable prize device is not activated or the large prize opening is not open.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is determined based on a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present).
The total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, number of balls dispensed) determined to be dispensed in the game area 32 during a predetermined period of time is referred to as the total number of prize balls determined to be dispensed (number of acquired balls, number of balls dispensed). If there is an error in the dispensing of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls determined to be dispensed will not be equal to the total number of prize balls actually dispensed to the upper tray 21 via the dispensing device, but the total number of prize balls actually dispensed may be measured using a detection switch or the like and used as the number of safe balls. The number of discharged balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls dispensed from the game area 32 during a predetermined period of time, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74.

Note that the number of fired balls, which is the number of fired balls that were fired and introduced into the play area 32, may be used instead of the number of ejected balls, and the difference in the number of fired balls may be calculated as the number of safe balls minus the number of fired balls. The number of fired game balls and the number of ejected balls may be collectively referred to as the number of used balls (difference in the number of used balls = number of safe balls - number of used balls). Foul balls that were fired by the ball launcher but did not reach the play area 32 are excluded from the number of fired balls, and the difference in the number of used balls is decremented by -1 for each game ball fired by the ball launcher and incremented by +1 for each foul ball. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of fired balls may be provided at the entrance of the game balls to the play area 32, i.e., near the top end of the guide path for launched game balls on the game board 30.

[Performance control device]
Next, the configuration of the performance control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG.
1 is a block diagram of the performance control system of the gaming machine 10.

The performance control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphics processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output to play various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program to be executed by the CPU and a program to be executed by the CPU.
A program ROM 321 is made up of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 provides a working area, and an FeRAM 323 that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power outage.
An RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day of the week, time, etc.), is connected to the RAM 323. The main control microcomputer 311 also has a RAM therein that provides a working area.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the display content, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video.
It performs processes such as issuing instructions to the stage to play sounds, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the operation of motors and solenoids, and managing the performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. Also connected to the VDP 312 are an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 326 that is used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in a serial manner.

The VDP 312 sends a vertical synchronization signal VSYN to the main control microcomputer 311 to synchronize the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that provides the timing for transmitting data is input.
Interrupt signals INT0 to n are also input to the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status, such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT is input to notify that the main control microcomputer 311 is waiting to receive commands or data.

The performance control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19 a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided in the front frame 12, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19 a and the lower speaker 19 b via the amplifier circuit 337.

The performance control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands sent from the game control device 100.
The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 receives the decorative special symbol reserve number command, decorative special symbol command, fluctuation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 via the DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the performance control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The performance control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a control circuit 334 that controls and drives a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
0 (including the center case 40) is provided with a board effect device 44 (for example, a display device 41
The board decoration device 46 is provided with a control circuit 334 for controlling the driving of movable parts (movable accessories, etc., which cooperate with the display of the effects in order to enhance the effects of the effects).
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334, which drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit may be provided which drives and controls a frame effect device (for example, a top unit) such as a motor (such as a motor that moves a top unit) provided in the glass frame 15.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 has the function of detecting the on/off state of the performance button switch 25a built into the performance button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the performance button 25, the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b, and the performance element switch 47 (performance motor switch) which detects the initial position of the motor within the board performance device 44, and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and is also provided with a switch input circuit 336 which detects the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided in the performance control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is a power supply for the performance control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the power supply, a DC 32V power supply is used to drive the motors and solenoids, a DC 12V power supply is used to drive the display device 41 made of a liquid crystal panel, the motors and LEDs, and a DC 5V power supply is used as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331.
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage to drive motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter for generating DC 3.3V or DC 1.2V based on DC 5V is provided in the performance control device 300.
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generating unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, which resets the device.
, and is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them.
When N45 is connected and the power of the performance control device 300 is turned on, the cooling fan 45 is driven.

Next, the game control performed by these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts a random number value for determining whether the normal map is a hit or a miss based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the normal map start gate 34, compares it with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and determines whether the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss.

Then, the normal map display 53 displays a normal map variation display game in which the identification pattern is displayed variably for a predetermined time, and then stops and displays it. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, the normal map display 53 displays a special result state, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated, and control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times) as described above. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). Note that if the result of the normal map variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a loss result state on the normal map display 53.

In addition, the start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 1 variable display game is a win or a miss.

In addition, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 2 variable display game is a win or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (presentation control command) including the determination result of the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game to the presentation control device 300. Then, the special symbol 1 display 51 and the special symbol 2 display 52 display a special symbol variable display game in which the identification symbol is displayed variably for a predetermined time and then statically displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the start winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37).

Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 displays a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 performs processing such as setting the presentation state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the presentation control device 300 serves as presentation control means for controlling presentations related to games (variable display games, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special symbol variable display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result state on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the large prize opening solenoid 39b opens the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable prize device 39, thereby controlling the flow of game balls into the large prize opening.

The opening of the large prize opening is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15, 11, or 2 times) (cyclic gameplay) until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (e.g., 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening. In other words, the game control device 100 functions as a large prize opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result pattern becomes a special result pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol variable display game is a loss, the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52 is controlled to display the loss result pattern.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result state of the special chart variable display game.
The probability of winning in the special chart variable display game is higher than in the normal probability state. Also, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result state of either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game will be in the high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result state of the special game variation display game. In the time-saving state, the normal game variation display game and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state, and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state, and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state. In this case, ...
In order to control the open time of 7 to be substantially longer, it is in a normal power support state.
Even in high probability states (normal probability state) excluding the latent probability state, the time-saving state is overlapped and normal power support is executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the special chart change display game (special chart change time) can be shortened more than usual, and time-shortened changes in the special chart change display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, for one winning result of the normal map variable display game, it is possible to set the number of times that the normal variable winning device 37 opens (normal power opening number) to a second opening number (for example, four times) that is greater than the first opening number (for example, two times). Also, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the probability of a winning result of the normal map variable display game (normal map probability, normal map winning probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time-saving state, the time for converting the normal variable winning device 37 into the open state is extended more than usual by changing one or more of the normal chart fluctuation time, normal chart stop time, normal power open count, normal power open time, and normal chart probability. As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state where no special game is played, and the number of times the special chart fluctuation display game is executed per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. Also,
It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states that change differently. Also, the movable member 37b may be set not to open in the normal operating state (normal probability is 0). Also, when a win occurs, either the first or second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability of the first and second opening modes may be different. Furthermore, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently, and both may occur simultaneously, or only one may occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on or off, and the device transitions to one of four states (modes).

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) transitions to a variable setting state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) in which it is possible to change (set) the probability setting value (see A1030-A1039 in Figure 5B and Figure 15).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the device will enter a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (see A1034-A1039 in Figure 5B and Figure 15).

Also, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is turned off but the RAM initialization switch 11
If R2 is turned on, the RAM is initialized (RAM clear mode) and
AM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1045-A1047 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device transitions to a normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), in which power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly shown in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C.
9. The main processing shown in FIG. 9C and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9, which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described.
1 is a flowchart showing the procedure for main processing by the game control device 100. The main processing is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the symbols (numbers) of the steps are represented as "A****".

5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main processing, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (A1001), and then executes a stack pointer setting process to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area to which values of registers, etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specified register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a launch prohibition signal and sets the launch permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is,
Signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer, the game control device 100, which serves as the main control means,
00 according to instructions from the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) until the program is started normally (for example, 3
This makes it possible to avoid the situation where the game control device 100 starts up first when the power is turned on and sends a command to the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) before they start up, causing the slave control devices to miss the command. In other words, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) to send a command to the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300).
00, etc.) is set as a waiting time.

In addition, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or register not subject to validity determination, etc.) that is not subject to validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM.
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM region when making calculations, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Incidentally, by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. In other words, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 were read after the standby time had elapsed, it would be necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112, or to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the states before the start of the standby time, it is possible to avoid such troublesome operations and to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power was turned on is not accepted.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1009).
1010).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100
The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. This makes it possible to respond to a power outage that occurs during the period when the startup of the game control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and malfunctions at power-on can be dealt with appropriately. Note that access to RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the contents stored at the time of the previous power outage remain retained, so there is no need to perform backup processing or the like when a power outage occurs here. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the waiting time has ended, access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (setting them to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets up a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which in this embodiment is used for communication with the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013).

Next, the game control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP circuit that calculates the frequency of the divided signal.
It is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to U111a and a signal CTC that triggers updating of the random numbers supplied to the random number generating circuit.

Next, the game control device 100 detects an RA indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c).
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an abnormality is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1016).
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power outage inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process (A1018) to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (for example, a work area within the area), and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power outage (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating a RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, if the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the checksums do not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 operates the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.
The game control device 100 determines whether both switches are on (A1021). If both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transitions to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the processing during the probability setting change in steps A1030-A1040.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100
It is determined whether a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM 111c is set (A102).
2) If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting change flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
4-A1040 probability setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of steps A1044-A1047, or step A
1044, A1048-A1051 are executed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored).

When the probability setting change flag is set (A1023
If the result of the above is "Y", a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the performance control device 300 to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (A1024).
The performance control device 300 that has received the main abnormality error notification command
It notifies you that an abnormality of 0 has occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 starts the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (the data of the error display of "E1") at the time of game stop on the performance display device 152.
0a, 150b (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying an external device (such as an internal management device (hall computer) or information collection terminal) of an abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Even if information about a jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state. After that, the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the machine waits, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. Note that while the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) that can execute the special chart 1 and 2 game processing and the normal chart game processing cannot be executed, so games (special chart variable display game, normal chart variable display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting change in progress flag is set even though the setting change operation has not been performed (both ON operations), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the processes A1024-A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting change in progress flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 also operates when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
2 is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the presentation control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), the 7-segment display data at the time of game stop (data displaying the "E1" error) is output to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the security signal ON data is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As mentioned above, even if information related to the jackpot remains in RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1027), and if a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1027 is "N"), the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the process waits. On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has occurred (the result of A1027 is "Y"),
Off data is output to all output ports (A1028), and access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is prohibited (A1029).Then, the gaming machine waits until the power is cut off.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (in the setting variable state), and first determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1030). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1030 is "Y"),
"), and since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1031), and then a probability setting change in progress flag is set to indicate that the probability setting is being changed (
A1032). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1030 is "N"
"), and set the probability setting change in progress flag without clearing the probability setting value (A1032).
Next, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1
033), and proceed to the processing of step A1037. In addition, upon receiving the command indicating that the probability setting is being changed, the performance control device 300 notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), and the probability setting change flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1034). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation process (setting confirmation state) begins, and the probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the probability setting is being confirmed is set (A1035). Then, the probability setting confirmation command is sent to the performance control device 30.
0 (performance control board) (A1036), and proceeds to the processing of step A1037. Upon receiving the command that the probability setting is being changed, the performance control device 300 notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1033 or step A1036, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1037 to A1043 as common processing during the probability setting change and during the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (a predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area (A1037) in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed. Note that the counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 15) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1319). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (A1038). This allows the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) to be executed. Then, it determines whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1039 is "N"), it determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1040). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039. Meanwhile,
If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1040 is "Y"), steps A1063-A10
69, the process to be performed when a power outage occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power outage has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, will continue.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039
If the result of the above is "Y", the interrupt is prohibited (A1041), and a command to end the notification is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1042). When the performance control device 300 receives the command to end the notification, it ends the notification that the probability setting is being checked or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting change flag is set, i.e., whether the probability setting has been changed up until now (A1043). If the probability setting change flag is set (the result of A1043 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability setting has been changed up until now, the game control device 100 executes the RAM initialization process (described below) of steps A1045-A1047. On the other hand, if the probability setting change flag is not set (the result of A1043 is "N"), i.e., if the probability setting has been confirmed up until now, the game control device 100 executes the normal process when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) from step A1048 onwards.

If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1034 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1044).
If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1044 is "Y"),
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
The RAM 111c is cleared (A1045). That is, all game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. The aforementioned probability setting change flag is also cleared here. The acquired game ball count area, which stores the acquired game ball count, which is the total number of prize balls acquired within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt), is also cleared to 0. The safety device activation flag area, which stores a safety device activation flag indicating whether the safety device (described above) is activated, is also cleared to 0 (safety device activation flag = 0), and the safety device is deactivated. Note that in step A1045, the safety device is deactivated by clearing the safety device activation flag area to 0 in both cases of RAM clearing with a setting change (when the result of A1043 is "Y") and RAM clearing without a setting change (when the result of A1044 is "Y"), but the safety device may be deactivated only in one of the cases. That is, when the RAM is cleared in step A1045, the safety device activation flag area may not be cleared to 0.

In addition, in addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure the system so that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and it is also possible to not clear the performance display work area (part of the out-of-area work area) and stack area (out-of-area stack area) related to performance information and its display (performance display). Note that performance information is derived based on the number of winning balls, and includes, for example, the payout rate, base value (payout rate in normal game mode), bonus ratio, and number of dispensed balls.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1046). Then, it sends the RAM initialization command to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1047) and proceeds to processing in step A1052. Note that areas that are not cleared to 0 in step A1045 are excluded from the areas to be initialized.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
Since the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, the normal power-on process (when power is restored after a power outage) is started, and the initial values at the time of power recovery (when power is restored) are saved in the area to be initialized as part of the power recovery process (A104
8). The areas to be initialized here include the power outage inspection area 1, power outage inspection area 2, and checksum area in the in-area work area (Figure 6). In addition, since all errors are re-monitored during normal power-on, the areas to be initialized include areas related to errors or error monitoring (such as areas for test signal output data related to errors) in both the in-area work area and the out-area work area (Figure 6). The aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared (initialized) here. Additional areas to be initialized in step A1048 may be added as needed. Note that, unlike when RAM is initialized, during normal power-on, the safety device activation flag area in the in-area work area (Figure 6) is not cleared (initialized) and its value is maintained to prevent the safety device from being deactivated.

Furthermore, the safety device-related work areas (a safety device counter area, a safety device activation information area, and a previous activation information area, which will be described later) in the outside work area are not initialized in step A1048, but are initialized in the safety device information initialization process (A1053), which will be described later.
By initializing the safety device counter value (information about the difference in the number of balls) in the safety device counter area, it is possible to increase the margin (allowable range of the difference in the number of balls, limit of the difference in the number of balls) before the safety device is activated (occurrence of a game stop state) in relation to the difference in the number of balls. The performance display work area in the outside work area is also not initialized in step A1048, but as described later, it is initialized in the performance display editing process (A1059
) may be initialized.

Also, step A1 at normal power-on (when power is restored after a power outage) without RAM initialization
In 048, the ceiling counter area (described later) in which the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed in a state other than the probability variation state after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot is stored may also be maintained without being cleared (initialized) so as not to be detrimental to the player. As described later, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling number of times, the time-saving state is entered (FIG. 36B), but by not clearing (initializing) the ceiling counter value, the number of times until the time-saving state occurs (up to the ceiling number of times)
The remaining number of games to be played does not change when the power is turned on, and the player is not disadvantaged.

When this number of executions (i.e., ceiling counter value) or the remaining number of games until the ceiling (ceiling number of executions - number of executions) is displayed on the display device 41 by the variable number of executions display 677 (see Figures 92, 100, etc.) described below, the performance control device 300 may, at normal power-on, match the variable number of executions display 677 with the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area, or may not match and display the variable number of executions display 677 as the initial value 0. When there is no match, the variable number of executions display 677 will display a value that does not reflect the ceiling counter value.

Similarly, in step A1048, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the gaming parlor (game parlor), the time-saving variation count 1 area in which the time-saving variation count 1 (described later) corresponding to the remaining number of times the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the time-saving state is stored, and the time-saving variation count 2 area in which the time-saving variation count 2 (described later) corresponding to the remaining number of times the special chart 2 variation display game in the time-saving state is stored, may be maintained without being cleared (initialized). Also, in a machine with a limited-time (ST) probability variable state, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the gaming parlor, the high-probability variation count area (ST counter) in which the high-probability variation count corresponding to the remaining number of times the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the probability variable state is stored may be maintained without being cleared (initialized). In addition, in machines where a limit is placed on the number of consecutive jackpots (which may also be the number of consecutive wins described below), the jackpot count area in which the number of consecutive jackpots is stored may not be cleared (initialized) and the value may be maintained so as not to cause any disadvantage to the gaming facility.

Next, a command for power outage recovery corresponding to a processing number prepared to rationally execute the special game processing etc. described later is transmitted to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A104
9) Proceed to processing of step A1050.

In addition, the commands sent during RAM initialization in the processing of step A1047 and the commands sent during power outage recovery in the processing of step A1049 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command and a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2, a probability information command indicating the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, a performance count information command indicating the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed in a specified performance mode, and a power outage recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power outage recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) that indicates setting value information (setting information), which is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. The gaming control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the presentation control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter the presentation control device 300 can refer to the setting value information stored therein to control the presentation.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command, the performance control device 300 performs the following operations, for example:
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker are used to display the RAM.
The initialization (RAM clear) notification is given for 30 seconds. In addition, the command at the time of power outage recovery includes a screen specification command that specifies the display content on the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen specification command is used for both special charts 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither variable nor winning)
, a customer waiting demo command, otherwise a recovery screen command may be used. Also, the command at the time of power recovery may include a command indicating the ceiling counter value in order to align the fluctuation count display 677 with the ceiling counter value, as described above.

Next, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (A1050). For example, if the safety device in operation flag "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in operation flag area, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device in operation flag = 1). Then, if the safety device is in operation (the result of A1050 is "Y"), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1051), and the process proceeds to step A1052. If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A1050 is "N"), the process proceeds directly to step A1052.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is pushed to the internal stack area (A
1052), and executes a safety device information initialization process to initialize safety device information (such as a safety device counter value, safety device operation information, and previous operation information, which will be described later) related to the safety device (A1053
After that, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (A1054).
Except when game play is stopped due to an abnormality (A1025-A1026), safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on, but if a count continuation switch is provided and the power is turned on while pressing the count continuation switch, the safety device information does not need to be initialized (cleared).

As will be described later, when the process proceeds to the safety device information initialization process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags (especially the zero flag) in the flag register will change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step A1052. The flag register is an 8-bit flag in which each bit takes the value 0 or 1. The flag register is described in detail in JP 2013-201366 A.
Those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-94101 and the like can be used.

Next, the gaming control device 100 activates and configures the random number generation circuit (A1055). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) within the random number generation circuit. The CPU also sets a bit transposition pattern for the hardware random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit's hardware. In this embodiment, the random number generation circuit generates random numbers updated solely by hardware, including jackpot random numbers, winning symbol random numbers (jackpot symbol random numbers, small win symbol random numbers, support win symbol random numbers, etc.), normal winning random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3. These random numbers may be generated by so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the operating clock.

A bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how the bit arrangement of an extracted random number (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) is rearranged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row).

In this embodiment, by permuting the bits of the random numbers according to a bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers and increase the confidentiality of the random numbers. The bit permutation pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the bit permutation pattern may be set arbitrarily by the user.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1056) and determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1057). If the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 (described later) occurs that requires the game (such as a special game with a variable display, a regular game with a variable display, or a round game) to be stopped, the game control device 100 can determine that the game is stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1057 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the information (value) of the flag register to the in-area stack area (A1058),
Execute performance display editing process to calculate performance information such as base value (ball payout rate) (A1059
). Here, performance information (such as the ratio of special features and payout rate) may be calculated. Also, if there is an abnormality in the performance display work area (part of the outside work area) related to the performance information or its display (performance display), this may be cleared. After that, the information in the flag register is restored (POP).
(A1060) and permit the interrupt (A1061). In addition to the case where no error has occurred, if an error other than the strong error 2, such as a weak error (described later) or a strong error 1 (described later), has occurred, the game is not stopped, and the performance display editing process, etc. are also performed in step A1058.
The process of steps A1058-A1060 is executed. It is also possible to configure the process of steps A1058-A1060 not to be executed when a weak error or a strong error 1 occurs.

As will be described later, when the process shifts to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). At that time, when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, the flag (
In particular, since there is a possibility that the zero flag may change, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step A1058.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1057 is "Y"), the game control device 100
, an interrupt is permitted without executing the performance display editing process, etc. (A1061). In other words, if the safety device is activated or if strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (especially the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so performance information such as the base value is not newly calculated and remains unchanged. Note that even if strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to configure the game to be played without stopping and to execute the performance display editing process, etc. Furthermore, permitting an interrupt makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In this embodiment, errors are classified into three types: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. When the performance control device 300 receives an error/illegal command, it can set and execute error notifications of different strengths corresponding to weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2 in the error/illegal setting process (B1316).

For example, the presentation control device 300 may increase the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker or the brightness (brightness) of the LED (the presentation LED of the board decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18) that lights up to notify errors in the order of weak error < strong error 1 ≦ strong error 2. The speaker volume or LED brightness may be the same for strong error 1 and strong error 2. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 may set the volume of the notification sound to the volume adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011) (below the maximum volume) when a weak error occurs, and set the volume of the notification sound to the maximum volume when strong error 1 or strong error 2 occurs.

Weak errors include a shoot ball out error, in which a shoot ball out switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow error, in which an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the lower tray 23 being full. In the case of a weak error, an external information signal is not output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 54A). Weak errors may also include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error, in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

Strong error 1 is a frame opening error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a main frame opening error (front frame opening error). In strong error 1, a door/frame opening signal (A9305) is output as an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 (see Figure 54A).

Strong Error 2 is an error related to fraud and should preferably result in a game being stopped, and includes magnetic fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge error, V passing error, large prize slot fraud, and normal power fraud. In Strong Error 2, a security signal (A93) is used as an external information signal.
22) is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 54A). In addition, the strong error 2 may include a remaining ball error. When the strong error 2 occurs, the game (the special game, the normal game, the round game, etc.) is stopped, and it can be determined that the game is stopped (A1
057). In addition, when a strong error 2 occurs, just as when the safety device is activated,
It is possible to generate a game stop state (game not possible state, game prohibited state) in which games such as special chart change display games, regular chart change display games, and round games (games played during a big win or small win) cannot be played.

After step A1061, the game control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1062). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1062 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to the processing of step A1056. As a result, until a power outage occurs, the game control device 100 repeats step A1056-
The loop process of A1062 is repeated. And, until a power outage occurs, unless the game is stopped, that is, unless the safety device is activated or a severe error 2 occurs, the performance information such as the base value can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (A1059).

The repetition period of the loop process is much shorter than the timer interrupt period (a predetermined time period, for example, 4 msec), so the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt period. Therefore, when a game ball wins or the number of balls discharged changes (a game ball entering the outlet 30b), the performance information such as the base value can immediately change.

When a power outage occurs (the result of A1062 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing for when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1063), and outputs off data to all output ports (A1064). After that, it saves power outage inspection area check data 1 in power outage inspection area 1 (A1065), and saves power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (A1066).
A1066). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1067), and the calculated checksum is saved in the checksum area (A1068). Finally, a process is executed to prohibit access to the RWM (A106
9) Wait until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving check data in the power outage inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power cut, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power was cut off has been correctly backed up when the power is turned back on.

As described above, the main processing has been described. For example, steps A1056-A106
If the setting key switch and RAM initialization switch are turned on during processing 2, a judgment process similar to step A1021 is performed, and the probability setting change in progress flag is set as in step A1032, making it possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the gaming machine 10 is running.

[Example of RAM area configuration]
6 is a diagram showing the configuration (memory map in address space) of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 6, the following are arranged in the address space starting from the starting address of the RAM 111c: an in-area work area, an unused area, an in-area stack area, an unused area, an out-area work area, an unused area, and an out-area stack area. The unused area between the in-area work area and the in-area stack area (gaming control stack area, in-area stack area) and the unused area between the out-area work area and the out-area stack area (out-area stack area) may not be necessary.

The RAM work area (game control work area, first area) is a work area for game control that is read and written by the program in the area and read by the program outside the area. The work area in the area includes a probability setting value area, a test signal output data area (including the area of the test signal output data related to errors), a random number area, a switch control area, a segment area, a power outage inspection area 1, a power outage inspection area 2, a checksum area, etc., as well as a safety device operation flag area that indicates whether the safety device is operating (has operated) or not, and a timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms
c) includes an area for storing the number of acquired game balls acquired as prize balls.

The RAM's out-of-area work area (second area) is an area that is read and written by out-of-area programs and read by in-area programs. The out-of-area work area includes a safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value) corresponding to the difference in number of balls, a safety device operation information area that stores safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device, and a previous operation information area that stores previous operation information, and is capable of storing safety device information related to the safety device. The safety device counter area (
The safety device counter value (3 bytes in size) is not generally read by the program within the area, but may be read and referenced by the program within the area when the safety device counter value or information on the difference in the number of balls is sent to the performance control device 300 using a difference in ball command. In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the difference in the number of balls, in proportion to the difference in the number of balls (safety device counter value = difference in number of balls + 100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this, as long as it corresponds to the difference in the number of balls and indicates the difference in the number of balls. Furthermore, by separating the outside-area work area from the inside-area work area, not only can the efficiency of program development be improved, but it also makes it easier to distinguish and initialize these areas.

Furthermore, the out-of-area work area includes a work area for performance display related to performance information and performance display, and can store information related to performance information and performance display. In addition, the out-of-area work area may store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring.
In the outside work area, the safety device-related work area (including the safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, and previous activation information area) related to safety device information and the performance display work area related to performance information and performance display may be clearly separated and arranged, or they may be mixed.

The external stack area is shared between processing related to performance information and performance display, and processing related to safety devices. The external stack area is also used when processing test signals and error monitoring.

Note that the in-area programs (in-area processing programs) and out-area programs (out-area processing programs) are arranged in this order from the top address in the address space of ROM 111b, and are distinguished by an unused area between the in-area program area and the out-area program area. The in-area programs of ROM consist of game control programs and game control data, etc., and include a main program corresponding to the main processing (FIGS. 5A-5C) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing described below. An unused area may be arranged between the game control program area and the game control data area (data area). Subroutines of the main program or interrupt processing program are basically in-area programs (unless otherwise specified), but may exceptionally be out-area programs. The out-area programs of ROM include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to the safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to the performance display editing processing,
It includes an outside area integration processing program corresponding to the outside area integration processing described below.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, the safety device information initialization process (A1053) in the main process will be described in detail. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device information initialization process. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, the safety device activation information area, and the old activation information area are initialized or cleared, and safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device activation information, and old activation information is set to its initial value (initial information). Note that the safety device activation information is information indicating the current state, and the old activation information indicates the state from the previous time (mainly one interrupt before).

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A1101), and sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area as the value of the external stack area (external stack area) in the stack pointer (
A1102) As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the register information (values) to the external stack area (P
The registers to be saved may be only those to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization process), or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) them to both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (A1104). Because the safety device counter value (= difference in balls + initial value) may become smaller than the initial value if the difference in balls decreases from 0, such as when no jackpot occurs, the initial value is set to a value greater than 0, but may be a value other than 100,000. Note that the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) when the power is restored (power is turned on) to avoid any disadvantage to the player. However, the ceiling counter value, which indicates the number of times the special symbol variable display game has been executed outside of the probability variable state, does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. When the safety device counter value (information regarding the difference in balls) is initialized (cleared), the margin (tolerance and limit of the difference in balls) before the safety device is activated (the game stops) regarding the difference in balls can be increased, to the player's benefit.
On the other hand, as mentioned above, since the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the remaining number of games (up to the ceiling number) until the time-saving state occurs does not change when the power is turned on, which benefits the player. Then, safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device is saved as safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (A1105). Furthermore, safety device non-operation information (value 0) is saved as old operation information in the old operation information area (A1106).

Next, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1107), loads it from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A1108), and ends the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In the above safety device information initialization process, if information is written directly to RAM without using a register, the register is not saved/restored. In this case, the register is not saved to RAM, so the stack pointer related processes (A1101, A1102, A1103, A1104, A1105, A1106, A1107, A1108, A1109, A12101, A12102, A12103, A12111, A12122, A12131, A12141, A12142, A12151, A12161, A12162, A12171, A12182, A12191, A12202, A122192, A12223, A12241, A12251, A12261, A12272, A12
Also, the saving/restoring of the flag register before and after the safety device information initialization process (A1052, A1054) is no longer necessary.

In this embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189,999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189,999), the safety device operation information becomes safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to an in-operation state in which the safety device is not operated (normally) (an operation notice state, an operation warning state, or a normal state in which the safety device is not operated). When the safety device counter value is 190,000 to 194,999 (safety device counter = 190,000 to 194,999), the safety device operation information becomes safety device operation notice information (value 1) corresponding to an operation notice state in which an operation of the safety device is noticed.

In addition, the safety device counter value is 195,000, which is the counter reference value (safety device counter =
If the game is not stopped even when the time reaches 195000, the safety device activation information is safety device activation warning information (value 2) corresponding to an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device.
In this case, even if the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) reaches the difference in the number of balls reference value 95,000, since the machine is in a big win or a small win, the above-mentioned condition (1) is met, but condition (2) is not met, which corresponds to the case where the activation condition of the safety device is not met.

Furthermore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 (safety device counter = 195000) and the game is stopped, the safety device operation information becomes the safety device operation information (value 3) corresponding to the operation state (operation state) in which the safety device is in operation. In this case, the difference in the number of balls reaches the difference in the number of balls reference value 95000, and it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, so the above-mentioned condition (1
) (2) is satisfied, the activation conditions of the safety device are satisfied.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, the details of the performance display editing process (A1059) in the main process will be explained.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the performance display editing process.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A1201), and sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the value of the external stack area in the stack pointer (
A1202) As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 pushes the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (A1203). It is preferable to push all general-purpose registers here. Then, a validity check is performed to determine the validity of the performance display work area within the external work area. If the work area is invalid and abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting) (A1204).

The validity assessment can determine whether a value stored in the performance display work area is invalid if it is a value that is impossible in terms of design or deviates from the design value (if it is outside a specified range). For example, the validity assessment can determine whether a specific value (e.g., 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialization flag, which indicates that the performance display work area has been initialized; whether a number managing the progress of a division process used to calculate a base value is within a specified range; whether the value of a switch counter is within a range equal to or less than the number of switches being monitored; whether the display period management number indicating the current display period is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3); and whether the time interval number indicating the current time interval is within the range of the number of intervals (0 to 4). In this way, the validity assessment preferably determines whether the value of an area used as a pointer to a data table is within a specified range. This can prevent a program from running out of control due to an out-of-range value being acquired. Furthermore, the validity assessment is effective because it is performed for each performance display editing process.

Furthermore, since a validity check is performed each time the performance display editing process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, and abnormal performance display (display of abnormal base values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), areas other than the stack pointer storage area are initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area and the in-area stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether it is time to switch the counting period for counting the data (such as the number of normal out balls and the number of normal prize balls) that are the basis for calculating the base value (ball payout rate) (A1205). A counting period is set for the total number of out balls (total number of discharged balls, total number of outs) since the power was turned on, and each time the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000
The aggregation period is switched each time the number of entries increases.

For example, the timing for switching the counting interval is when the total number of balls out since power-on reaches a predetermined number, such as 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, etc. In other words, the width of the counting interval is basically 60,000, except for the first counting interval.
First time window: 0-300 items, second time window: 300-60300 items, third time window: 6 items
The first time window is 0300 to 120300, the fourth time window is 120300 to 180300, the fifth time window is 180300 to 240300, etc. The first to fifth time windows are numbered 0 to 4, respectively, and the time window number remains 4 for the sixth and subsequent time windows. The current time window number is stored in the performance display work area.

When it is time to switch the counting period (the result of A1205 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 sets the counting period to be switched (A1206).
The total out counter, which counts the total number of out balls (total number of outs), the normal out counter, which counts the normal number of out balls (normal number of outs), which is the number of out balls (number of balls discharged) within each counting interval, and the normal prize ball number counter, which counts the normal prize ball number, which is the total number of prize balls (number of balls won) within each counting interval, are cleared, and the final base value (or latest base value) of each counting interval is shifted (moved) to the base value storage area of the adjacent counting interval.

If it is not time to switch the counting period (the result of A1205 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (A120
7) In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 3).

Here, the information on the switch rising edge copied to the performance display work area (copied in step A9603 of FIG. 58) for each input port to be monitored is checked.
For each input port to be monitored, the copied information of the rising edge of the switch is stored.
There is a bit area. If the switch rising edge information for all monitored input ports is all 0, it can be determined that there is no input, and in all other cases it can be determined that there is input. Note that as for the switch rising edge information, unless it is masked when copying,
In the input process (A1303), the bit corresponding to the switch that has received a new input (detection) is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the switch that has not received a new input is set to 0.

When there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (A12
07 is "Y"), the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter is checked to obtain the input information (A1208). The target switches here are the lower large winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the start port 1 switch 36a of the first start winning port 36, the start port 2 switch 37a of the second start winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), the win port switch 35a of the general winning port 35 (
The base value (or payout rate) can be changed by detecting game balls using switches such as the left winning slot switch, the right winning slot switch, and the out ball detection switch 74.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target switch is in its valid period (A
1209). In addition, there have been cases of fraudulent large prize slots and regular power fraud, and large prize slots and second start prize slots 37
If the winning is invalid, i.e., if the big winning hole switch 38a, 39a or the start hole 2 switch 37a
In addition, there are switches that are always active, such as the first start winning hole 36 and the out ball detection switch 74.

The game control device 100 is in the valid period of the target switch (the result of A1209 is "
Y"), and determine whether there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (A1
210) If the target switch is not in its valid period (the result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1218.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), clear the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211),
It is determined whether or not the game is in the normal base state (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period in which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal gaming state in this embodiment.

The game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal game state) (A121
2 is "Y"), if the target switch is a switch that awards prize balls, the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch is added to update the normal number of prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls within the counting period (A1213). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the normal number of out balls (normal number of outs, normal number of discharged balls), which is the number of out balls within the counting period, is updated by adding 1 (A1214). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the total number of out balls (total number of outs, total number of discharged balls) is updated by adding 1 (A1215).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (i.e., all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only game balls that have entered the out opening 30b, but also game balls that have entered the winning openings (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37, big winning opening, or general winning opening 35) are guided to the out ball detection switch 74 via a passage or the like (not shown) and detected.

The game control device 100 is not in the normal base state, which is the normal game state (A121
If the result of step A1212 is "N," only the total number of out balls is updated without updating the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls (A1215). Therefore, in a high base state (second gaming state, time-saving state, probability variable state, or special gaming state) that is not the normal base state, neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls is updated, and the base value calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls (number of normal prize balls ÷ number of normal out balls) is not updated and remains unchanged. Note that it is also possible to eliminate the determination process regarding the normal base state in step A1212 and configure the base value to be updateable (changeable) as the payout rate in all gaming states.

Next, the game control device 100 increments the switch counter by +1 to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (A1216). Note that due to the loop processing in the main processing, the performance display editing process is executed at intervals (e.g., several μsec) that are significantly shorter than the interrupt period of the timer interrupt (predetermined time period, e.g., 4 msec).
Therefore, during the interrupt period, the performance display editing process is repeatedly executed, and the switch counter (for example, 0 to 7) covers all the switch bits (for example, bit 0 to bit 7) for each input port to be monitored. Also, the switch counter counts up to 0 after the final value (for example, 7).
and the switch input for the next input port to be monitored is checked. For example, after the switch input for the third input port 124 is checked first,
Next, the switch input is checked for the fourth input port 126 .

On the other hand, if there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports (the result of A1207 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) to calculate the base value (A1217). It should be noted that there may be no switch input to any of the monitored input ports from the beginning. On the other hand, even if there is initially a switch input to some or all of the monitored input ports, after the switch input has been checked for all of the monitored input ports, the input information for the target switches that have had an input is cleared (A1211), so that there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated by dividing the number of normal prize balls by the number of normal out balls.
, normal variable winning device 37), the big winning hole, or the general winning hole 35, as a first step, the winning hole switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 3
The input (detection) of 9a updates and changes the number of normal prize balls, changing the base value. In the second stage, the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74 updates and changes the number of normal out balls, changing the base value. In other words, when a game ball enters a prize slot, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball enters the out slot 30b of the game board 30, the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74 updates and changes the number of normal out balls, changing the base value. On the other hand, when a ball enters the normal start gate 34, neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls are updated or changed by the ball itself, and the base value remains unchanged. Even if a ball enters the normal start gate 34, no prize balls are awarded, so the number of normal prize balls is not updated.

Regardless of whether the base value has changed or not, the processing of steps A1624-A1630 of the output processing outputs the base value as a performance display on the performance display device 152. However, if the safety device is activated and game play is stopped, or if a strong error 2 occurs and game play is stopped, the performance display device 152 outputs off data and turns off.

As a special example, the calculation of the base value may be performed only during the real-time value display period when the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed. In this special example, the normal number of winning balls and the normal number of out balls are updated until the real-time value display period arrives, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1218), loads it from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A1219), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In addition, in Figure 8, it is also possible to perform the processing of step A1217 immediately after step A1214, so that the base value calculation processing is performed immediately after the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls is updated, without waiting for the input check of all switches of the input port to be monitored.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. Figure 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301) and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a specified register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing begins, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs and signals from various sensors and switches,
That is, an input process is executed to read the status of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), a probability setting change/confirmation process is executed to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

The game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting or checking the probability setting (A130
If the result of step A1004 is "N", then based on the output data set in the various processes, output processing is executed to perform drive control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, the large prize opening solenoid 39b) and drive control of LEDs (light emission control) (A1306). Note that if a launch prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a launch permission signal can be output by performing this output processing, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process to output the commands (payout commands, etc.) set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1
307). After that, a prize opening switch/status monitoring process is executed (A1308), which monitors whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the prize opening switch 35a, and the large prize opening switch 39a, and monitors for errors (such as whether the front frame or glass frame is open).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1309). If the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 that requires the game to be stopped has occurred, the game control device 100 can determine that the game is stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1309 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special game process (A1310), the bonus game process (A1311), the regular game process (A131
2) Segment LED editing process (A1313) is executed. Then, step A131
4 and subsequent processes are executed. In addition to the case where no error occurs, even when a weak error and a strong error 1 occur, the special game process (A1310) and the bonus game process (A
1311), normal game processing (A1312), segment LED editing processing (A1313)
Execute.

In the segment LED editing process, the plurality of segment LEDs constituting the collective display device 50
The settings for driving a part of the collective display device 50 (such as the memory display section and the round display section: LED lamps D3-D7, D11-D17) are executed.
Settings for driving the LED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, and D18 are executed in the pattern variation control process (A2615, A2617, and A7615). Settings for driving another part of the collective display device 50 (probability status display unit: LED lamp D9) are executed in the power outage recovery process (
A1048) and so on.

When the game is stopped (the result of A1309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the special game process (A1310), the bonus game process (A1311), the regular game process (A131
2) Step A131 without executing the segment LED editing process (A1313)
In this way, when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the special game process (A1310) and the normal game process (A1312) are performed.
) is not executed, so the number of reserved special maps (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved regular maps (A770
On the other hand, when a weak error or a strong error 1 occurs, the game is not stopped and the special game process (A1310) and the normal game process (A1312) are executed, so the number of reserved special games (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved normal games (A7707, A7918) do not change.
) can be changed by updating by +1 (when a hold occurs) or by updating by -1 (when a hold is consumed).

It is also possible to configure the system to execute some of the special game processing (A1310), bonus game processing (A1311), regular game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing (A1313) but not others depending on the type of error, such as weak error, strong error 1, or strong error 2. For example, when strong error 2 occurs, only the segment LED editing processing may be executed.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a safety device-related process that can transmit safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device as a presentation command to the presentation control device 300 and set a safety device operation flag (A1314).Then, it executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determines whether there is any abnormality (A1315).
Furthermore, the control unit 100 executes a radio wave irregularity monitoring process (board radio wave irregularity monitoring process) that checks the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determines whether there is any abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process to monitor fraud caused by vibration based on input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process to monitor abnormal discharge from the large prize opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge from the special variable prize winning device 39 is monitored based on input from the large prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 in the special variable prize winning device 39, and an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set when an abnormal discharge occurs. Note that game balls that have passed through the large prize opening switch 39a of the special variable prize winning device 39 are discharged by the specific area switch 72.
2 (V winning port switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 and discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process to set signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1319). Then, as in step A1309, it determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1320).

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1320 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the flag register to the in-area stack area (A1321) and updates the safety device counter value (
Calculation of the difference in the number of balls) and the outside area integration process that controls the display of the performance display device 152 (
A1322). After that, the flag register is restored (A1323), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. If the safety device is not activated and strong error 2 has not occurred, the game is not stopped, and the processes of steps A1321 to A1323 are executed, including the out-of-area integration process.

As will be described later, when the process shifts to the out-of-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-of-area stack area. At that time, when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, there is a possibility that the flags (especially the zero flag) of the flag register may change. Therefore, in step A1321,
The flag register is saved in advance.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1320 is "Y"), the game control device 100
The timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the out-of-area integration process, etc. In other words, if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integration process is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the displayed contents of the performance display, such as the base value, are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while the game is stopped.

Unlike the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped, and the special game processing (A
It is also possible to configure the system to execute the following processes: (A1310), bonus game process (A1311), regular game process (A1312), and segment LED editing process (A1313). It is also possible to configure the system to execute the out-of-area integration process, etc., even if a strong error 2 occurs.

Furthermore, when the timer interrupt processing returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank designation are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, processing to enable the interrupt or to return the register bank designation to register bank 0 may be performed after the external information editing processing.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (A1306) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

The game control device 100 first resets the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 3) by outputting OFF data to the output port 135, which outputs data for the segments of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, OFF output data is set for all solenoids (the large prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the normal power solenoid 37c) (A1602). Then, as in step A1309, it determines whether or not game play is stopped (A1603). It can be determined that game play is stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1603 is "N"), the game control device 100 synthesizes the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134, which outputs data for the large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, and normal power solenoid 37c (A1604).
Then, data is output to the solenoid output port 134 (A1605). If the game is stopped (the result of A1603 is "Y"), nothing is done, and the process proceeds to step A1605, and off data (A1602) is output to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when the game is stopped, the operation of all solenoids stops, and the operation of the big prize opening, the specific area 86,
The normal variable winning device 37 and the like are closed to be in a closed state. In this way, in the game stop state, the big winning port is closed and round play (play during a big win or a small win) cannot be executed.

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (it adds only 1, but updates to 0 after 3) (A1606). Furthermore, the L corresponding to the value of the digit counter
The digit output data to the digit line of the ED is acquired (A1607), and the acquired digit output data is combined with the external information data (A1608), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1609).

Next, the game control device 100 sets OFF data as segment output data to the segment line (A1610). Then, it sets output data for prohibiting firing (A161
1). Furthermore, as in step A1603, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (A
1612).

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1612 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the segment output data from the segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (A1613), and sets the output data for firing permission (A1
614), and outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). Note that this segment area may be included in the in-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when the game is not stopped, each time the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected, and segment output data is output to the eight segment lines of the digit to which this digit line is connected. Digits 0 to 3 (digits 0 to 3) are selected in sequence, and a dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50 is implemented.
is realized.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1612 is "Y"), the game control device 100
Without performing the processing of steps A1613 and A1614, the off data (A1610) is output to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). As a result, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activation flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 occurs, the collective display device 50 is turned off in a game stop state. As a result, the special chart variation display game and the normal chart variation display game cannot be executed in a game stop state. Then, the collective display device 50
When a player sees this, he or she can recognize that the game has been stopped, that a safety device has been activated, or that a severe error 2 (an illegal error) has occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1616), then combines the combined external information data with the launch permission or launch prohibition output data (A1617), and finally outputs the combined data to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (A1618). Here, if game play is not stopped, the output data becomes launch permission data (A1614), and if game play is stopped, the output data becomes launch prohibition (launch stop) data (A1611). This prevents the ball launcher from launching game balls in a game stop state when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs, while allowing the ball to be launched from the ball launcher when game play is not stopped. It is also possible to configure the ball launcher to allow the ball to be launched from the ball launcher without prohibiting (stopping) launching even in a game stop state.

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (A1619).After that, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (A162
0).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (A1621).Furthermore, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (A1622).
Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (A1623).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs off data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) that outputs data on the segment of the performance display device (LED) 152, and resets the output port 141 (A1624). Next, the value of the digit counter 2, which is used to sequentially scan the digit lines of the performance display device 152, is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (it only adds 1, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1625). Furthermore, it obtains the digit output data to the digit line of the LED that corresponds to the value of the digit counter 2 (A1626). Then,
The acquired digit output data is output to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (
A1627).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1628), as in step A1603. If the game is not stopped (the result of A1628 is "N"),
Segment output data is loaded from the performance display device segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1629). The performance display device segment area is included in the performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). The loaded segment output data is then output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1630), after which the output process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1628 is "Y"), the game control device 100
, the output process is terminated without executing the processes of steps A1629 and A1630. Therefore, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped (when the safety device activated flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to the output port 141, so the off data of step A1624 is output as is to the output port 141 for the performance display device 152. In this case, when the value of the digit counter 2 goes around in the range of 0 to 3, the performance display device 152 outputs all LE
D is forcibly turned off and becomes invisible, and the person in charge or staff of the amusement facility who sees the performance display device 152 can recognize that play has been stopped, that a safety device has been activated, or that a strong error 2 (an illegal error) has occurred.

It is also possible to configure the system so that even if strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped, but processing of steps A1629 and A1630 is executed.

[Winning port switch/status monitoring process]
Next, the winning slot switch/status monitoring process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9)
11 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the winning port switch/status monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the number of acquired game balls area included in the in-area work area to 0 (A2001). As a result, the number of acquired game balls area becomes an area for storing the number of acquired game balls, which is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (within a predetermined time period). The number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interrupt. Then, a prize opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper large prize opening switch 39a in the upper large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 39) is prepared (A2002). Then, even though the upper large prize opening is not open, a fraudulent and winning monitoring process is executed to monitor whether there is any illegal winning at the upper large prize opening and to detect normal winning (
A2003).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower large winning port switch 38a in the lower large winning port (special variable winning device 38) (A2004). Then, even though the lower large winning port is not open, the game control device 100 executes a fraudulent winning and winning monitoring process to monitor whether there is any fraudulent winning at the lower large winning port and to detect normal winning (A2005).

The game control device 100 then prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2006). Then, it executes a fraudulent and winning monitoring process to monitor for fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2007). Next, it prepares a winning port monitoring table for a winning port switch that allows winning at any time and does not require fraud monitoring (A20
08) The winning port switches that are always capable of winning include the start port 1 switch 36a and the general winning port 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a win number counter update process to update the number of wins (
A2009). Then, a status scan counter is updated to specify which of the multiple switches and signals whose statuses are to be monitored is to be monitored this time (A2010). The status scan counter is updated within the range of 0 to 3.

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2012).
.

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (switch abnormality error) based on the abnormality detection signal output when a switch connector comes loose or the like occurs is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball out error) based on the chute ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status (payout abnormality error) based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. In this way, weak errors are monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2013), and then executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2014).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch (glass frame open error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch (main body frame open error, front frame open error) is set. Also, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (frame radio wave illegal) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2015),
If the result of step A2014 is "N", the process proceeds to step A2017.

In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (A2
If the result of step A2015 is "Y", a dispensing busy signal check process is executed (A2016) to set the busy signal status (dispensing busy signal flag) based on the dispensing busy signal indicating whether the dispensing control device 200 can start dispensing control, and then processing proceeds to step A2017.

The process of step A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter, which is updated at each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if the timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, A2016 is executed every 16 ms.
The process of step 6 is carried out.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a V-passing timing monitoring process to monitor whether the game ball has passed through the specific area switch 72 at an inappropriate timing (A2017). In the V-passing timing monitoring process, if a detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, it is determined to be a V-passing error.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process to monitor whether any game balls remain in the specific area switch 72 (A2018), and ends the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

In addition, the V passing timing monitoring process and remaining ball monitoring process in the winning port switch/status monitoring process are necessary for so-called Type 1/Type 2 mixed machines (Type 1+Type 2 machines) such as this embodiment, and may not be necessary for normal Type 1 pachinko machines.

[Fraud and winning monitoring processing]
12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud and winning monitoring process. The fraud and winning monitoring process is performed in steps A2003 and A2004 in the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.
005, A2007.

The fraud and winning monitoring process is a process performed on the lower large winning port switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, and the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. The second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) and the large winning port (special variable winning devices 38, 39) are prone to fraud whereby the opening and closing member is forcibly opened to insert game balls and pay out prize balls, so in addition to detecting winning, fraud is monitored.

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the prize slot switch that is the target of error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not it is currently in the fraud monitoring period (A2102).
For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period during which the prize entry port switch being monitored for errors does not normally detect game balls, and is a period other than the special game state in which the special variable prize entry device 38 is opened when the prize entry port switch is the lower large prize entry port switch 38a.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "
If the target prize entry switch has no input (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target alarm timer update information is loaded (A2112). If the target prize entry switch has input (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the target number of fraudulent wins is updated by +1 (A2104), and it is determined whether the number of fraudulent wins after the increment is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrences to be monitored (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason for setting the number of judgments to five is to prevent fraud from being judged to be the case, for example, when a large prize opening that is in an open state is converted to a closed state and a game ball gets caught in the door member of the large prize opening, and the game ball enters the game after the validity period of the count switch has expired, or when noise is present in the signal, and to prevent fraud from being easily judged to be an error even when there is no fraud.

Then, if the number of determinations is not equal to or greater than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "
N), and prepare a prize slot monitoring table for the target prize slot switch (A2110).
If the number of fraudulent wins is equal to or greater than the judgment number (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent wins is kept at the number of fraudulent wins judgment (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) is set in the target fraudulent win notification timer area.
) is saved (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as a performance command (
A2108), and further prepare an illegal winning flag as an illegal flag (A2109).
Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"
"), a prize slot monitoring table for the target prize slot switch is prepared (A2110), and a prize number counter update process is executed to set the prize balls (A2111). The prize number counter update process will be described in detail later.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112).
Then, it is determined whether or not updating of the alarm timer is permitted (A2113). If updating of the alarm timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud and winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if updating of the alarm timer is permitted (the result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target alarm timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the alarm timer is set to 0.

The update of the alarm timer is permitted if the winning port switch that is the object of error monitoring is the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. Also, if there are two winning port switches in one special variable winning device (large winning port), the update of the alarm timer is permitted if one of the winning port switches is the object of error monitoring, but is not permitted if the other is the object of error monitoring. As a result, for an illegal alarm for one special variable winning device, the update of the alarm timer is performed twice as frequently, and it may take longer than the specified time (for example, 60
This prevents the time from running out halfway through the specified time (000 ms).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (A211
5), if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud and winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the alarm timer is 0 (
If the result of A2115 is "Y", that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared as a performance command (A2116), and a fraud win cancellation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (A2117). Then, when the value of the notification timer reaches 0
It is determined whether this is the moment when the time has come (A2118).

When the value of the alarm timer reaches 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the alarm timer reaches 0 during this fraud and winning monitoring process, the game control device 100 clears the number of fraudulent winnings in question (A2119).

In addition, after the processing of step A2119 is completed, or if the value of the alarm timer has not reached 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), that is, if the value of the alarm timer reached 0 in the previous or previous fraud and winning monitoring processing, the game control device 100 compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud and winning monitoring process.
If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value in the target illegal flag area (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121).
The effect command setting process is executed (A2122), and then the fraud and winning monitoring process is terminated.

Through the above processing, when fraud occurs, a fraud occurrence command is sent to the performance control device 300, and when the fraud is resolved, a fraud release command is sent to the performance control device 300, thereby setting the start and end of fraud notification.

[Winning number counter update process]
13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the winning number counter. The winning number counter update process is executed in step A2009 of the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG. 11 and in step A2111 of the fraud and winning monitoring process shown in FIG. 12.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a game is currently stopped (A2201). If the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 that requires the game to be stopped has occurred, it can be determined that a game is currently stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A2201 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2202), and determines whether there is an input to the target winning port switch (A2203). The winning table in the winning port monitoring table defines the number of winning balls, the address of the winning number counter area 1, the address of the winning number counter area 2, etc. for each winning port switch to be monitored. If there is no input (A
2203 is "N"), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A22
15), determine whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning port switch (A220
3 is "Y"), the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the acquired game ball number area (A2204), the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning slot switch is added to the number of acquired game balls (A2205), and the value after the addition is saved in the acquired game ball number area (A2206). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the acquired game ball number area is updated for each winning slot switch, and the number of acquired game balls finally becomes the number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (total).

The area for the number of winning game balls is in the work area within the area, and is written in by the program for updating the number of winning balls counter (part of the program within the area), and is only read out by the program for checking the difference in balls (part of the program outside the area) described below. Note that even if input is made to all winning slot switches at the same time, the total number of winning balls will not reach 255 (1 byte), so no upper limit check is made on the number of winning game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A220
7), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2208). Furthermore, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). The prize number counter area 1 is 2 bytes in size (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves (A2210) the updated value in the number of winnings counter area 1. After the processing of step A2210 is completed, or if an overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads (A2211) the value of the target number of winnings counter area 2.

The game control device 100 then updates the loaded value by +1 (A2212) and determines whether the updated value will cause an overflow (A2213). If an overflow will not occur (the result of A2213 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the prize count counter area 2 (A2214). The prize count counter area 2 is 1 byte in size (0 to 255).

After the process of step A2214 is completed, or if an overflow occurs (the result of step A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record (A2215). Then, it determines whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (the result of A2216 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch in step A2203.
If the monitoring of all switches is completed (the result of A2216 is "Y"), the process returns to step 1.
), and the winning number counter update process is completed. As a result, the process of steps A2203-A2216 is repeated until the monitoring of all switches is completed, and the number of acquired game balls, which is the number of winning balls (total) acquired within one interruption, is obtained, and the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winnings at each winning port (each winning area) within one interruption, and winning information is stored.

When game play is stopped (the result of A2201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, while game play is stopped, the detection of game balls by the winning slot switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated, so winning information is not stored and no prize balls are obtained (not paid out). Note that the payout of prize balls based on winning information stored before the game stopped (i.e., when the detection of game balls by the winning slot switch was valid) continues even while game play is stopped.

The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to send payout commands (prize ball commands) to instruct the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls, and stores data on winnings corresponding to prize balls for which payout commands have not yet been sent. In other words, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter that can store information related to prize ball commands.

The winning number counter area 2 is an area used to transmit a main prize ball signal to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning into the winning slot reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), and stores data on winnings corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal generation process has not been performed. In other words, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main prize ball signal counter that can store information related to the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each winning slot (for example, 3 prize balls, 2 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the number of prizes won at the winning slot. In other words, it is possible to store information on a winning entry at a winning slot. The winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is equivalent to the winning number counter area 2 (1
A larger area than the payout control device 200 (8 bytes) is allocated to the payout command, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because, while the main prize ball signal can be sent regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, and therefore more unsent data may be accumulated.

[Gaming machine status check process]
14 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gaming machine status check process. The gaming machine status check process is performed in step A201 of the winning slot switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.
2, A2014, etc.

The game control device 100 first acquires a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter (A2301). The status scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game status. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as explained in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (
A2302). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2302 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a status off flag is prepared as a status flag (A2303), and the target status off command is acquired and prepared (A2304). Furthermore, the target status off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2305). The status off flag indicates a normal state for error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state for touch switch signals.

On the other hand, if the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2302 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a status-on flag as a status flag (A2306), acquires and prepares the target status-on command (A2307). Furthermore, it acquires the target status-on monitoring timer comparison value (A2308). The status-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2305 or step A2308 is completed, the game control device 100
determines whether the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (A2
If they match (the result of A2309 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2312. If they do not match (the result of A2309 is "N"), the acquired signal status is saved in the target signal control area (A2310), and the target status monitoring timer is cleared (A2311).
A2311).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target status monitoring timer by +1 (A2312).
Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the updated status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2313). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the updated value of the status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and keeps it at the timer comparison value -1 (A2314). Furthermore, it determines whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2315). If they match (A231
5 is "Y"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prepared status flag does not match the value of the target status flag area (the result of A2315 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared status flag in the target status flag area (A2316). Finally, it executes a presentation command setting process to set a presentation command (A2317), and ends the gaming machine status check process.

The presentation command here is either a status off command or a status on command. If the status on command is an error-related command, it causes the presentation control device 300 to start reporting an error. The status on commands that cause the presentation control device 300 to start reporting an error include commands that correspond to payout errors (included in weak errors) related to the payout of game balls, such as a shot ball out error, an overflow error, or a payout abnormality error, as well as commands that correspond to frame open errors (included in strong error 1), such as a glass frame open error or a main frame open error, and commands that correspond to an illegal frame radio wave error (included in strong error 2).

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the probability setting change/confirmation process. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401) The probability setting value here is stored in a probability setting value area included in the internal work area of the RAM 111c.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A2402), and output to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the probability setting value display data is set to off data (A2403), and output to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b.
Output via 0b (A2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data on the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. Note that, to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as the gaming facility manager and attendants, if the probability setting values are different but the jackpot probability (and small win probability) is the same, the display probability setting value may be made the same in correspondence with the jackpot probability (and small win probability). In other words, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is updated to the value set in step A1037.
Then, the security signal ON data for notifying an external device (such as an internal control device (hall computer) of an abnormality) is sent to the external information terminal 71.
(A2406) Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as a jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting change flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting change flag is not set (A2407
If the result of is "N", that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

When the probability setting change flag is set (A2407
If the result of A2408 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether this is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408 result is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated if the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 executes the timer interrupt process if it is not the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A240
8 is "N"), and it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2
409) If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2409
If the result of the above is "Y", the working setting value in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 within the possible range, and the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. Note that when entering the setting change mode, the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) that stores the working setting value may store a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability setting value). Note that if the working setting value is updated by +1 when it is 5 (probability setting value 6), it can return to 0 (probability setting value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched. Furthermore, the possible range of the working setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of a multi-stage setting where multiple probability setting values exist, but 0 is the limit in the case of a single-stage setting.
In the case of a multi-stage setting, the working setting value and the probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of a single-stage setting, they remain the same even if updated (they are updated to the same value).

Furthermore, a command (setting value information command) informing the presentation control device 300 of the setting value may be sent each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. Similarly, a test signal may be output to an external test firing device each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. It is preferable that these transmissions and outputs be stopped if there is an abnormality in the game control device 100, such as a main abnormality. Additionally, a command (setting value information command) informing the presentation control device 300 of the setting value may be sent when the game state is switched to a probability variable state, a time-saving state, a jackpot state, etc., or at the start of a special chart variable display game, or a test signal may be output to an external test firing device.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. However, the probability setting value (working setting value) being changed is stored in the working setting value area of the RAM 111c, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1039 is "Y
"), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change (A1040
This can prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, presentation control, etc. is changed to an unintended value if the result of the above is "Y".

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game processing. In the special symbol game processing, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special symbol variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special symbol is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process (A2600) to monitor the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 or the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a game result advance determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance at a stage before the start of the special chart variable display game based on the winning.
The start port switch monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Next, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper large winning slot switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the upper large winning port switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special game processing timer by -1 if the timer is not 0 (1
(A2603) By updating the special game processing timer by -1, the timer will be timed for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process. The minimum value of the special game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

When the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a special game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the process corresponding to the special game processing number is set in a register (A2605). Furthermore, the special game sequence branch table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game processing number (A2606).
Next, a subroutine call is made using the special game processing number, and game branching processing according to the special game processing number is executed (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100
The start of the special chart change display game is monitored, and special chart normal processing is executed to set the start of the special chart change display game, set the performance, and set information necessary for performing special chart change processing (A2608). Details of the special chart normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100
A special pattern change processing is executed (A2609), which sets the stop display time of the special pattern and sets information necessary for performing processing during special pattern display. For example, in the special pattern change processing, necessary information such as a pattern stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern and a stop display time corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern is set, and the processing number "2" for the special pattern display processing is set and saved in the special pattern game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100
A special chart display process is executed (A2610), which sets the information necessary to transition to a big win state or a small win state. For example, in the special chart display process, if the result of the special chart variation display game is a big win, the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, the process number "0" for the special chart normal process is set, and saved in the special chart game process number area. If the result of the special chart variation display game is a small win, necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and a time before the small win is released is set, and the process number "3" for the small win pre-release process is set.
If the result of the special chart variable display game is a miss, the processing number for the special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute small win opening pre-processing (A2611). For example, in the small win opening pre-processing, the opening time of the large prize opening due to a small win (small win opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, ON data is saved in the upper large prize opening solenoid output data area, the small win opening command is set as the performance command, and the processing number "4" related to the small win opening processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the small win release process (A2612). For example, in the small win release process, the small win remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "5" for the small win remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the small win remaining ball processing (A2613). For example, in the small win remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" for the special game normal processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special symbol game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special symbol 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special symbol 1 display 51 (A2614), and then executes a pattern fluctuation control process for the special symbol 1 display 51 (A2615). Then, after preparing a special symbol 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special symbol 2 display 52 (A2616), it executes a pattern fluctuation control process for the special symbol 2 display 52 (A2617). Next, it executes a lever solenoid control process (A2618) that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so that the lever solenoid 86b is opened during a small win, and then ends the special symbol game processing.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the start winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) (A2701), executes a hardware random number acquisition process (A2702), and
If there is no winning at the start winning slot 36 (A2703),
If the result of A2703 is "N", the process from step A2709 onwards is executed. On the other hand, if there is a win in the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A2704).

If the game control device 100 determines that the game state is not for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onwards. On the other hand, if the game state is for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "Y"), it prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A2705) and executes a presentation command setting process (A2706). In the presentation command setting process, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer and transmitted to the presentation control device 300.

That is, in the normal power support state (time-shortened state), regardless of the probability state of the variable display game (high probability state/low probability state), a right-hit instruction notification command is prepared and the performance command setting process is executed. In this embodiment, a left-handed hit is more likely to win at the start winning slot 36, and a right-handed hit will not win at the normal variable winning device 37. Also, unless the ball is hit with the right, the game ball will not pass through the normal start gate 34. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time-shortened state), a right-handed hit is more advantageous than a left-handed hit, but if a win occurs at the start winning slot 36 during the normal power support state (i.e., if a left-handed hit occurs during the normal power support state), a right-hit instruction notification command is sent to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 sends a notification (
A warning is displayed on the display device 41 etc. by displaying a right-hand strike instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting reservation information by the start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special start port switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second start winning slot (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hardware random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second start winning slot (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning slot (
If the result of A2711 is "N", the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is a win in the second start winning slot (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal electric device (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state where the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric device is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), proceed to processing of step A2714.

On the other hand, if the normal electric device is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether normal power fraud is occurring (A2713). It determines that normal power fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins into the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (e.g., 5). The normal variable winning device 37 does not allow game balls to win when in the closed state; game balls can only win when in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred. If there are any game balls that win in such a closed state, the number of such game balls is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. It then determines that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins thus counted is equal to or greater than the predetermined fraud determination number (upper limit).

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on the reservation by the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714), then executes special chart start port switch common processing (A2715), and ends the start port switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in A2713 that normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring processing is also ended. That is,
Prevent further startup storage from occurring.

[Special diagram starter switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common processing in the start port switch monitoring processing (A2708, A
18 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special starting port switch common processing. The special starting port switch common processing is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first loads the start port signal output count, which is the number of times that information regarding the number of wins on the start port switch being monitored, between the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, is output to an external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901), updates the loaded value by +1 (A2902), and determines whether the output count will overflow (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
The updated value is saved in the RWM start signal output count area (A2904), and step A
The process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output count area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by incrementing by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols to be updated (start memory number) corresponding to the monitored start symbol switch, among the start symbol 1 switch 36a and the start symbol 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (A2905). If the number of reserved special symbols to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special symbol start symbol switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved special symbols to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special symbols to be updated (the number of reserved special symbols 1 or the number of reserved special symbols 2) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target start symbol winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start switch and the number of reserved special symbols to be monitored (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). Next, the game control device 100 extracts the jackpot random number of the special symbol variable display game that starts upon detection of the start switch to be monitored, and
The random number of the big win symbol is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of the WM (A2910). Next, the random number of the small win symbol for the special symbol variable display game that starts upon detection of the start switch of the monitored object is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of the small win symbol (A2911). In addition, the random number of the support symbol for determining the time-saving symbol is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In this embodiment, as described above, since a big win occurs by a V winning after a small win, it is not necessary to use a small win symbol random number, and step A2911 is optional and does not need to be executed. Also, since there is no small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game, if the start port switch to be monitored is the start port 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract a small win symbol random number.

In addition, the small win pattern random number, support win pattern random number, and jackpot pattern random number are used in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) and special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503) described below to determine the stop pattern number at the time of a small win, the stop pattern number at the time of a support win, or the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, and the small win stop pattern pattern, support hit stop pattern, or jackpot stop pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small win symbol random number, the support win symbol random number, and the big win symbol random number are each set independently.
By sharing two random numbers (common random numbers), the small winning pattern (the stopping pattern number at the time of small winning, the small winning stopping pattern), the support winning pattern (the stopping pattern number at the time of support winning, the support winning stopping pattern)
In other words, when determining a small win symbol, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each small win symbol, when determining a support win symbol, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each support win symbol, and when determining a large win symbol, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each large win symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2913), and executes a special chart reservation information determination process (pre-determination process, pre-reading process) that can determine the result of the variation display game (game result) in advance (A29
14). In the special reserved information judgment process, the stop pattern information (jackpot stop pattern, small win stop pattern, time-saving stop pattern, miss stop pattern) based on the saved jackpot random number and winning pattern random number (jackpot random number, small win pattern random number, support winning pattern random number) is read ahead and the corresponding stop pattern command, and the first half change number (number of the change before the reach) based on the saved change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is read ahead and the corresponding stop pattern information (jackpot stop pattern, small win stop pattern, time-saving stop pattern, miss stop pattern) is read ahead and the corresponding stop pattern command.
And a predictive fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after the reach) is set as a performance command. Then, a decorative special chart reserved number command corresponding to the start port switch and special chart reserved number to be monitored is prepared as a performance command (A2915), and a performance command setting process (A2916) is executed to end the special chart start port switch common process. In this way,
The game control device 100 comprises a pre-determination means capable of determining the result of a variable display game before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) serves as a start memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning slot 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and storing the predetermined number as a start memory that becomes the right to execute the variable display game, up to an upper limit.
The start memory means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the first start entry port (start entry port 36) as first start memory up to a predetermined number, and stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the second start entry port (normal variable entry device 37) as second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described in detail. Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small win is occurring (A3001). If the special game processing number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that a small win is occurring. If a small win is occurring (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it determines whether or not the condition device is operating (A30
02) If condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the condition device is in operation.

When the condition device is not in operation (the result of A3002 is "N"),
It is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). If there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, if there is a win in the specific area 86 (
If a V win occurs, condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is not in a small win (the result of A3001 is "N"), or if the condition device is operating (A3
002 is "Y"), or when there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003
If the result of step 104 is "N", the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated without any further action.

[Special chart normal processing]
Next, we will explain the details of the special chart normal processing (A2608) in the special chart game processing.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special chart normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the normal role processing of the role game processing described later, and
It is determined whether the remaining ball counter of the large prize opening is 0 (A3200). If the reel is not being processed normally or the remaining ball counter of the large prize opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N
"), and proceed to processing of step A3215 without starting the special chart change display game.

The game control device 100 is in the normal processing of the special device, and the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0.
If the result of A3200 is "Y", determine whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 0 (A3201 is "Y"), determine whether the number of reserved special drawings 1 (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206).
If the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has already started (A3211). If the customer waiting demo has not already started (A32
If the result of step 11 is "N", a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A
3212).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a performance command (
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A3211 (A32
11 is "Y"), and the processing number is set to "0" for the special chart normal processing (A3215
), the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (A3216), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize slot fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special game normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100 is not a case where the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
"), execute the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202), prepare the decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation number as a performance command (A3203
), and executes the effect command setting process (A3204). Then, executes the special chart 2 special chart variable processing transition setting process (A3205), and ends the special chart normal processing.

In the special chart 2 special chart change processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1" and the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the changing flag is saved in the special chart 2 change control flag area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the number of reserved special charts 1 is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
"), execute the special chart 1 variation start process (A3207), prepare the decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special chart 1 reservation number as a performance command (A3208
), and executes the effect command setting process (A3209). Then, executes the special chart 1 special chart variable processing transition setting process (A3210), and ends the special chart normal processing.

In the special chart 1 special chart change processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1" and the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the change-in-progress flag is saved in the special chart 1 change control flag area.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 before checking the number of reserved special figures 1, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0, the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) will be executed. In other words, the special figure 2 variation display game will be executed in priority to the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 2 reservation priority consumption). In other words, if the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100) is stored in the game control device 100, the game control device 100 serves as a priority control means for executing the variation display game based on the second start memory in priority over the variation display game based on the first start memory. Note that, in the case of special figure 1 reservation priority consumption, in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed in priority to the special figure 2 variation display game, the determination in step A3201 can be made by determining whether the number of reserved special figures 1 is ≠ 0.

[Special Chart 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special chart normal process will be explained. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 variation start process. The special chart 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special symbol 1 variable flag indicating the type of special symbol variable display game to be executed (here, special symbol 1) in the variable symbol discrimination area (A3401). Next, it executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) that sets miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special symbol 1 variable display game is a jackpot. The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) for setting the special symbol 1 stop symbol (symbol information) for the special symbol 1 variable display game. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss, a support hit, or a jackpot, and the stop symbol pattern at the time of the miss, the stop symbol pattern at the time of the support hit, or the jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. The stop symbol number at the time of a support hit or a jackpot is determined corresponding to the support hit symbol random number or the jackpot symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special chart information setting process to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special chart 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special chart 1 variation display game (A3405).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special chart 1 variation display game (A3406).
Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process to set information on the start of fluctuation of the special chart 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special chart 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, a fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, a fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is prepared as a presentation command, and a presentation command setting process is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of reserved special charts related to the special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2) of the special chart fluctuation display game that is about to start is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special Chart 2 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special chart normal process will be explained. Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 variation start process. The special chart 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the special chart 1 variation start process shown in Figure 21, but for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special chart variable display game to be executed (here, special chart 2).
The special symbol 2 variable flag indicating the special symbol 2 variable flag is saved in the variable symbol discrimination area (A3501). Next, a jackpot flag 2 setting process is executed (A3502) to set miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the special symbol 2 variable display game is a jackpot.
).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special symbol 2 stop pattern setting process for setting the special symbol 2 stop pattern (symbol information) for the special symbol 2 variable display game (A3503). Furthermore, it executes a special symbol information setting process for setting the special symbol information, which is a parameter for setting the variable pattern (A3504). Next, it prepares a special symbol 2 variable pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing various information related to the variable pattern setting of the special symbol 2 variable display game is set (A3505).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, a variation start information setting process to set the variation start information of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3507) is executed, and the special chart 2 variation start process is terminated.

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special chart 1 variation start process will be described. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the jackpot flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the RWM loads and prepares a jackpot random number from the special jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM (A3602), and clears the special jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3603). The reserved number 1 area stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special jackpot start memory that is first in the consumption order (here, the first of the special 1). Then, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3606), and terminates the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), an optional support hit determination process is executed (A3607) to determine whether the special symbol variable display game is a support hit based on the acquired jackpot random number value, and the result of the determination is determined to be a support hit or not (A3608). In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, a support hit (time-saving hit) in the special symbol variable display game refers to a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special symbol variable display game, and in response to this time-saving result, the presentation control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a stop result of the decorative special symbol variable display game.

If the special chart change display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3609), and terminates the jackpot flag 1 setting process.
On the other hand, if the special chart change display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

Thus, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is either a "big hit", a "support hit (time-saving hit)", or a "miss", and there is no "small hit". Note that steps A3607-A3609 are provided as options, and these may be omitted and the result of the special chart 1 variable display game may not have a "support hit (time-saving hit)".
It is also possible to configure the game so that a "small win" is included in the results of the special chart 1 variable display game.

In addition, in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since jackpots and support hits do not overlap, the support hit information may also be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Jackpot Flag 2 Setting Process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special chart 2 variation start process will be described. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in Figure 23, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, it loads the big hit random number from the special chart 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM, prepares it (A3702), and clears the special chart 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3703). Note that for reserved number 1, the information about the special chart start memory that is the first in the consumption order (here, the first of the special chart 2) (
Then, the small win determination process is executed to determine whether or not the prepared big win random number value matches the small win determination value (A3704).
).

If the result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3706), and terminates the big hit flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variable display game is not a small win (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a support win determination process (A3707) to determine whether the special symbol variable display game is a support win based on the acquired jackpot random number value, and determines whether the result of the determination is a support win (A3708). In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a support win (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support win determination and the jackpot determination). Here, a support win (time-saving win) in the special symbol variable display game refers to a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special symbol variable display game, and in response to this specific result, the presentation control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a stop result of the decorative special symbol variable display game.

If the special chart change display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the support hit information in the support hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3709), and terminates the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (A3708
If the result of (A371) is "N", an optional jackpot determination process may be executed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A371).
0). If the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3710) is a jackpot (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3712), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3710) is not a jackpot (the result of A3711 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process while leaving the miss information saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 2 variable display game will be either a "small hit," a "support hit (time-saving hit)," or a "miss," but it is also possible to optionally configure the special chart 2 variable display game to result in a "big hit."

In addition, in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area, and support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area, but since jackpots, support hits, and small hits do not overlap, small hit information and support hit information can also be saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (
A3604, A3710) will be described in detail. Figure 25A is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800
), a lower limit judgment value for the jackpot judgment value is set (A3801), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A jackpot occurs when the jackpot random number matches the jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a jackpot is determined to occur when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value. The upper limit judgment value may differ between a low probability state (a normal probability state other than a special probability state) and a high probability state (a special probability state).

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
2 is "Y"), the judgment result is set to "miss" (other than jackpot) (A3804), and the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "
If the result of A3803 is "N", a miss (other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a jackpot is set as the judgment result (A3805). Once the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be explained. Figure 25B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets a small win upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3
900), and determine whether the value of the target (special chart 2) jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3901). A small hit is when the jackpot random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a small hit is determined when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small hit judgment value, and is equal to or less than the small hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. The small hit upper limit judgment value may differ between a low probability state (a normal probability state other than a special probability state) and a high probability state (a special probability state).

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being a small win and a big win, the range of the small win determination value (between the small win lower limit determination value and the small win upper limit determination value) does not overlap with the range of the big win determination value (between the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value).
No unique small win random number is set, and the big win random number is also used to determine small wins, but it is also possible to configure a system in which a unique small win random number is set.

If the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special chart 2) is less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a miss as the judgment result (A3903),
The small hit determination process ends.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small win lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special chart 2) is greater than the small win upper limit judgment value (A3902). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small win upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a miss as the judgment result (A3903).
On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "
N"), and a small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). Once the judgment result is set, the small hit judgment process ends. In this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability may be other values.

[Support hit determination processing]
Next, details of the support hit determination process (A3607, A3707) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be explained. Figure 25C is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. Note that the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets a support winning upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (
A7001). Next, a lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (A7002), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). A support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and it is judged to be a support hit when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the support hit judgment value, and is equal to or less than the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the support hit judgment value. The support hit upper limit judgment value is
It may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the special probability state) and the high probability state (special probability state).

Naturally, to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (between the support hit lower limit judgment value and the support hit upper limit judgment value) does not overlap with the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value and small hit judgment value. In this embodiment, a support hit random number is not set independently, and a big hit random number is also used to judge a support hit, but a configuration in which a unique support hit random number is set is also possible.

The game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit value for the support hit (
The result of A7003 is "Y", and the result of the judgment is set to "miss" (other than a support hit) (A70
05), the support hit determination process is completed.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value for the support hit (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value for the support hit (A7004). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value for the support hit (the result of A7004 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a miss (other than a support hit) as the judgment result (
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value for the support hit (A70
If the result of step 04 is "N", the support hit is set as the judgment result (A7006). After the judgment result is set, the support hit judgment process ends.

In the support hit determination process, a support hit determination (time-saving determination) is performed by lottery using a jackpot random number value. In the support hit determination (time-saving determination) as a lottery, if the jackpot random number value matches the support hit determination value (time-saving determination value), a support hit result (time-saving result, specific result) is obtained as the determination result, and the time saving is set. The support hit determination value is different from the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value.

In order to make the game more interesting, the winning probability of the support hit (the range of the support hit judgment value ÷ the range of the jackpot random number) may be different for each probability setting value, or for simplicity, the winning probability of the support hit may be the same for each probability setting value. Setting 1 (or the low setting side) is more likely to win the support hit,
The winning probability of a support hit may be set so that setting 6 (or the high setting) is less likely to win a support hit, thereby mitigating the disadvantages of a low setting, or conversely, it may be set to match the expectations of players who expect that it is easier to win a support hit with a high setting. The winning probability of a support hit may also be changed monotonically from setting 1 to setting 6, or it may not be monotonous, such as by changing every two settings. The winning probability of a support hit may be made different between even and odd settings to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability setting value.

In addition, the winning probability of the support hit can be made different between the low probability (outside of the probability change state) and the high probability (in the probability change state) of the jackpot probability to make it more distinct, or it can be the same for simplicity.
You can set the probability of winning a support hit to mitigate the disadvantage of low probability, or conversely,
This may be adjusted to the expectations of players who expect that they will be more likely to win the support prize during the high probability period. For example,
The probability of winning a support hit may be set so that the support hit is won only during low probability periods (the probability of winning a support hit is zero during high probability periods), thereby mitigating the disadvantage during low probability periods.

Furthermore, the winning probability of a support hit may be different between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to add emphasis, or may be the same for simplicity. For example, in order to increase the number of support hits in the normal power support state (time-saving state or probability variable state), the winning probability of a support hit in the special chart 2 variable display game may be made higher than that in the special chart 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to increase the interest in the game in the normal game state, the winning probability of a support hit in the special chart 1 variable display game may be made higher than that in the special chart 2 variable display game. In short, the winning probability of a support hit in one of the special chart 1 variable display games or the special chart 2 variable display game may be set to zero, so that a support hit occurs only in the other special chart variable display game.

If the result of the special chart variation display game is a support hit result (time-saving result), in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), a time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern) is set as the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop pattern), and the next special chart variation display game will enter a time-saving state. In other words, in this case, the time-saving state will suddenly be entered without going through a jackpot (sudden time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special chart command corresponding to the time-saving pattern is sent to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 will display the time-saving pattern (decorative time-saving pattern) as a decorative stop pattern on the display device 41.

The time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 are, for example, "
There are no restrictions on the time-saving symbols as long as they are decided in advance, but symbols with a pattern, such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right symbols are aligned, are preferred as they are easier for players to remember. Multiple time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of special symbol variable display games in which the time-saving state continues (number of time-saving times) may be determined for each time-saving symbol.

The lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) when a time-saving result (time-saving symbol) is reached, unlike when a jackpot or small jackpot result is reached. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red when a jackpot or small jackpot result is reached, and may emit light in a neutral or cool color (i.e., a color other than a warm color) such as green or blue when a time-saving result (time-saving symbol) is reached. Furthermore, the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off when a miss occurs. Therefore, when a time-saving symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that a jackpot has occurred, and it is easier for the player to understand that they have won the time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, if the number of times the special symbol variation display game (excluding the number of times in the probability variable state) played after the end of the jackpot state reaches a predetermined number (the so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), the game will enter a time-saving state (Yu-time) even if no support hit is won. At this time, if the result of the special symbol variation display game is a miss, lamp display units 1 and 2 will be turned off, and if it is a small hit or a big hit, they will emit warm colors. At this time, if there is no small hit or a big hit, lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit cool colors as the fourth symbol to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game will enter a time-saving state. The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, a miss symbol (which may be a time-saving symbol) or a small hit symbol (if it is a small hit without a V prize) will be displayed as the stopping symbol on the special symbol display device or display device 41, and the game will enter a time-saving state from the next special symbol variation display game. In this case, the time-saving symbol displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left symbol and the center symbol are aligned (as in the case of time-saving due to a support hit result, "1, 1,
3" is also acceptable).

[Special chart 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special chart 1 variable start process will be described. Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, i.e., whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001).
If it is a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the jackpot random number is loaded from the special jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, the special jackpot random number table is set (A4003), and the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot random number is obtained and saved in the special jackpot random number area of the RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special jackpot stop symbol information table (A40
05), the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the stop pattern area (A4006).
1) and the display device 41. Then, the information on the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the number of stopped symbols is acquired and saved in the information area for the upper limit of the number of rounds for special symbol 1 of the RWM (A4007), and the information on the fanfare corresponding to the number of stopped symbols is acquired and saved in the fanfare information area (A4008). This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number,
The time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not the time reduction state is in effect after the end of the jackpot (time reduction or no time reduction), and is used in the special chart 1 jackpot end processing and special chart 2 jackpot end processing described below. Next, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number, symbol A described below) is saved (A4010). Then, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A4
011). When the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (the result of A4011 is "Y"), a random number is loaded from the special chart 1 support hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4012), and the special chart 1 support hit symbol table is set (A4013). Then, by referring to the special chart 1 support hit symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 1 stop symbol number area (A4014). Next, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4015). After that, the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4016),
The presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is saved (A4017).
Proceed to processing of step A4020.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N") and the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (the result of A4011 is "N"), the game control device 100
"), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special pattern 1 stop pattern number area (A4018), and the loss stop pattern is saved in the stop pattern area (A4019). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020. In addition, if the process related to the support hit (A3607-A3609) is not executed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), steps A4011-A4017 are not executed and the process proceeds to step A4018.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and saves the decorative special symbol 1 command as a performance command in the decorative special symbol 1 command area (A4020). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4021). As a result, the decorative special chart 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4022) and clears the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). After that, the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated. Note that, by the above-mentioned symbol variation control process, the stop symbol display of the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, losing symbol, etc.) is executed on the special symbol 1 display 51.

[Special chart 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the small win flag 2 indicates a small win, i.e., whether small win information is saved in the small win flag 2 area (A4101).
If it is a small win (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, the special jackpot pattern table is set (A4103), and the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special jackpot pattern number area of the RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In this embodiment, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small win, causing the game ball to enter the V, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so even if the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win (small win flag 2 is a small win), the big win pattern random number is loaded. However,
It is also possible to load the small winning symbol random number (A2911) and obtain the stop symbol number corresponding to the small winning symbol random number. In this configuration, when a V win occurs (the result of A3003 in FIG. 19 is "Y"),
When the jackpot symbol random number is loaded, the stop symbol number is acquired, and step A4107 is executed.
The process from A4110 onwards may be executed.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 2 jackpot stop pattern information table (A41
05), the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the stop pattern area (A4106).
2) and the stop pattern on the display device 41. In the case of a small win, the special chart 2 small win stop pattern information table may be used instead of the special chart 2 big win stop pattern information table. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4107), and the fanfare information corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the fanfare information area (A4
108) This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number,
The time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not the time reduction state is in effect after the end of the jackpot (time reduction or no time reduction), and is used in the special chart 1 jackpot end processing and special chart 2 jackpot end processing described below. Next, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number, symbol B-G described below) is saved (A4010). Then, the process proceeds to step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4102 and subsequent steps, but a special chart 2 big hit pattern table and special chart 2 big hit stop pattern information table different from those used in the case of a small hit may be used.

The game control device 100 determines whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A4111 is "N").
"), and it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit or not (A4112). If the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A4112 is "Y"), a random number is loaded from the special chart 2 support hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4113), and the special chart 2 support hit symbol table is set (A4114). Then, by referring to the special chart 2 support hit symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 stop symbol number area (A4
115). Next, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4116), and time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4117). After that, the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and the process proceeds to step A4121.

The game control device 100 determines whether the small win flag 2 is a small win (the result of A4101 is "N").
If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4111 is "N") and the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A4112 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4119), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4120). Then, the process proceeds to step A4121.

In this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not set as a result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing of step A4111 is optional and does not need to be executed. That is, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), step A4111 may not be executed and the processing may proceed to step A4112.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and saves the decorative special symbol 2 command as a performance command in the decorative special symbol 2 command area (A4121). Through the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 2 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4122). The decorative special chart 2 command is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4123) and clears the special pattern 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). Also, if a small win pattern random number (A2911) is extracted, the special pattern 2 small win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process is terminated. In addition, by the above-mentioned pattern variation control process, the stop display of the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern pattern or stop pattern number is executed on the special pattern 2 display 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution means that executes the special chart 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the first start winning port 36, and executes the special chart 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The game control device 100 also serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special drawing information setting process]
Next, the special chart information setting process (A340) in the special chart 1 change start process and the special chart 2 change start process
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time-saving) does not directly affect the allocation of fluctuations, but the presentation mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the allocation of fluctuations. One presentation mode is set from multiple presentation modes depending on the probability state, whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, the progress of the special symbol fluctuation display game, etc. Note that the allocation of fluctuations may also be performed directly based on the probability state, whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, the progress of the special symbol fluctuation display game, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variable group selection pointer table (A
4201), obtain the first half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the performance mode information (A4
202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203).
The offset data corresponding to the target reserved number of special symbols (reserved number of special symbols 1 or reserved number of special symbols 2) and the stopping symbol pattern is obtained (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 1 area (A4206
). As a result, the fluctuation allocation information 1 area saves the fluctuation allocation information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and the presentation mode. This fluctuation allocation information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern up until the start of the reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, depending on the specifications of the machine, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of a miss when there are many reserved symbols, so in cases other than a miss, the number of reserved symbols does not affect the allocation of the first half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group contains multiple fluctuation patterns, and when determining a fluctuation pattern, first a fluctuation group is selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation group.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variable group selection pointer table (A
4207), and obtain the latter half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the performance mode information (A4
208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209).
, obtain offset data corresponding to the target special reserved number and stop pattern pattern (A42
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 2 area (A4212).
), and the special chart information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable allocation information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and the presentation mode is saved in the variable allocation information 2 area. This variable allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half of the variation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a variable group. However, since the occurrence rate of reach changes according to the number of reserved symbols only in the case of a miss (the occurrence rate of reach decreases when the number of reserved symbols is large), in the case of a non-miss, the number of reserved symbols does not affect the allocation of the latter half of the variation.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process (A) in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process
29 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the variable pattern setting process.

The variation pattern consists of a first half variation pattern, which is a variation state from the start of the special chart variation display game until it reaches a ready state, and a second half variation pattern, which is a variation state from it reaches a ready state until it ends the special chart variation display game, and the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A430
1), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation allocation information 2 is obtained and prepared (A4302), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the latter half fluctuation group table differs for winning and losing. Specifically, the winning table is 1 byte in size, and the losing table is 2 bytes in size. Since the winning rate is lower than the losing rate and 1 byte is sufficient, the winning table is 1 byte in size from the perspective of saving data capacity. Therefore, when a winning occurs, only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used. Furthermore, since the losing rate is higher than the winning rate and more diverse effects are desired to appear, the losing table is 2 bytes in size.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special chart variable display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), it performs a 2-byte allocation process (A4305) and moves to the processing of step A4307. Also, if it is not a loss (the result of A4304 is "N"), it performs an allocation process (A4306) and moves to step A
The process proceeds to step 4307.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains and prepares the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation (A4307), and loads and prepares the variation pattern random number 2 from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4308). Then, it executes the allocation process (A4309), obtains the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, and saves it in the second half variation number area (A4310). This process sets the second half variation pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation allocation information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, it obtains and prepares the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer (A4313), and loads and prepares the fluctuation pattern random number 3 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4314). After that,
The allocation process (A4315) is performed, the first half variable number obtained as a result of allocation is acquired, and saved in the first half variable number area (A4316), and the variable pattern setting process is terminated. This process sets the first half variable pattern, and the variable pattern of the special chart variable display game is set. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a variable pattern setting means for setting the variable pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, from among multiple ones.

[2-byte allocation process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variable pattern setting process will be explained. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte allocation process.
The byte allocation process is a process for selecting a second half variation selection table for a special chart variation display game from a second half variation group table based on variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302) is a code for no allocation (i.e., "0") (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but if the latter half fluctuation pattern is "
In the case of a second half fluctuation group table that specifies only a second half fluctuation selection table that results in "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is a miss), there is no need for allocation, so the allocation value "0", i.e., the code for no allocation, is specified at the beginning.

If the first data in the selection table (later variable group table) is a code without allocation (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates it to the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (A4407) and ends the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (later variable group table) is not a code without allocation (the result of A4402 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the first allocation value specified in the selection table (later variable group table) (A4403).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value obtained in step A4403 from the random number value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404).
Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address is updated to the next allocation value (A4406), and the process proceeds to step A4403, where the subsequent processing is carried out. That is, the next allocation value specified in the selection table (later variable group table) is obtained (A4403), and then the previous allocation value in step A4405 is obtained.
A new random number is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number determined in (A44)
04), and determine whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above process is repeated until the new random number value is determined to be smaller than "0" in step A4405 (A4
This is executed until the result of step A4405 is "Y"). This selects one of the latter half variation selection tables from at least one of the latter half variation selection tables defined in the selection table (later half variation group table). Then, in step A4405, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result is updated (A4407), and the 2-byte allocation process is terminated.

[Allocation process]
Next, the allocation process in the fluctuation pattern setting process (A4306, A4309, A43
31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the allocation process. The allocation process is a process for selecting a second half fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or for selecting a first half fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table prepared in step A4302, the second half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A4313) is a code for no allocation (i.e., "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value "0", i.e., the code for no allocation, is specified at the beginning.

Then, if the first data of the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is a code without allocation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (A4507) and ends the allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is not a code without allocation (the result of A4502 is "N"),
The first allocation value specified in the second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table is obtained (A4503).

Next, the game control device 100 subtracts the allocation value obtained in step A4503 from the random number values (values of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 to calculate a new random number value (A45
04), and determine whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next allocation value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the allocation value specified next in the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is obtained (A4503), and then a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4505 (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), whereby one of the second half fluctuation selection tables, second half fluctuation patterns (second half fluctuation numbers), and first half fluctuation patterns (first half fluctuation numbers) is selected from at least one of the second half fluctuation selection tables, second half fluctuation patterns (second half fluctuation numbers), and first half fluctuation patterns (first half fluctuation numbers) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result (A4507) and terminates the allocation process.

[Variable start information setting process]
Next, the variable start information setting process (A) in the special chart 1 variable start process and the special chart 2 variable start process
32 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting fluctuation start information.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the variable display game to be started is a special chart 2 variable display game (A4600a). If the variable display game to be started is not a special chart 2 variable display game but a special chart 1 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), the random number storage area for the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (A4601). Next, a first half variable time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variable time value corresponding to the first half variable number is obtained (A4603).
4603). Furthermore, a second half variable time value table is set (A4604), and the second half variable time value corresponding to the second half variable number is obtained (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (A460
6), the added value (total variable time value) is saved in the special game processing timer area (A4607).
Then, prepare the change command (MODE) corresponding to the first half change number (A4608),
Prepare the change command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half change number as a performance command (
A4609), and then a performance command setting process is performed (A4610). Next, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag indicating the symbol of the variable symbol to be started (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is updated by -1 (
A4611), set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (A4
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free space after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

When the variable display game to be started is the special chart 2 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 first determines whether the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (A4600b). When the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the variable display game to be started is the special chart 1
The process from step A4601 onwards is carried out in the same manner as in the case of the variable display game. Unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a support hit, step A460
The configuration may be such that the processes from step 1 onwards are executed.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a miss result, the game control device 100 saves the variable time value (total variable time value) corresponding to the number of special chart 2 variations (the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the big win ends in the special chart game processing timer area (A4615).
.

Therefore, the variable time value of the special chart 1 variable display game and the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are set by allocation (lottery) and are not fixed, while the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a miss is a fixed time value that is set for each number of special chart 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit. In other words, the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game is controlled by the number of rotations. It is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit to be a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 issues a variable command (MODE, AC
TION) is prepared as a performance command (A4616), and processing from step A4610 onwards is executed.

In addition, when the support state (support state, normal power release pattern) regarding the state (content) of the normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below, the fluctuation time value may be set not only to correspond to the number of times special chart 2 fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, but also to correspond to the support state.

By the above processing, information regarding the start of the special chart variable display game is set.
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start memory means (game control device 100). The game control device 100 also serves as a variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games is then transmitted to the performance control device 300, which, based on the received information relating to the start of the special symbol variation display game, sets detailed performance content for the decorative special symbol variation display game in accordance with the determined variation pattern. Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games includes a decorative special symbol reserve number command containing information about the start memory number (reserved number), a decorative special symbol command containing information about the stop symbol, and a variation command containing information about the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display game, and the commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special symbol command before the variation command, processing in the performance control device 300 can be carried out efficiently.

[Special chart change processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation process (A2609) in the special symbol game process will be described. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the special symbol 2 is changing (the special symbol 2 change display game is running) (A4801). If the special symbol 2 is not changing, that is, if the special symbol 1 is changing (the special symbol 1 change display game is running) (the result of A4801 is "N"), the display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (A4802).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in the process of changing the special chart 2 (the result of A4801 is "Y")
, determine whether the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (A480
3). If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stopped symbol (stop display) that is the result of the variable display game. Note that, unlike this embodiment, even if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a support hit, the configuration may proceed to the processing of step A4802.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is not a small win or a big win,
That is, in the case of a miss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the number of times the special chart 2 changes after the big win ends (
Set the display time corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special chart 1 variable display game and the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win are not fixed times based on the stopping pattern pattern set by lottery, while the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a miss is fixedly set for each number of special chart 2 variations (number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the end of the big win. Note that it is also possible to configure the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be set fixedly.

In addition, as described later, when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern) regarding the mode (content) of the normal power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is
It may be set not only according to the number of fluctuations but also according to the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special game processing timer area (A4805).
0, it is determined whether normal power support is in progress (time-saving state) (A4806). If normal power support is not in progress (the result of A4806 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813.
If normal power support is in progress (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the change is in the special chart 1 variable display game (A4807). If the change is in the special chart 1 variable display game (A48
If the result of step A487 is "Y", the process proceeds to step A4810.

If the special chart 2 variable display game is changed (the result of A4807 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening variation count 2 by -1 (decreases by 1) (A4808), and determines whether the time-shortening variation count 2 is 0 (A4809). If the time-shortening variation count 2 is 0 (the result of A4809 is "Y"), it executes a time-shortening end setting process to set the end of the time-shortening (
A4812).

If the time reduction variation number 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N
"), the time reduction variation count 1 is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A4810), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (A4811). If the time reduction variation count 1 is not 0 (
If the result of step A4811 is "N", the process proceeds to step A4813. On the other hand, if the time-saving variation count 1 is 0 (the result of step A4811 is "Y"), the process executes a time-saving end setting process (A4812) to set the end of the time-saving. Then, the process executes a performance mode information check process (A4813) to be described later.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the special chart display processing transition setting processing (A4814
). In the special chart display processing transition setting processing, the processing number "2" for the special chart display processing is set and the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the stop flag for the fluctuation stop in the special chart 1 display 51 is saved in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag for the fluctuation stop in the special chart 2 display 52 is saved in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area. After that, the special chart fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, the details of the time-saving end setting process (A4812) in the special chart change process will be described. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time-saving end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the time-saving function in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 is very short or the probability of winning the normal variable display game is very low, so there is no winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory does not occur. Therefore, at the time of the time reduction end, the second start memory (special 2 start memory,
When a special chart 2 reserve remains as a remaining reserve, the output of ON data for the jackpot 2 signal may continue (no inconvenience occurs even if this is done), and when the variable display of the special chart variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops, the OFF data for the jackpot 2 signal (a signal related to the end of time reduction) may be output to an external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal indicating the end of the time-saving mode in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4902). This outputs the signal indicating the end of the time-saving mode to the test firing device as a test signal. The signals indicating the end of the time-saving mode are, for example, off data for the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, off data for the special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal, off data for the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, off data for the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal, and off data for the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, a no-time-saving mode number is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A4903), a normal symbol low probability & no-time-saving mode flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4904), and a special symbol low probability & no-time-saving mode flag is saved in the special symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4905).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number 1 area of the RWM where the time reduction variation number 1 is stored (A4906), and clears the time reduction variation number 2 area of the RWM where the time reduction variation number 2 is stored (A4907).
Save it in the WM test signal output data area (A4908), and RWM game status display number 2
The number during left-hit state is saved in the area (A4909).

After that, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (A49
10) Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal gaming state, which is the period for calculating the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state). After that, the time-saving end setting process is ended.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, the time-saving state (a state with a low probability of special drawings and normal power support) is appropriately changed to a normal game state (a state with a low probability of special drawings and normal power support)
can be transferred to.

[Performance mode information check process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode information check process (A4813) in the special chart change process will be described. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the presentation mode information check process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the presentation mode information check process ends. In this case, the presentation mode is not changed according to the number of special chart variable display games that have been executed, and for example, a presentation mode that continues until the next jackpot is selected.

In addition, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (A50
If the result of 01 is "N"), the remaining number of spins for the effect, which is the number of times the special symbol variable display game can be executed until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (A5002), and it is determined whether the remaining number of spins for the effect has become 0 (A5003). Here, the remaining number of spins for the effect is updated by -1 only if the game executed this time is the main special symbol variable display game, but it is also possible to configure it to be updated by -1 even if it is a non-main variable display game.

Depending on the game state, one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game. For example, the main variable display game (main variable display game) is the one that is frequently executed between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the one that is frequently executed between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game.
This is the less frequently executed of the variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game. Note that the game control device 100 and/or the presentation control device 300 may store information indicating the main variable display game (special chart 1 or special chart 2) depending on the game status, etc.

If the number of remaining spins for the effect is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the number of remaining spins for the effect is 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special chart variable display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5004), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode change information is obtained (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the presentation mode number of the presentation mode to be shifted to, and
Save it in the performance mode number area in M (A5006), obtain the remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the performance mode to be switched to, and save it in the remaining number of rotations area in RWM (A5007).
The next mode transition information for the presentation mode to be transitioned to is obtained and saved in the next mode transition information area within the RWM (A5008).

Furthermore, when the presentation mode is transitioned upon the end of the time-saving state (time-saving variation count 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining presentation spins (initial value) for the transitioning presentation mode may be set to a specified remaining reserve number (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining reserve number is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends, and is the number of special chart 2 variations after the time-saving state ends. The remaining reserves are generated by winning the normal variation winning device 37, which is opened by a normal chart win during the time-saving state. In this way, the remaining reserve consumption mode (Fig. 54) can be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the remaining reserves (special chart 2 reserve, special chart 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the transition to a new presentation mode occurs upon the completion of the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (which is opened by a normal prize winning during the time-saving mode, corresponding to the later opening described below), the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the transitioning presentation mode may be set to the number of reserved special prize winning devices 2 at that time. This allows a "normal power release end mode" (FIG. 71A) to be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of reserved special prize winning devices 2 after the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (which is opened by a normal prize winning during the time-saving mode) has ended. Furthermore, in this case, the "normal power release end mode" (FIG. 71A) can be set by setting the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode transitioning upon the end of the time-saving mode (time-saving variable prize winning number 1 or 2 = 0) to a predetermined value corresponding to the number of time-saving prize winning devices (e.g., 6 minus the number of time-saving prize winning devices).

Furthermore, when switching the performance mode due to the end of the time-saving state (time-saving fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0), the remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the performance mode to be switched is set to the special chart 2 at that time.
It may be set to a predetermined number equal to or less than the reserved number or the reserved number of special chart 2. In this way, the remaining reserved number consumption mode (Fig. 71B) generated during time reduction can be set as a presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the reserved number of special chart 2 or the predetermined number of remaining reserved (special chart 2 reservation, special chart 2 start memory) at the end of time reduction. The remaining rotation number (initial value) of the presentation mode to be shifted to after the remaining reserved number consumption mode generated during time reduction is set to the predetermined remaining reserved number (
For example, it can be set to a value (excess reserve number) obtained by subtracting the number of remaining reserves consumed in the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode from 10. In this way, the excess reserve consumption mode (FIG. 71B) can be set as the performance mode after the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode.

The game control device 100 then prepares a probability information command (including probability state information, time-saving information, and presentation mode information) corresponding to the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A5009), and determines whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

In addition, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "N"), the prepared probability information command is saved in the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5011), and a performance command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a performance command (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a performance rotation number command corresponding to the remaining performance rotation number as a performance command (A5013), and executes a performance command setting process (A5014
). This allows the performance control device 300 to obtain the remaining number of rotations for the performance. Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 2 is prepared as a performance command (A50
15) and the performance command setting process (A5016).
00 can acquire the time reduction variation number 2. Note that the game control device 100 may also prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as a presentation command and execute the presentation command setting process.

Next, when a new presentation mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether the new presentation mode is a left-hand hitting mode (A5017).
If the mode is not a left-handed hitting mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), the performance mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is a left-handed hitting mode (the result of A5017 is "Y"),
In this case, a left-hit instruction notification command is prepared as a presentation command (A5018), a presentation command setting process is executed (A5019), and the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

In the above, the result of the determination of whether the remaining number of spins for the effect is 0 (A500
Regardless of 3), the performance rotation count command corresponding to the updated remaining performance rotation count (A5002) and the time reduction variation count command corresponding to the updated time reduction variation counts 1 and 2 (A4808, A4810) may also be prepared as performance commands, and the performance command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special chart display]
Next, the details of the special chart display process (A2610) in the special chart game process will be described. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart display process. Figure 36A shows the first half of the special chart display process, and Figure 36B shows the second half of the special chart display process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current execution is a variation of the special symbol 1 (A5101). That is, it determines whether or not the display of the stopped symbol (stop display) is related to the special symbol 1 variation display game. If the current execution is a variation of the special symbol 1 (the result of A5101 is "Y"), it loads the jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clears the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and determines whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5104).
104).

The game control device 100, when the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5104
If the result of step A5104 is "Y", the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5105), and the process proceeds to step A5106. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of step A5104 is "N"), step A511
The process proceeds to step 1.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5106).
In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number for the special chart normal processing is set to 0, the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared. After that, the special chart display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the change executed this time is the special chart 2 change (A510
If the result of A5109 is "Y", the jackpot flag 2 is loaded (A5107), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5108). The loaded jackpot flag 2 is determined to be a jackpot (A5109). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5109 is "Y"),
The condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5110), and the process proceeds to step A5106. If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a miss, step A5
The process proceeds to step 111.

In this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing of steps A5107 to A5110 is optional and does not need to be executed. That is, after step A5101, the processing may proceed to step A5111.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special chart is currently in a high probability state (in a probability change state) (A5111). If the special chart is not currently in a high probability state (the result of A5111 is "N"), it determines whether or not there is a ceiling-reached flag indicating that the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed has reached the ceiling number of times (time-saving ceiling) (A5112).

If there is no ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"), the game control device 100
), the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area of the RWM is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (A51
13). Then, it is determined whether the number of times (i.e., the ceiling counter value) that the special chart variable display game (including the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) has been executed in a state other than the probability variable state has reached the ceiling number of times (A5114). For example, the ceiling number of times is 500 times. If the ceiling number of times has been reached (the result of A5114 is "Y"), a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that a ceiling time-saving will occur and a ceiling-reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (ON) (A5115). It is also possible to combine the ceiling time-saving activation flag and the ceiling-reached flag into a single flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, once the ceiling number of times is reached, if the time-saving number of times ends without a jackpot, the ceiling reached flag will remain set (on), so the ceiling time-saving will not occur from then on, and the ceiling counter value will not be updated.

On the other hand, if the special chart has a high probability of winning (in a special state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling-reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), or if the ceiling number of times has not been reached (the result of A5114 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small win flag 2 indicates a small win or not (A5116).

Next, if the small win flag 2 indicates a small win (the result of A5116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a small win fanfare command as a performance command (A5117
), execute the effect command setting process (A5118). Then, the decorative special chart 2 command is loaded from the decorative special chart 2 command area as an effect command and prepared (A5119), and execute the effect command setting process (A5120). After that, execute the small win opening pre-processing transition setting process (A5121), and end the special chart display process.

In the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small hit opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area, and the small hit opening pre-time (for example, 300 m
s) is saved in the special game processing timer area. Also, the signal (
For example, the jackpot 1 signal is turned on (output on jackpot or small jackpot) and saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 2 is not a small win, i.e., if the result of A5116 is "N," the game control device 100 determines whether a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating the occurrence of a ceiling time-saving state is present (A5122). If the ceiling time-saving activation flag is present (A5122 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the initial values for the ceiling time-saving count (the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time-saving state) in the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area (A5123). The initial values for the time-saving fluctuation count 1 and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 in the case of the ceiling time-saving state (e.g., 704 and 700 times) are saved here. The initial values may be determined by lottery. Next, the game control device 100 executes a support activation setting process to activate the ceiling time-saving state (A5127), executes a special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5128), and ends the special chart display processing. In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number for the special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that the ceiling time reduction will occur (the result of A5122 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (
A5124). And, if the support flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5124 is "
N"), and the support hit flag 1 determines whether or not the support hit is true (A5125).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data in the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area (A5126).
The initial values of the time-saving fluctuation count 1 and time-saving fluctuation count 2 in the case of a support hit result (sudden time-saving) (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) are saved here. Next, the support operation setting process is executed (A5127) to generate a time-saving state (sudden time-saving) by the time-saving pattern, and the special pattern normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5128).
, and end processing during special chart display.

In addition, since the time reduction judgment data is set corresponding to the stop pattern number in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) and the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the initial value (i.e., the number of time reductions) in the case of a support hit result will be determined by lottery using the support hit pattern random number.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hits (the results of A5124 and A5125 are "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support activation setting process to set the time reduction, but executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5128), and ends the processing during the special chart display.

As described above, in the special chart display process, the setting of the time reduction, such as the setting of the number of time reductions (i.e., the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) for the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction, is executed. In addition, for the time reduction due to a jackpot, that is, the time reduction that starts from the end of the jackpot state, the setting of the number of time reductions, such as the setting of the time reduction, is executed in the jackpot end process.

In addition, since the special chart display processing is executed when the special chart game processing timer, to which the stop display time (A4805) is set, reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), it is executed when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (approximately the same as when the next special chart variation display game starts, if it starts), the time reduction variation count (A5123, A5126) is set, and the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction begins.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) in the special chart display process will be described. Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of time-saving in the external information output data area (A5301). As a result, when the ceiling time-saving is started due to the ceiling number of times reached or the sudden time-saving is started due to the time-saving symbol (support hit), the signal related to the start of time-saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71.
This is then output to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the start of the time-saving is the on data of the jackpot 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (e.g., 128 msec) is saved in the time-saving signal control timer area (A5302). This timer initial value is the time to output the jackpot 3 signal by the external information editing process described below.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time-saving in the test signal output data area (A5303). As a result, when the ceiling time-saving and sudden time-saving modes begin, a signal related to the start of time-saving is output as a test signal to the test firing device. The signals related to the start of time-saving are, for example, ON data for the special symbol 1 variable time-saving state signal, ON data for the special symbol 2 variable time-saving state signal, ON data for the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, ON data for the normal symbol 1 variable time-saving state signal, and ON data for the normal electric device 1 extended release state signal. Then, the game control device 100 saves a time-saving number in the game status display number area (A5304), saves a normal symbol high probability & time-saving flag in the normal symbol game mode flag area (A5305), and combines the special symbol time-saving flag in the special symbol game mode flag area (A5306). Next, a signal regarding a right-hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5307), and the number in the right-hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5308).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the presentation mode information address table according to the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (A5309), and executes the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3404).
The address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (A3503) is obtained (A5310), and the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode is obtained based on the table and saved (A5311). This allows the selection of the presentation mode to be transitioned to when the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction start.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode based on the table (A5312). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode is the number of time-saving times (the initial value of time-saving variation number 1 or time-saving variation number 2). This allows the same presentation mode to continue until the time-saving time ends, for example.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on the transition from the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction performance mode to the next mode, based on the table (A5
313). Then, a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number is prepared as a presentation command (A5314), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5315), and a presentation command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A5316).
The probability information command includes information on the probability state, whether or not time-saving (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation number command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (A5317), and executes a presentation command setting process (A5318).
Then, time reduction variation number commands corresponding to the time reduction variation number 1 and the time reduction variation number 2 (here, the time reduction number as the initial value) are prepared as performance commands (A5319
), and executes the performance command setting process (A5320).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5321),
The effect mode transition information area is cleared (A5322), and the support operation setting process is terminated. In addition, at this point, since the ceiling time reduction has been activated, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored may be cleared.

[Gem game processing]
Next, the details of the bonus game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the bonus game process. In the bonus game process, the entire process related to the jackpot state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes the lower large winning slot switch monitoring process (A5601).
In the lower large winning port switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the bonus game processing timer by -1 if the bonus game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A5602) By updating by -1, the bonus game processing timer will count for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. The minimum value of the bonus game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the bonus game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the bonus game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the bonus game processing is terminated.

When the bonus game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a bonus game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the process corresponding to the bonus game processing number is set in a register (A5604). Furthermore, the bonus game sequence branch table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the bonus game processing number (A5605).
Next, a subroutine call is made using the bonus game processing number, and game branching processing according to the bonus game processing number is executed (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A5606, the game control device 100
The normal feature processing is executed to set the jackpot start time, etc. (A5607). For example, in the normal feature processing, the processing number "1" for the fanfare processing is set in a predetermined case and saved in the feature game processing number area. Details of the normal feature processing will be described later in FIG. 39.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A5606, the game control device 100
Execute fanfare processing (A5608). For example, in fanfare processing,
The processing number "2" for the interval processing is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A5606, the game control device 100
Execute the interval processing (A5609). For example, in the interval processing, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the lower large prize opening time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the on data is saved in the lower large prize opening solenoid output data area, the round command is set as the effect command, and the processing number "3" for the jackpot opening processing is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, and processing during jackpot opening is executed to set information necessary for jackpot remaining ball processing, etc. For example, in the processing during jackpot opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, and processing number "4" for jackpot remaining ball processing is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, a jackpot remaining ball process is executed (A5611), which sets the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot opening to be discharged and sets the information required for jackpot end processing. For example, in the jackpot remaining ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the bonus game process timer area, and the process number "2" related to the interval process is set and saved in the bonus game process number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the bonus game process timer area, and the process number "5" related to the jackpot end processing is set and saved in the bonus game process number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A5606, the game control device 100
Executes the jackpot end process, which sets the information necessary to execute the normal processing of the role (A
For example, in the jackpot end processing, based on the time reduction judgment data including the information on whether or not there is a time reduction state after the jackpot ends (time reduction or no time reduction), necessary information such as the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the jackpot state ends is set, and the processing number "0" for the normal processing of the role
Set and save in the special game processing number area.

[Normal processing of accessories]
Next, the details of the normal feature processing (A5607) in the above-mentioned feature game processing will be explained. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal feature processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the condition device is in operation (A5801
When the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004,
A5005, A5010), that is, if there is jackpot information in jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or if there is a win in specific area 86 (V winning slot) (input to specific area switch 72, V winning), it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. If the condition device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the normal processing of the reel is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the condition device is in operation (the result of A5801 is "Y")
The round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round number upper limit value area (A5802). Next, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), a probability information command (normal) is prepared as a performance command (A5804), and the performance command setting process is executed (
A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as a performance command (A5806), and executes a performance command setting process (A58
07). Then, the decorative special symbol command (decorative special symbol 1 command or decorative special symbol 2 command) is loaded from the decorative special symbol command area of the special symbol that has resulted in the current big win or small win, and prepared as a performance command (A5808), and the performance command setting process is executed (A5809).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves a signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). Then, it saves an initial value in the number of rounds area (A5812).
5812). The initial value is 0 when the condition device is in operation due to jackpot information, and is 1 when the condition device is in operation due to a win in the specific area 86 (V win).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the fanfare processing transition setting process (A581
3) End normal feature processing. For example, in the fanfare processing transition setting process, the processing number for the fanfare processing is set to "1" and the processing number is saved in the feature game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the feature game processing timer area.

In the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation count 1 area where the time reduction variation count 1 is stored, the time reduction variation count 2 area where the time reduction variation count 2 is stored, the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter value is stored, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area where the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the game control device 100 saves a normal low probability & no time reduction flag in the normal game mode flag area, and a special low probability & no time reduction flag in the special game mode flag area. The ceiling counter area, which stores the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special game variation display game has been executed in a state other than the probability variable state, is cleared here when a jackpot occurs, but as mentioned above, it does not need to be cleared when a normal power outage is restored (when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on).

Furthermore, in the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 saves signals relating to the start of a jackpot (special game state) (for example, turning on the jackpot 1 signal (output for a jackpot or small jackpot), turning on the jackpot 4 signal (output for a jackpot)) in the external information output data area. Then, signals relating to the end of the high probability state and the time-shortening state (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, turning off the special symbol 1 variable time-shortening state signal,
Special pattern 2 variable time shortening state signal off, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal off, normal pattern 1
The variable time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (A5612) in the bonus game process will be explained. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the time-shortening determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with time-shortening (A6001). Data with time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will be entered after the jackpot state ends. Data without time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will not be entered after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data indicates no time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 1 to transition to a normal game state after the jackpot ends (A6002), and when the time reduction determination data indicates time reduction, it executes jackpot end setting process 2 to transition to a time reduction state (normal power support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the presentation mode information address table (A6004), and sets the presentation mode transition information (A4010,
A6005, and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot state (A4110). This allows the selection of the presentation mode to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be set after the special game state ends (A6007). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation is the number of time-saving times (initial value of the number of time-saving variations) or the total number of time-saving times and the specified number of remaining reserved times (for example, 10 times). This allows the same presentation mode to continue, for example, after the end of a jackpot, until the time-saving time ends or until all of the special chart 2 variable display games related to the remaining reserved times are executed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about the transition from the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state to the next mode (A6009). Then, it prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A6009), saves the prepared probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A6010), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes information about the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, whether or not time reduction (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation number command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (A6012), and executes a presentation command setting process (A6013).
The number of time reduction fluctuations (here, the initial value of the number of time reductions, for example, 5 times or less or 99 times)
A time-shortening variation number command corresponding to the number of times is prepared as a performance command (A6014),
The performance command setting process is executed (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the presentation mode transition information area (A6016),
The normal reel processing transition setting process is executed (A6017), and the jackpot end process is terminated. In the normal reel processing transition setting process, in order to transition to the normal reel processing, the process number for the normal reel processing is set to "0", the process number is saved in the reel game processing number area, the condition device operation information area is cleared, and the time reduction judgment data area is cleared.

[Jackpot End Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be explained. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal indicating the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and then saves the signal indicating the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, off data for the jackpot 1 signal, off data for the jackpot 2 signal, off data for the jackpot 3 signal, and off data for the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Because jackpot end setting process 1 is a process for when there is no time reduction after the end of the jackpot state, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game status display number 2 area as display data for the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204), and saves a special game mode no time reduction flag in the special game mode flag area (A6
205). Then, the time reduction variation count area is cleared (A6206), and the collective display device 50
The number in the left-hit state is saved in the game status display number 1 area as the display data of the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D7) (A6207), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is completed.

[Jackpot End Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be explained. Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal indicating the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6401) and then saves the signal indicating the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data for the jackpot 1 signal, the off data for the jackpot 3 signal, and the off data for the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal indicating the start of the time-saving mode is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal indicating the start of the time-saving mode is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). Since the jackpot end setting process 2 is a process for entering the time-saving mode (normal power support mode) after the jackpot state ends, the on data for the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal indicating the start of the time-saving mode (in this embodiment, the jackpot 2 signal is output during the jackpot state, so the on state of the jackpot 2 signal continues).

Next, the game control device 100 turns on the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D
17) is saved in the game status display number 2 area as the display data for the time-saving number (A640
5), a high probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (A6406), and a special game time reduction flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (A6407).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special chart 2 variable display game has become a jackpot after the time reduction ends, that is, whether or not the special chart 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation has become a jackpot (
A6408). When the special chart 1 variable display game becomes a jackpot or when the special chart 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot during the time-saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count) corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number, symbol A-F described later) is saved in the time-saving variable count area (A6409), and the processing from step A6411 onwards is executed. Here, the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count) becomes the initial value of the time-saving variable count 2 (first predetermined count described later). In addition, in step A6409, the time-saving variable count 2
In addition to the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count (time reduction count), the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 1 (
For example, the initial value of the time reduction variation count 1 may be the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2 plus the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special chart 1 reservation count (first start memory count).

When the special chart 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot after the time reduction ends, that is, when the special chart 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation becomes a jackpot (the result of A6408 is "
Y"), and save the time reduction variation count initial value (time reduction count, here 99) in the time reduction variation count area (A6410). Here too, the time reduction variation count initial value (time reduction count) becomes the initial value of time reduction variation count 2 (first predetermined count, described later). Note that in step A6410,
In addition to the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count (time reduction count) for the time reduction fluctuation count 2, the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 1 (second predetermined count described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 1 is set to the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 2 by setting the maximum value of the special chart 1 reservation count (first start memory count) (
For example, the sum of 4) may be used.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number,
In response to step A6411, the type of the support state (support state, normal power release pattern), which is the state (state) of the normal power support, is saved in the support state area (A6411).
This process is optional and is executed when the support status regarding the mode (content) of normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 turns on the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D
7) as display data, save the number in the right-hand hit state in the game state display number 1 area (A6
412), prepare a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A6413), execute the presentation command setting process (A6414), and end the jackpot end setting process 2.

[General game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. The normal game process monitors the input of the gate switch 34a, controls the overall process related to the normal game change display game,
Set the display of general maps, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process for monitoring input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The normal power winning switch monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(A7603) The minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to 0. The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the normal game processing timer has reached 0 (A7604).

If the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets in a register a normal game sequence branch table to be referenced in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal game processing number (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game process number based on the set normal game sequence branch table (A7606), and then makes a subroutine call based on the normal game process number to execute the game branch process according to the normal game process number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100
The start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and normal map normal processing is executed (A7608), which sets the start of the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the performance, and sets the information necessary for normal map fluctuation processing. Details of the normal map normal processing will be described later.

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal map change processing (A7609) that sets the information necessary to perform the normal map display processing. For example, in the normal map change processing, in order to transition to the normal map display processing, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

Also, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal map display process (A7610) to set the normal power release time and set the information necessary to perform normal map win processing if the result of the normal map variable display game is a win. For example, in the normal map display process, if the result of the normal map variable display game is a win, the game processing number is set to "3" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map win processing, while if the result is a loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map normal processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal winning processing (A7611), which continues the normal winning processing or sets information necessary for normal remaining ball processing. For example, in the normal winning processing, after setting the normal variable winning device 37 to open a predetermined number of times, the game processing number is set to "4" and saved in the normal game processing number area in order to transition to normal remaining ball processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal remaining ball process (A7612) that sets the information necessary to perform the normal winning end process. For example, in the normal remaining ball process, in order to transition to the normal winning end process, the game processing number is set to "5" and saved in the normal game processing number area, and the normal ending time is saved in the normal game processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal winning end process (A7613) that sets information necessary for normal winning processing (A7608). For example, in the normal winning end process, in order to transition to normal winning processing, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal winning game processing number area.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a normal symbol fluctuation control table (A7614) for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 53. Thereafter, it executes a symbol fluctuation control process (A7615) for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) by the normal symbol display device 53, and ends the normal symbol game process.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
If the result of step A7614 is "N", that is, if the time has not expired, the process from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). And, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
If the game state is right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "Y"), it is determined whether the game state is right-hitting or not (A7702). The game state for right-hitting is the jackpot state or the time-saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-hit instruction notification command (left-hit instruction command) is prepared as a presentation command (A7703), and the presentation command setting process is executed (A7704). Upon receiving the left-hit instruction notification command, the presentation control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit left on the display device 41, etc., by displaying a left-hit instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal maps and determines whether the reserved normal map number is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). If the reserved normal map number is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal map variation display game is changing (running) or in a normal map winning state (A7706). If the normal map variation display game is not changing or in a normal map winning state (the result of A7706 is "N")
, the number of reserved normal maps is updated by +1 (A7707). In this way, the number of reserved normal maps is updated by +1 only when the normal map fluctuation display game is not changing or when the normal map is not in a winning state, and the reserved normal map is consumed as soon as it is updated by +1, so the reserved normal map is not actually accumulated and becomes 1 only momentarily just before the normal map fluctuation display game starts (the number of reserved normal maps is essentially 0).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal symbols (A7708). Then, it extracts the winning random number and saves it in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), extracts the winning symbol random number and saves it in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7710), and ends the gate switch monitoring process.

On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), when it is determined that the number of reserved normal figures is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is "N"), or when the normal figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating or when the normal figure is winning (A7
If the result of step 706 is "Y", the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Regular power entry switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the normal game process will be explained. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power winning switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a normal winning is occurring, that is, whether or not the normal winning display game is in a winning state and the normal winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations (A7801). Then, if a normal winning is occurring (the result of A7801 is "Y"),
It is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the normal power counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the count number of the updated normal power counter is equal to the upper limit value (for example,
If the count reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM and saved in the normal hit control pointer area in the RWM (A7805).

Finally, the normal game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if a normal power winning occurs that is equal to or greater than the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal winning processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed, so that the normal winning state is terminated midway.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal winning is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"), if it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N"), or if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (A780
4 is "N"), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Normal processing]
Next, we will explain the details of the normal game processing (A7608) in the normal game processing.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of reserved normal games is 0 (A7901).
If the number of reserved regular figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the winning random number is loaded from the RWM's random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and stored in the RWM's random number storage area (
A winning symbol random number is loaded from the normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1), and after loading, the normal symbol winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the normal symbol winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7902). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the probability of a winning result in the normal symbol variable display game is higher than normal, that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state) (A7903). In this embodiment, the range of the winning random number is 0 to 250, and the normal symbol winning probability during high probability is 251/251, and the normal symbol winning probability during low probability is 0/251.
However, this is not limited to this, and the normal winning probability among low probabilities may be a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability state of the normal game (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability state of the normal game (A7904
), if the probability of a normal drawing is high (the result of A7903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0), which is the lower limit judgment value during the high probability of a normal drawing, is set (A7905), and processing proceeds to step A7906.

The game control device 100 determines whether the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to both the normal high probability and the normal low probability. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
If the result is a loss, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y"), that is, if it is a loss, the loss information is saved in the win flag area (A7908).
Furthermore, the losing stop symbol number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing symbol information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a win, the win information is saved in the win flag area (A7911), the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number is set (A7912), the winning stop pattern information corresponding to the winning stop pattern number is saved in the normal stop pattern information area (A7913), and processing proceeds to step A7914. Note that here, there is one type of winning stop pattern (normal winning pattern), but in the modified example described below, there may be several types.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal stop symbol area (A791
4), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A7915), the random number storage area per normal symbol is shifted (A7916), and the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7917
), and update the number of reserved general maps by -1 (A7918).

In other words, as the regular map change display game for the oldest regular map reserved number 1 is executed, the ranks of regular map reserved numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after regular map reserved number 1 are moved up by one.
This process clears the value for the number of reserved regular maps of 1 in the random number storage area per regular map to 0, and decrements the number of reserved regular maps by 1 to 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads information on the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of normal power support, is variable, as in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal map fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal map game processing timer area (A7920). Note that, when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern), which is the state (state) of the normal power support, as in the modified example described below, is variable, a variable normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set and saved in the normal map game processing timer area. Then, the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed (A7921), and the normal map normal processing is terminated. Note that the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the number of reserved normal figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), and set "0" as the processing number to transition to normal processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A7923). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal game fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the normal game processing is terminated.

[Normal map change processing transition setting processing]
47 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process. The normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed in step A7921 in the normal map normal processing.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as the processing number for transitioning to normal game fluctuation processing.
(A8101), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8102
).

After that, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol 1
The "in-fluctuating signal is on" is saved in the test signal output data area (A8103), and the "in-fluctuating flag" indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is in fluctuation is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (
A8104). Then, the blinking control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer for the blinking period of the normal map display, is saved in the normal map blinking control timer area (A8105), and the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the normal map variable pattern number area (A8106). After that, the normal map variable processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map fluctuations]
Next, the details of the normal map fluctuation process (A7609) in the normal map game process will be explained. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map fluctuation process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to the normal map display processing (A8301), and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (
A8302). Then, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (normal map stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variable display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area (A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal symbol fluctuation (turning off the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, it saves a stop flag indicating that the normal symbol fluctuation display game is stopped in the normal symbol fluctuation control flag area (A8
305), and terminates the normal map change processing.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process during normal map display (A7610) in the normal map game process will be explained. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A84
02) Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag has hit information set (A8403).

When the winning information is set in the winning flag, the game control device 100
If the result is "Y", the winning process setting table is set (A8404), the winning start pointer value (0 in this case) corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the normal win control pointer area (A8405). Also, the winning end pointer value corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the normal win end pointer area (A8406). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8407). By the above processing, the normal variable winning device 3 during the time-saving state
The opening mode of 7 is set, and for example, two openings are possible.
There is one type of normal winning pattern, and the winning start pointer value, winning end pointer value, and normal power release time are fixed. However, as in the modified example described below, when the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) for normal power support is variable, the winning start pointer value corresponding to the support state,
The winning end pointer value and normal power release time may be set and saved in the normal game processing timer area.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "3" to transition to the normal winning processing.
" is set (A8408), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A840
9). After that, the signal regarding the winning of the normal symbol variation display game (the signal during the normal symbol 1 win is turned on)
Then, a signal related to the start of normal power operation (normal electric accessory 1 operation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Furthermore, on data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area to output a signal to drive (turn on) the normal power solenoid (A8411).
.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), and clears the information in the normal power fraudulent winning number area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period (A8413). Finally, a flag that specifies the normal variable winning device 37 outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

If the winning information is not set in the winning flag (A840
If the result of 3 is "N", set "0" as the processing number to move to normal processing (A
8415), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8416).
The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing during normal map display is terminated.

[Normal processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal winning process (A7611) in the normal game process will be explained. Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal winning process.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the normal winning control pointer (A860
1) Determine whether the value of the loaded normal map hit control pointer has reached the normal map hit control pointer upper limit value (hit end pointer value) (A8602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal winning has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal winning (the winning end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the control pointer during normal winning by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, it executes normal power operation transition setting processing (A8604) and ends the normal winning processing. The details of the normal power operation transition setting processing will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during normal winning reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal winning (the winning end pointer value), the game control device 100 (the result of A8602 is "Y")
Without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal map hit processing control pointer area in step A8603, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal map hit processing is terminated.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) during the normal winning process will be explained. Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal power operation transition setting process. The normal power operation transition setting process is a process that controls the drive of the normal power solenoid 37c to open and close the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched depending on the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (normal winning control pointer) (A8701).
The value before updating is used. An example of the control pointer is shown in FIG. 73 described later. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37, and the wait time after the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer (normal power interval time, for example, 60,000 msec) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8702). Note that when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) for normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the wait time (normal power interval time) may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (A8703), and terminates the normal power operation transition setting process.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8704 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and saves the normal power opening time, which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). The normal power opening time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (e.g., 3000 msec). Furthermore, to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, on data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 10
0 moves to step A8706, ends the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37, and sets "4" as the processing number to execute the normal remaining ball processing (A7612) (A8706
), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8707).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, to set the normal power solenoid 37c to OFF, it saves OFF data in the normal power solenoid output data area (A8709).
), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated. Note that, when the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) for normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the normal power remaining ball processing time may be set in accordance with the support state.

[Handling of remaining normal electric bulbs]
Next, the details of the remaining normal ball processing (A7612) in the normal game processing will be explained. Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the remaining normal ball processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "5" for the normal winning end processing (A8
901), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A8902). Then, the normal game ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8903). Note that, when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) for normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the normal game ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turning off the normal electric device 1 operation signal) in the test signal output data area (A8904).
Next, the normal count number area that counts the number of wins to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (A
Then, the control pointer area for normal hit is cleared (A8905), and the normal hit end pointer area is cleared (A8906).Then, the normal hit end pointer area is cleared (A8907), and the normal hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Normal map end processing]
Next, the details of the normal winning end process (A7613) in the normal winning game process will be explained. Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal winning end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "0" for the normal processing (A910
1), and then save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A9102). After that, save the signal regarding the end of the normal variable game win (the signal during normal pattern 1 win is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (fraudulent monitoring period flag) that specifies the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104),
After that, the normal hit end processing is completed.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. Figures 54A and 54B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the external information editing process. Figure 54A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and Figure 54B shows the second half of the external information editing process. The external information editing process includes payout command sending process (A1307), winning slot switch/
Status monitoring process (A1308), magnet irregularity monitoring process (A1315), panel radio wave irregularity monitoring process (
Based on the monitoring results, the information collection terminal, the amusement facility internal management device, and other external devices, as well as the test firing device, are created and set in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame open error is occurring (
A9301). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9301 is "N"),
Determine whether a main frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9302).
If a main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9302 is "N"), the off data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9303), and the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9304).

If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9301 is "Y"), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9302 is "Y"), the game control device 100
The on data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9305), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9306).

After steps A9304 and A9306, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9307), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the timer has timed out) (A9308). The initial value of the security signal control timer can be set in RAM by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or the like.
When the data stored in the RAM is initialized, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set (A1046 of the main processing). The security signal control timer then starts counting from the time the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9308 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9309), and then the process proceeds to step A9310. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

If the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnetic fraud is occurring (A9310). Note that if there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnetic fraud is occurring. If there is no magnetic fraud occurring (the result of A9310 is "N"), it further determines whether or not board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9311). Note that if there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 is not experiencing any illegal radio wave activity (the result of A9311 is "N").
Furthermore, it is determined whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9312). When a frame radio wave fraud signal is detected, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. When frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9312 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not large prize slot fraud is occurring (A9313). Note that when the prize slot switch/status monitoring process has saved an illegal prize entry flag for the large prize slot in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that large prize slot fraud is occurring. When large prize slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9313 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not normal power fraud is occurring (A9314). Note that when the prize slot switch/status monitoring process has saved an illegal prize entry flag for the second start prize slot of the normal variable prize entry device 37 in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that normal power fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A9314 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether vibration fraud is occurring (A9315). Note that if there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9315 is "N"), it determines whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A93
16) When the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) sets the abnormal discharge flag, it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9316 is "N"
"), it is determined whether a V passage error is occurring (A9317). If a detection signal from the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passage error is occurring. If a V passage error is not occurring (the result of A9317 is "N"), it is determined whether a remaining ball error, which is an error related to the remaining ball, is occurring (A9318). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9318 is "N"), it is determined whether the safety device is operating based on the safety device operating flag (A9319). If the safety device is not operating (the result of A9319 is "N"), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9320).

If a switch abnormality error such as a disconnection of a switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9320 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the off data of the game machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9321).
If the result of A9320 is "Y", the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9323).

On the other hand, if a magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9310 is "Y
"), if a board radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9311 is "Y"), if a frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9312 is "Y"), if a large prize slot irregularity is occurring (A93
If the result of A9313 is "Y", if a normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A9314 is "Y"), if a vibration fraud is occurring (the result of A9315 is "Y"), if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (the result of A9316 is "Y"), if a V-pass error is occurring (the result of A9317 is "Y"), if a remaining ball error is occurring (the result of A9318 is "Y"), or if the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A9322), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (A9323). Depending on the setting of the security signal ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. In this embodiment, the safety device is activated when the safety device activation flag = 1.

In this way, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322).
This allows the amusement facility manager or staff to recognize that the safety device is activated. In addition to a configuration in which the safety device continuously outputs a security signal to an external device while it is activated, a configuration in which the security signal is output to an external device for only one pulse (e.g., 256 ms) when the safety device is activated is also possible. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the security signal, external information may be provided exclusively for the safety device, and the dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is activated.

Also, if the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal to the test firing device. Note that it is also possible to configure the system not to output a test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the safety device being activated. Also, a test signal other than the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the test firing device.

After steps A9321 and A9323, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process to edit the winning signal of the start port (A9324), then executes a main prize ball signal editing process to set information about the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9325), and executes a pattern determination count signal editing process to output to an external device a pattern determination count signal generated when the stopped pattern of the special pattern variable display game is determined (A9326).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A93
27), it is determined whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (A9328). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9328 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9328 is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9329), and the external information editing process is terminated.

In this way, when the ceiling time reduction due to the ceiling number of times reached and the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern (support hit) start, the on data of the big hit 3 signal is sent to the game center internal management device (hall computer).
or the like, via the external information terminal 71. Here, the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is output for the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time-shortening signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process described above. Conventionally, the jackpot 1 to 4 signals were output during the period of a jackpot, etc., but the output of the jackpot 3 signal is an output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) that is much shorter than the period of a jackpot, etc.
For this reason, an external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that a time reduction has occurred due to a ceiling time reduction caused by reaching the ceiling number of times or a sudden time reduction caused by a time reduction pattern, without confusing it with a jackpot or a time reduction following a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the jackpot 2 signal is output to an external device as external information for a long period of time during the jackpot state and in the time-saving state following the jackpot state (the time-saving state due to the jackpot, the first specific game state, the first time-saving state). The jackpot 3 signal of the short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) is output to an external device as external information indicating the occurrence of a time-saving state due to a ceiling time-saving state or a sudden time-saving state (the second specific game state, the second time-saving state) in distinction from external information indicating a time-saving state due to a jackpot (the long-term jackpot 2 signal), and is not confused by the external device.

In addition, as another configuration, only in the case of the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction, the jackpot 3 signal may be output for a fixed time at the start of the time reduction. Also, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of the sudden time reduction, in one of the time reductions, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output for a fixed time at the start of the time reduction.
For example, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output for the ceiling time reduction, and only the jackpot 3 signal may be output for the sudden time reduction (or vice versa). Also, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of the sudden time reduction, the jackpot 3 signal (or the jackpot 4 signal) may be output for the ceiling time reduction at the start of the time reduction,
A jackpot 4 signal (or a jackpot 3 signal) may be output for sudden time reduction. In this way, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of sudden time reduction so that the external device can recognize them.

[External information or test signal transmission]
FIG. 55 is a time chart showing the transmission of external information or test signals.

Figure 55 (A) shows a case where the last special chart change display game in the previous time-saving state (a special chart change display game in which the number of time-saving times is reached) reaches the ceiling number of times or the time-saving pattern stops, and the next special chart change display game enters a later time-saving state (a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing when the previous time-saving state ends is the timing when the time-saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 33) is executed in the special chart change process, that is, the timing when the change display of the previous special chart change display game stops. Also, the timing when the next time-saving state (ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving) starts is the timing when the time-saving change count (A5
123, A5126) is set, that is, the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart change display game ends (approximately the same as the timing when the next special chart change display game starts, if any).

Also, when the variable display of the previous special symbol variable display game stops, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is set in the external information output data area by the time-saving end setting process within the special symbol variable processing and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and the off data of the variable time shortening state signals (special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal) as signals regarding the end of the time-saving function are set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test device (A4902). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal turn off after the variable display of the previous special symbol variable display game stops (after the previous time-saving function ends).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special symbol variation display game ends, the support operation setting process sets the on data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal regarding the start of time reduction in the external information output data area and outputs it to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A5301), and also outputs a variation time shortening status signal (special symbol 1 variation time shortening status signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening status signal, normal symbol 1 variation time shortening status signal) as a signal regarding the start of time reduction.
The ON data of the above is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test device (A5303). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal are turned ON after the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends.

In this way, when the special symbol variation display game (previous special symbol variation display game) where the time reduction ends reaches the ceiling number of times or stops on the time-saving symbol, it becomes clear that the time reduction has ended. Also, by turning off the output of external information (jackpot 2 signal) and test signals (variation time reduction status signal, etc.) for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stopped symbol), when the time reduction resumes, the on state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 55 (B), in conventional gaming machines, when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends, the time reduction ends by the time reduction end setting process within the special chart display processing. In the time reduction end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal regarding the end of the time reduction is set in the external information output data area and output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the off data of the variable time reduction state signal as a signal regarding the end of the time reduction is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test device.

For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal are turned off after the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game is completed, but at this timing, the jackpot 2 signal and the variable time shortening state signal are immediately turned on by the support operation setting process, so they are not actually turned off (
(The ON state is substantially continued.) Therefore, unlike this embodiment, in conventional gaming machines, it is unclear whether the time reduction has ended, and when the time reduction is resumed, the ON state of the external information and the test signal output is unclear.

[Safety device related processing]
Next, the safety device related processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described in detail. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device related processing. The safety device related processing is an in-area processing and is executed as part of the above-mentioned in-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the in-area work area (A940
1) If the safety device activation flag is 1, it can be determined that the safety device is activated. If the safety device is activated (the result of A9401 is "Y"), the safety device-related processing ends.

The game control device 100 is when the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9401 is "N")
, load safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area (
A9402), and determine whether the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information area (A94
03). If the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information field (the result of A9403 is "Y
"), and since there is no change in the safety device activation information, the processing proceeds to step A9409 without setting (sending) a performance command.

If the safety device operation information is not the value in the old operation information area (A94
If the result of step 03 is "N", a safety device activation related command table is set in which the safety device activation information and the command are associated so that a performance command can be set (transmitted) since there is a change in the safety device activation information (A9404), and the command corresponding to the safety device activation information (ACTION section) is sent.
(A9405). Then, it is determined whether there is no command definition (A94
06). In the safety device activation-related command table, a command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is not defined (there is no command), so when the safety device activation information is the safety device non-activation information (value 0), it can be determined that there is no command definition. If there is no command definition (the result of A9406 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A9409 without setting (sending) a performance command.

If a command definition exists (the result of A9406 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a safety device activation related command (MODE section) as a presentation command (A9407).
If the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3), it can be determined that a command definition exists. Then, a performance command setting process is executed to set (transmit) a performance command (A9408). Note that the performance command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. Note that a command corresponding to safety device non-activation information (value 0) may be defined in the safety device activation-related command table, thereby omitting the determination of step A9406 and allowing a safety device activation-related command to be set (transmitted) even for safety device non-activation information (value 0).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) (A9409). If the safety device operation information is not safety device operation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "N"), the safety device-related processing ends.
If the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "Y
"), and saves "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation as the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area (A9410), and then terminates the safety device-related processing. Note that if the safety device in operation information (value 3) was saved in step A9804 (described below) in the previous timer interrupt processing, the result of step A9409 in the next timer interrupt processing will be "Y".

As described above, when the safety device operation information changes to safety device operation notice information (value 1), safety device operation warning information (value 2), or safety device operation information (value 3), the safety device operation related command includes the safety device operation information in part (ACTION part), and the performance control device 3
00. When the ACTION section is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3), the safety device activation-related command becomes an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, or an activation command corresponding to the activation state, respectively.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning display (for example, the text "Playing will end soon") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. Therefore, the player is notified in advance that there is a possibility that play will be stopped, and the player is urged to end play, preventing the player from suffering unintentional disadvantages.
It can also shock those who are cheating and encourage them to stop.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning message (e.g., the text "Play will end after the win ends") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that play will be stopped after a small win or a big win, warning the player that they will suffer a disadvantage, such as the end of a winning streak. A winning streak refers to, for example, a continuation of a big win state and a specific game state without going through normal mode (or normal game state). The activation warning state can also surprise cheaters and encourage them to stop cheating.

By receiving the operation command, the performance control device 300 can display an operation display 513 (for example, the words "playing stopped") on the display device 41 while the safety device is in an operation state (operational state). This can prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10, and can also stop any cheating that may be occurring.

In addition, if the safety device operation information does not change and remains at 0, 1, 2, or 3 (0 → 0, 1 → 1
, 2 → 2, 3 → 3 (no change), the safety device operation related command is
After the safety device counter value reaches 190000 to 194999, the
Even when the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 0 (when the value becomes less than 000) (when the value changes from 1 to 0), the safety device activation related command is not sent without a command definition. Note that the change in safety device activation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (changes from 2 to 1, 3 to 2) is excluded by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described below.

When the safety device operation information changes from 0 to 1 (when the information changes from 0 to 1), an operation notice command among the safety device operation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device operation information changes from 1 to 2 (when the information changes from 1 to 2), an operation warning command among the safety device operation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device operation information changes from 2 to 3 (when the information changes from 2 to 3), an operation command among the safety device operation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. Note that when the safety device operation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step A9403 becomes "Y" only once immediately afterwards, and steps A9404 to A9410 are executed.
The safety device is in operation (the result of A9401 is "Y"), and the timer interrupt process thereafter is executed in step A940.
4-No safety device activation related commands are sent without going through A9410.

In addition, the direct change of safety device operation information from 1 to 3 (the change from 1 to 3 itself)
Although the above is removed by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described later, the safety device activation information may change instantaneously from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not cause an activation warning state as described later). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the safety device counter value reaching 195,000 when there is neither a big win nor a small win, and the transition from the activation notice state to the activated state. Then, in response to the transition from the activation notice state to the activated state of the safety device, an activation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device activation related command (A94
05, A9407).

[Out-of-area integration processing]
Next, the details of the outside area integration process (A1322) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the outside area integration process. The outside area integration process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside area program.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A9501), and sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the value of the external stack area in the stack pointer (
A9502). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (A9503). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. Then, a performance display device control process is executed (A9504), which performs display control of the performance display device 152. Next, a ball difference confirmation process (A9505) is executed, which updates the number of balls difference (safety device counter value) and sets safety device activation information corresponding to the number of balls difference (safety device counter value). Next, a safety device activation monitoring process is executed (A9506), which monitors the activation of the safety device.

The game control device 100 then restores the saved register (A9507), loads it from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A9508), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

[Performance display device control processing]
Next, the performance display device control process (A9504) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described in detail. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance display device control process. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the out-of-area program described above.

The game control device 100 first performs a validity check to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including setting the initial value).
The process at step A9601 is the same as the process at step A1204 in FIG.

Furthermore, since a validity determination is performed each time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, and abnormal performance display (display of abnormal base values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), areas other than the stack pointer storage area are initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area and the in-area stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the initial display timer update process (A9602).
In the initial display timer update process, the timer is updated to perform full blinking control (initial display control) in which all LEDs of the display units of each digit of the performance display device 152 blink for approximately 5 seconds when the performance display starts (after power is turned on).

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port that is the target of the calculation of the base value to the performance display work area (A9603). The switch rising edge information is acquired in the input process and stored in the in-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (A1303). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the input ports that are the target of the base value calculation (input ports to be monitored) are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126. The copied switch rising edge information is then used in the performance display editing process (FIG. 8).
Used in.

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls is not directly changed, and the rising edge information (bits) of the switches that are not subject to the calculation of the base value are copied (masked) in a cleared state. For example, the gate switch 34a and the specific area switch 72
The information on the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the like is cleared before copying. This allows the processing related to these switches (at least the clearing processing of A1211) to be omitted in the performance display editing process.

In addition, the number of balls that are normally out is, for example, the number of balls that are out when the winning hole switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a,
If the number of regular prize balls is updated by input (game ball detection) from the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, or the remaining ball outlet switch 73, the number of regular prize balls will be updated redundantly, overlapping with the input (game ball detection) from the out ball detection switch 74, which detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32, and the base value will be calculated to be an incorrect value. Also, if the number of regular prize balls is updated by input (game ball detection) from the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, or the remaining ball outlet switch 73, which overlaps with the winning port switch and through which game balls can pass, the number of regular prize balls will be updated redundantly, overlapping with the winning port switch, and the base value will be calculated to be an incorrect value.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a performance display device display process (A9604). In the performance display device display process, the performance display device 15 is displayed in accordance with the type of display period and various other conditions.
2. For example, the real-time value display period B is set as the display period.
L, one-to-one display period B1, two-to-three display period B2, and three-to-three display period B3 may be provided, and in each display period, segment output data corresponding to the real-time value during measurement of the base value, the base value measured in the one-to-one aggregation period, the two-to-three aggregation period, and the three-to-three aggregation period may be set.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period and determines whether it is time to switch the display period (A9605). If it is time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "Y"), it executes the display period switching setting (A9606) and ends the performance display device control processing. If it is not time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the display period switching setting and ends the performance display device control processing.

In the display period switching setting, the display period information is switched as follows: BL → B1 → B2 → B3 → BL → .... Also, an initial value of the timer for switching the period (for example, an initial value corresponding to a predetermined period of 5 seconds) is set.

[Difference ball confirmation process]
Next, the details of the difference ball confirmation process (A9505) in the outside area integration process (Fig. 57) will be explained. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the difference ball confirmation process. The difference ball confirmation process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the outside area program described above. In the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value (difference ball number + 100,000) indicating the difference ball number is updated, and the safety device operation information indicating the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the in-area work area (A970
1). When the safety device is in operation (the result of A9701 is "Y"), the difference ball confirmation process is immediately terminated, and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated. In this embodiment, the outside area integration process program (program related to the safety device) included in the outside area program is configured not to be executed while the game is stopped, and when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, the outside area integration process including the difference ball confirmation process is not executed (A13
If the result of step A9701 is "Y", the processing of step A9701 may be omitted.
If the process of 701 is not performed, the safety device operation flag area is read and written by programs within the area, but is an area that is not read (an area that is not accessed) by programs outside the area.

The game control device 100 is when the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9701 is "N")
, the old operation information of the old operation information area included in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area ≧
If the old operation information is 2 or more (A9702), it is determined whether the old operation information is 2 or more (A97
If the result of step 02 is "Y", the difference ball confirmation process is terminated and the safety device counter value and safety device operation information are not updated.

If the old operation information is less than 2 (the result of A9702 is "N"), the game control device 100
), it is determined whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information of the switch control area (internal work area) for the fourth input port 126 (A9703). If there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "
If the safety counter value is not 0 (the result of A9704 is "N"), the safety counter value, which is the value in the safety counter area, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A9705). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of discharged balls by 1, the difference in the number of balls (=
The number of safe balls - number of ejected balls) and the safety device counter value (= difference in number of balls + 100,000) are updated by decreasing by 1. Next, the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the acquired game ball number area included in the work area within the area (A9706).

The game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "N") or whether the safety device counter value is 0 (the result of A9704 is "Y").
"), the safety device counter value is maintained without being updated by -1, and the number of acquired game balls is loaded (A9706).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety device counter value of the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (A9707), and adds the number of acquired game balls to the safety device counter value (A9708). The number of acquired game balls is the number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (total), i.e.,
Since the number of safe balls increases within one interruption, in step A9708, the difference in the number of balls (=
The number of safe balls - number of ejected balls) and therefore the safety device counter value (= difference in number of balls + 100,000) will be increased by the number of acquired game balls and updated.

Next, the game control device 100 checks whether the safety device counter value is equal to the counter reference value (195000
) or more (whether the safety device counter is ≧195000 or not) (A9
709). If the safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the counter reference value (195000),
The result of A9709 is "Y"), and the upper limit value (195000) is set to the safety device counter value so that the safety device counter value returns to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195000) (A971
0), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after the addition (A9711). Note that the safety device counter value exceeds the upper limit value in step A9708 and becomes 195000 + α
Here, α is less than the maximum number of winning balls (acquired within one interrupt), and is smaller than the total number of winning balls when all winning slot switches are pressed simultaneously, for example.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195000) (A9
Since the result of step A9709 is "N", there is no need to limit it to the upper limit value, so the value after the addition process in step A9708 is saved as is in the safety device counter area (A9711). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the value after the addition (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

Furthermore, by limiting the safety device counter value to an upper limit of 19,500, the range of the safety device counter area (number of bytes or number of bits) becomes clear, which is convenient for developing game control programs.

Next, the game control device 100 sets an operation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (A9712).
Corresponding to the safety device counter values of 00 to 194,999 and the safety device counter value of 195,000, the operation information number is set to "0" indicating the safety device is not in operation (normal state), "1" indicating the operation notice state, or "2" indicating the operation warning state. Note that the operation information number is not set to "3" indicating the operation state in which the safety device is in operation. Here, as described above, when the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is set to the difference in the number of balls based on the minimum value (the difference in the number of balls in a predetermined period from the time of the minimum value to the present), in step A9709, it is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the minimum safety device counter value up to the present from the current safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the difference in the number of balls reference value of 95,000. If it is equal to or greater than the difference in the number of balls reference value of 95,000, step A9709 is performed.
In step A9710, the difference in the number of balls may be set to 95,000. Then, in step A9712, the difference in the number of balls may be set to 0 to 89,999, 90,000 to 94,999, 9500, etc., based on the minimum value.
The operation information number corresponds to the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device.
The activation information number may be set to "0" indicating an activation notice state, "1" indicating an activation warning state, or "2" indicating an activation warning state. The minimum safety device counter value described above may be stored in a minimum value area in the out-of-area work area, and whenever the current safety device counter value becomes smaller than the stored minimum safety device counter value, the minimum safety device counter value may be updated to the current safety device counter value. When the activation information number becomes "2," as described below, gameplay is halted immediately or after the end of a big win or small win. Thus, if the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is based on the minimum value, a gameplay halt can occur if the current difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the ball difference reference value of 95,000. Therefore, the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is equivalent to the maximum increase in the number of balls during one business day (so-called MY).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old operation information area (A9713).
Then, the old operation information is 2 and the operation information number is 1 (old operation information = 2 and operation information number = 1
) (A9714). If the old operation information = 2 and the operation information number = 1 (the result of A9714 is "Y"), the safety device operation information "2" (loaded value) is maintained without saving the operation information number in the safety device operation information area, and the difference ball confirmation process is terminated. This prevents the safety device operation information from changing from "2" to "1" (2 →
1 change). Then, the next timer interrupt and subsequent difference ball confirmation processes will be performed with the old operation information set to 2.
Therefore (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the process ends immediately, the safety device counter value and safety device activation information are not updated, and the safety device activation information is maintained at "2".

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (the result of A9714 is "N": old operation information ≠ 2 or operation information number ≠ 1), the game control device 100 saves the operation information number in the safety device operation information area and updates the safety device operation information area (A9
715). After that, the difference ball confirmation process is terminated. Note that even if "2" indicating an operation warning state is saved in the safety device operation information area, if it is neither a big win nor a small win, "3" indicating the operation state of the safety device is instantly saved in the safety device operation information area in the subsequent safety device operation monitoring process, and the operation warning state does not occur.

In this way, in the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value of 0 to 189999, 1
The safety device operation information corresponds to the safety device counter values of 90000 to 194999 and the safety device counter value of 195000, respectively, and is "
The information is set to "0" (safety device non-operation information), "1" (safety device operation advance notice information) indicating an operation advance notice state, or "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state.

The old information on safety device operation (old information on A9713) has been updated to the new information (A971
5) The change patterns (including maintenance patterns) to
As mentioned above, the change from 2 to 1 is prevented (A971
4).

The game control device 100 transmits a difference ball command indicating the updated safety device counter value (A9711) or a difference ball command indicating the updated number of difference balls (=safety device counter value - 100,000) to the performance control device 300 (sub-board), and the performance control device 300 transmits the difference ball command indicating the updated number of difference balls (=safety device counter value - 100,000) to the display device 4.
The safety device counter value or the number of difference balls may be displayed in 1, etc. In that case, in the difference ball confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device operation warning information) (A9702)
, the safety device counter value is updated, and steps A9709 and A971
The processing of 0 is omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit value of 19,500.
However, in response to a safety device counter value of 195,000 or more, the safety device operation information is set to "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state.

The difference ball confirmation process has been described above. Step A9706 of the difference ball confirmation process is a first process that can count the number of paid-out game media or the number of game media that have been decided to be paid out (the amount of game value that has been given or the amount of game value that has been decided to be given).
Steps A9703-A9705 of the difference ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of uses (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls discharged), which is the number of gaming media used. Step A9708 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculation value (e.g., a safety device counter value or the number of difference balls) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses.

[Safety device operation monitoring process]
Next, the safety device operation monitoring process (A9506) in the outside-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described in detail. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device operation monitoring process. The safety device operation monitoring process is an outside-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device activation information is 2 or more (safety device activation information ≧2) (A9801).
01 is "Y"), that is, safety device activation warning information (value 2) or safety device activation information (
When the value 3) is set, it is determined whether or not a big win or a small win is occurring (A98
02). Here, whether or not a big win or a small win is occurring can be determined based on, for example, the game processing number (special symbol game processing number, accessory game processing number). The game processing number is stored in the game processing number area (special symbol game processing number area, accessory game processing number area) of the in-area work area.

For example, if the game processing number of the jackpot fanfare matches the game processing number of the jackpot ending, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring. In this embodiment, if the accessory game processing number is 1 to 5, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring. Also, for example, if the game processing number of the start of a small win (or small win fanfare (only if present)) matches the game processing number of the remaining ball processing of the small win (or the ending of a small win (only if present)), it can be determined that a small win is occurring. In this embodiment, if the special game processing number is 3 to 5, it can be determined that a small win is occurring. It can be determined that a small win is occurring from the time the small win pattern is derived, or it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring from the time the jackpot pattern is derived. In cases where a jackpot occurs due to a V winning during a small win, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring from the time the V winning occurs.

The game control device 100 is not a small win or a big win (the result of A9802 is "
N"), the current safety device operation information is loaded from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saved in the old operation information area (A9803). Then, the safety device operation information area is updated by saving the safety device operation information (value 3) in the safety device operation information area (A9804).
9804).

On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is "0" or "1" which is less than 2 (the result of A9801 is "N"), or if the player is in the middle of a big win or small win (the result of A9802 is "Y")
, the safety device operation monitoring process is immediately terminated, and essentially nothing is done in the safety device operation monitoring process.

As described above, in an operation warning state (condition (1) is met and condition (2) is not met) in which the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set and the safety device is activated, when the big win or small win ends and it is no longer a small win or a big win (condition (2) is met), the safety device activation information is set to safety device activation information (value 3) (change of safety device activation information from 2 to 3) (A9804). As a result, the safety device activation flag is set to "1" (A9410 of the safety device related processing), and the safety device is activated (stopped state),
That is, it is possible to generate a game stop state (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited) in which the special game, the normal game, and round play cannot be performed as games. In this way, the safety device activation flag can be set based on the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (part of the outside work area). And, the safety device activation flag of "1" indicates that the safety device has been activated (is in operation) based on the establishment of the activation condition (predetermined condition).
Based on the safety device activation flag being "1", the results of steps A1309, A1603, A1612, A2201, etc. become "Y", and a game stop state occurs.

By activating the safety device and preventing play, it is possible to take appropriate measures against fraud when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, and by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it may also be possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, even if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (A9712, A9715 of the difference ball confirmation process), if it is not a big hit or a small hit (the result of A9802 is "N"), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from the safety device activation warning information (value 2) to the safety device activation information (value 3) (A9804).
That is, in this case, before the activation warning command is sent to the performance control device 300, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) in the safety device activation information area is overwritten and erased with the safety device activation information (value 3). Therefore, when there is neither a big win nor a small win, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000, an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device does not occur,
Immediately afterwards, the safety device is activated and game play is stopped (game not possible, game prohibited).
As mentioned above, this corresponds to the safety device operation information instantaneously changing from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and an operation warning state does not occur), but in response to the transition from an operation notice state in which the safety device is about to be operated to an operation state in which the safety device is in operation, an operation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device operation related command (A9405, A9
407).

In addition, if the safety device activation warning information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already been activated and game play has been stopped, the out-of-area integration process is not executed (the result of A1320 is "Y"), so the safety device activation information is maintained as the safety device activation information (value 3) and the game stop state continues.

In this embodiment, whether before or after a V win during a small win, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, after the big win due to the V win ends, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set in step A9804 and the game is stopped (a big win occurs). However, as another example, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set and the game is stopped immediately after the small win ends (a big win does not occur), and during the small win,
If safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after a win, safety device activation information (value 3) can be set after the jackpot due to V win ends, and the game can be stopped (a jackpot will occur).
As yet another example, whether the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before or after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) can be set immediately after the small win ends, causing the game to stop (a big win will not occur).

[Control of the production control device]
The following describes the control (processing) that the performance control device 300 executes using the performance control program.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
First, the main processing executed by the performance control device 300 will be described in detail.
is a flowchart showing the steps of the main processing (main program) executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the performance control device 300, the step symbols (numbers) are represented as "B****".

When the performance control device 300 starts executing the main process, it first prohibits interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B
0003), and then permit the interrupt (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the game control device 1
00, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the device is ready to be executed.

Next, the performance control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41, etc. (B0005), sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006), and saves the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Next, the performance control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Thereafter, the performance control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC read process may be configured to read time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process moves to step B0009. The RTC read process may be configured to be executed only once when the power is turned on to the performance control device 300 (i.e., when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC read process may be changed, and it may be executed, for example, between steps B0003 and B0004). The performance control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) that keeps time in a timer area in RAM,
When time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined interval or when the power is turned on, the RT
When time information is read from RTC 338, the time timer (timekeeping means) may be adjusted to match the time on RTC 338. Then, performance control device 300 may use the time timer to execute various processes. In this way, the number of times the time is read from RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on CPU 311 can be reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect button input processing to detect an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (a signal from the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) and change the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal (B0010).
Executes hall/player setting mode processing to accept operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) by the person in charge of the game parlor (game arcade) or the player (B0011
). The operation is performed by using the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 45
1b, the effect button 25, the volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine, etc. In the hall/player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effects according to the effect points described below.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process that adds or clears effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, effect points are added by executing effects or operations that are eligible for adding effect points. In addition, when a game ends or when a game is stopped (when a game is stopped), information including effect point information, for example, is displayed on the display device 41 as a two-dimensional code, a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 during hall/player setting mode processing or safety device processing (when an operating command is received).

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as effect random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process to edit and control the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and executes a power saving control process to control the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for customers (B0016).

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance display editing process (B0017) that updates various data according to the content to be displayed on a display device (display means) such as the display device 41, and sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problems as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec). Then, the performance control device 300 completes preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer and executes drawing command preparation end setting (B0018).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether it is frame switching timing (B
If it is not frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), an instruction to draw a screen on the display device 41 is issued (B0
020). Since the frame period in this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period), frame switching is performed. Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be increased even further.

In addition, the performance control device 300 executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

The performance control device 300 also executes a decoration control process (B0022) for controlling the decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs, etc. In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of the decoration devices such as LEDs is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process (B0023) for controlling performance devices (board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.) such as movable role objects (electric role objects) driven by motors and solenoids. In the movable body control process, for example, a role object operation performance that drives a motor is set.

Then, when the performance control device 300 finishes the process of B0023 described above, it returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Received command check process]
Next, the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 61) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of received commands to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it determines whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if no commands have been received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there are no commands to analyze, and the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if a command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 subtracts the number of received commands from the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area (B1103).
), the contents of the receive command buffer in RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received while copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the performance control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105).
The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read index 0 to 31, and the received commands are read out in index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that once copying to the command area for analysis is complete, the storage area in the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The performance control device 300 determines whether copying of the number of commands received that were loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"), repeats the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

When the presentation control device 300 receives a command sent from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are saved in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is incremented and updated. The received command buffer can store up to 32 commands, but analysis of the received commands is performed in a separate command area for analysis. Then, once the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always ensuring free space in the received command buffer without directly analyzing the commands, it is possible to prepare for the reception of a large number of commands.

Next, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y
"), loads the received command contents into the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing to analyze the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later in the next Figure 63. Also, updates the address of the command area for analysis (B1109). After that, it is determined whether analysis of the number of commands received that were loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110), and if analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. If analysis has been completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check processing is terminated.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 63, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (Fig. 62) will be described.
10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a received command analysis process executed by the command analyzer 100.

The performance control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE section and the lower byte into an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 is divided into a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACT section).
It is usually sent in succession starting from the MODE section, which indicates the type of command.
It is composed of an ODE section and an ACTION section in that order.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether the MODE part indicating the type of command is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.) is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203),
If the result of B1204 is "Y", it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the type of command is executed in B1205 and subsequent processes.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variation command (B1205). The variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, for example, a variation command. Then, if the MODE section indicates a variation command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variation command processing is executed (B1206).
), the received command analysis process is completed.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12), the performance control device 300
05 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is in the range of hit-related commands (B
1207). Note that the winning command is a command that instructs operations related to the effects during a big win or a small win (such as displaying a fanfare screen or round screen), and examples thereof include a fanfare command for instructing a fanfare screen, a round command for instructing a round screen, an interval command for instructing an interval screen, and an ending command for instructing an ending screen. If the MODE section indicates a winning command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (B12), the performance control device 300
07 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is in the range of the symbol-based command (B
1209). The symbol-related commands include, for example, a decorative special symbol 1 command and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. When the MODE section indicates a symbol-related command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-related command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a symbol command (B12), the performance control device 300
09 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is in the range of a single command (B
If the MODE section indicates a one-off command (result of B1211 is "Y"), the one-off command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a single command (B12
If the result of B1213 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (B1213). The pre-read symbol command includes, for example, a pre-read stop symbol command. If the MODE section represents a pre-read symbol command (B1213 is "Y"
"), executes pre-reading pattern command processing (B1214), and terminates the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a pre-reading pattern command, the performance control device 300
If the result of B1213 is "N"), it is then determined whether the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead variation command (B1215). An example of a look-ahead variation command is a look-ahead variation pattern command. If the MODE section represents a look-ahead variation command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), look-ahead variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the performance control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in test mode), so it terminates the received command analysis process. Also, if the MODE section is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION section is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the AC
If the combination of the TION parts is not correct (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process also ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the one-off command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the one-off command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), it executes a model setting process to set the type of gaming machine (B
1302), and the single command processing is completed.

If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (B1
If the result of step B1301 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE portion represents a RAM initialization command (B1303).
If the result of B1303 is "Y", RAM initialization setting processing is executed (B1304) to notify the user of RAM initialization, and the single command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (B1305). For example, power outage recovery commands include a power outage recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (B13
05 is "Y"), the power outage recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a power outage recovery command, the performance control device 300
If the result of step B1305 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE portion represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307).
07 is "Y"), customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the performance control device 300
If the result of B1307 is "N", then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a decorative special drawing 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE section represents a decorative special drawing 1 reserved number command (B1309 is "Y"), the special drawing 1 reserved information setting process is executed (B1310).
The single command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special figure 2 reserved number command (B1311). Then, if the MODE section represents a decorative special figure 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a special figure 2 reserved information setting process (B131
2) End the single command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special figure 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1
313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (B1
If the result of step B1313 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE section indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Examples of error/illegal commands include an illegality occurrence command, an illegality cancellation command, a status off command, a status on command, a magnet illegality notification command (magnetic error command), and a panel radio wave illegality notification command (panel radio wave error command).
The fraud occurrence command includes a command indicating the occurrence of an illegal win based on the signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the large prize port switch 43. The fraud cancellation command is a command indicating the cancellation of the fraud. The prize port switch/status monitoring process (A1308) monitors the occurrence of an illegal win and the cancellation of the fraud, and can send a fraud occurrence command and a fraud cancellation command. The status on command includes commands indicating the occurrence of a shot ball out switch signal (shot ball out error), the occurrence of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), the occurrence of a payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error), the occurrence of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error), and the occurrence of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) (main frame open error, front frame open error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred. When there is detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1
If there is detection (radio wave fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio wave fraud notification command is sent in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).

If the MODE section indicates an error/incorrect command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error/incorrect setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or incorrectness (
B1316), and terminates the single-shot command processing. In the error/fraud setting processing, for example, an alarm sound for an error or fraud is generated, the LEDs for effect provided in the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, and an error display is made on the display device 41, etc.

If the MODE unit does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for switching performance modes (set by processing during special chart display, etc.) (B1317). If the MODE unit represents a command for switching performance modes (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a performance mode switching setting process (B1318) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the presentation mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a command for the number of out balls indicating the number of out balls (B1319). Then, if the MODE section represents a command for the number of out balls (the result of B1319 is "Y"), it executes the out ball number reception process (B1
320), and the single command processing is completed.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for the number of balls out, the performance control device 300
If the MODE section indicates a command to count the large prize opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command, the performance control device 300
If the result of step B1321 is "N", it is determined whether the MODE portion represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323).
It is included in the command at the time of power recovery in step A1049 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1047. And, when the MODE part represents the setting value information command (
If the result of B1323 is "Y", the process when the set value is received is executed (B1324), and the single command process is terminated. In the process when the set value is received, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a memory such as RAM, and the necessary processes are executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command, the performance control device 300
If the result of step 1323 is "N", it is determined whether the MODE section represents a command for changing settings (B1325). As a command for changing settings, for example, a command for changing the probability setting (A
1033). If the MODE section indicates a setting change command, then (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single command process is terminated. The setting change information setting process stores the contents of the setting change command and executes the process corresponding to the command. For example, if a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, the setting change information setting process displays a setting change in progress message on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the performance control device 300
If the result of B1325 is "N", it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1036). If the MODE section indicates a command for checking settings, then (B1
327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being confirmed is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being confirmed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command, the performance control device 300
If the result of B1327 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a command related to the safety device (B1329). An example of a command related to the safety device is a command related to safety device activation (A9407). When a difference ball command including difference ball information such as the safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, this difference ball command may be included in the command related to the safety device. Then, if the MODE section represents a command related to the safety device (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the safety device system processing related to the safety device is executed (B1330), and the single-shot system command processing is terminated. In the safety device system processing,
It stores the contents of safety device-related commands and executes processing corresponding to the commands.

In the safety device processing, as processing corresponding to the command, information included in the safety device related command can be displayed on the display device 41. For example, when a safety device activation related command is received as a safety device related command, a safety device related display (activation notice display 511) corresponding to the safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3)) included in the ACTION part of the safety device activation related command is displayed.
, operation warning display 512, and operation display 513) are displayed on the display device 41.
When a difference ball command is received as a command related to a safety device, the difference ball number is displayed on the display device 41.
Display in.

The display of the difference in ball count (= safety device counter value -100,000) may be made to display the entire range of values (for example, 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) on the display device 41 in response to the received difference in ball command, or only values within a predetermined range (for example, 90,000 to 100,000 after the activation notice state). If the difference in ball count is only displayed within this predetermined range, it is possible to attract the player's attention by displaying it only when the difference in ball count is important, and when the difference in ball count is not important, the difference in ball count can be hidden, making the display device 41 easier to see. The predetermined ranges include a range corresponding to the activation notice state (more than 90,000 and less than 95,000), a range corresponding to the activation warning state and the activation state (more than 95,000), and a range corresponding to all of the activation notice state, activation warning state, and activation state (95,000).
10,000 or more), or a value equal to or greater than the value immediately before or after entering the activation notice state (for example, 89,000 or more, 91,000 or more). Also, the difference in the number of balls itself may be displayed, or the difference in the number of balls may be displayed indirectly in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (stops). Furthermore, instead of the difference in the number of balls, the safety device counter value may be displayed, and when the safety device counter value is within a predetermined range (for example, 190,000 or more after the activation notice state), it may be displayed on the display device 41.

The difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the difference ball number, which changes in units of 1. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can change in increments of 1, between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, just like the actual difference ball number. The difference ball command may be transmitted each time the safety device counter value and therefore the difference ball number are updated (A9711).

In addition, the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in accordance with the difference ball number that changes in a predetermined unit. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can change in units of 1000, and 0 (=
Actual difference in ball count: 0-999), 1000 (= Actual difference in ball count: 1000-1999), 2000
(=actual difference in number of balls 2000-2999), ..., 100,000 (=actual difference in number of balls 100,000). In this case, in order to reduce the chances of sending the difference in number command, the difference in number command may be sent every time the safety device counter value and therefore the difference in number of balls is updated in units of 1000 (A9711). In addition, the difference in number of balls indicated by the difference in number command may have a negative value.

If the MODE unit does not represent a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a pattern stop command (B1331). Note that the pattern stop command includes, for example, a pattern stop command for special pattern 1 (decorative special pattern 1 stop command) and a pattern stop command for special pattern 2 (decorative special pattern 2 stop command).
If the MODE section indicates a command to stop the symbols (the result of B1331 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B1332).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1332 is "Y")
The performance control device 300 sets the stopping mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1333), and after all symbols have stopped, sets the game status flag to the normal state (B1334), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the processing of B1334, as an example, the game status flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this processing is executed, the game status flag is set to a flag of "fluctuating,""bighit," or "small hit."

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1331 is "N"
"), or if the command in the MODE section is not normal (result of B1332 is "N")
At this time, the performance control device 300 ends the single command processing.

In addition, the presentation control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in Fig. 64 in single-shot command processing. For example, the presentation control device 300 may receive a time-saving variation number command, a presentation rotation number command, a play instruction notification command (left-hit instruction notification command, right-hit instruction notification command), etc. from the game control device 100, and perform processing corresponding to the command. The presentation control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state from the time-saving variation number command (time-saving variation number), etc., and can obtain the remaining rotation number for the presentation in each presentation mode from the presentation rotation number command, etc., and can set the presentation based on the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state and the remaining rotation number for the presentation in each presentation mode, etc. The presentation control device 300 displays a play instruction display (left-hit instruction display or right-hit instruction display) that instructs (suggests) the play instruction in response to the play instruction notification command (left-hit instruction notification command or right-hit instruction notification command).
can be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Predictive pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the pre-reading symbol command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described.
10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the program.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reserved (special chart 1 start memory), for example, whether the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (B1601). If the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reserved (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the pre-reading pattern command (pre-reading stop pattern command) is saved in the special chart 1 pre-reading pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 1 reserved number (B1602).

If the latest reserved information is not information on special chart 1 reserved (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, if the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command, the performance control device 300 saves the look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 2 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the performance control device 300 sets a pre-reading fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a pre-reading fluctuation command (B160
4) This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command are a set, and the look-ahead variation command is sent following the look-ahead symbol command from the game control device 100. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the details of the pre-reading variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described.
10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for pre-reading variable command processing executed by the program.

The performance control device 300 first reads a pre-reading fluctuation command (pre-reading fluctuation pattern command).
It is determined whether the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received (B1701). If the above-mentioned read-ahead variable system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable system command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the read-ahead variable system command processing is terminated. If the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the read-ahead variable system command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the performance control device 300 (sub-board) displays the latest reserved information pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2).
A look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reserved reads is set (B1703), and the MODE part of the sub-intra-sub look-ahead variation command is acquired in correspondence with the MODE part of the look-ahead variation command (
Next, a look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead fluctuation command is generated.
The part is acquired (B1706).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the sub-internal look-ahead variable command MODE and ACT sections) are both other than 0 (B1707).
If the command is normal (valid), it will be converted to a value other than 0.
If the CT part is not 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command consisting of the CT part is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special figure 1 look-ahead variable command area or special figure 2 look-ahead variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9), and determine whether the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (B1710
).

The time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of reserved items when the reserved item starts the variable display game. When the reserved item starts the variable display game, if there are no other reserved items, the first half fluctuation will be longer, and if new reserved items are generated and the number of reserved items is large, the first half fluctuation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reserved positions, the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the sub-intra-sub predictive fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of reserved positions. However, there are different types of reaches of the same type,
If the ACT part (value of the latter half of the variation) of the pre-read variation command is not converted, the performance control device 30
If you use 0 as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, even in a normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach -1 stop miss and normal reach +1 stop miss.
Therefore, by converting ACT parts indicating reaches of the same system into the same intra-sub look-ahead variable command ACT parts, the number is reduced, and the burden of check processes such as look-ahead command consistency check processes is reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether or not at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the sub-internal pre-read variable command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or whether or not the combination of the converted MODE section and ACT section is normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N", it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (B
If the result of 1710 is "Y", the hold information of the pre-read target (latest hold information) is loaded from the pre-read variable command area (B1711), and the pre-read lottery process for the latest hold pre-read effect is executed (B1712). Pre-read effects (pre-read notice effects) include, for example, continuous notice effects (including chance eye pre-read effects), pre-read zone effects, hold change notices, etc. Next, it is determined whether the latest hold pre-read effect (hold change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713).
If the latest reserved pre-reading effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the pre-reading effect (hold change notice, etc.) to be generated is an effect that will start immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading effect to be generated is an effect that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect to be generated is not an effect that will start immediately (B1715
If the result of (B1714) is "N", the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect during a hold shift (when the hold display moves or the number of holds decreases) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. The look-ahead effect is an effect that notifies the probability of a jackpot (the probability of a special result) by announcing information suggesting the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops, but it may also be configured to notify information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6). In other words, the effect control device 300 can perform a look-ahead effect by changing the hold display (icon) of the read-ahead target based on the probability of a jackpot or the probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the latest pending look-ahead performance does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the performance control device 300 terminates the look-ahead variable command processing as is.

[Pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 receives a pattern command (decorative special command 1 or decorative special command 2
The special symbol type corresponding to the MODE part of the symbol command is set (B1801). The special symbol type is special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Then, the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
The symbol type corresponding to the combination of the number of symbols is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, the allocation ratio of the symbols changes between special chart 1 and special chart 2, so the symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In this embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to a losing symbol, a jackpot symbol A for special chart 1, a jackpot symbol B-F for special chart 2, a jackpot symbol G for the remaining reserved symbol (reserved special chart 2), a time-saving symbol (a support symbol), etc.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 determines the special chart type (special chart 1) of the received change command (change command).
It is determined whether the special symbol type (or special symbol 2) is undetermined (B1901). If the special symbol type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the fluctuation command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received fluctuation command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the fluctuation command and symbol type are inconsistent (B1903). Here, inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the performance, such as when a losing fluctuation command is received but a symbol command for a winning symbol is received. If the fluctuation command and symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, and variable command processing is completed.

If the variation command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1
904), and executes a variable performance setting process to set the variable performance that is the performance during the change (B19
05). Note that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Next, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) is set to "special chart variable" (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable performance setting processing]
Next, details of the variable performance setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 68) described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 69. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the type of fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation (a fluctuation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the type of fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of performance points, the model code,
A first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special chart type, performance mode, and setting information (setting value) is set (B2002), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the reserved number of the special chart type is acquired (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the more the number of reserved positions, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reserved positions is obtained.

If the type of fluctuation pattern is not a reach-less fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a reach-with fluctuation, the performance control device 300 sets the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points of the performance point, the model code, the special symbol type, the performance mode, the symbol type, and the setting information (setting value) (B2004), and
The address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ODE section and the fluctuation pattern type is obtained (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the performance control device 300 performs a lottery for the notices that will appear during the first half of the fluctuation period (before the reach) (B2006). Next, it sets a second half of the notice allocation group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2007), obtains the address of the second half of the notice allocation group table corresponding to the ACT portion of the fluctuation command (B2008), and performs a lottery for the notices that will appear during the second half of the fluctuation period (during the reach) (B2009). Then, it determines the content of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the MODE portion and ACT portion of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) (B2010).
In addition, the fluctuation commands will tell you the fluctuation time and main reach details.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (pre-announcement effect) corresponding to the result of the pre-announcement lottery (B2011). After that, the stopping symbols of the decorative special symbol variable display game are determined according to the variable effects such as reach effects and the content of the pre-announcement effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stopping symbols are specifically determined, such as determining the number of scattered symbols in the case of a losing symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display settings for the variable effect (B2013), and performs display settings for the preview effect (B2014). Next, it performs display settings for the reserve reduction corresponding to the special symbol type, and for example, it sets a display (reserve shift display) that reduces the reserve display corresponding to the decorative special symbol that is changing this time (B2015). Next, it sets an audio number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) by the speaker audio, and a decoration number that determines the performance mode by the light emission of the decoration device (B2016).
The decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) are provided with a plurality of decorative light-emitting units (decorative LEDs
The LEDs each have a decoration number, and emit light in a light emission mode (color, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

It is also possible to set the audio numbers and decoration numbers based on not only the performance content but also the setting information (setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light-emitting state of the decoration device, i.e., the light-emitting state of the decorative light-emitting unit (LED).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special chart variation corresponding to the special chart type (B
2017), and in addition to the first to third special symbols that change on the display device 41, a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is displayed (B2018).
The fourth symbol variation is performed by the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED) or may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section of the received winning command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE section of the winning command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a big win fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, it executes a fanfare effect setting process to set a fanfare effect (B2102). In addition, in response to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, a play instruction (left-hit instruction or right-hit instruction) may be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big win. Next, it sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "fanfare in progress" (B2103), and ends the winning command processing. The upper limit of the number of rounds is
It can also be obtained from the pattern type determined from the pattern command (the decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stopping pattern).

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents a round (B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a round command or a small win open command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process and sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "round in progress" (B2105, B2106).
06), the hit command processing is completed.

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an interval (B2107).
is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the presentation control device 300 executes interval presentation setting processing, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "interval in progress" (B2108, B2109), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (B2107
If the result of B21 is "N", the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command indicates an ending (B2110).
10 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation setting process to set an ending presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE part of the received command does not indicate an ending (B2
110 is "N"), the performance control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 71A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating transitions of game states in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (shifts) under the game control of the game control device 100. The game state transitions are particularly shown as being triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot, or by the passage of a predetermined number of games (number of spins, number of fluctuations). In FIG. 71A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special game probability), the state of the normal game win probability (normal game probability), which is the probability of a win in the normal game variable display game, the presentation mode, the main variable display game (main variable display game, main variable), and the right- or left-hand shot firing mode are shown.

As mentioned above, the presentation mode (presentation stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end process (FIG. 40) or the presentation mode information check process (FIG. 35). However, it is not limited to this, and the presentation control device 300 can also set the number of time reductions, the number of specified remaining reserves,
It can also be set based on the number of times the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game is played after the jackpot ends.

Also, in Figure 71A, the specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) in the case of ceiling time-saving due to reaching the ceiling number of times and sudden time-saving due to time-saving patterns are omitted (similar to Figure 71B), but will be explained in detail in the second embodiment (Figure 77) and the third embodiment (Figure 82) described below.

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state as a probability variable state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high.

In addition, in the transition state, the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of winning the normal game are the same as in the normal game state,
In terms of probability, the transition state may be included in the normal game state. That is, the transition state may be considered a normal game state in which the main variable display game becomes the special symbol 2 variable display game. However, in the transition state, the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed by consuming the remaining reserved balls, and the special symbol 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game. A small win, or even a jackpot due to a V-pass during a small win (a game ball passing through a V-entry hole, a V-entry), occurs with a small win probability of 1/8. Therefore, the transition state is a more advantageous state for the player than normal, and from this perspective, it may be considered a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. Furthermore, the transition state and the specific game state (time-saving state) may be collectively considered advantageous states for the player, or the specific game state (time-saving state) may be considered the first advantageous state and the transition state the second advantageous state.

First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the gaming control device 100:
The probability of a jackpot is low (low probability for special charts), and the probability of a regular chart hit is also low (low probability for regular charts).
In this embodiment, the state of low probability of normal winning is a state without normal power support (no support state), and the state of high probability of normal winning is a state with normal power support (support state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is opened due to a normal winning in a support state, if the normal winning probability is low at the time of opening, it will be in a no-support state. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure it to be considered as a support state while the normal variable winning device 37 is open.

In addition, in the normal game state, the presentation mode is the normal mode. In the normal game state, hitting from the left, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first start winning hole 36, is more advantageous for the player than hitting from the right, and is recommended as the game ball launch mode. The main start area where the game ball is more likely to enter in the recommended launch mode is the first start winning hole 36, and the main variable display game (main variable special symbol) is the special symbol 1 variable display game. The secondary start area where the game ball is less likely to enter in the recommended launch mode is the normal variable winning device 37, and the secondary variable display game is the special symbol 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time-shortened state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be low, but the normal winning probability to be high (normal high probability). In the specific game state, the normal variable winning device 37 is more likely to open as a launch mode for the game ball, so right-handed shots aimed at the normal variable winning device 37 are recommended. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning slot 36, so the main variable display game is the special variable 2 display game, and the secondary variable display game is the special variable 1 display game.

In addition, in a specific game state, if the number of time-saving times is less than the reference number (here, 5 times) (
There are cases where the number of time-saving times is ≦5) and 99 times (number of time-saving times = 99) which is greater than the standard number of times. The presentation mode when the number of time-saving times is ≦5 is set as time-saving mode #1, and when the number of time-saving times = 99 is set as time-saving mode #2, and the presentation style of time-saving mode #1 and time-saving mode #2 may be different to enhance the enjoyment of the game. The standard number of times may be, for example, about the reciprocal value of the small win probability 1/8 (8 times), or may be 7 times, etc. The smaller the standard number of times, the more difficult it is for a small win (a big win state when a V passes during a small win) to occur in time-saving mode #1, while the presentation style of presentation mode #2
The difference becomes larger and the contrast becomes more pronounced.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of a specific game state (time-saving state). In the transition state, the remaining reserves created by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) that is opened by a normal win during the specific game state are consumed, and the special power 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. The presentation mode of the transition state is the remaining reserve consumption mode. Furthermore, the remaining reserve consumption mode may be divided into a normal power release pre-end mode before the release of normal power due to a normal win during the specific game state is completed, and a normal power release end mode after the release of normal power is completed. In the normal power release pre-end mode, right-hand shots are recommended to aim for normal power, and in the normal power release end mode, left-hand shots are recommended because the normal power is closed.

If the remaining reserve consumption mode, which is the transition state presentation mode, is divided into a mode before the normal power release ends and a mode after the normal power release ends, it becomes easier for the player to understand whether the normal power is open (should hit right) or closed (should hit left).In addition, if it is not divided, it becomes easier to recognize that the remaining reserve is being consumed through the transition state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the transition state and the specific game state (time-shortened state) may be collectively considered as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same presentation mode may be used instead of being separated.
In this case, the advantageous state in which the special symbol 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game can be a common presentation mode. As will be described later, if a special symbol win occurs when the remaining reserve is consumed (a big win when a V passes during a small win), the game value awarded to the player can be greater than if the special symbol win occurs during a specific game state, and even though it is unclear from the common presentation mode whether the time is being reduced or the remaining reserve is being consumed, the player can obtain a large game value and be pleased. Note that here, the game value (benefit) refers to the number of time reductions after the big win ends and the number of big wins ultimately obtained.

Next, we will explain the transitions from each game state. First, in the normal game state, if a jackpot (not due to a V win) occurs in the special chart variable display game, the game will transition to the special game state after the jackpot state ends.

In the specific game state, if a small win (a big win state when V passes) occurs by the special chart variable display game, after the big win state ends, it returns to the specific game state again. In this case, it returns to the time-saving mode #1, and the number of time-saving times as a game value (benefit) is less than the standard number (time-saving times ≦ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is met, the game transitions from the specific game state to the transition state. For example, the predetermined transition condition is met when either (i) the number of times the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the time-saving count (first predetermined count, the initial value of the time-saving count 2), (ii) the total number of times the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game are executed in the specific game state exceeds a second predetermined count (the initial value of the time-saving count 1, for example, twice the time-saving count) that is greater than the time-saving count (first predetermined count), or (iii) the normal power release ends a predetermined number of times (for example, two times). Note that the second predetermined count may be the time-saving count (first predetermined count) plus the maximum number of reserved special symbol 1 (for example, 4). Condition (iii) is established as a countermeasure against stop-play.

In the specific game state, the original specifications (performance) of the gaming machine 10 are that the master variable display game, the special symbol 2 variable display game, can be executed a certain number of times for time reduction. However, if the transition condition from the specific game state is, as in the past, only that the total number of executions of the special symbol variable display game exceeds the number of executions for time reduction, the execution of the subordinate variable display game, the special symbol 1 variable display game, deviates from the original specifications of the gaming machine 10. However, by establishing two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the subordinate variable display game can be treated as a bonus (benefit), allowing the player to play according to the original specifications without incurring any losses. Furthermore, if the player plays normally, the transition state will occur when condition (i) is met, and it is highly unlikely that condition (ii) will be met.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state, it is possible to continue until the special chart 2 variable display game of the time-saving number of 99 times is executed, so a small win (a big win state occurs when V passes) is almost certain to occur, and after the big win state ends, it becomes the specific game state (time-saving mode #1) again. Therefore, the time-saving mode #2 is a next continuation confirmation mode (
Confirm mode).

In the transition state, when the special chart 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state where the special chart 1 variation display game is. On the other hand, in the transition state, if a small win (a V passing during a small win becomes a big win state) occurs, after the big win state ends, the time-saving mode # of the specific game state
2, and 99 time-saving times are awarded. In other words, if a small win (a big win after V passes) occurs in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) in which the remaining reserve is consumed, the number of time-saving times will be greater than the number of time-saving times (≦5) when a small win (a big win after V passes) occurs in the specific game state, and the game value awarded to the player will be greater. Furthermore, if a small win (a big win after V passes) occurs in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), a small win (a big win after V passes) will almost certainly occur in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of two big wins will be secured as game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
71B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. The transition of the game state in FIG. 71B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 71B, the remaining reserves, which are all Special 2 reserves consumed after the time-saving feature has ended, are divided into a predetermined remaining reserve (first remaining reserve) and an excess reserve (second remaining reserve). The remaining reserve consumption mode, which is a presentation mode corresponding to the transition state, is divided into a time-saving feature-generated remaining reserve consumption mode in which the predetermined remaining reserves are consumed, and an excess reserve consumption mode in which excess reserves are consumed. Here, the predetermined remaining reserves refer to the first predetermined number of Special 2 reserves (all or part of the Special 2 reserves) generated during the time-saving feature and consumed after the time-saving feature has ended, and the excess reserves refer to Special 2 reserves (remaining reserves) consumed after the predetermined remaining reserves. The excess reserve consumption mode may include, for example, a mode in which a results screen showing game results is displayed on the display device 41 or other special modes. Note that the time-saving feature-generated remaining reserve consumption mode and the time-saving mode (time-saving mode #1 or time-saving mode #2) share the commonality of consuming Special 2 reserves generated during the time-saving feature, and therefore may share the same presentation style as the same presentation mode.

[Number of time-saving times and remaining reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
FIG. 72 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the prescribed number of remaining reserved times (prescribed number of remaining reserved times) corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special pattern variable display game. The patterns are the patterns that will result in a jackpot, and are determined here by the jackpot pattern random number, excluding the time-saving patterns. The patterns are,
It is a winning stopping symbol and may correspond to either a stopping symbol number or a stopping symbol pattern.
) relates to the winning symbols of the special chart 1 variable display game. The upper diagram of (B) relates to the winning symbols of the special chart 2 variable display game during the normal chart high probability state (time-saving state), and the lower diagram relates to the winning symbols of the special chart 2 variable display game during the normal chart low probability state (winning symbols in the remaining reserve).

Pattern A is a stop pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, and is the stop pattern for a jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game. Patterns B-F are also stop patterns determined by a jackpot pattern random number, but are the stop patterns for a jackpot related to a V-pass (V-winning) in a small jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game during a normal chart high probability state (time-saving state). Pattern G is also a stop pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, but is the stop pattern for a jackpot related to a V-pass (V-winning) in a small jackpot (small jackpot with remaining reserves) in the special chart 2 variable display game during a normal chart low probability state. Note that if there is a small jackpot pattern random number in addition to the jackpot pattern random number, patterns B-F and G can also be configured as the stop patterns for a small jackpot determined by the small jackpot pattern random number.

The allocation (selection rate) of the symbol A is 100%, and the only symbol that stops in the jackpot of the special 1 variable display game is the symbol A. The allocation rates of the symbols B-F for the jackpot symbol random number are 40%, 25%, 15%, 10%, and 10%, respectively. The allocation rate of the symbol G is 100%.
is.

For pattern A, which is a type of jackpot in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game, the number of time-saving cycles after a jackpot is one. Furthermore, for pattern A, the number of remaining reserved balls that can be consumed after the time-saving cycle ends is four. Therefore, the total number of reserved balls that can be consumed by playing the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game after the jackpot cycle ends is five (= 1 + 4) according to the regulations. For pattern A, with a small jackpot probability of 1/8, the continuation rate is {1 - (1 - 1/8) ⁵ } x 100% = 48.7%, and the transition rate to fixed mode is (1 - 1/8) x {1 - (1 - 1/8) ⁴ } x 100% = 36.2%.

In the pattern B-F, which is the type of jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game started during the normal chart high probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, and 1 time, respectively.
For F, the prescribed remaining reserve numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be consumed by executing the special symbol 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state is 10 for all of the symbols B-F. For symbols B-F, the continuation rate is the same for each with a small win probability of 1/8, which is {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ } x 100% = 73.7%, and the transition rate to the fixed mode is 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%, respectively.
This comes to 61.2%.

In the case of the G pattern, which is a type of jackpot (remaining reserve jackpot) of the special chart 2 variable display game started during the normal chart low probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 99 times. Also, in the G pattern, the specified remaining reserve number is 4. Therefore, the total number of special chart 2 reserves that can be consumed by executing the special chart 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends is 103. In the G pattern, for a small win probability of 1/8,
For each, the continuation rate is approximately 100%, and the transition rate to the fixed mode is approximately 0%. Therefore, in the case of the symbol G, after the jackpot ends with the remaining reserved, the game will transition to the time-saving mode #2, and the jackpot will be re-achieved, and the specific game state (time-saving state) will continue. On the other hand, in the case of the symbol G, the transition rate to the fixed mode is approximately 0
%, and in most cases, the transition occurs from time-saving mode #2 in the specific game state to time-saving mode #1 via a jackpot.

The continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue due to the special pattern 2 variable display game (within 5 times for pattern A, within 10 times for pattern B-F, and within 103 times for pattern G) after the end of the jackpot state, and is the probability of re-entering the specific game state without going through the normal game state (normal mode). The fixed mode transition rate is the probability of transitioning from the remaining reserve consumption mode to time-saving mode #2 (fixed mode, next continuation fixed mode) due to the special pattern 2 variable display game based on the remaining reserve after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of reserved special symbols 2 consumed after the end of the jackpot state (i.e., the number of times the variable display game for the special symbol 2 is executed after the end of the jackpot state), and the continuation rate for symbols B-F, which has a total number of 10, is greater than the continuation rate for symbol A, which has a total number of 5. In addition, as the number of time-saving times decreases and the specified remaining reserved number increases in the order of symbols B-F, the transition rate to the fixed mode increases.

As described above, for symbols B-F, the number of time-saving times is set according to the symbol, which is the type of jackpot (type of special result). Therefore, the specific game state after the jackpot has ended has a variable number of time-saving times (1 to 5) that is set by lottery (allocation) and changes randomly, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, the remaining reserve number (5 to 9), which is the number of times the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed after the specific game state ends, changes according to the number of time-saving times. Therefore, the remaining reserve number is also randomly and variable, which is set by lottery, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, if there is a difference in the game value between a jackpot in a specific game state and a jackpot with a remaining reserve, the player's joy or sorrow will be determined by the remaining reserve number set by lottery, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with regard to the winning symbols B-F of the main variable display game (special chart 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, even if the number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserves are variable, the total of the number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserves is constant (10), so the continuation rate of the specific game state can be kept the same while the transition rate to the fixed mode can be made variable. As mentioned above, while the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed for the total number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserves, that is, if the same presentation mode is executed in the specific game state (time-saving mode) and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether they are in the time-saving mode or the remaining reserve consumption mode, and they will be surprised when they get a big hit with the remaining reserve and get a large game value (99 times of time-saving times), which increases the interest of the game.

[Features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation]
Figure 73 is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation.

As shown in Figure 73 (A), there is only one type of winning pattern (winning stop pattern, normal winning pattern) in the normal map variation display game, and the same normal power opening pattern is always obtained, and when the normal map variation display game is in a winning state, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability of winning is 0/251 (0%) in the low probability state and 251/251 (1%) in the high probability state.
00%). In the normal game, the winning probability is always 0% in a high probability state and always 0% in a low probability state, so randomness is eliminated. However, this is not limited to this, and the normal winning probability is a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) in a low probability state (normal game state, etc.).
That's fine too.

The start memory count (number of reserved normal symbols) for the normal symbol variation display game is essentially 0, and even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 during the winning state (normal power operation) and during the variation of the normal symbol variation display game, the normal symbol start memory for the normal symbol variation display game is not stored. The normal symbol variation display game can only be started while the stopped symbol is displayed. If the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 during the stopped display, a normal symbol start memory is generated, but it is immediately consumed and the normal symbol variation display game begins. In this way, the start memory for the normal symbol variation display game is not actually accumulated, so the normal symbol variation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in a specific game state, the normal symbol variation display game or normal power operation and the special symbol variation display game are easily linked without any discrepancies, and this also helps prevent strategy attacks.

The normal map fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. It may be 200 msec in a normal map high probability state and longer than 200 msec in a normal map low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In a specific game state (time-saving state, normal map high probability state), in order to link the normal map fluctuation display game (and thus the normal power operation) and the special map fluctuation display game without any discrepancy, it is preferable that the normal map fluctuation time and normal map stop time be as short as possible. Assuming that the launch speed of game balls is 100 per minute, game balls can pass through the normal map start gate 34 every 600 msec, so the time required for one normal map fluctuation display game, i.e., the sum of the normal map fluctuation time and normal map stop time, is preferably less than 600 msec.

Also, the maximum count number (count upper limit) for regular power is 10.

73(B) is a diagram showing the normal map start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) and the surrounding configuration. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration so that almost all game balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the normal power (normal power opening) pass through the normal map start gate 34 and win the normal power.

First, to ensure a consistent winning rate (the rate at which one game ball wins) for the normal variable winning device 37 when a right-hand hit is made in sync with the normal power release, obstacle pins 32a and structures are eliminated as much as possible from the game area 32 around the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37, to prevent unevenness in the game ball's movement. For example, obstacle pins 32a and structures are not placed between the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 or on either side in the game area 32. Two rows of obstacle pins 32a, located approximately directly above the normal map start gate 34, form a path for game balls, preventing game balls from leaking out. The path formed by the two rows of obstacle pins 32a smoothly connects to the upper path 32c formed by a structure.

In addition, the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in a positional relationship such that the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as is. In other words, the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged directly below the normal map start gate 34. For example, the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34 may enter the normal variable winning device 37 by the time it reaches the normal variable winning device 37.
In this case, the distance L (the distance between the vertical centers) between the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be greater than the product of the average falling speed of the game ball and the time required for one normal map variable display game. However, the distance L is set to be short enough so that the game ball will enter the normal variable winning device 37 even if the falling direction of the game ball deviates from the vertical after passing through the normal map start gate 34.

Furthermore, in order to prevent unevenness in the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37, as mentioned above, it is preferable that the normal variable winning device 37 be a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b falls forward.

Figure 73 (C) shows the opening pattern (normal power opening pattern) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) of this embodiment. The normal power opening pattern shows the operating state of the normal power due to one normal winning. The normal power opening pattern after the end of the jackpot state is the same regardless of the jackpot pattern A-G (i.e., the type of jackpot). The number enclosed in the square frame indicates the control pointer during the normal winning (Figure 51
etc.)

In this embodiment, in a normal power release pattern per normal map, the normal power is released twice. Note that the normal power may be released multiple times, more than twice. The normal power release is divided into a first half release and a second half release, separated by a long interval in which the normal power is closed. The normal power interval time (wait time), which is the interval time, is 60,000 msec, and the normal power release time for both the first half release and the second half release is 3,000 msec.

For example, if the launch speed of the game balls is 100 per minute, the game balls will reach the normal power every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the normal power 5 times during the first half of the 3000 msec opening, and after the 60000 msec interval, it is possible to win 5 times during the second half of the 3000 msec opening.
The special 2 reserves accumulated during the first half of the opening can be consumed during the 60,000 msec interval in which the normal power is closed, reducing the number of special 2 reserves to 0, and the maximum number of special 2 reserves (here 4) can be accumulated during the subsequent second half of the opening.

During the normal power interval (closed state), if the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time-saving count, the specific game state (time-saving state, normal chart high probability state, support state) ends and the normal chart low probability state (transition state) is entered. Then, the special chart 2 reserves that were accumulated during the first half of the opening but are consumed after the time-saving state ends become remaining reserves, and in addition, the special chart 2 reserves that are accumulated by winning the normal power during the 3000 msec second half of the opening also become remaining reserves. In this way, even if the normal chart low probability state is entered, it is possible to accumulate a large number of remaining reserves by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving one normal winning (specific result) of the normal winning display game, the normal winning device 37 can be converted to the open state multiple times, and the normal winning device 37 can be converted to the open state in both a high probability state where the probability of the normal winning of the normal winning display game is high and a low probability state where the probability is low. Therefore, even if the probability of a normal winning is low, the normal winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special winning device 2 can be reserved, which pleases the player and increases the fun of the game.

Furthermore, when the first half of the normal power is released, special chart 2 reserve can be accumulated and consumed at intervals, and when the second half of the normal power is released, special chart 2 reserve can be accumulated again and consumed after the normal power operation has ended.
Therefore, the remaining reserves can be made larger than the upper limit of 4 for the number of reserves for Special Chart 2, and the number of remaining reserves can also be made variable by making the number of time-saving times variable.

[Timing chart]
Figures 74-76 are timing charts showing the game state, normal probability (normal probability of winning), normal state, normal power state, number of reserved special symbols 2, special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation), etc. after a jackpot. The further to the right on the timing chart, the more time passes. Figure 74 is after a jackpot of symbol A, Figure 75 is after a jackpot of symbol B, and Figure 76 is
This applies after a jackpot with pattern F.

Regarding the state after the jackpot of the pattern B-F, only the timing of changing from the normal high probability state (specific game state) to the normal low probability state is different depending on the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining reserve number, so only the pattern B and the pattern F are illustrated.
The other features are the same for all of the patterns B-F.

74 to 76 show the timing charts of the game ball passing through the normal start gate 34 (normal gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the game ball entering the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) (start gate 2
The detection of the switch 37a) is also shown by a pulse. In Figures 74 to 76, the state and changes of the game ball passing through the normal gate, the normal state, the normal power state, and the normal power winning (winning into the normal power) are the same, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

In Figures 74-76, the jackpot round (during the jackpot) and the jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending where the ending performance is executed, when the player hits the right hand as prompted by the right hand instruction display, the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 (normal symbol gate) (shown by the first pulse in Figure 74), the normal symbol (normal symbol) changes on the normal symbol display 53, and the normal symbol change display game is executed, and then stops. Here, because the normal symbol is in a low probability state when the normal symbol starts to change, it stops with a miss.

Here, when the normal symbol misses and stops, the jackpot ending ends, resulting in a high probability state for normal symbols, and a right-hand play state with support is entered, corresponding to the specific game state (time-saving mode #1) of FIG. 71A. At the beginning of the right-hand play state with support (normal symbol high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, and the normal symbol begins to change. Then, since the normal symbol is in a high probability state with a 100% normal symbol probability, a normal symbol win occurs, the normal symbol operation begins, and the normal symbol is opened as the first half is opened. In the open state where the normal symbol is opened, the game ball that passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 enters the normal symbol (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special symbol 2 reserve is generated, the special symbol 2 reserve is consumed, the special symbol 2 change display game begins, and the number of special symbol 2 reserves becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100 controls the variable time (execution time) of the special chart 2 variable display game.
The stop display time and the special symbol 2 change time are controlled based on the number of times the special symbol 2 change has occurred since the end of the jackpot state (the number of times the special symbol 2 change display game has been executed) (the change start information setting process in FIG. 32 and the special symbol change processing in FIG. 33). The game control device 100 sets the change time and the stop display time of the special symbol 2 change display game to be different for three types: after the end of a jackpot for symbol A, after the end of a jackpot for symbol B-F, and after the end of a jackpot for symbol G.

After the big win of the pattern A in FIG. 74, the first special chart 2 variable display game is set to have a sufficiently long variable time so that it continues at least until the end of the normal operation, that is, until the end of the second half opening. The variable time of the first special chart 2 variable display game is set to be the normal operation time (660
The normal power operation time is approximately the same as the normal power operation time (00 msec, 66 seconds), but a margin (several seconds to several tens of seconds) may be added to the normal power operation time.
The first special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game, the special chart 2 reserve is accumulated to the upper limit of four.

Since the number of time-saving times after a jackpot of the A symbol is one, when the first special symbol 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends, the normal symbol low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) is entered. In the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the four remaining reserved symbols 2 is executed four times with a significantly shorter fluctuation time than the first time (second to fifth special symbol 2 variable display games). These second to fifth special symbol 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed fluctuation time.

After a jackpot of the B symbol in Figure 75, the first Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game begins at least before the end of the first half of the normal power release and continues until after its end. Also, the fluctuation time of the first Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game is approximately the same as the normal power release time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in Figure 75, but it may be longer than the normal power release time. In response to the first half of the normal power release, the first Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game is executed, and during this Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game, the maximum number of Special Chart 2 reserved symbols is accumulated (four). All four reserved symbols are consumed during the interval in which the normal power is closed, and during this interval, the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game is executed four times (the second through fifth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games) with a fluctuation time significantly shorter than the first one. These second through fifth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games may all have the same fixed fluctuation time.

Since the number of time-saving times after a jackpot of pattern B is five, when the fifth special pattern 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends, the normal pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) is entered. In the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), the normal power is opened as a second half opening. As soon as one special pattern 2 reserve is generated as a remaining reserve due to a win on the open normal power, the special pattern 2 reserve is consumed, and the sixth special pattern 2 variable display game begins, and the number of special pattern 2 reserves becomes 0.

In response to the opening of the second half of the regular power (together), the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game, the special chart 2 reserve is accumulated to the upper limit of 4.
The sixth special chart 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the second half of the normal power release and continues until the end. The variable time of the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is the normal power release time (30
The time is approximately the same as the normal power release time (00 msec, 3 seconds), but may be longer than the normal power release time.

After the sixth special chart 2 variable display game, the special chart 2 variable display game based on the four remaining reserved special chart 2 reserves is executed four times with a variable time that is significantly shorter than the first and sixth times (7 to 1
0th special chart 2 variable display game). In this way, five specified remaining reserve numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special chart 2 variable display games can be realized.

The seventh through tenth special chart 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed, short variable time, and may be the same or shorter than the variable time of the second through fifth special chart 2 variable display games (particularly during the time-saving mode). This allows the special chart 2 variable display games to be played at a consistent tempo and rhythm, and allows remaining reserves to be consumed quickly. Furthermore, since the seventh through tenth special chart 2 variable display games only consume the special chart 2 reserve and are not related to saving, using a variable variable time selected by allocation of the variable pattern (lottery) prevents monotony in the game. Furthermore, the variable time of the seventh through tenth special chart 2 variable display games can be made longer than the variable time of the second through fifth special chart 2 variable display games (particularly during the time-saving mode), allowing for a slower corresponding effect.

Also, when the latter half of the normal power line is opened, the normal power line state ends and the normal power line start gate 34 (
The passing of the game ball through the normal gate allows the normal map variation display game to be executed, but since the normal map is in a low probability state with a normal map winning probability of 0%, the normal map variation display game does not result in a winning result. The stop after the normal map winning state ends corresponds to the normal remaining ball processing time and the normal map ending time.

After a jackpot of pattern F in Figure 76, the passing of the game ball through the normal gate, the normal state, normal power state, normal power winning, the number of reserved special pattern 2, and the appearance and changes of the special pattern change display game (special pattern change) are the same as after a jackpot of pattern B in Figure 75. However, because the number of time-saving times and the specified remaining reserved number are different between pattern B and pattern F, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal pattern high probability state) to the transition state (normal pattern low probability state, remaining reserved consumption mode) is different.

After the jackpot of the symbol F, when the first special symbol 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends and the normal symbol low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) is entered. After that, just like after the jackpot of the symbol B, nine special symbol 2 variable display games are executed, and nine specified remaining reserves can be realized.

As shown in Figures 75 and 76, the game control device 100 can execute the special symbol 2 variable display game for a long time in response to the open state of the normal power switch, and can execute the special symbol 2 variable display game for a short time in response to the closed state (interval) of the normal power switch. Therefore, the special symbol 2 reserve can be accumulated by opening the first half of the normal power switch and consumed at the interval, and the special symbol 2 reserve can be accumulated again by opening the second half of the normal power switch and consumed after the normal power operation ends. Therefore, the remaining reserve can be increased beyond the upper limit of four special symbol 2 reserves, and the number of remaining reserves can also be varied by varying the number of time-saving operations.

Although not shown, after the big win of the symbol G, for example, while repeating the normal operation, the special symbol 2 variable display game may be executed only for the number of time reductions (99 times) and the remaining reserved amount (4 pieces) in a short fixed variable time such as the 2nd to 5th times and the 7th to 10th times in Figures 74-76.
If the variation time of the special chart 2 variation display game after the big win is fixed, the special chart 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the variation time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous.

Although the first embodiment has been described above, the specific gaming state may be not only a time-saving state but also a probability variable state (excluding a latent probability variable state).
The first embodiment may be applied to a type of gaming machine (so-called digital pachinko) that simply has a specific game state (time-saving state or probability variable state). In a type of gaming machine that has a probability variable state, especially for a model (so-called sweet digital pachinko, short pachinko) that has a high probability of winning even with a low probability of special charts after the probability variable state ends, the remaining reserved number can be expected to win, so applying the first embodiment is very effective.

[Actions and Effects of the First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a special symbol variable display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (a normal variable winning device 37, a normal power supply) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means (e.g., the game control device 100) can execute a game (e.g., a special symbol 2 variable display game) based on a start memory (e.g., a special symbol 2 reserve) generated by winning the variable winning device. The game value (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability variable times) awarded to a player when a game results in a special result (e.g., a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V win during a small win) in a specific gaming state differs from the game value awarded to a player when a special result is achieved after the specific gaming state ends.

In such a gaming machine 10, there is a difference in the game value awarded for the special results of the game during the specific gaming state and after the end of the specific gaming state, so the player will be happy or sad depending on the number of start memories that occur during the specific gaming state and that cause the game to be executed after the end of the specific gaming state, which will increase the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a normal game with a variable display). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (a normal variable winning device 37, a normal power supply) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (a normal game with a variable display) is a specific result (a normal win). The game control means can switch the variable winning device to the open state multiple times by deriving a single specific result (a normal win), and can switch the variable winning device to the open state in both a high-probability state where the probability of the game resulting in a specific result (a normal win) is high and a low-probability state where the probability is low.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability of the game resulting in a specific result (a normal winning), the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) can be converted to an open state, and the start-up memory (for example, special winning device 2 reserved) generated by winning the variable winning device can be stored, which pleases the player and increases the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment comprises a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and a presentation control means (for example, a presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game. The gaming machine 10 comprises a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state (for example, a right-hand hit state with a low probability of winning a normal game) in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state even after the specific gaming state has ended, and the presentation control means
The presentation mode in the predetermined state is made different from the presentation mode in states other than the predetermined state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the specific game state ends, the predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted into the open state in the same manner as the specific game state can be distinguished from the specific game state in terms of presentation appearance. Also, by providing a presentation mode unique to the predetermined state, the entertainment value of the game can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special chart variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable winning device, without consuming the start memory (for example, special chart 2 reserve) that becomes the execution right of the game (special chart variable display game),
The starting memory can be accumulated by winning a prize on the variable prize winning device.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special symbol variable display game) for a long time in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device, and can execute the game for a short time in response to the closed state of the variable prize winning device. Therefore, during the specific game state, the open state of the variable prize winning device (for example, the first half open)
In this case, many start memories (for example, special chart 2 reserve) are stored, and then in the subsequent closed state (for example, interval), many start memories (for example, special chart 2 reserve) are consumed, and after the specific game state ends, in the open state again (for example, second half open), many start memories (for example, special chart 2 reserve) can be stored. For this reason, the number of start memories (remaining reserve number) consumed after the specific game state ends is set to the upper limit of the number of start memories (for example, 4).
Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes a game (special symbol variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device for a time longer than the open state time of the variable prize winning device.
Even if there is a difference between the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variation time, variable period) of the game (special chart variable display game), the difference can be absorbed and the actual remaining reserve number coincides with the specified remaining reserve number without any excess or deficiency.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special symbol variable display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period when the variable prize winning device is closed. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (variation time, variable period) of the game (special symbol variable display game), the discrepancy can be absorbed, and the actual remaining reserved number will exactly match the specified remaining reserved number.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines whether the game (special chart variable display game) has been played a predetermined number of times (
For example, the specific game state is controlled to end when a certain number of times (for example, the number of times of time reduction or the number of times of probability change) is executed. Then, after the specific game state ends, the number of times (a specified number of remaining reserves of 5 to 9) in which a game based on a start memory generated by winning a prize in the variable prize winning device is executed is changed according to a predetermined number (for example, the number of times of time reduction or the number of times of probability change). Therefore, if the predetermined number is selected by lottery, the number of remaining reserves will also be random and variable, set by lottery, and the player will be happy or sad depending on the number of remaining reserves, which will increase the interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines whether the game (special chart variable display game) has a special result (
A predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time-saving times or the number of probability variations) can be set as the game value to be awarded to the player when a special result (small win or big win) is achieved, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type of special result (design). Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the special game state based on the special result ends is set by lottery (allocation) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes randomly, which increases the interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means sets a constant (for example, 10) sum of the number of times (prescribed remaining reserved number) that a game (special symbol variable display game) will be executed after the end of the specific game state and a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time-saving or probability variable times). Therefore, the continuation rate of the specific game state can be kept the same, while the number of remaining reserved numbers can be made variable. If the same presentation mode is executed while this fixed number of special symbol 2 variable display games are executed during the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether the specific game state is in progress or has ended, and the player will be surprised when they win a jackpot on the remaining reserved number after the end of the specific game state and gain significant game value, which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special chart 1 variable display game) and a second game (special chart 2 variable display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on a start memory generated by a game ball entering a predetermined winning area (for example, a start winning hole 36), and can execute the second game based on a start memory generated by a game ball entering a variable winning device. The second game (special chart 2 variable display game) can be executed based on the first game (special chart 1
The first game can be executed in priority over the variable display game, and when the first game is executed in the specific gaming state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times that the first game (special chart 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state is reduced, and the number of times that the first game (special chart 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state is reduced.
Even if this is executed, the start of the second game (special chart 2 variable display game) is not significantly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game is divided into a first game (a normal game with a variable display) and a second game (
The game control means can execute a first game based on the passage of a game ball through a predetermined area (normal game start gate 34), and can execute a second game (special game change display game) based on a start memory generated by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power). In a specific game state, even if a game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal game start gate 34) during the execution of the first game or during a winning state generated by a specific result of the first game, a start memory (normal game memory) that becomes the right to execute the first game is not generated.

Therefore, the first game (the normal map variation display game) can only be started during the stop display, and the normal map variation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (the normal map start gate 34) during the stop display. In this way, the start memory (normal map memory) of the first game (the normal map variation display game)
Therefore, in the specific game state, the operation of the variable winning device due to a win in the first game (normal game) and the second game (special game) can be easily linked without any discrepancy.

In the first embodiment, the game control means terminates the specific game state when the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) has been in the open state a specified number of times (e.g., twice). This prevents situations in which the specific game state is extended by stopping the shot and causing the number of wins in the variable winning device to be less than a specified number (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability-change wins). Furthermore, it prevents the variable winning device from being in the open state excessively due to a win in the first game (normal variable display game) during the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the game execution time (variation time) based on the number of times the game (special symbol variation display game) has been executed since the end of the special game state.
A game (special chart variable display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and when the variable winning device is in the open state, a start memory (for example, special chart 2 reserve) which becomes the right to execute the game (special chart variable display game) can be stored.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (a game control device 100) that controls the progress of a game (a variable display game). The game control means includes a first counting means (e.g., a ball difference confirmation process) that can count the number of game media (game balls) paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from power-on to the present) or the number of game media determined to be paid out during the predetermined period (e.g., the total number of winning balls during the predetermined period, the number of safe balls). The game control means includes a second counting means (e.g., a ball difference confirmation process) that can count the number of game media used during the predetermined period (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls discharged). The game control means includes a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state in which the game cannot be played based on the difference between the number of game media paid out and the number of game media used (e.g., the number of balls difference). The game control means can generate a specific game state (for example, specific game state B, b time reduction) when the number of times the game is executed under a predetermined condition (for example, a state of low probability of special drawing) reaches a predetermined number (for example, a ceiling number of times). When the power is turned on, the game control means receives information (for example, a safety device counter value) regarding the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls (for example, the difference in the number of balls).
is initialized, and information about the number of times the game has been played (for example, the ceiling counter value) is not initialized.

In such a gaming machine 10, the number of remaining games (up to a predetermined number) until a specific gaming state occurs does not change when the power is turned on, but the margin (tolerance, limit) before an unplayable state occurs regarding the difference between the payout number and the usage number can be increased (maximized) by initialization when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player will not suffer any disadvantage when the power is turned on.

In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game includes a storage means (for example, RAM 11) including a first area (intra-area work area) that can be a work area for game control, a second area (extra-area work area) different from the first area, and an unused area between the first area and the second area.
1c). The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which game execution is disabled upon the establishment of a predetermined condition (activation condition). The first area can store a flag (e.g., a safety device activated flag) that indicates the occurrence of a game-disabled state upon the establishment of the predetermined condition. The flag can be set based on information in a predetermined area (e.g., a safety device activation information area) in the second area, and is not initialized when the power is turned on. The game stop means generates the game-disabled state based on this flag.

In such a gaming machine 10, the game can be disabled when a predetermined condition is met, thereby preventing fraudulent play and also preventing players from becoming addicted to the game. Furthermore, because a flag for causing a game disable state (e.g., a safety device activation flag) is not initialized when the power is turned on, the game disable state is not released except in special circumstances (e.g., when RAM is cleared with a setting change). Therefore, fraudulent play can be appropriately prevented and players can be appropriately prevented from becoming addicted to the game.

Furthermore, in such a gaming machine 10, the storage means (e.g., RAM 111c) includes a first area (inner area work area) and a second area (outer area work area) separated by an unused area. A flag (e.g., a safety device activation flag) is stored in the first area (inner area work area) and can be set based on information in a predetermined area (e.g., a safety device activation information area) in the second area (outer area work area). This makes it easy to initialize the flag separately from the initialization of information for setting the flag (information in the predetermined area). Furthermore, it becomes easier to separate the program for setting the flag (outer area program) from the game control program (inner area program), improving program development efficiency.

In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10, which is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of controlling presentations related to games, is equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) capable of counting the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) or the number of game media decided to be paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the total number of winning balls in a predetermined period, the number of safe balls). The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a second counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls).
The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100 or an out ball detection switch 74). Based on the payout number and the number of used balls, the gaming machine 10 is set to a non-playable state (
The machine is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game stop state or a game prohibited state.
When a value corresponding to the difference between the payout number and the usage number (for example, the difference in the number of balls or the safety device counter value) is within a predetermined range (for example, a range corresponding to all of the activation notice state, activation warning state, and activation state), the performance control means (performance control device 300) displays the value on a display means (for example, a display device 41).
It can be displayed in.

Therefore, a value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is displayed only when it is within a predetermined range, and this value is displayed only when it is important to attract the player's attention, and when this value is not important, the value is hidden to make the display easier to see. Also, since it is possible to create a state in which the game cannot be played based on the number of payouts (number of safe balls, etc.) and the number of uses, it is possible to effectively take measures against fraud, for example, when the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (for example, the difference in number of balls or the safety device counter value) is large, and it is also possible to effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 77 to 80. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.
The embodiment relates to a special chart change display game after the end of a specific game state with regular power support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Figure 77 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the second embodiment. Figure 77 is similar to Figure 71A, but differs from Figure 71A in that it includes the addition of specific game states (omitted in Figures 71A and 71B) in the case of ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times and sudden time reduction due to a time-saving symbol (support hit).

The specific game states include specific game state A, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a time-saving state immediately after a jackpot (time-saving a), specific game state B, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a ceiling time-saving state (time-saving b) without being caused by a jackpot, and specific game state C, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a sudden time-saving state (time-saving c) without being caused by a jackpot. Note that, although the specific game state is a time-saving state in this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the specific game state as a probability variable state (with normal power support/high probability of special chart) in which the probability of a jackpot is high.

In the specific game states A-C, the probability of winning a jackpot is low, but there is normal power support. In the specific game states A-C, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is more likely to open, so right-hand shots aimed at the normal variable winning device 37 are recommended as the launch mode of the game ball.
In a specific game state, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game becomes the special chart 2 variable display game and the secondary variable display game becomes the special chart 1 variable display game.

The presentation modes of the specific gaming state A include time-saving modes #1 and #2, as in Figure 71A.
In this embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles for time-saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, three times) for simplicity, but it may be a variable value as in the first embodiment (FIG. 72). The presentation mode for specific gaming state B is time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode for specific gaming state C is time-saving mode #4. The presentation modes are different, and the player can distinguish between the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) and the time-saving state due to the sudden time-saving (c time-saving) by the presentation. It is also possible to use the same presentation mode for specific gaming state B and specific gaming state C to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs.

In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are different presentation modes from time-saving modes #1 and #2,
The presentation modes are different, and the time-saving state resulting from a jackpot (specific gaming state A) and the time-saving state not resulting from a jackpot (specific gaming states B and C) can be distinguished by presentation.
The presentation mode can be made the same for the specific game states B and C, thereby standardizing the presentation and reducing development costs.

In addition, in the specific gaming state A, when it is possible to generate a time-saving state by ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, it is also possible to configure the time-saving modes #1 and #2 to continue without changing the time-saving modes #1 and #2 to the time-saving modes #3 and #4, and in this case, it is also possible to give the player the impression that the specific gaming state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time-savings has increased). Of course, in the specific gaming state A, when it is possible to generate a time-saving state by ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, it is also possible to configure the time-saving modes #1 and #2 to continue without changing the time-saving modes #1 and #2 to the time-saving modes #3 and #4, and in this case, it is also possible to give the player the impression that the specific gaming state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time-savings has increased).
, #2 may be changed to time-saving mode #3 or #4 to notify the player that a ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and the transition state (normal game state in which the remaining reserve is consumed) are the same as those of the first embodiment (
The transition state presentation mode is described as a single remaining reserve consumption mode without separating the mode before the end of normal power release and the mode after the end of normal power release, but they may be separated.

Next, the transitions from each game state, particularly the transitions to and from the specific game states B and C, will be described.

In the normal game state, transition state, and specific game state A, when the number of times of the special symbol variable display game (excluding the number of times in the probability variable state) executed after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time shortening (b time shortening) is entered and the specific game state B (time shortening mode #3) is entered. Also, in the normal game state, transition state, and specific game state A, when the result of the special symbol variable display game is a support hit result (time shortening result, time shortening pattern), the time shortening (c time shortening) is entered suddenly and the specific game state C (time shortening mode #
Transition to 4).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during specific game state A or if a support result occurs,
The time-shortening state may be continuously (overlappingly) generated by the ceiling time-shortening or sudden time-shortening, or it may not be continuously generated. Basically, regardless of the remaining number of time-shortening times in the specific game state A, when the conditions for transitioning to the specific game states B and C (reaching the ceiling number of times or the occurrence of a support hit result) are met, the specific game state transitions to the specific game states B and C, but whether or not to transition may be changed depending on the remaining number of time-shortening times. For example, if the number of time-shortening times in the specific game state B (the number of time-shortening times b m3) is greater than the remaining number of time-shortening times in the specific game state A (the number of time-shortening times not yet consumed), the specific game state A transitions to the specific game state B. If the number of time-shortening times in the specific game state C (the number of time-shortening times c m4) is greater than the remaining number of time-shortening times in the specific game state A, the specific game state A transitions to the specific game state C. If the number of time-saving times (m3, m4) of the specific game states B and C is less than the remaining number of time-saving times in the specific game state A, the time-saving symbol is displayed, but the specific game states B and C do not occur and the specific game state A
There is no transition to the specific gaming states B and C. Note that the time-saving symbol does not have to be displayed in the case of ceiling time-saving.

Basically, when the number of time-saving times in specific game states B and C ends, the mode shifts to the remaining reserved consumption mode, but if the number of time-saving times in specific game state A remains, the mode may return to specific game state A. In other words, if the number of time-saving times in specific game state A remains even after the number of time-saving times in specific game states B and C ends, the mode may return to specific game state A from specific game states B and C, which continue into specific game state A, and may not shift to the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during specific game state A or if a support hit result occurs,
It is also possible to configure the game so that no time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving occurs, regardless of the relationship between the number of time-saving times in specific game states B and C and the number of time-saving times remaining in specific game state A. Even in this configuration, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, there is no transition from specific game state A to specific game states B and C.

In this embodiment, during the specific game state A, it is preferable not to generate (overlap) a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (c time-saving) caused by a support hit result (time-saving pattern).
That is, even in the specific game state A, a support win may be achieved for the special game with variable symbol 2, but even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, it is preferable not to suddenly trigger a time-saving state due to the time-saving (c time-saving) mode. In this case, the display device 41 and the lamp display device 80 may display a losing symbol as a decorative special symbol for the performance. Also, as explained in FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, it is preferable not to provide a support win for the special game with variable symbol 1, and not to suddenly trigger a time-saving state due to the time-saving (c time-saving) mode, even in normal mode (normal game state). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to transition to the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) only from the transition state for consuming remaining reserves (remaining reserve consumption mode). This increases the value of the remaining reserve consumption mode, encouraging players to focus on the remaining reserve consumption mode and increasing their interest in the game.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 77, when the ceiling number of times is reached or a support hit occurs during the specific game states B and C, the time-saving state may be continuously (overlapped) by the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, or it may not be continuously generated.
It is also possible to transition further to specific game states B and C from the above.

When the transition conditions are met from the specific game states B and C, the game transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) in which the remaining reserved amount is consumed. The transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game state A to the transition state. The transition conditions are (i) that the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the time-shortening number m3, m4 (first predetermined number, initial value of the time-shortening number of times 2), and (ii) that the total number of times the special chart variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game and special chart 2 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state exceeds the second predetermined number (time-shortening number 1) which is greater than the time-shortening number m3, m4 (first predetermined number).
The first predetermined number of times may be the sum of the number of time-saving times and the maximum number of reserved times for special drawing 1 (for example, 4).

In addition, the time-saving number m1-m4 and the ceiling number m5 of the time-saving modes #1-#4 can be adjusted in size as needed to change the gameplay.

For example, in order to balance the profits of the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming states B and C, m1(
a time-saving number of times 1) < m4 (c time-saving number of times) < m2 (a time-saving number of times 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times) < m3
It may be adjusted to satisfy the relationship (b number of time reductions).

In addition, for example, adjustments may be made to satisfy the relationship m1 (number of times a time reduction is 1) < m2 (number of times a time reduction is 2) < m4 (number of times c time reduction is) < m5 (number of times ceiling time reduction is) < m3 (number of times b time reduction is) so that ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) and sudden time reduction (c time reduction) are more advantageous than time reduction following a jackpot (a time reduction).

In addition, for example, adjustments may be made to satisfy the relationship m1 (number of a time reductions 1) < m4 (number of c time reductions) < m3 (number of b time reductions) < m2 (number of a time reductions 2) < m5 (number of ceiling times) so that the profit from ceiling time reductions is reduced.

[Number of time-saving times and remaining reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
78 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the prescribed remaining number of reserved times (prescribed remaining number of reserved times) corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game in this embodiment. The symbols are the symbols that result in a jackpot (including V winnings during small wins), and here they are determined by the jackpot symbol random number, and the time-saving symbols are excluded.

In this embodiment, the pattern A of the jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game is the same as in the first embodiment, except for the number of time reductions. The pattern G of the jackpot (jackpot with remaining reserve) in the special chart 2 variable display game without normal power support is the same as in the first embodiment. For the jackpot (including V winning in a small jackpot) in the special chart 2 variable display game with normal power support, the number of time reductions is fixed at three, so there is only one type of pattern, the pattern S.

In normal game mode (normal mode), a jackpot (pattern A) is displayed by the special chart 1 variable display game.
) occurs, the game state shifts to a specific game state A (time-shortening mode #1) after the big win state ends.
In the specific game state A, if a jackpot (pattern S) occurs in the special chart 2 variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) again after the jackpot state ends.
In this embodiment, when a jackpot (pattern S) occurs in the special chart 2 variable display game, the game transitions to the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A, the number of time-saving times is set to 3, and the number of remaining reserved times is set to 4.
It is fixed to an individual.

[Features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation]
Figure 79 is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 79 (A), there is only one type of winning symbol (winning stop symbol, winning symbol for normal symbol) in the normal symbol variable display game. In this embodiment, regardless of whether normal power support is provided or not, the normal symbol winning probability is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, it is not controlled to change between low probability (low normal symbol probability) and high probability (high normal symbol probability). As in the first embodiment,
The probability may be lower than 250/251 in normal game mode.

The starting memory number (number of reserved normal maps) of the normal map change display game is 4. The maximum count number of normal maps (
The upper limit of the count is 10.

The normal map fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is a fixed value of 500 msec. Note that in normal gameplay, the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 may be set to a value longer than 500 msec. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Note that, although not shown in Figure 79, the sum of the normal remaining ball processing time and the normal map ending time FZ3 may be, for example, 700 msec, which is equal to or longer than the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal map stop time FZ2.

As shown in Figure 79 (B), for each win in the normal game display game, the normal game winning device 37 (normal power) is opened only once, creating a state where it is easy to win. However, the normal power opening time is short (e.g., 48 msec) in a state without normal power support, such as in a normal game state, and long (e.g., 3400 msec) in a state with normal power support, such as in a time-saving state, and the normal power opening pattern (normal power opening mode) varies depending on the game state. As mentioned above, the probability of a normal game win is always a constant value regardless of the game state, so in this embodiment, the easy-to-win state with normal power support is achieved by lengthening the normal power opening time compared to when there is no normal power support.

In addition, the normal power release time may be shorter than the normal map fluctuation time FZ1, the normal map stop time FZ2, the normal power remaining ball processing time, and the normal map ending time FZ3 in a state without normal power support, and the time FZ1-F related to the control of these normal maps and normal power
It takes longer than the Z3.

[Timing chart]
FIG. 80 shows a transition state from a time-saving state as a specific gaming state (which may be included in the normal gaming state).
It is a timing chart showing the game state, special chart change display game (special chart change), normal chart state, normal power state, special chart 2 reserved number, etc. In FIG. 80, for simplicity, the timing of the time reduction end and the timing of the normal power release start are aligned, but this is not limited to this and they may be offset.

FIG. 80(A) shows the time-saving mode #1 of the specific gaming state A (first specific gaming state) following a jackpot.
80(A) shows the situation in which #2 ends and transitions to the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode). In the case of FIG. 80(A), the stop display time STP1 (first period) from the end of the time-saving final variation, which is the final special chart variation display game of time-saving modes #1 and #2, to the start of the next special chart variation display game is made longer than the long normal power open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) which becomes normal power support. In other words, it is set to the relationship STP1>OPN.

In addition, the game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 changes after the end of the jackpot (the number of times the special chart 2 change display game is executed) (A4804). In this embodiment,
Furthermore, the stop display time of the time-saving final variation is set corresponding to the type of time-saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to the time-saving modes #1 and #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the time-saving final variation is set longer than the long normal power open time OPN during which the normal power is in a state where it is easy to win.

In Figure 80, the final time-saving variation is described as a variation in which the number of times the special chart 2 variation after the end of the jackpot becomes the number of times the time-saving is performed (3 times). However, the final time-saving variation may be the special chart 1 variation (special chart 1 variation display game), or the total number of times the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) is performed may be the second predetermined number of times described above.

If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is the maximum of 4 before the start of the final time-saving variation, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 will decrease by 1 to 3 when the final time-saving variation of special chart 2 occurs, but when a game ball enters normal variation winning device 37 due to the normal power release of normal variation winning device 37, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 will again become 4. If a game ball passes through normal chart start gate 34 just before the end of the final time-saving variation, normal power will be released even in the remaining reserved consumption mode after the end of the time-saving variation, depending on the winning result of the normal chart variation display game (normal chart variation) that started at this time.

If the fluctuation of the special chart 2 variable display game (special chart 2 remaining reserve fluctuation) starts during a long period of normal power release in the remaining reserve consumption mode after the time reduction ends, the number of special chart 2 reserves decreases by 1 to 3, and if a game ball enters the normal variation winning device 37 here, the number of special chart 2 reserves becomes 4 again, and the number of remaining reserves, which is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) consumed after the time reduction state ends, becomes 5 (1 + 4).
In addition, during the normal power release in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the fluctuation start of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game
If this happens, the number of remaining reservations may reach six (more than five).

Since the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1, #2) is a jackpot state, the number of balls (
The player's benefits and game value are great in terms of the number of balls acquired). Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid giving the player excessive benefits and game value, the remaining reserve number is set not to exceed the specified remaining reserve number of 4 and not to become 5 or more. For this reason, as mentioned above, the stop display time STP1 of the time-saving final variation in the specific game state A is set even longer than the long normal power open time OPN that becomes normal power support, so that the consumption of the remaining reserve (execution of the special chart 2 variation display game) does not start during the normal power open time OPN (STP1>OPN). This prevents the remaining reserve number from exceeding the specified remaining reserve number of 4
can be kept individually.

In addition, the normal power release time (for example, 48 msec) caused by the result of the normal power fluctuation in the remaining reservation consumption mode is considerably shorter than the normal power release time OPN (for example, 3400 msec) caused by the result of the normal power fluctuation started in the time-saving mode #1, #2. For this reason, in the short-term normal power release in the remaining reservation consumption mode (normal power release after the normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), the special chart 2 reservation (remaining reservation) does not accumulate and the number of remaining reservations does not increase,
The remaining number of reservations will be the specified remaining number of reservations, which is four.

In addition, taking into account the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and normal map stop time FZ2, the stricter condition STP1
It is also possible to set the relationship of STP1 > (OPN + FZ2) or the relationship of STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but the normal power fluctuation time FZ1 and normal power stop time FZ2 are not related to the normal power open time OPN.
Since this is much shorter and can be ignored compared to the above, by setting the relationship STP1>OPN, the effect of maintaining the remaining reservation number at the specified remaining reservation number of 4 can be fully obtained.

On the other hand, FIG. 80(B) shows the specific game states B and C (time-saving state,
The time-saving mode #3, #4 of the second specific game state) ends and transitions to the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode). In the case of Figure 80 (B), the stop display time STP2 (second period) from the end of the time-saving final variation, which is the final special chart variation display game of the time-saving mode #3, #4, to the start of the next special chart variation display game is set to the normal power support long-term normal power open time OPN (third period,
For example, the time is set to be shorter than 3400 msec. In other words, the relationship STP2<OPN is set.
Corresponding to the time-saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the final time-saving variation is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN during which the normal power becomes in a state where it is easy to win (A4804).

Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special chart 2 variable display game (special chart 2 remaining reserve fluctuation) starts during the normal power open in the remaining reserve consumption mode after the time shortening of the time shortening mode #3 and #4 ends, the number of special chart 2 reserved balls decreases by 1 to 3. During this normal power open, if a game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37, the special chart 2
The number of reserved items becomes 4 again, and the number of remaining reserved items, which is the number of special 2 reserved items (remaining reserved items) consumed after the time-saving state ends, becomes 5 (1 + 4). In addition, if the special 2 variable display game starts to change twice during the normal power release in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the number of remaining reserved items becomes 6 (greater than 5).

The specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through the jackpot state.
The player's benefits and gaming value as the number of balls won (the number of balls acquired) are small.
In order to give players greater benefits and gaming value, the possibility of the remaining number of reserved items exceeding the specified remaining number of reserved items of 4 to 5 or more is increased. For this reason, as mentioned above, the stop display time STP2 of the time-saving final variation in the specific gaming states B and C is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN that becomes normal power support, and the remaining reserved items are consumed during the normal power open time OPN (execution of the special chart 2 variation display game).
This makes it easier for the start of the process (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal map start gate 34 just before the end of the time-saving final fluctuation, the normal power release with a long normal power release time OPN will not occur in the remaining reserved consumption mode after the time-saving end,
This long normal power release will be brought forward and some parts will be released before the time-saving period ends. In this case,
Even if you set the relationship of STP2<OPN, the remaining reserved number is only 4, which is the specified remaining reserved number.
Sometimes there aren't more than one.

In addition, taking into account the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal map stop time FZ2, the more relaxed condition STP2<
It is also possible to set the relationship (OPN + FZ2) or the relationship STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but by setting the stricter condition STP2 < OPN, which has a narrower range of STP2 values, the possibility of the remaining reserved number being 5 or more is reliably increased.

In this embodiment, STP2 (second period) < OPN (third period) < STP1 (
In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the time-saving final fluctuation in the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1, #2) is set to the time-saving final fluctuation in the specific game state B, C (time-saving mode #3,
#4) The stop display time STP2 of the time-saving final variation is set to be longer than the time displayed in #4. Here, if there is a remaining reserved game, the stop display time of the time-saving final variation is the same as the time from the end of the final special game display game to the start of the next special game display game.

Regardless of the normal power open time OPN, the relationship STP2<STP1 is satisfied.
Since the start of the change in the remaining reserved balls after the time-saving ends in specific game states B and C is earlier than in specific game state A, the possibility of the number of remaining reserved balls being larger in specific game states B and C than in specific game state A is increased. This makes it possible to mitigate the difference (difference in benefits and game value) between specific game state A, which has a large number of balls released after going through a jackpot state, and specific game states B and C, which have a small number of balls released without going through a jackpot state. Therefore, even in specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, which have fewer balls released than specific game state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) following a jackpot, benefits and game value are compensated, increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when the conditions for generating specific game states B and C are met during specific game state A, that is, when the ceiling number of times is reached during specific game state A or when a support hit result occurs, the stop display time of the time-saving final variation is not STP1 (first period) but STP2, which is smaller than STP1.
In this case, after a jackpot, the specific game state A may be continuously (overlapped) into a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving (specific game state B, C).
The stop display time of the time-saving final fluctuation is set to a short time STP2, and the series of time-saving states after the jackpot (
After the final time-saving fluctuation of the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C, a special benefit or game value can be further given by a small STP2 (second period), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Basically, when the time-saving count of specific game states B and C continuing into specific game state A ends, the game transitions to the remaining reserved consumption mode, and the final time-saving fluctuation occurs in specific game states B and C. When specific game states B and C occur from specific game state A, the time-saving fluctuation count 1 and 2 areas are overwritten with the time-saving count of specific game states B and C (the initial values of time-saving fluctuation count 1 and 2), causing the remaining time-saving count in specific game state A to disappear. However, if the configuration is such that the remaining time-saving count in specific game state A is copied to another predetermined area and remains there even after the time-saving count of specific game states B and C continuing into specific game state A ends, the game returns from specific game states B and C continuing into specific game state A to specific game state A, and there is no need to transition to the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode). In this case, the final time-saving fluctuation occurs in specific game state A. The remaining number of time reductions is smaller than the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 for the specific game state A and is larger than zero.

Furthermore, even if a time-saving symbol (a support hit result) that can cause specific game states B and C is displayed during specific game state A, the display time for the final time-saving variation may be set to STP1, which is longer than STP2, rather than STP2. In a configuration (preferred configuration) in which a time-saving symbol is displayed but the time-saving state caused by the time-saving symbol does not continue to occur from specific game state A, the long first period (STP1) maintains the remaining reserved number consumed after specific game state A at the specified remaining reserved number, as described above, preventing specific game state A following a jackpot from becoming too advantageous. Furthermore, even in a configuration in which a time-saving symbol causes a time-saving state to continue to occur from specific game state A, specific game states B and C can be prevented from becoming too advantageous because they are reached via specific game state A following a jackpot.

[Actions and Effects of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a special symbol variable display game), and can generate a special game state (e.g., a jackpot state) advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A) advantageous to the player following the special game state, accompanied by the generation of the special game state, and can also generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game states B and C) advantageous to the player without the generation of the special game state.
The game control means controls a first period from the end of the final game of the first specific game state to the start of the next game.
The period (for example, the stop display time STP1 of the time-saving final variation) is set to a second period (for example, the stop display time S
TP2).

In this gaming machine 10, because the second period is shorter than the first period, the maximum accumulated start memory (remaining reserve) in the second specific game state is consumed more quickly after the end of the second specific game state, potentially allowing for the accumulation of additional start memory (remaining reserve). This reduces the difference in profit between a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A) in which a special game state profit (e.g., payout) can be obtained by going through a special game state, and a second specific game state (e.g., specific game states B and C) in which a special game state profit (e.g., payout) cannot be obtained without going through a special game state. Therefore, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of a special game state, profits are compensated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., a normal variable winning device 37) that can be converted between an easy-to-win state and a non-easy-to-win state and is more likely to convert to the easy-to-win state in the first and second specific game states than in the normal game state. The third period (e.g., the normal power open time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy-to-win state is shorter than the first period (STP1) and longer than the second period (STP2). Therefore, the number of remaining reserved balls consumed after the end of the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A) can be maintained at a specified number of remaining reserved balls, and the likelihood that the number of remaining reserved balls consumed after the end of the second specific game state (e.g., specific game states B and C) will exceed the specified number of remaining reserved balls is increased. This ensures profits and enhances the enjoyment of the game, even in the second specific game state, which does not involve the occurrence of a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control device 100)
The period from the end of the last game in the first specific gaming state to the start of the next game is called the first period (
The game control means can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game as a first period (STP1), and can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game as a second period (STP2). When the condition for generating the second specific game state is met during the first specific game state (for example, when the ceiling number of plays is reached or a support win result occurs), the game control means can set the period from the end of the final game of the specific game state as the first specific game state or the second specific game state to the start of the next game as a second period that is shorter than the first period, rather than as the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of gaming states including a special gaming state, a first specific gaming state, and a second specific gaming state, a bonus or gaming value can be further provided for a short second period (STP2), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control device 100)
The game control means can set the period from the end of the final game of the first specific game state to the start of the next game as the first period, and can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game as the second period.
The period from the end of the final game of a specific game state or a specific game state as a second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set to a first period (STP1) that is longer than the second period (STP2) rather than to a second period.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of a game that may cause a second specific gaming state to occur is displayed, if the configuration is such that the second specific gaming state is not continuously (overlappingly) caused to occur from the first specific gaming state, the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific gaming state following the special gaming state from becoming too advantageous. Also, even if the configuration is such that the second specific gaming state is continuously (overlappingly) caused to occur from the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state passes through the first specific gaming state following the special gaming state, so the second specific gaming state can be prevented from becoming too advantageous.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 81 to 98. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first or second embodiment.
The same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first or second embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate in the following description. The third embodiment relates to a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation pattern group) for selecting a variation pattern of a variation display game.

[Game board]
Referring to Figure 81, the game board 30 in the third embodiment will be described. The game board 30 in Figure 81 differs from the game board 30 in Figure 2 in that another normal map start gate 34 is added near the normal winning opening 35 in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40. Two normal map start gates 34 exist in the game area 32, one on the right side of the center case 40 and one at the lower left. The function and configuration of the normal map start gate 34 itself are the same as those in the first embodiment. Specifically, a gate switch 34a is provided inside the normal map start gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a, a normal map change display game is executed.

Since the normal map start gate 34 is present in the game area 32 at the lower left, even if the game ball is hit from the left (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, the normal map variation display game is executed by the game ball passing through the normal map start gate 34. When the result of the normal map variation display game is a winning result, the movable member 37b is converted into an open state (a state where it is easy to win), and the normal variation winning device 3
However, in order to make the game ball win the normal variable winning device 37 in the right-hand game area 32, the player is required to have the skill to quickly switch the game ball's launch mode (hitting method) from left-handed to right-handed immediately after the game ball passes through the normal map starting gate 34 at the lower left. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the normal map starting gate 34 at the lower left and the normal variable winning device 37 in the right-hand game area 32 is converted to an open state, the normal variable winning device 37
There is no guarantee that the game ball will land in the prize.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Figure 82 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the third embodiment. Figure 82 is similar to Figure 77, but differs from Figure 77 in that the normal power support becomes high support in the specific game state B (time-saving mode #3) that occurs when the ceiling number of times is reached, and the normal power support becomes medium support in the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) that occurs due to the time-saving pattern. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure some or all of the specific game state to be a probability variable state (with normal power support/special pattern high probability) in which the jackpot probability is a high probability state.

In the medium support mode, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in the normal game state without normal electric support (electric support), but it is more difficult to convert to the open state than in the high support mode.
The profits that players get increase in the order of normal power support (no power support) < medium support < high support.
In the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 37 is more likely to be converted to the open state than in the normal game state, but is more difficult to be converted to the open state than in the specific game state B.

In the specific gaming state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) that occurs following a jackpot, the normal power support may be the same type of high support as in the specific gaming state B, or it may be another type of high support. In this other type of high support, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in the specific gaming state C, and is either more difficult or easier to convert to the open state than in the specific gaming state B. If the high support in the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming state B are the same type, control is simplified, while if they are different types, gameplay becomes more varied.

In the specific game states A and B, the normal variable winning device 37 is more likely to open, so a right shot aimed at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended as the mode of launching the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game states A and B, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

As mentioned above, winning the first start winning slot 36 or the occurrence of the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory, special chart 1 reserve) is the first start condition that enables the special chart 1 variable display game to be executed. Winning the normal variable winning device 37 or the occurrence of the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserve) is the second start condition that enables the special chart 2 variable display game to be executed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 3
Although 7 is slightly more likely to open than in the normal game state, if right-handed hits are continued during the specific game state C, the disadvantage of not winning the starting winning slot 36 becomes greater. For example, if the number of winnings into the starting winning slot 36 per unit number of balls fired when hitting from the left is greater than the number of winnings into the normal variable winning device 37 per unit number of balls fired when hitting from the right, the disadvantage of hitting from the right becomes greater than the disadvantage of hitting from the left.

For this reason, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, a left-handed shot aimed at the start winning hole 36 is basically recommended as the launch mode (hitting method) of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state C, the main starting area is the first start winning hole 36 and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, so the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game.

As the presentation mode of the specific game state A, the time-saving modes #1 and #2 are the same as those in FIGS. 71A and 77.
In this embodiment, the time-saving numbers m1 and m2 for the time-saving modes #1 and #2 are 4, respectively.
However, it may be a variable value to increase the variety of the game. For example, the number of time-saving times m2 may be selected by lottery as 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the probability of a small win in the special chart 2 variable display game is 1
/15.79 and the time-saving count m2 is small. For this reason, in time-saving mode #2, a small win (a big win state of V passing) does not occur reliably, so it does not become the next continuation confirmation mode (confirmation mode).

The presentation mode of the specific game state B is the time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode of the specific game state C is the time-saving mode #4. The presentation modes are different, and the player can distinguish between the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) and the time-saving state due to the sudden time-saving (c time-saving) by the presentation. In addition, by making the presentation mode the same for the specific game state B and the specific game state C, it is possible to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times m3 and m4 for the time-saving modes #3 and #4 are
are fixed values of 251 times and 30 times, respectively, but may be made variable to increase the variety of games. For example, multiple time-saving symbols such as a time-saving symbol for 50 times, a time-saving symbol for 30 times, and a time-saving symbol for 20 times may be provided, and the average number of time-saving symbols m4 may be set to 30 by drawing a lottery using a support symbol random number at 10%, 70%, and 20% respectively.

In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are different presentation modes from time-saving modes #1 and #2,
The time-saving state resulting from a jackpot (specific gaming state A) and the time-saving state not resulting from a jackpot (specific gaming states B and C) can be distinguished by the presentation.
By making the presentation mode the same, it is possible to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs.

Next, we will explain the transitions from each game state.

In this embodiment, the ceiling number m5 is 580 times, and in the specific game state A and the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode), the number of special chart variable display games executed under predetermined conditions (special chart low probability state, state other than the probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot state will not reach the ceiling number. Therefore, there is no transition from the specific game state A and the remaining reserved consumption mode to the specific game state B.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state or the specific game state C, when the number of times the special chart variable display game is executed under predetermined conditions after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is entered and the game transitions to the specific game state B (time reduction mode #3).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no support hit (time-saving result, time-saving pattern) in the result of the special chart 2 variable display game, and there is a support hit only in the result of the special chart 1 variable display game. In order to do this, in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 23), the support hit determination process (A3607-A
3609) is executed, and conversely, in the jackpot flag 2 setting process (FIG. 24), the support hit determination process (A3707-A3709) is not executed. Therefore, basically, the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game during the specific game state A, the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), and the specific game state B do not transition to the specific game state C.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game, if the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is a support result (time-saving pattern), it will suddenly transition to a specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) as time-saving (c time-saving).
In a normal game state where the player gets little profit and the presentation tends to be monotonous, the interest in the game can be improved by providing a special benefit that results in a support winning result (time-saving pattern).

Furthermore, if a transition condition is met without a small win or a big win occurring in the specific game states B and C, the game transitions to a transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) in which the remaining reserve is consumed.
The transition condition for transitioning from the specific game state to the transition state may be the same as that in FIG. 77 of the second embodiment. That is, the transition condition is, (i) the number of executions of the special game state 2 variable display game is the time-saving number m3, m
4 (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) the total number of executions of the special chart variable display game (the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) in the specific game state is the time-saving number m3
, or exceeds a second predetermined number of times greater than m4 (first predetermined number of times). The second predetermined number of times may be the number of time-saving times plus the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2. In addition, regarding the condition (i) for transitioning from the specific game state C to the transition state, the number of times the special game state 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is executed in the specific game state C may exceed the number of time-saving times m4.

[Number of time-saving times and remaining reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
83 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserved times corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game in the third embodiment. The symbols are the symbols that result in a jackpot (including a jackpot due to a V prize), and here, the time-saving symbols are excluded.

As shown in (A), in this embodiment, in the state without normal power support, the jackpot pattern of the special chart 1 variable display game only has pattern A1 (mainly a jackpot in the normal game state)
The only difference between the A1 pattern and the A pattern in the first and second embodiments is the number of time-saving cycles (four in this case). Furthermore, with normal power support, the only jackpot pattern in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game is the P1 pattern (primarily a jackpot in Special Game State C). The P1 pattern has 30 time-saving cycles (m2), and the specified remaining reserve number is four. The A1 and P1 jackpot patterns are not jackpots resulting from a V win, but are instead stop patterns determined by a jackpot random number. It's also possible to configure the A1 and P1 patterns as jackpot stop patterns for a V win in a small win in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game. However, if there's a small win random number in addition to the jackpot random number, the A1 and P1 patterns can also be configured as small win stop patterns determined by the small win random number.

In the state without normal power support, when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the only pattern is the pattern A1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, in the normal game state, when the special chart 1 variable display game of the main variable display game is a jackpot, after the jackpot state, it transitions to the time-saving mode #1 (time-saving number of times 4) of the specific game state A. In addition to the pattern A1, it is also possible to provide a pattern P1 so that after the jackpot state of the special chart 1 variable display game, it transitions to the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A (such as the dotted line in Figure 82). Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pattern P1 instead of the pattern A1, and
When the variable display game becomes a jackpot, the game changes from the normal game state to the jackpot state and then to the specific game state A.
The mode may be changed to the time-saving mode #2.

In the state with normal power support, when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the only pattern is the pattern P1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, in the specific game state C, when the special chart 1 variable display game of the main variable display game is a jackpot, after the jackpot state, it transitions to the time-saving mode #2 (time-saving number of 30 times) of the specific game state A. In addition to the pattern P1, a pattern A1 is provided,
After the special chart 1 variable display game hits a jackpot, the game may transition to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A. Alternatively, a pattern A1 may be provided instead of the pattern P1, and when the special chart 1 variable display game hits a jackpot, the game may transition from the specific game state C to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A via the jackpot state.
It may be configured to transition to 1.

As shown in (B), for a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game with normal power support, there is only one type of symbol, symbol S1, which results in a time-saving count m2 of 30 times after the jackpot has ended, and the allocation is 100%. In this embodiment, a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game is achieved by a V prize in a small jackpot, but this is not limited to this. When a jackpot occurs in the special chart 2 variable display game of the main variable display game in specific game states A-C with normal power support, the game transitions to time-saving mode #2 in specific game state A. In addition to symbol S1, two other symbols with time-saving count m2 of 20 and 50 may be provided, and the time-saving count m2 of 20, 30, or 50 may be selected by lottery for the symbol allocation.

In this embodiment, the probability of a small win differs between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and the small win upper limit judgment value (A3900) differs between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game. The probability of a small win in the special chart 2 variable display game is 1/15.79, while the probability of a small win in the special chart 1 variable display game is 1/199.80. Therefore, in the specific game state A, specific game state B, and transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) where the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, it is easier to win a small win, and in turn a big win due to a V win on a small win, than in the normal game state and specific game state C where the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

The pattern G1 of the jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game without normal power support (jackpot due to V winning of a small jackpot in the remaining reserve) is the same as the pattern G of the first embodiment. There is only one type of pattern, G1, which gives 30 times the number of time-saving times m2 granted after the jackpot ends, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), when the special chart 2 variable display game of the main variable display game becomes a jackpot, it transitions to the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A. In addition, since the pattern G1 and the pattern S1 transition to the same time-saving mode after the jackpot ends,
The symbol G1 and the symbol S1 may be common symbols. In addition to the symbol G1, two symbols are provided, one for the time-saving number m2 of 20 times and the other for the time-saving number m2 of 50 times, and the other for the time-saving number m2 of 20 times and 50 times.
2 may be selected from 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times. In addition to the symbol G1, a symbol A1 may be provided to transition to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific gaming state A (see FIG. 82).
dotted line).

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the normal gaming state, transition state, specific gaming state A, specific gaming state B, and specific gaming state C occur based on individual occurrence conditions (transition conditions).
The transition conditions may be different from each other.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the special symbol 1 variable display game is a jackpot in the specific game state C, just as when the special symbol 2 variable display game is a jackpot (in the case of symbols S1 and G1), after the jackpot ends, the game transitions to time-saving mode #2, and 30 time-saving times are obtained in high support. Therefore, even if the specific game state C is medium support rather than high support, it is very advantageous for the player and increases the interest of the game. In addition, since the specific game state C in medium support does not change to a state with normal power support, it is treated as a consecutive win in which the jackpot state and the specific game state continue without going through normal mode (or normal game state).

As shown in the pie chart of the ratio of the upper limit of the number of rounds in (C), when there are multiple upper limit of the number of rounds (number of jackpot rounds), there may be a jackpot pattern corresponding to each upper limit of the number of rounds. For example, as shown in (C), when there are three types of upper limit of the number of rounds for the jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game, namely 9R, 6R, and 3R, the pattern S1-9R (distribution 15
%), pattern S1-6R (allocation 10%), pattern S1-3R (allocation 75%), pattern G1-9R (allocation 15%), pattern G1-6R (allocation 10%), pattern G1-3R (
There may be a symbol corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds, such as a 75% allocation. In the case of a jackpot resulting from a V winning on a small jackpot, the small jackpot may be considered as one round and included in the upper limit of the number of rounds, or the small jackpot may not be included in the upper limit of the number of rounds.

[Working hours reduction status]
FIG. 84 is a table summarizing the operation status of the time-saving function when a new time-saving operation trigger occurs from each game state. The time-saving operation trigger is the time-saving function that has been activated via a jackpot (time-saving function A).
If it is a ceiling time reduction (b time reduction), the ceiling number of times has been reached, and if it is a sudden time reduction (c
In the case of time-saving, it is the setting and derivation (display) of the time-saving pattern.

As mentioned above, in the normal game state (including the remaining reserve consumption mode) and specific game states A-C, when a jackpot occurs as a trigger for the a time reduction, the game will go through the jackpot state, and immediately after the jackpot ends, the a time reduction will be activated and the game will transition to specific game state A.

In the normal gaming state (including the remaining reserved consumption mode), the specific gaming state A, and the specific gaming state C, when the ceiling number of times is reached, which triggers the b time reduction, the b time reduction is activated, and a transition to the specific gaming state B is possible. However, even if the ceiling number of times is reached in the specific gaming state B, which triggers the b time reduction, a new ceiling time reduction activation flag (A5115) is not generated, and a new b time reduction cannot be activated. In this way, the b time reduction is prohibited from being overlapped in the specific gaming state B, preventing a situation in which the specific gaming state B is essentially extended and preventing an excessive advantage from being given to the player. Note that in this embodiment, since the ceiling number of times cannot be reached in the specific gaming state A and the remaining reserved consumption mode of the normal gaming state, a transition to the specific gaming state B is not actually made from the specific gaming state A or the remaining reserved consumption mode of the normal gaming state. This prevents an excessive advantage from being given to the player.

As mentioned above, when the ceiling number of times is reached and the game transitions from the medium support specific game state C (c time reduction) to the high support specific game state B (b time reduction), the presentation mode switches from time reduction mode #4 to time reduction mode #3, and the presentation changes. Also, in this case, the way of hitting the game ball switches from a left-handed hitting state in which left-handed hitting is recommended to a right-handed hitting state in which right-handed hitting is recommended, and the main variable display game switches from the special chart 1 variable display game to the special chart 2 variable display game.

In addition, in the normal game state (excluding the remaining reserve consumption mode), when a time-saving symbol is derived by a support hit as a trigger for the occurrence of the c time-saving, the c time-saving is activated and the game transitions to the specific game state C. However, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the remaining reserve consumption mode of the normal game state, the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, and as described above, the support hit (time-saving symbol) does not occur in the special chart 2 variable display game, so the c time-saving does not operate and the game transitions to the specific game state C.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a time-saving symbol is derived as a c-time-saving trigger by the special symbol 1 variable display game in the specific game state C, for example, by not executing the setting of the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (A5126) and the support operation setting process (A5127), the operation of the c-time-saving is prohibited and new c-time-saving is disabled. In this way, the c-time-saving is prohibited from occurring twice in the specific game state C, eliminating the situation in which the specific game state C is substantially extended and preventing excessive advantage to the player. In addition, in the specific game state C,
When a time-saving pattern is derived in the time-saving pattern, it is also possible to reset the initial value of the time-saving variation count and execute the support activation setting process to activate a new c time-saving pattern. However, even in this configuration, if the remaining number of time-saving patterns is greater than the initial value of the time-saving variation count (the number of time-saving patterns of the new c time-saving pattern), the remaining number of time-saving patterns will suddenly decrease, so the new c time-saving pattern may be made inoperable and canceled.

In addition, in the specific game states A and B, if the start winning slot 36 is won and there is no special game state 2 start memory, the special game state 1 variable display game may be executed, but the operation of the c time reduction may be forcibly prohibited so as not to transition to the specific game state C.
In this case, even if the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is a support hit (time-saving pattern), the setting of the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (A5126) and the support activation setting process (A5127) are not executed.

[Display on the collective display device]
Fig. 85 is a diagram illustrating the display of the collective display device 50 according to the third embodiment. Note that the display of the collective display device 50 other than that shown in Fig. 85 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, since there is no special high probability state, unlike the first embodiment, the LED lamp D9 (third game state display unit 59) is the LED lamp D7 (first game state display unit 57).
Similarly, the light will turn on or off to indicate whether the ball is being hit from the right or left (normal hit).

In the state without normal power support (no power support), that is, in the normal game state or transition state,
The LED lamps D7 and D9 on the collective display device 50 are off, indicating that the device is in left-handed play mode (normal play mode), and the LED lamp D17 on the collective display device 50 is also off, indicating that the variable time reduction function is not activated (i.e., non-time reduction mode).

In the specific game state C, which is the time reduction c, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are turned off to indicate that it is in the left-hand hitting state (normal hitting state), while the LED lamp D17 is turned on to indicate that the variable time shortening function is activated (i.e., the time shortening state). However, exceptionally, if a win (normal winning) of the normal symbol variable display game occurs during the time reduction c (specific game state C), the LED lamps D7 and D9 as right-hand hitting LEDs will light up at the timing when the winning symbol stops to indicate that it is in the right-hand hitting state in which the normal power is released. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the lower left playing area 32
When the normal map variation display game executed by the game ball passing through the normal map start gate 34 becomes a win and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted into an open state by the center support, an instruction (suggestion) to hit to the right is notified to the player.

In addition, in the specific gaming state C, a left-hit instruction display instructing a left hit and a right-hit instruction display instructing a right hit may be displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with the left-hit state and right-hit state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50. In this way, even an unskilled player can easily grasp that they are hitting right, and can more easily receive the benefit of the normal power release by the center support. In addition, the right-hit instruction display on the display device 41 may be displayed not when the LED lamps D7 and D9 light up, but when the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) actually opens, so as to benefit the player. Also, in the specific gaming state C, when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a normal win in a short time (for example, 50 msec or less) (in the case of the normal power release pattern H1 described below), the right-hit instruction display is displayed on the display device 41 in order not to disappoint the player.
It does not have to be displayed in.

Furthermore, since a right-hit state in which right-hitting is recommended occurs exceptionally in the specific gaming state C, regardless of the left-hit state or right-hit state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9, the left-hit instruction display may always be displayed on the display device 41. In this way, skilled players will hit right in response to the normal power release, making it easier for them to receive benefits from the center support, and as players try to increase their skill, the operation of the gaming machine 10 may improve.

Furthermore, since the left-hit state is the normal state in the specific game state C, the left-hit instruction display may not be displayed on the display device 41 so as not to cause discomfort to the player, or the left-hit instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 only for a specified period when transitioning to the specific game state C.

Furthermore, in a specific game state A which is time-saving a and a specific game state B which is time-saving b,
The lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that the player is in the right-hand hit state, and the LED lamp D17
lights up to indicate that the variable time reduction function is active.

During the big win state and small win game state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that the state is a right-hit state, and the LED lamp D17 is off to indicate that the variable time shortening function is not in operation (i.e., non-time shortening state). Exceptionally, in a specific game state, during a short-time small win game state without a V prize due to the small win result of the special chart 1 variable display game (during the small win opening in FIG. 98), the variable time shortening function is not turned off (the no time shortening flag is not saved) and remains in operation, so the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that the right-hit state is in operation, and the LED lamp D17 is lit to indicate that the variable time shortening function is in operation (i.e., time shortening state). Also, during a long-time small win game state due to the small win result of the special chart 2 variable display game (during the small win opening in FIG. 98), a V prize will definitely occur and a big win will occur, so the variable time shortening function is turned off (
The variable time reduction function is deactivated (by saving the no time reduction flag), and the LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not activated (i.e., the non-time reduction state).

[Features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation]
Figures 86 and 87 are diagrams showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in the third embodiment.

As shown in Figure 86, the winning symbols (winning stop symbols, winning symbols) of the normal game are 3.
In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not there is normal power support, the normal winning probability is always a constant value of 250/251, and is not controlled to change between low probability (low normal probability) and high probability (high normal probability). Note that the probability may be lower than 250/251 in the normal game state or in the specific game state C with medium support.

The starting memory number (number of reserved normal maps) of the normal map fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum count number of normal maps (
The upper limit of the count is 5. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 600 msec regardless of the game status.

The normal game time, which is the time when the game changes, is 5000 msec in the normal game state and transition state without normal power support (power support), and 4900 msec in the specific game state C of time reduction.
msec for specific game state A with time reduction a and specific game state B with time reduction b, and 200 msec for specific game state A with time reduction b. The normal map fluctuation time becomes shorter in the following order: no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game states A and B). Thus, compared to the state without normal electric support (low support) in the normal game state and transition state, in the specific game state C with medium support, it is slightly more likely to enter a normal electric winning state (open state), and in the specific game states A and B with high support, it is extremely likely to enter a normal electric winning state. Note that the normal map fluctuation time is set in the normal game processing based on the support state corresponding to each game state (i.e., no electric support, medium support, high support) (A7920 in Figure 46).

As shown in Figure 87 (A), by allocating 65,521 possible winning random numbers (A7710) for regular winning symbols, winning stop symbol number 1 corresponding to winning symbol 1 is set with a probability of 65,321/65,521, winning stop symbol number 2 corresponding to winning symbol 2 is set with a probability of 100/65,521, and winning stop symbol number 3 corresponding to winning symbol 3 is set with a probability of 100/65,521 (A7912).

LED lamps D8, D10, D18 of the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal game fluctuation display are turned on/
Depending on the combination of lights out, the winning symbol is (light out, light on, light out), and the winning symbol is (light out,
The winning symbol for the winning symbol number 0 (A7909) is displayed as (off, off, off).
It will be displayed as follows.

The normal power opening pattern is the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) in one normal winning. In normal times, that is, in the normal game state and the transition state, the normal power opening pattern is
For all symbols of 3, the pattern H1 is a short-term normal power release pattern, and since the pattern H1 is selected with a 100% probability, there is no normal power support (no power support).
In the specific game state B (a time reduction) and the specific game state B (b time reduction), the normal power release pattern is pattern H3, which is a long-term normal power release for all patterns 1 to 3, and there is a 100% probability of pattern H3
will be selected, resulting in high support.

On the other hand, in the specific game state C (c time reduction), the normal power release pattern is pattern H1 for the winning symbol 1, and pattern H2 for the winning symbols 2 and 3, which opens the normal power twice.
Pattern H1 and pattern H2 are mixed. Pattern H1, which is a short-term normal power open once, is 653.
The probability of selection is 21/65521 x 100%, and the pattern H2 of normal power release twice is 200
/65521 × 100% probability. In this way, in the specific gaming state C, the selection probability of pattern H1, which results in a shorter normal power release time than pattern H2, is much higher than the selection probability of pattern H2, resulting in medium support. By making the medium support (specific gaming state C) slightly more advantageous than no power support (normal gaming state), the profits of the player and the gaming facility are adjusted so that the profits of the player do not become too large.

As mentioned above, the patterns corresponding to hits 2 and 3 are the same in each game state.
Wins 2 and 3 may be combined into one win.

As shown in Figure 87 (B), in the short-time opening pattern H1, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a short time only once. The normal power opening time (A8407) of pattern H1 is 36 msec, the normal power remaining ball processing time (A8708) is 600 msec, and the normal game ending time (A8903) is 100 msec.
) is 100 msec, and the recovery time until the next map variation display game becomes possible after the map ending is 4 msec (the interrupt period of the timer interrupt processing).

In the pattern H2 of two normal power releases, the normal variable winning device 37 is released twice, with the normal power release time being 36 msec for the first release and 1624 msec for the second release. The normal power release time for the first release (A8407) is the same as the normal power release time of 36 msec for pattern H1. While pattern H2 is indistinguishable from pattern H1 for the first release, the second release surprises the player and increases their interest in the game. The normal power release time for the second release (A87
04) is considerably longer than the normal open time of the first opening. Also, the normal open time of the second opening of pattern H2 (1624 msec) or the total opening time of the first and second openings (36
The normal power release time (36 msec + 1624 msec) is longer than the normal power release time of 36 msec in pattern H1. The normal power remaining bulb processing time, normal power ending time, and recovery time in pattern H2 are the same as those in pattern H1, making normal power control simpler.

Furthermore, in pattern H2, the wait time between the first and second openings (A
The time between the first and second normal power releases (8702) is longer than the time between the first and second normal power releases, for example, 3000 msec. The player who has confirmed the passage of the game ball through the normal power start gate 34 at the bottom left and the first normal power release has this long waiting time to switch from hitting left to hitting right, and can hit right in time for the second discharge release. The total time from the start of the normal power release to the completion of the recovery time for pattern H2 (36 msec + 3000 msec + 1624 msec)
The total time of pattern H1 (36 msec+704 msec) is longer than the total time of pattern H1 (36 msec+704 msec) and the total time of pattern H3 (2800 msec+704 msec).

In the long-time opening pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a long time only once.
The normal power release time (A8407) of pattern H3 is 2800 msec, longer than the 36 msec normal power release time of pattern H1, and longer than the normal power release time of the second release of pattern H2 (1624 msec) or the total release time (36 msec + 1624 msec). Therefore, pattern H3 makes it easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 than patterns H1 and H2. The normal power remaining ball processing time, normal game ending time, and return time of pattern H3 are the same as patterns H1 and H2, making normal power control easier.

As described above, the total open time of normal electricity increases in the order of pattern H1 < pattern H2 < pattern H3, and the selection probability of pattern H1, which has the shortest total open time, decreases in the order of no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game state A, B). And, without electric support, the selection probability of pattern H1 is 100
%, and at high support, the selection probability of pattern H3 is 100%. Also, as mentioned above, the normal fluctuation time decreases in the order of no electric support > medium support > high support. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electric support < medium support < high support.

In this embodiment, the normal power release time, the winning start pointer value, and the winning end pointer value are set in accordance with the normal power stop symbol information (the winning symbols 1-3) and the support state (no electric support, medium support, high support) according to each game state (A8405-A840 in FIG. 49).
7, A8704 in FIG. 51). Therefore, for the normal power release of pattern H1, the first and second normal power release of pattern H2, and the normal power release of pattern H3, the normal power release time is
For patterns H1 and H3, the hit start pointer value and hit end pointer value are set to the same value (here, 0), and normal power is released only once. Furthermore, for pattern H3, the hit start pointer value and hit end pointer value are set to different values (here, 0 and 2), and normal power is released twice.

In this embodiment, since only pattern H2 has a second normal power release, the wait time and the normal power release time of the second normal power release are determined based on the normal power stop pattern information for winning numbers 2 and 3,
Furthermore, it is set in the normal power operation transition setting process only for the support state (medium support) corresponding to the specific game state C, i.e., only for pattern H2 (A8702 and A8704 in Figure 51).

The normal remaining ball processing time and normal ending time are set to the same value regardless of the normal stop pattern information (winning patterns 1-3) and the support state (no electric support, medium support, high support) according to each game state, that is, regardless of which of patterns H1-H3 it is (A in FIG. 51).
8708, A8903 in FIG. 52). However, these may be set in accordance with the normal stop symbol information and the support state.

[Special drawing information setting process]
Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart information setting process according to the third embodiment.
The special chart information setting process is executed in the special chart 1 change start process and the special chart 2 change start process (A
3404, A3504). In the process of Fig. 88, unlike Fig. 28 of the first embodiment, the distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation is eliminated for simplicity, but the distinction may be made.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection pointer table (A14
201), and using this variable group selection pointer table, obtain a variable group selection pointer corresponding to the performance mode information (A14202). As shown in Figure 82, normal mode,
The remaining reserved consumption mode, time-saving modes #1-#4, and other presentation modes correspond to each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state A-C).
By processing 2, a variation pattern table is set according to each game state as described below.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the variable group selection offset table (A
14203), and using this variable group selection offset table, offset data corresponding to the variable pattern discrimination flag and the stopping pattern pattern is obtained (A14204).

The variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variable symbol to be started, and determines whether the variable symbol display game to be started is the special symbol 1 variable symbol display game or the special symbol 2 variable symbol display game. Therefore, by processing step A14204, the variable symbol table can be made different between the special symbol 1 variable symbol display game and the special symbol 2 variable symbol display game, as described later. Also,
The stopping pattern is the result of the special chart change display game (big hit, small hit, support hit, miss)
Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, the variation pattern table can be changed according to the result of the special chart variation display game.

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A14205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information area as variable allocation information (A14206).

[Variation pattern setting process]
Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. The variation pattern setting process is executed in the special chart 1 variation start process and the special chart 2 variation start process (A3406, A3506). Note that in the process of Figure 89, unlike Figure 29 of the first embodiment, for simplicity, there is no distinction between the first half variation and the second half variation, but they may be distinguished. Also, for simplicity, only one variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) is used among the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3.

The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation selection address table (fluctuation group table) (A14301). Then, it acquires and prepares the address of a fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table) corresponding to the fluctuation allocation information (A14206) (A14302). Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a fluctuation pattern group consisting of a collection of one or more fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers), and is set by acquiring its address (for example, the first address). As mentioned above, in the special symbol information setting process (Fig. 88), the fluctuation allocation information is set based on the presentation mode, variable symbol discrimination flag, and stop symbol pattern corresponding to the game state. For this reason, the fluctuation pattern table (
You can set a group of fluctuation patterns.

After that, the variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the target (special chart 1 or special chart 2) and prepared (A14303).
14304), and obtain the variable number obtained as a result of allocation and save it in the variable number area (A14305). The variable number is associated with a predetermined variation pattern and indicates the predetermined variation pattern (for example, a normal reach miss A, an SP3 reach jackpot B, etc.). In this way, in the variation pattern setting process, a variation number as a variation pattern is set by a lottery-based allocation process based on the variation pattern table.

[Variable start information setting process]
Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting fluctuation start information according to the third embodiment. The fluctuation start information setting process is executed in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process (A3407, A3507). In Figure 90, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Figure 32 of the first embodiment, and explanations are omitted. In the process of Figure 90, unlike Figure 32 of the first embodiment, for simplicity, the distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation is eliminated, but it may be distinguished.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A4600b is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is in the time-saving mode #1 or the remaining reserve consumption mode (A4600c).
4600c is "Y"), the variable time value corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 has changed after the big win (the number of times the special chart 2 change display game has been executed) is saved in the special chart game processing timer area (A4615
). As a result, in the case of a miss in the time-saving mode #1 or the remaining reserved consumption mode (no support hit), the fluctuation time value of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game is set for each number of times the special chart 2 changes after the end of the jackpot, and the number of rotations is controlled. The number of rotations controlled in the time-saving mode #1 or the remaining reserved consumption mode may increase the interest in the game.

In step A4600c, instead, the specific gaming state A (time-saving mode #1,
In step A4600c, it is determined whether the game is in the specific game state A or the remaining reserved consumption mode, and in the case of a miss in the specific game state A or the remaining reserved consumption mode, the rotation speed of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled. Alternatively, in step A4600c, it is determined only whether the game is in the remaining reserved consumption mode, and in the case of a miss only in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the rotation speed of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled. In step A4600c, it is determined only whether the game is in the time-saving mode #1, and in the case of a miss only in the time-saving mode #1,
The rotation speed of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled.

The game control device 100 determines that the variable display game to be started is not the special chart 2 variable display game but the special chart 1
If it is a variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y"), or if it is not in time-saving mode #1 or remaining reserve consumption mode (the result of A4600c is "N"), the processing of steps A14601-A14605 is executed.

The game control device 100 clears the random number storage area of the target variable pattern random number 2 (A1
Then, a fluctuation time value table is set (A14602), and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number indicating the fluctuation pattern is obtained using the fluctuation time value table (A1460
3). This obtains a fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Next, the fluctuation time value is saved in the special game processing timer area (A14604). After that, a fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation number (i.e., fluctuation pattern) is prepared as a performance command (A14605). As a result, the next performance command setting process (A4610) transmits the fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) to the performance control device 300.

In FIG. 90, steps A4600a, A4600b, A4600c, and A46
15. Processing A4616 may be eliminated, and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number (fluctuation pattern) may be obtained in all cases (A14603).

[Fluctuation pattern table setting status]
91 is a table showing the setting status of the fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table, fluctuation pattern group) (A14302) set based on the processing of Figures 88 and 89, etc., for each game state and special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). As described above, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table is set to select the fluctuation pattern of the special chart 1 fluctuation display game (first fluctuation display game) by lottery, and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table is set to select the fluctuation pattern of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) by lottery.

The special chart 1 variation pattern table for the special chart 1 variation display game is set to the same common variation pattern table A (A14302) in the normal game state (normal mode) with no electric support, the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) with medium support, and the specific game state B (time-saving mode #3) with high support. Then, by referring to this variation pattern table A, the variation pattern (variation number) of the special chart 1 variation display game is selected by lottery by the allocation process (A14304).

The special chart 2 variation pattern table for the special chart 2 variation display game is, in the normal game state,
The same variation pattern table A as the special chart 1 variation pattern table is set. On the other hand, unlike the normal game state, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special chart 2 variation pattern table is set to the same common variation pattern table C.

As shown in Figure 82, when transitioning from specific game state C to specific game state B due to reaching the ceiling number of plays, the state remains in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), so for variable display games of the same special chart type (special chart 1 variable display games or special chart 2 variable display games), keeping the variable pattern table the same will create less discomfort and will not violate game rules, etc.
Furthermore, if the same fluctuation pattern table is used, the fluctuation pattern or fluctuation time value of the fluctuation display game will be common, reducing the sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special chart 1 variation pattern table (
The same common variation pattern table A is set as the special chart 2 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group), and the same common variation pattern table C is set as the special chart 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group). Also, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state C, there is no change in the fact that the main variation display game is the special chart 1 variation display game in the left-hand hitting state, so that there is less sense of incongruity, the same common variation pattern table A is set as the special chart 1 variation pattern table in the normal game state and the specific game state C.

In addition, when transitioning from specific game state C to specific game state B, the type (state) of normal power support transitions from medium support to high support, and the content of the game changes significantly, so it is preferable to clearly switch the type of fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation display game (special chart 1 fluctuation display game in specific game state C, special chart 2 fluctuation display game in specific game state B) in accordance with the change in normal power support. Therefore, in both specific game state C and specific game state B, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table (first fluctuation pattern group) and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table (second fluctuation pattern group) are set differently, like fluctuation pattern table A and fluctuation pattern table C.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 91, specific gaming state A (a time reduction, time reduction mode #1, #2)
In the specific game state A, the special game state 1 variation pattern table may be variation pattern table A, like specific game states B and C, in order to ensure commonality of presentation using a common variation pattern and reduce development costs, or may be a variation pattern table other than A in order to increase presentation variations. Similarly, in the specific game state A, the special game state 2 variation pattern table may be variation pattern table C, like specific game states B and C, in order to ensure commonality of presentation and reduce costs, or may be a variation pattern table other than C in order to increase presentation variations.

Alternatively, in the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table may be the same fluctuation pattern table A as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure commonality of presentation using a common fluctuation pattern and reduce development costs, or in the time-saving mode #1, since the number of time-saving times is extremely small compared to the time-saving mode #2 and the specific game states B and C, a fluctuation pattern table other than A may be used to distinguish between presentations. Similarly, in the time-saving mode #2, the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table may be the same fluctuation pattern table C as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure commonality of presentation and reduce development costs, or in the time-saving mode #1, a fluctuation pattern table other than C may be used to distinguish between presentations.

Also, the settings of the fluctuation pattern table in Fig. 91 may be the same regardless of the result of the fluctuation display game. Alternatively, the settings of the fluctuation pattern table in Fig. 91 may change depending on the result of the fluctuation display game (jackpot, small win, support win, miss). For example, if the result of the fluctuation display game is a miss, it is as shown in Fig. 91, but if it is a small win or a big win, a common fluctuation pattern table D may be used regardless of special chart 1, special chart 2, or the game state, and the fluctuation pattern or fluctuation time value may be made common regardless of special chart 1, special chart 2, or the game state.

[Example of a production screen]
92 is a diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment. (A) shows the display screen of the normal mode, which is the display mode for the normal game state without normal power support, and (B) shows the display screen of the time-saving mode #4, which is the display mode for the specific game state C with medium support.

In FIG. 92(A), "High School Mode" or "High School Stage" is displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode, and a background image imitating a school is displayed.
Here, the mode display 679 and background image are still images, but they may also be videos. The variation count display 677 is "95G," indicating that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been played after the jackpot has ended (excluding the number of times in the special chart variable state) is 95. The variation count display 677 may also indicate the number of games remaining until the ceiling number of games is reached (ceiling number of games - number of games played). The special chart 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen respectively display the number "4" indicating the special chart 1 reserve number (special chart 1 start memory number) and the number "0" indicating the special chart 2 reserve number (special chart 2 start memory number).

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a and a right pattern 611b are displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns).
The left and right patterns 611a, 611b, and 611c can be displayed in a variable manner.
The variable display of the middle pattern 611c is shown in the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B, respectively.
10B, are displayed in the central variable display area 610C. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of seven patterns (decorative identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7 appear on the display screen in order, move vertically (up and down) across the display screen, and then disappear from the display screen. In order to save display area, the middle pattern 611c is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling.
The direction of the variable display is different from the vertical scroll of 11b, and the variable display is a rotational change that is visually recognized by the player as rotating around an axis. Note that instead of a rotational change, a forward and backward change (forward and backward scrolling) is used in which a series of overlapping patterns are displayed by perspective or the like as if moving forward and backward.
The middle design 611c may be scrolled vertically in the same manner as the left design 611a and the right design 611b.

The left image 611a is a character image 612a (character component,
The left pattern 611a is composed of a character image 612a (character portion) and a character image 613a (character component, character portion) showing numbers (characters).
The character image 613a is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612a.
The right pattern 611b is composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a letter image 613b showing a number. In order to shorten the width of the entire right pattern 611b, the character image 612b and the letter image 613b are arranged so that their centers are aligned in the scrolling direction (vertical direction), and the letter image 613b is
13b is located on the central axis of the character image 612b. In order to save the display area, the middle design 611c is composed of only character images 613c indicating numbers.

In the normal mode, the numbers from 1 to 7 as the identification information are, for example,
Instead of the same color, such as 1 (green), 2 (blue), 3 (orange), 4 (blue), 5 (green), 6 (blue), and 7 (orange), at least one number is a different color from the others. Note that even numbers may be the same color (cool colors). Odd numbers may be a different color from the even numbers, and may include multiple colors, such as green (neutral colors) and orange (warm colors). In this embodiment, when the decorative special pattern includes characters and numbers, the characters correspond one-to-one to the numbers and are different for each number, but this is not limited to this; the same character may be used for different numbers.

In the first pending display section 630a (waiting area) which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first pending display, four pending displays 682a (first pending displays) are displayed. The pending displays 682a have a display form imitating playing cards. Also, in the pending consumption area 640, a changing pending display 682b which indicates the changing pending related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game (the start memory which was the execution right for this special chart variable display game) is displayed in a display form imitating a turned over playing card. The pending consumption area 640 may be indicated by a base. The second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is displayed as the second pending display (
Here, nothing is displayed in the second hold display section 630b, which displays the second start-up memory display.

In FIG. 92(B), a background image (background movie) of a moving image (movie) is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41. Also, as a mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode #4 of the medium support,
"Transcendent Mode" and "Transcendent Area" are displayed in two opposing locations in the upper left and lower right corners.
Because the multiple mode displays 679 are displayed on a layer behind the reserved display 682a, the mode display 679 in the lower right corner is hidden by the reserved display 682a on the front layer. However, the mode display 679 in the upper left corner, which is not hidden by the reserved display 682a, allows the player to fully recognize the current presentation mode. The mode display 679 may be displayed diagonally, unlike the horizontal orientation shown in FIG. 92(A), and may move diagonally in a strip-shaped area as part of the video of the background image or independently of the video. In this way, the appearance of the mode display 679 is clearly different between the time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode, making it easier to visually distinguish the time-saving mode #4 from the normal mode.

The number of times the variable number display 677 is set to "124G," indicating that the number of times the special variable number display game will be played after the jackpot ends is 124. The remaining number display 696 in the upper right corner of the display screen displays the remaining number of time-saving modes, i.e., the number of variable number display games that can be played in time-saving mode #4. The number "4" indicating the number of special number 1 reserved and the number "0" indicating the number of special number 2 reserved are displayed in the special number 1 reserved and the special number 2 reserved, respectively, in the upper right corner of the display screen. Note that because this is a medium support, the number in the special number 2 reserved display 660 may often be other than "0" due to winning the normal variable number winning device 37.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the center support in Fig. 92(B), the left and right patterns 611a and 611b are displayed by vertical scrolling, and the center pattern 611c is displayed by rotational fluctuation, as in the normal mode in Fig. 92(A). However, in Fig. 92(B), the fluctuation mode may be different from that in Fig. 92(A), so that it is clear that it is a center support. For example, the center pattern 611c may be displayed by vertical scrolling, and the left and right patterns 611a and 611b may be displayed by rotational fluctuation.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the center support in FIG. 92(B), similar to the normal mode in FIG. 92(A), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are composed of a character image representing a character and a letter image representing a number. The center pattern 611c is composed only of a letter image 613c representing a number. However, in FIG. 92(B), to clearly indicate that it is a center support, the decorative special pattern may be configured in a different manner from FIG. 92(A). For example, the center pattern 611c may be composed of a character image and a letter image, and the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b may be composed only of a letter image. Note that when the same character is used for the same number in the time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the display manner may be different to the extent that it can be recognized as the same character due to common characteristics.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #4 of the medium support, the numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (red), 2 (red), 3 (red), 4 (red), 5 (red), 6 (red), 7 (red)
As shown in the figure, the characters are the same color (red in this case) as the numbers. The color of the characters is also the same color (red) as the numbers. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand that it is time-saving mode #4 with medium support, which is different from the normal mode without normal power support. Also, to make it easy to understand that it is time-saving mode #4, the LEDs of the board decoration devices 46 such as the upper performance unit 40c and the side performance unit 40d are
The LEDs of the frame decoration devices 18, such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b, may also emit light in the same color (red) as the numbers. Note that the time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode are both in the left-handed state, and the special chart 1 variable display game is the main variable display game, so it is important to make the time-saving mode #4 easy to visually distinguish from the normal mode.

In addition, in time-saving mode #4, four hold displays 682a (first hold displays) are displayed in the first hold display section 630a (waiting area), which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the first hold display. However, unlike the normal mode of FIG. 92 (A), the hold displays 682a have a star-shaped display form. This also makes it easier to distinguish time-saving mode #4 from the normal mode. In addition, in the hold consumption area 640, the variable hold display 682b, which indicates the variable hold related to the currently running special chart 1 variable display game, is displayed in a star-shaped display form.

In addition, when a win is made to the normal variable winning device 37 by the middle support, the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed may be displayed as the second hold display (second start memory display) in the second hold display section 630b. Also, the distinction between the second hold display section 630b and the first hold display section 630a may be eliminated, and the second hold display may be displayed together with the first hold display in a common hold display section (
The display may be in a waiting area.

Also, in the time-saving mode #4 of the medium support, unlike the normal mode without normal power support,
The upper effect unit 40c, as a movable device (movable member), vibrates slowly up and down along the display screen in front of the player on the display device 41. This increases the player's expectations for time-saving mode #4, which is a medium support and allows transition to time-saving mode #2, which has 30 time-saving cycles, and enhances the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by providing effects (operation effects of the upper effect unit 40c) that can appear in time-saving mode #4 but not in normal mode, it is possible to easily distinguish time-saving mode #4 from normal mode. In a special symbol variation display game, the upper effect unit 40c may operate from the start of the variation of the decorative special symbol and stop operation when the variation ends or when a predetermined effect occurs.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support, a performance that can appear in normal mode (announcement performance)
Some of the effects do not appear. Effects that can appear in normal mode but do not appear in time-saving mode #4 include a change to a specific type of hold display in the hold change notice, a pre-reading effect by the movement of a movable role object, a specific type of line notice, and a specific type of step-up effect.

The above has explained the differences in presentation between the medium support time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode, but further differences in presentation may be provided between the medium support time-saving mode #4 and the high support time-saving modes #2 and #3 to make it easier to distinguish the time-saving mode #4 from the time-saving modes #2 and #3. For example, the display mode of the mode display 679, the background image, the configuration and variation of the special decorative symbols, the color of the numbers and characters of the special decorative symbols, the presentation that can appear, etc. may be different between the time-saving mode #4 and the time-saving modes #2 and #3.

[External information editing processing]
93A is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. The external information editing process is executed during timer interrupt processing (A1319).
In Fig. 93A, the same steps as those in Fig. 54B of the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

If the time-shortening signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (A9527).
Then, it is determined whether or not it is in time-saving mode #3 (b time-saving, specific gaming state B) (A9
528a). The initial value of the time-shortening signal control timer is the value set in the time-shortening signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 37) described above (
For example, a fixed time of 128 msec.) If the game control device 100 is not in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing of step A9528c.

When the game control device 100 is in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "Y")
It is determined whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (A9528b). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9528b is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9528b is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9529), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, when the ceiling time reduction (time reduction b) begins due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as an amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal continues for the timer initial value set in the time reduction signal control timer area (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec).

When the game control device 100 is not in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N")
, determine whether it is other than time-saving mode #4 (c time-saving, specific gaming state C) (A952
8c). In the case of a gaming state other than the time-saving mode #4 (specific gaming state C) (A9528c
If the result of A9528c is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated, and if the time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C) is selected (the result of A9528c is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 4 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9530), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, when the sudden time-saving (c time-saving) due to the time-saving symbol (support hit) starts, the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is output to an external device such as an internal gaming facility management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal continues during the time-saving mode #4 (specific gaming state C).

In addition, the game control device 100 may also determine whether or not the time-saving signal control timer is 0 in step A9528c. That is, in step A9528c, it may determine whether or not the mode is other than time-saving mode #4 or whether or not the time-saving signal control timer is 0. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the timer initial value (for example, 128m) has elapsed since the start of time-saving mode #4 (specific gaming state C).
The ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is output only for a fixed time (a fixed time of 100 s).

[Output of jackpot signal (external information)]
Figure 93B is a time chart showing the on/off states of the jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information. (I) shows the state before and after entering the b time-saving mode (i.e., before and after the ceiling number of times is reached). (II) shows the state before and after entering the c time-saving mode (i.e., before and after the time-saving symbol is derived).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the machine type. In this embodiment, the jackpot 1 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or small jackpot and turns off at the end of the jackpot or small jackpot. The jackpot 2 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or small jackpot and turns off at the end of the jackpot or small jackpot. Furthermore, the jackpot 2 signal turns on at the start of the high support time reduction (excluding the medium support time reduction) and turns off at the end of the remaining reserve consumption mode (when the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops).

The big hit 3 signal turns on at the start of a big hit or a small hit, and turns off at the end of a big hit or a small hit. Furthermore, the big hit 3 signal turns on at the start of b time reduction (ceiling time reduction) and remains on for a short fixed time (
For example, it turns off after 128 msec has elapsed. The big hit 4 signal turns on at the start of the medium support time reduction (excluding the high support time reduction) and turns off at the end of the medium support time reduction.

In Figure 93B (I), when the ceiling number of times is reached and the game enters b time reduction, the game state changes from the normal game state to specific game state B. When the high support b time reduction is entered, on data of the jackpot 2 signal (jackpot 2 signal in on state) is output as a signal regarding the start of time reduction. The output of on data of the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time until the remaining reserve consumption mode ends, that is, until the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops.

Furthermore, when the b time reduction mode is entered, the processing of FIG. 93A outputs the on data of the jackpot 3 signal to the external device for a short fixed time (e.g., 128 msec). This allows the external device to distinguish between the occurrence of the b time reduction mode (a time reduction mode) and the occurrence of the c time reduction mode due to a jackpot and to recognize the occurrence of the b time reduction mode or the reaching of the ceiling number of times. Furthermore, the external device can distinguish between the occurrence of the jackpot 3 signal due to a jackpot or a small jackpot (when it continues for a long time) and the occurrence of the jackpot 3 signal due to the b time reduction mode (when it continues for a short time).

In addition, in FIG. 93B (I), since big hit, small hit, c time reduction do not occur, big hit 1
The signal and the jackpot 4 signal remain off.

In FIG. 93B (II), when the time-saving pattern enters c time-saving (sudden time-saving),
By the process of 3A, the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is output to the external device.
The external device can distinguish the occurrence of time reduction (time reduction a) or time reduction b) resulting from a jackpot and recognize the occurrence of time reduction c (specific game state C) or the derivation of a time-saving symbol. The output of the on data of the jackpot 4 signal continues for a long time until the end of time reduction c (specific game state C).

In addition, in FIG. 93B (II), since the big hit, small hit, and b time reduction do not occur, the big hit 1 signal, the big hit 2 signal, and the big hit 3 signal remain off. In addition, even if you enter the c time reduction of the medium support, the on data of the big hit 2 signal that occurs in the time reduction of the high support (the big hit 2 signal in the on state)
is not output.

[Test signal output]
FIG. 94A shows a test signal output to the test firing device, which is a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal (
1 bit), normal electric device 1 open extension status signal (1 bit), normal pattern 1 variable time shortening status signal (1 bit), winning ease status signal 1 to 4 (4 bits), winning ease status confirmation signal (1
94B illustrates examples of winning-prone state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support.

The normal electric normal pattern state signal, which indicates the state of the normal electric device 1 opening extension state signal, the normal pattern 1 variation time shortening state signal, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, etc., can change to on simultaneously with or after the winning likelihood state signals 1 to 4, and the normal electric normal pattern state signal and the winning likelihood state signals 1 to 4
The time difference between the on-timing of the easy-to-win state confirmation signal and the easy-to-win state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more. The easy-to-win state confirmation signal may turn on simultaneously with or after the on-timing of the easy-to-win state signals 1 to 4, and the time difference between the on-timing of the easy-to-win state confirmation signal and the easy-to-win state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more.

Figure 94A particularly illustrates a case where the game state transitions in the following order: normal game state → specific game state C (medium support, c time reduction) → specific game state B (high support, b time reduction) → jackpot state or transition state.

When a time-saving symbol is derived during a support hit in the special chart 1 variable display game during normal game play, a specific game state C occurs, and the type of normal power support becomes medium support (easier winning state 2). At this time, first, the 4-bit easy-to-win state signal 1 to 4 indicating the type of normal power support changes from an indefinite state to 01H corresponding to medium support and is output to the test firing device. Next, a win-easier state confirmation signal indicating that the normal power support state (easier winning state) has been confirmed is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing device.
Next, the normal electric accessory 1 release extension state signal, which indicates that the normal power open time will be longer, and the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, which indicates that the normal symbol variation time will be shortened compared to the normal game state, are turned on as normal electric symbol state signals, which indicate the state of normal power and the state of normal symbol variation, and are output to the test firing test device. In Figure 94A, the winning likelihood state signals 1 to 4 → winning likelihood state confirmation signal → normal electric symbol state signal change in this order.

Subsequently, when the number of special symbol variable display games executed under predetermined conditions (special symbol low probability state) after the end of the jackpot state in specific game state C reaches the ceiling number of times, specific game state B occurs, and the normal power support becomes high support (prize-facilitated state 1). At this time, the 4-bit prize-facilitated state signal 1-4 indicating the type of normal power support changes from 01H corresponding to medium support to 00H corresponding to high support and is output to the test firing test device. Next, a prize-facilitated state confirmation signal indicating that the normal power support state (prize-facilitated state) has been confirmed changes to ON for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example, 32 msec) and is output to the test firing test device. Then, the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal continue to be ON from specific game state C and are output to the test firing test device.

Thereafter, when the specific game state B is shifted to a jackpot state or a transition state, the winning likelihood state signals 1 to 4 become indefinite, and the normal electric role device 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal are turned off.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal game does not change and is always a constant value of 250/
251, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than normal, will not be turned on. However, if the normal symbol hit probability is high only during high support, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal will turn on as shown by the dotted line and be output to the test firing device. If the normal symbol hit probability is high during both medium support and high support, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal will be turned on and output to the test firing device for the same period as the normal electric role 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal are on.

Figures 95 and 96 are a table and a time chart showing the output of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 as test signals output to the test firing device.
and launch position designation signal 2 are both signals indicating a right hit, which means that the game ball should be launched into the game area 32 on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 95(A), in the center support (specific game state C), when a normal win occurs and the normal power is released in pattern H1, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned on and output, but the launch position designation signal 2 is turned off. On the other hand, in the center support, when a normal win occurs and the normal power is released in pattern H2, both the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned on and output. As such, the output states of the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are different for the normal power release in pattern H1 and the normal power release in pattern H2, so the test firing test device can distinguish and recognize these two types of normal power release. In addition, to distinguish between normal power releases, it is also possible to configure only one of the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 to be turned on when the normal power is released in pattern H1, and only the other to be turned on when the normal power is released in pattern H2. Also, even during the center support, during periods when a normal win does not occur or during the normal game state, both the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned off.

As shown in Figure 95 (B), during electric support other than medium support (high support, specific game state A and specific game state B), during a small hit, or during a big hit, the right-hand hitting state is assumed, so both launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are turned on and output.

For example, as shown in Figure 96, if there is a small win during the normal power release of pattern H1, launch position designation signal 1 turns on at the start of the normal power release of pattern H1, launch position designation signal 2 turns on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win.
If there is a normal power release of pattern H1 during a small hit, the launch position designation signal 1 is sent at the start of the small hit.
When the small win ends, launch position designation signal 2 turns on, and when the small win ends, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off. If there is a normal power release of pattern H1 just before the end of the small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on when the small win starts, launch position designation signal 2 turns off when the small win ends, and launch position designation signal 1 turns off when the normal power release of pattern H1 ends.

If a small win occurs during the normal power release of pattern H2, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the normal power release of pattern H2, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win.If a normal power release of pattern H2 occurs during a small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win.If a normal power release of pattern H2 occurs just before the end of a small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the normal power release of pattern H2.

[Operation of the main prize slot, lever solenoid, etc.]
Figure 97 is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 in the case of a small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game. (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error. The operation related to the opening and closing (closure) of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is controlled by the small win opening process (A2612). The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, i.e., the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86, is controlled by the lever solenoid control process (A2618).

In FIG. 97(A), in the case of a small win result of the special chart 1 variable display game, unlike the case of a small win result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened once for a short time. This short time is, for example, the small win opening time (for example, 1000 msec).
This is the shorter of the time it takes for the required number of prizes to be awarded at the Kamidai prize entry gate or the time it takes for the required number of prizes to be awarded at the Kamidai prize entry gate.

During this short time, the lever solenoid 86b opens the small prize of the upper large prize opening for a short time (
For example, the specific area 86 is opened by turning on the power for only 100 msec.
Since the opening of 6 (V winning hole) is very short, the game ball almost never enters the specific area 86. Therefore, during the opening of the small win as a result of the special chart 1 variable display game, a big win due to V winning almost never occurs.

A V-winning ball entering the specific area 86 is detected by the specific area switch 72 of the specific area 86. The specific area switch 72 is enabled when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on, and is disabled when the processing of the remaining balls is completed. Also, while the specific area switch 72 is enabled,
As a test signal, the special electric device operation signal is turned on and output to the test firing device.

The upper large winning hole switch 39a (count switch) turns on in a pulse when it detects a game ball that has entered the upper large winning hole. Immediately after that, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error.
When the device 2 detects a game ball, irregular win information indicating that the jackpot is due to an unexpected abnormal V win is transmitted to the performance control device 300 together with an ending command at the end of processing the remaining balls. Then, the performance control device 300 executes processing corresponding to the irregular win information, such as announcing that the V win is abnormal.

The processing of the remaining balls starts from the end of the small win opening (when the upper large winning hole is closed) and ends when the remaining ball counter becomes 0 or when the remaining ball processing time has elapsed, whichever is later. The remaining ball counter is incremented by +1 after the game ball passes the upper large winning hole switch 39a, and incremented by -1 when the game ball (remaining ball) is detected by the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72.
In FIG. 97(A), before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) has elapsed, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball and the remaining ball counter has already become 0. Therefore, the small win remaining ball processing (A2613) is completed when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) has elapsed, and at this point the specific area switch 72
will be invalid.

In this embodiment, the small win ending occurs after the remaining ball processing. The special game processing (FIG. 16) has a small win ending process as the processing of game processing number "6", and the small win ending time (for example, 2000 msec) set in the small win remaining ball processing (A2613)
The ending of the small win continues during this time. In the small win end processing, the game processing number "0" for the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area. When a big win occurs due to a V win, the fanfare effect (B2102) corresponding to the fanfare command (A5806) is executed during the fanfare time.

In FIG. 97(B), similarly to FIG. 97(A), the upper large winning hole is opened for only a short time, and during this short time when the upper large winning hole is opened for a small win, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on for a short time (for example, 100 m
sec) and the specific area 86 is opened. The specific area switch 72 is enabled when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on. However, there is a remaining ball error, and the remaining ball processing time (
For example, even if 1900 msec has elapsed, the small win remaining ball processing does not end. Therefore, according to the on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (i.e., the opening pattern of the specific area 86), after a short on/off period, an interval (for example, 2900 msec) is inserted, and the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time, after which it turns off in response to the cancellation of the remaining ball error (the end of the remaining ball processing). Here, the time of the interval is the small win opening time (for example, 10
The on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b is set to be the same for the small win in the special chart 1 variable display game and the small win in the special chart 2 variable display game (Figure 98).

Thereafter, until the remaining ball error is cleared, the small hit remaining ball processing continues, the lever solenoid 86b is kept on, and the specific area switch 72 is kept in an enabled state.
Then, while the specific area switch 72 is enabled, the special electric device operation signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing device. When the remaining ball error is released and the small win remaining ball processing is completed, the small win ending will be the same as in Figure 97(A).

In addition, after the game ball that has entered the upper large winning hole is detected and the upper large winning hole switch 39a (count switch) is turned on and off in a pulsed manner, the remaining ball error monitoring time (for example, 3000 msec)
When this time has elapsed, the remaining ball error flag, which indicates that a remaining ball error is occurring, is set to ON. After that, when the remaining ball counter reaches 0, the remaining ball error flag is turned OFF and the remaining ball error is cleared. For example, the timer measurement for the remaining ball error monitoring time and the ON/OFF of the remaining ball error flag are controlled by the winning slot switch/status monitoring process (A1308
) and executes the remaining ball monitoring process.

Figure 98 is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 in the case of a small win result in the special chart 2 variable display game. (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error.

In FIG. 98(A), in the case of a small win result of the special chart 2 variable display game, unlike the case of a small win result of the special chart 1 variable display game (FIG. 97), the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened once for a short time (for example, 48 msec), and then the interval (for example, 286
For example, the multiple releases are 48 msec.
This long time consists of 19 openings of 424 ms and 18 closings of 424 msec, totaling 854
4 msec or the time until the specified number of entries into the upper large winning slot. In order to make this type of opening pattern of the upper large winning slot, for example, in the small winning opening process, as with the normal power opening pattern,
The opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39 may be controlled by the control pointer.

In addition, in FIG. 98(A), in accordance with the above-mentioned on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on and off for a short time (for example, 100 msec), and then
After an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time and then turned off. The long time here is the shorter of 21000 msec and the time until the processing of the remaining balls is completed. In addition, in the case of a small win in the special chart 2 variable display game, the on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (i.e., the opening pattern of the specific area 86)
The opening pattern of the upper prize entrance is the same until the multiple openings of the upper prize entrance begin.
They work in roughly synchronous relation (the lever solenoid 86b and the upper large prize opening solenoid 39b also work in roughly synchronous relation).

The upper large winning slot switch 39a (count switch) pulses on when it detects a game ball entering the upper large winning slot. Immediately thereafter, or before the remaining balls are processed, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. Note that if the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, it is a normal V-entry jackpot, so irregular win information is not sent to the presentation control device 300. At the end of the remaining ball processing, only the ending command is sent to the presentation control device 300.

The processing of the remaining balls begins when the small win opening ends (when the upper large prize opening closes) and ends at the later of either the time when the remaining ball processing time has elapsed or when the remaining ball counter reaches 0 (when the error is cleared). In Figure 98 (A), the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball and the remaining ball counter has already reached 0 before the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, so the small win remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, and the specific area switch 72 becomes invalid at this point.

In this embodiment, the ending of the small win occurs after the remaining ball processing, but the ending of the small win continues for the small win ending time (for example, 4200 msec) set in the small win remaining ball processing (A2613). Note that the ending time for the small win in the special chart 2 variable display game is longer than that in the case of the small win in the special chart 1 variable display game.

In Figure 98(B), the upper large winning hole is opened in the same opening pattern as in Figure 98(A). The opening pattern of the upper large winning hole does not depend on whether there is a remaining ball error. Also, in Figure 98(B),
The lever solenoid 86b operates in the same on/off pattern as in Figure 98 (A) until the small win is released, but because there is a remaining ball error, even after the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1,900 msec) has elapsed, the lever solenoid 86b remains on for a long period of 21,000 msec.

After that, until the remaining ball error is released, the small win remaining ball processing continues, and the specific area switch 72 remains enabled. While the specific area switch 72 is enabled, a test signal indicating the special electric device is in operation is turned on and output to the test firing device. When the remaining ball error is released and the small win remaining ball processing is completed, the small win ending occurs, similar to Figure 98(A). The occurrence and release of the remaining ball error is as described in Figure 98(B).

[Actions and Effects of the Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed. The game control means is capable of generating a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B or specific game state A) that is advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C) whose generation conditions differ from those of the first specific game state. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (e.g., a special symbol 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and is capable of executing a second variable display game (e.g., a special symbol 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of a second start condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first group of variation patterns (e.g., special chart 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is made different from a second group of variation patterns (e.g., special chart 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the second variation display game.

For example, the main variable display game may be different between the first and second specific game states, such as when the main variable display game becomes the second variable display game in the first specific game state and the first variable display game in the second specific game state. However, in this gaming machine 10, by differentiating the first and second variable pattern groups in both the first and second specific game states, the type of variable pattern selected in the special symbol variable display game can be clearly switched to match the type of specific game state. This allows for presentations tailored to the type of specific game state, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the third embodiment, in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state,
The variable pattern group (for example, the special chart 1 variable pattern table) is made the same as in the normal game state. Therefore, the type of variable pattern selected in the first variable display game is common to the normal game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, reducing the sense of incongruity in the presentation and increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, game control is simplified. Also, it does not violate game rules, etc.

In the third embodiment, in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state,
The same set of variation patterns (for example, the special chart 2 variation pattern table) is used. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the second variation display game is common to both the first and second specific game states, eliminating any sense of incongruity in the presentation and increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, game control is simplified. Furthermore, it does not violate game rules, etc.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is equipped with a game control means (e.g., the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and is capable of generating a special game state (e.g., a jackpot state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., the normal variable winning device 37) that can convert the game ball between an easy-to-win state (e.g., an open state) in which it is easy to win and an uneasy-to-win state (e.g., a closed state) in which it is difficult to win, and that makes it easier to convert to the easy-to-win state in a specific game state than in a normal game state. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, b time reduction) without the occurrence of a special game state when the number of times the variable display game is executed under a predetermined condition (e.g., special symbol low probability) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., ceiling number of times), and can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, c time reduction) without the occurrence of a special game state when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (e.g., time-saving symbol) different from the special result. The game control means can execute a first variable display game (e.g., special symbol 1 variable display game) as the variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and can execute a second variable display game (e.g., special symbol 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of a second start condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variable display game for selecting a variable display pattern of the first variable display game is executed.
The variable pattern group (for example, special chart 1 variable pattern table, variable pattern table A) and the second variable pattern group (for example, special chart 2 variable pattern table, variable pattern table C) for selecting the variable pattern of the second variable display game are made different. In the second specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c time reduction), the variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37) is easier to convert to a state where it is easier to win than in the normal game state, but is more difficult to convert to a state where it is easier to win than in the first specific game state (for example, specific game state B, b time reduction).

The main variable display game (e.g., the special chart 1 variable display game in the second specific game state, the special chart 2 variable display game in the first specific game state) and the type of normal power support (e.g., high support in the first specific game state, medium support in the second specific game state) may differ between the first and second specific game states. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by differentiating the first and second variable pattern groups in both the first and second specific game states, the type of variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game can be clearly switched to match the type of specific game state and, therefore, the type of normal power support. This allows for presentations that match the type of specific game state and, therefore, the type of normal power support, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the third embodiment, the game control means can generate a third specific game state (e.g., specific game state A, a time reduction) advantageous to the player following the special game state (e.g., a jackpot state) with the occurrence of the special game state. The variable winning device (e.g., the normal variable winning device 37) can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, c time reduction) in the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, b time reduction) and the third specific game state (e.g., specific game state A, a time reduction).
It becomes easier to convert into a state where it is easier to win.

Therefore, the normal power support of the second specific game state is set to medium support, and the first specific game state and the third specific game state are set to medium support.
The second specific game state can be made a specific game state with a different characteristic from the other multiple specific game states (the first specific game state and the third specific game state) in terms of the profits that the player can obtain and the way in which the game ball is launched, which can add variety to the game and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., a normal variable winning device 37) that can convert the game ball between an easy-to-win state where it is easy to win and a difficult-to-win state where it is difficult to win, and that makes it easier to convert to the easy-to-win state in a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability variable state, or a normal power support state) than in the normal game state. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A or specific game state B) after the end of a special game state (e.g., a jackpot state), and can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C) without generating the special game state when the result of the variable display game is a specific result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) different from the special result. The game control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device to the easy-to-win state in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state. The game control means can execute a first variable display game as a variable display game based on the establishment of a first starting condition, and can execute a second variable display game based on the establishment of a second starting condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variable pattern group (e.g., special chart 1 variable pattern table, variable pattern table A) for selecting a variable pattern of the first variable display game and a second variable pattern group (e.g., special chart 2 variable pattern table, variable pattern table B) for selecting a variable pattern of the second variable display game are provided.
For example, it is different from the special chart 2 variation pattern table and variation pattern table C.

For example, the main variable display game may be different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state, such as the main variable display game becoming the second variable display game in the first specific game state and the first variable display game in the second specific game state. However, in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variable pattern group and the second variable pattern group are made different from each other, and the type of variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game is determined by the type of specific game state, and therefore,
The variable winning device can be switched according to the frequency with which it becomes easy to win (for example, the type of normal power support). Therefore, it is possible to produce a presentation according to the type of specific game state, and therefore the frequency (degree) with which it becomes easy to win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game control means
In the specific game state (for example, specific game state A or specific game state B), it is easier to convert the variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37) into a state where winning is easy than in the second specific game state (for example, specific game state C), and as the variable display game, a first variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of a first start condition, and a second variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of a second start condition, and in the second specific game state, the first variable pattern group for selecting the variable pattern of the first variable display game is made the same as in the normal game state.

A second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C), which is more difficult to convert to an easy-to-win state than a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A or specific game state B), may have a frequency (degree) of conversion of the variable winning device to an easy-to-win state closer to the normal game state than the second specific game state. Therefore, if the first variable pattern group is the same as that of the normal game state in the second specific game state, the type of variable pattern selected in the first variable display game in the second specific game state will be the same as that of the normal game state, reducing the sense of incongruity in the presentation, while the two specific game states with different frequencies of conversion to the easy-to-win state can increase the interest in the game. In addition, game control is simplified. In particular, in the second specific game state and the normal game state, the hitting style (
When the type of the first variable display game (right hit or left hit) is the same and the main variable display game is the same as the first variable display game, there is a greater advantage in making the first variable pattern group the same between the second specific game state and the normal game state and making the types of variable patterns of the first variable display game common (if they are not common, the sense of incongruity will be greater).

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 107. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The fourth embodiment relates to the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (number of balls difference + initial value) according to the state (display state, light emission state, operation state) of the performance device. The performance device is a device that can perform performance, and for example, there are a display device 41, a decoration device (board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18, etc.) consisting of a performance LED, etc., and a movable role object (movable body, board performance device 44, frame performance device). The control executed by the game control device 100 is as follows:
This is the same as the other embodiments from the first embodiment to the third embodiment.

[Aspects of performance-related devices according to the state of safety devices, etc.]
99 is a table showing the state of the performance device according to the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 99, the state of the performance device changes depending on the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (and thus the difference in the number of balls).

As explained in the first embodiment, the safety device counter value ranges from 0 to 189999 (-1000
The safety device state will be in the inactive state (activation notice state, activation warning state, or normal state where the safety device is not activated) corresponding to the safety device counter value of 190000 to 194999 (the difference in the number of balls from 90000 to 94999). The safety device state will be in the activation notice state where the safety device will be activated. The safety device counter value of 195000 (95000
In response to the difference in the number of balls being reached, the device enters an operation warning state in which the safety device is activated, or an activated state in which the safety device is activated (activated state).

Furthermore, with a safety device counter value of 195,000, the safety device goes into an activation warning state during a big win or a small win, and goes into an activated state when neither a big win nor a small win occurs. Therefore, if the safety device goes into an activated state before a big win or a small win occurs, a game stop state (a game unplayable state, a game prohibited state) occurs immediately afterwards, and the activation warning state does not occur.

On the other hand, the activation warning state can occur when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 during a big win or a small win. Therefore, when the big win or small win ends and the state is no longer either a big win or a small win, the safety device transitions from the activation warning state to an activated state (activated state).

When the safety device counter value is 0 to 194,999 (-100,000 to 94,999 ball difference), the state of the gaming machine (game state) is in play or waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer state).
In the case where the difference in the number of balls reaches 0, the gaming machine is in a state of a small win or a big win when the safety device is activated, but is in a game stop state (a game not possible state, a game prohibited state) when the safety device is activated. Note that the same game stop state can occur even when a strong error 2 occurs.

In the game stop state, the game is a special chart change display game, a normal chart change display game, and
Round play (play during a big win or small win) etc. cannot be performed.
As in the first embodiment, in the game stop state, the detection of the game ball by the winning hole switch is invalid, and the winning hole (winning) is invalid ("Y" in A2201), and the big winning hole, the specific area 86
, the solenoid is stopped so that the variable winning device 37 etc. is closed (A1602 and A160
3 is "Y"), and the launch of the game ball from the ball launcher is stopped (prohibited) and the launch is stopped (A1
A1611 and A1612 are "Y"), and the collective display device 50 is turned off (A1610 and A1612
The result is "Y"). In the game stop state, not only can the special chart change display game and the normal chart change display game not continue, but new special chart change display games and new normal chart change display games cannot be started. Note that it is also possible to configure the game not to stop firing in the game stop state where the safety device is activated (it is also not necessary to stop firing in the game stop state caused by the strong error 2). Also, in the game stop state, as in the first embodiment, the payout command transmission process (A1307) is not stopped, and the payout of prize balls due to winnings that occurred before the game stop state is entered continues.

In the game stop state, a security signal is generated (A9322) and output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer, and a test signal is generated (A9323) and output as on data of a game machine error state signal to a test firing test device. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the test signal (game machine error state signal) is not generated in the game stop state where the safety device is activated (even in the game stop state caused by strong error 2, the test signal does not have to be generated).

When the safety device is in an inoperative state, the display device 41 does not generally display any safety device-related display related to the safety device, but as an exception, while waiting for customers, the display device 41 may display the fact that the gaming machine is equipped with a safety device by displaying a specific model display 541 (for example, the words "equipped with complete function"). A player who sees the specific model display 541 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function).

In the safety device activation warning state, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 511 (e.g., the text "Playing will end soon") as a safety device-related display (or safety device activation information display). To effectively display the activation warning display 511, the display mode of the activation warning display 511 may change depending on the game state, such as when waiting for customers or when a variable display is being performed (when a special chart variable display game is being executed). At the start of the activation warning state, the performance control device 300 has received an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command, and therefore the activation warning display 511 is enabled on the display device 41 (safety device system processing of B1330).

The activation notice display 511 notifies the player in advance of the possibility that he or she may not be able to play, urging the player to end the game and preventing the player from suffering an unintended disadvantage. Also, the activation notice display 511 can surprise someone who is cheating and urge them to stop cheating. The display mode of the activation notice display 511 can be changed depending on the game status (for example, while waiting for customers,
The warning display can be changed depending on the current status (currently being displayed).

In the activation warning state of the safety device during a small win or a big win, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 512 (for example, the text "The game will end after the win") as a safety device-related display.
At the start of the activation warning state, the performance control device 300 receives an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command, and therefore, the activation warning display 512 can be displayed on the display device 41 (safety device system processing of B1330).

When the safety device is in operation (not during a small win or a big win), i.e., when the game is stopped, the display device 41 displays an operation indicator 513 (for example, the characters "stopped") as a safety device-related indicator.
At the start of the operating state, the performance control device 300 receives an operating command corresponding to the operating state as a safety device operation-related command, and therefore the display device 41
This enables the operation display 513 (safety device processing of B1330).

In addition, the performance control device 300 constitutes a display control means capable of displaying on the display device 41, etc. (display means) an operation notification display 511 that notifies the operator of the safety device's operation, an operation warning display 512 that warns of the safety device's operation, and an operation in progress display 513 that indicates that the safety device is currently in operation.

The display device 41 can display an error message even when the game is stopped due to the safety device being activated. For example, since payout continues even when the game is stopped, a payout error may occur regarding the payout of game balls (game media).
A payout error can be notified by an error display. Note that, even when a strong error 2 occurs, the game stops and the game enters a game-halted state (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited), but in a game-halted state due to a strong error 2, the display device 41 may be able to notify a payout error by an error display so that hall personnel and players are aware of the occurrence of an error, or may be unable to notify a payout error so as not to confuse it with a strong error 2.

In the game stop state, unlike the non-operation state, the operation notice state, and the operation warning state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are turned off (all off).
In the game stop state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 may be lit (all lit). In the game stop state, the ball lending button 27 remains active, and when the player operates it to borrow game balls, game balls may be paid out from the payout device to the upper tray 21.

In the game stop state, the presentation control device 300 that receives the operation command turns off (all off) or turns on (all on) all presentation LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46. However, when an error occurs, some or all of the presentation LEDs may be lit in red. Also, in the game stop state, the presentation control device 300 may stop audio output from the speaker 19 to silence the sound.

Furthermore, in the game stop state, the presentation control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), and even if the operation unit is operated, the brightness of the presentation LEDs and LCD (such as the display device 41) and the volume of the speaker 19 may be made unadjustable, and the brightness and volume may be set to default. For example, the default brightness may be zero or a predetermined value (all lights off or all lights on), and the default volume may be zero (silent). Furthermore, in the hall/player setting mode process (adjustment process), various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the gaming machine 10 can be performed in response to operations by the gaming center manager or player on the operation unit (such as the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine). In this way, even if the player or other user operates the operation unit, various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not executed in the game stop state, making it easier for the player or other user to recognize that the game is stopped.
If the default brightness and volume are low, power can be saved when the game is stopped.

In another configuration, in the game stop state, even if the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) is executed, the effect control device 300 may not accept (ignore or invalidate) the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation unit, and may set the default brightness and volume even if the operation unit is operated by the person in charge of the game parlor or the player. In this configuration, the first operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b) that can be operated by the player may be set to the default brightness and volume.
) is not accepted (ignored or invalidated), while a second operation unit (volume adjustment switch 335) that can be operated by a person in charge of the game facility or a hall staff member is used.
) and may receive an operation signal corresponding to the first operation unit. When a player operates the first operation unit, the brightness and volume may be set to a predetermined value, and when a hall staff member operates the second operation unit, the volume and brightness of the gaming machine 10 may be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the second operation unit.
The second operation section (volume adjustment switch 335) is provided on the performance control device 300 on the back of the gaming machine, and can be operated by hall staff but not by players.

If a game stop state starts (if the safety device is activated) while a movable role (movable member, electric role, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) is in operation, and the movable role is in an operating position other than the initial position, the effect control device 300 may move the movable role from the operating position to return to the initial position. This prevents the movable member from being maintained in the operating position in a non-playable state where game play cannot be performed, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstandings such as the movable member being broken. While the movable role (movable member) is returning from the operating position to the initial position, the effect LED of the movable role may be in a lit state (operating state) or in an unlit state (initial state). As mentioned above, in a game stop state, the effect LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are either all turned off (all turned off) or all turned on (all turned on),
After the movable accessory returns to its initial position, the performance LED of the movable accessory turns off or turns on in accordance with the other LEDs.

On the other hand, the performance control device 300 controls the movable role (movable member, electric role, movable body, board performance device 4
4, frame effect device) during operation, if the movable part is located in an operating position other than the initial position, the movable part may be maintained in the operating position without being returned to the initial position. In this case, the operating position at which the movable part stops and is maintained may be the operating position at the start of the game stop state, another operating position to which the movable part has moved slightly since the start of the game stop state due to a time lag, or another appropriate operating position different from the operating position at the start of the game stop state. As mentioned above, in the game stop state, the effect LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are all turned off (all off) or all turned on (all on), so the movable part remains stopped in the operating position, and the effect LEDs of the movable part may be turned off or on in accordance with the other LEDs.

In this way, if the movable role does not return to the initial position but remains at the predetermined operating position after the start of the game stop state (after the safety device is activated), it is unnatural and can be emphasized to the player that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state (a state in which play can be performed, a state in which play is possible). For example, if the board effect device 44 (upper effect unit 40c, etc.) as a movable role remains in an unnatural position such as in front of the display screen of the display device 41 in the game stop state, the player will feel uncomfortable and will not be able to operate the gaming machine 1.
It becomes easier to recognize that 0 is not a normal state.

A board effect device 44 in which a movable accessory is provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40)
In this case, the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, the movable accessory is in front of the display device 41 (forward).
The initial position of the movable role is, for example, a position where the movable role overlaps the display device 41 in front of the display device 41 (see the position of the upper performance unit 40c in Figure 103 (K3)). Also, in this case, the initial position is a position where the movable role is difficult to see from the front (player side) in the storage space on the back side (rear side) of the center case 40 (center case 4
The movable accessory may be positioned such that a part of the movable accessory is covered by the glass frame 1.
In the case of a frame performance device (for example, a decorative device 18a such as a top unit) installed in glass frame 15 (or the opening and closing frame), the initial position of the movable prop is, for example, a position in the storage space inside glass frame 15 (or the opening and closing frame) where the movable prop is difficult to see from the front (a position where the movable prop is recessed into glass frame 15 and part of the movable prop is covered by glass frame 15), and the operating position of the movable prop is, for example, a position where the movable prop protrudes forward, upward, or diagonally from the initial position.

In addition, when a strong error 2 occurs, a game stop state occurs, just as when the safety device is activated. However, if this game stop state begins while a movable role is in operation, and the movable role is in an operating position other than its initial position, the performance control device 300 may move the movable role from its operating position back to its initial position, or may maintain it in its operating position without returning it to its initial position. Returning the movable role to its initial position can prevent unnecessary misunderstandings, such as that the movable component is broken. Not returning the movable role to its initial position would be unnatural, making it easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 10.

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as the special game processing timer, the bonus game processing timer, and the regular game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 may not be turned off and may continue to display the information displayed when the game is stopped. Furthermore, if the collective display device 50 is displaying a variable value at the start of the game stop state, it may be turned off after the variable value display ends. This prevents the variable value display on the collective display device 50 from suddenly ending. Furthermore, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue to display the information.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off and then turned on again, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, etc. are initialized by the safety device information initialization process (
Since safety device operation information such as safety device operation notice information (value 1), safety device operation warning information (value 2), and safety device operation information (value 3) is erased, safety device-related displays (such as the operation notice display 511, operation warning display 512, and operation display 513) may be erased and hidden on the display device 41. If the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (off) while the safety device is operating and then the power is turned on again (on) with the RAM initialization switch 112 on, the safety device operation flag area is also cleared to 0 (A1045), and the gaming machine 10 returns from a game-stopped state to a playable state.

[Screen transition example 1]
100A and 100B are an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the fourth embodiment.

In (A), after the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is in a customer waiting state, and the display device 41
Since the game has not started, the safety device counter value is the initial value (10
Thereafter, a player seated in a chair in front of the gaming machine 10 rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launching device launches a gaming ball, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning hole 36, and the special chart variation display game is executed.

Then, (A) shows a situation where the special chart variation display game has been executed twice since the power was turned on. The safety device counter value has decreased from its initial value (100,000) to 99,920. Note that, because the total number of prize balls does not increase significantly until a jackpot occurs, the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) tends to decrease by the number of discharged balls, and the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value) also tends to decrease. When a difference in ball command indicating the safety device counter value or difference in the number of balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the safety device counter value or difference in the number of balls (safety device counter value - initial value) may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Since the game is in normal game mode after power-on, the mode display 679 displays "A mode," which corresponds to the normal mode as the presentation mode. The variation count display 677 indicates the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played since power-on or after a jackpot has ended, and here, "2G" indicates that the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played since power-on is 2. Note that, in the case of a machine capable of generating a probability variable state, the variation count display 677 may indicate the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played since power-on or after a jackpot has ended, excluding the number of times in the probability variable state, in order to make it easier to see that the ceiling number of times is being reached. The variation count display 677 may also indicate the number of games remaining until the ceiling (ceiling number of times - number of times played).

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special symbol 1 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "×" indicating that the special symbol 2 variable display game is stopped. The symbol "○" may be flashed to cause a fourth symbol change as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a and a right pattern 611b are displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns).
The left and right patterns 611a, 611b, and 611c can be displayed in a variable manner.
The variable display of the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are displayed in the variable display area 610A, the right pattern 610B, and the center pattern 610C, respectively, in the variable display area 610. In this embodiment, the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are displayed by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

In the first pending display section 630a (waiting area) which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first pending display, four pending displays 682a (first pending displays) are displayed. The pending displays 682a have a display form imitating playing cards. Also, in the pending consumption area 640, a changing pending display 682b which indicates the changing pending related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game (the start memory which was the execution right for this special chart variable display game) is displayed in a display form imitating a turned over playing card. The pending consumption area 640 may be indicated by a base. The second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is displayed as the second pending display (
Here, nothing is displayed in the second hold display section 630b, which displays the second start-up memory display.

The special chart 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen respectively display the number "4" indicating the special chart 1 reservation number (special chart 1 start memory number) and the number "0" indicating the special chart 2 reservation number (special chart 2 start memory number).

After (A), many jackpots occurred, and in (C), the safety device counter value was 189993.
(Difference in number of balls = 89993) and the warning start value 1900 when the safety device operation warning state begins
00 (difference in number of balls = 90,000), but is approaching the predicted starting value of 190,000.

In (C), a specific game state (time-saving state) is entered after a jackpot or when the maximum number of times has been reached, and the mode display 679 displays "Flower Mode" corresponding to the time-saving mode as the presentation mode. The number of times the special chart change display game has been played since the jackpot ended is displayed as "73G." Also, in response to the time-saving mode, a right-hit instruction display 502 is displayed instructing the player to hit the right.

The special drawing 1 reservation number display unit 650 and the special drawing 2 reservation number display unit 660 respectively display the number "0" indicating the special drawing 1 reservation number and the number "1" indicating the special drawing 2 reservation number.
5 is the symbol "X" indicating that the special chart 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the symbol "○" indicating that the special chart 2 variable display game is running.

In the second pending display section 630b, which displays the second start memory as the second pending display, one pending display 683a (second pending display) is displayed. The pending display 683a has a display form imitating a flower. In addition, in the pending consumption area 640, a changing pending display 683b indicating the changing pending related to the currently executed special chart 2 changing display game (the starting memory that was the execution right of this special chart changing display game) is displayed in a display form imitating a flower. In addition, the pending consumption area 640 is displayed in a display form imitating a flower.
Here, nothing is displayed in the first pending display section 630a, which displays the first start memory before the variable display game is executed as the first pending display.

Next, in (D), by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) by hitting right, the special chart 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special chart 2 reserved number display unit 660 respectively show the special chart 1 reserved number.
The number "0" indicating the number of reserved items and the number "4" indicating the number of reserved items for special chart 2 are displayed. In the second reserved display unit 630b, four reserved displays 683a (second reserved displays) are displayed.

In (D), several prize balls are obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37, and the safety device counter value becomes 1900, which is greater than the warning start value 190000 at which the operation warning state starts.
09 (safety device counter value ≧ 190000). Then, an operation notice display 511 ("It will stop soon") that warns of the operation of the safety device is displayed as a safety device-related display. The operation notice display 511 can be displayed in a small (short) display area, so
Instead of displaying everything at once, the display may be scrolled across the screen. In this activation warning state, the activation of the safety device may be warned not only by the activation warning display 511 but also by a sound from a speaker or by lighting up a predetermined mode of an LED for effect.

The activation warning display 511 warns the player of the upcoming activation of the safety device, alerting the player in advance of the possibility of a game suspension state and urging the player to end the game, thereby preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. In addition, warning the player of the upcoming activation of the safety device can surprise anyone who is cheating and urge them to stop cheating.

The operation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to overlap with other displays or image objects. This makes it easier to see the other displays and image objects. Here, the other displays and image objects are displayed in a small size, and the large display pattern in the variable display area 610, the large display pattern in the variable display area 615, and the large display pattern in the variable display area 616 are displayed in a small size.
small pattern), the first predetermined image 675, the second predetermined image 676, the hold display 682a, 682b,
683a, 683b, reserved number display (special drawing 1 reserved number display unit 650 and special drawing 2 reserved number display unit 66
These include the number 0), mode display 679, number of variations display 677, right-hit instruction display 502, and characters (not shown).

Note that even if the activation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to interfere with other displays, it may be displayed in a swaying manner or moved by scrolling across the display screen so as to attract attention to some extent. Also, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed near (for example, to the left of) the right hit instruction display 502 and facing (adjacent to) the right hit instruction display 502 so as to attract attention to some extent. When the activation notice display 511 is displayed large, it may be overlapped with other displays and other image objects, but to make it more noticeable, it is displayed on a layer in front of other displays and other image objects.

Then, in (E), the player stops operating the operating handle 24 to take a break, etc., and the launch of the game ball ends. Then, the second start memory is consumed, the reserve display 683a in the second reserve display unit 630b disappears, and the special figure 2 reserve number in the special figure 2 reserve number display unit 660 becomes "0". Only the changing reserve display 683b is displayed.

The safety device counter value is 190,000, which is greater than the warning start value 190,000 at which the operation warning state begins.
The time is 0055, and the safety device-related display 511 ("Playing will end soon") continues to be displayed. The variation count display 677 shows "77G" as the number of times the special chart variation display game has been played since the end of the jackpot.

Next, in (K), the special symbol 2 variable display game of (E) ends, and the decorative stop symbols are displayed as "3, 7, 8" in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. The variable pending display 683b disappears, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "X". Operation notice display 511
The safety device counter value is 190.
It remains 055.

Next, at (G), the gaming machine 10 is in a waiting state for customers, and the display device 41 displays a waiting screen. During the waiting state, the safety device counter value is maintained at 190055. As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 ("Playing will end soon") may change depending on the gaming state. During the waiting state, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be in a variable display mode (
The special chart change display 511 may be larger than the special chart change display 511 during game execution.
In an operation warning state in which it is expected that the safety device will soon be activated and game play will be stopped, the operation warning display 511 can be displayed large and conspicuously as shown in (G) while waiting for customers, thereby preventing new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10. To make the operation warning display 511 even more conspicuous, it may be made to swing or move while waiting for customers. In addition, the operation warning display 511 may be displayed by scrolling across the screen to make it more conspicuous.

Details of the customer waiting screen will be described later in Figure 104, but the operation warning display 511 is displayed on a layer in front of other displays and other image objects on the customer waiting screen (here, the model name display 519 "P Tora Tora Tora"), to prevent the large operation warning display 511 from being hidden by other displays and other image objects on the customer waiting screen and becoming difficult to see.

After that, in (K), the player has just finished his break and resumed playing. By winning the normal variable winning device 37, two second start memories (special chart 2 start memories) are generated, and the variable pending display 683b and the pending display 683a are displayed. The special chart 2 pending number display section 660 becomes "1". Then, the special chart 2 variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "○". The variable count display 677 displays "78G". The safety device counter value starts to change, and becomes 190
After the customer waiting state ends, the operation notice display 511 ("Ending soon") returns to the same display mode as during the variable display before the customer waiting state began, and is displayed in a small size.

After (K), many jackpots occur without going through the normal mode due to consecutive wins, etc.
In (I), the safety device counter value is 194,500 (number of balls difference = 94,500), which is less than the counter reference value of 195,000 at which the safety device can start operating.
It's approaching 5,000.

In addition, when the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, the performance control device 300 can recognize that the safety device counter value has reached a predetermined value 194,500 which is larger than the notice start value 190,000 and slightly smaller than the counter reference value 195,000.
In case of 500, the performance control device 300 may flash the operation warning display 511 to notify that the safety device is about to start operating.

In (K), the changing hold indicator 683b and the four hold indicator 683a are displayed, and the special symbol 2 hold number display unit 660 shows "4." The change count indicator 677 shows "115G." Here, in order to notify that the second start memory will be wasted due to the game being stopped by the activation of the safety device, the performance control device 300 may flash some or all of the changing hold indicator 683b and the four hold indicator 683a.

In addition, from (i) onwards, the safety device counter value is the predetermined value 194500 or more (predetermined value 9450
When the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to 194,500, the presentation control device 300 may prohibit and not execute the hold change notice, which changes the display mode (color or shape) of the hold indicators 682a, 683a, etc. according to the likelihood of a jackpot, to avoid unnecessary player anticipation when the safety device is about to activate and stop the game. On the other hand, even after (i), changes in the display mode of the variable hold indicators 682b, 683b do not need to be prohibited, because they indicate the likelihood of the currently running variable display game resulting in a small jackpot or a jackpot. Furthermore, when the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value of 194,500, the presentation control device 300 may also prohibit pre-reading effects other than the hold change notice (pre-reading pre-reading effects such as continuous pre-reading effects and pre-reading zone effects), or may prohibit only some of the pre-reading effects (for example, the hold change notice). Prohibiting only the hold change notice as part of the pre-reading effects ensures presentation quality while preventing players from directly expecting the hold indicators 682a, 683a themselves. In addition, in the operation notification state from (e) onwards, it is also possible to configure the hold change notification and pre-reading effects to be prohibited and not executed.

In addition, once the safety device counter value reaches the predetermined value of 194,500 (the difference in the number of balls reaches the predetermined value of 9
After the safety device counter value reaches the predetermined value 194500 (or another smaller value 194500), all or part of the pre-reading effect may be prohibited and not executed unless the power is turned on again after being turned off.
00), all or part of the look-ahead effect may be allowed to be executed again without being prohibited.

In addition, regardless of the safety device counter value (number of balls difference), the game control device 100 executes a special symbol pending information determination process (pre-determination process) that can determine the result of the special symbol variable display game in advance before the special symbol variable display game based on the start memory is executed, and can transmit the determination result to the performance control device 300 by including it in a pre-reading stop symbol command or a pre-reading variable pattern command. Then, the performance control device 3 that has received the pre-reading stop symbol command or the pre-reading variable pattern command
Unlike the above, 00 may execute a pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice effect) regardless of the safety device counter value (number of balls difference). As a result, even if the safety device counter value (number of balls difference) reaches the predetermined value 194500 (predetermined value of the number of balls difference 94500) that is close to the occurrence of a game-unplayable state,
A pre-reading performance can be carried out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the activation notice display 511 displayed in (D) to (K) is displayed when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off (OFF) and then turned on (ON) again before the safety device is activated. The safety device activation information area is initialized by the safety device information initialization process, and the safety device activation notice information (value 1
) will be erased and will no longer be displayed.

After that, in (K), the safety device counter value is the counter reference value of 195,000 (difference in number of balls = difference in number of balls reference value 95,000), but since it is neither a big win nor a small win, the safety device is activated (in operation), and the gaming machine 10 immediately stops playing. Note that even during the special chart change display game (which may include the stop display) that results in a big win or a small win,
When the counter reference value reaches 195,000 (ball difference reference value 95,000), the safety device is activated and the gaming machine 10 is put into a game stop state (conversely, unlike this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the safety device not to be activated during a special chart variable display game that results in a big win or small win).
Since the game has stopped (game is not possible, game is prohibited), the operation indicator 513 ("play is stopped") is displayed as a safety device related indicator.
11, and strongly suggests that the safety device is in operation (play is stopped) to prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10. The operation indication 513 ("play stopped") may be flashed, swayed, or moved to be more noticeable by an animation display or the like.

The in-operation display 513 notifies the player that a game (especially a new game) is stopped, preventing the player (customer) from using the gaming machine 10, and if someone is cheating, the cheating can be stopped. When the in-operation display 513 (the text image of "playing stopped") is displayed, predetermined images different from the in-operation display 513 (the first predetermined image 675, the second predetermined image 676, the reserved displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, the reserved number display, the mode display 679, the number of variations display 677, the right-hit instruction display 502, the decorative special symbols, the characters, and other effect images) are erased and hidden. This allows the in-operation display 51
3 is easily recognized by players and hall staff.
("The limit will soon be reached") is a predetermined image (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676
, hold display 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, hold number display, mode display 679,
The display may be displayed while still displaying images such as the number of rounds display 677, right-hit instruction display 502, decorative special patterns, characters, etc., and the operation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the end of the win" in Figure 101 described below) may also be displayed while still displaying images such as the number of rounds and round effects (video).

Furthermore, if a special chart variable display game is being executed (displaying a variable) in variable display area 610 and variable display area 615 when the game is stopped, the special chart variable display game may be forcibly stopped, or the special chart variable display game being executed on the back layer (behind the background, at the backmost side) may be continued in a manner that makes it impossible to see.

Next, in (K), immediately after (J), a payout error display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify of a payout error related to the payout of game balls. It is assumed that a payout error related to the payout of prize balls due to a win that occurred before the game stopped, continues at or after the game stopped. Examples of payout errors include a chute ball shortage error, which corresponds to a lack of game balls before the payout, and an overflow error, which corresponds to the lower tray 23 being full. As mentioned above, these payout errors are included in weak errors.

In (K), the payout error display includes a ball out error display 520 (for example, the text "ball out error") that notifies a shot ball out error, and an overflow error display 522 (for example, the text "please remove balls") that notifies an overflow error. When each payout error is resolved, the corresponding payout error display may be erased. In this way, even when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, a payout error can be notified, so that no disadvantage or inconvenience is caused to players or hall personnel. Note that the game control device 100,
The performance control device 300, the display device 41, etc. cooperate to form a notification means capable of notifying an error.

In addition, if an error or fraud other than a payout error (such as a slot opening error or magnet fraud) occurs when or after the game has stopped, an error message may be displayed to notify the player of the error or fraud so as to prevent any disadvantage or inconvenience to players or hall staff.
Furthermore, even if an error (particularly a payout error) or fraud occurs, if the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000, the safety device will be activated and a game stop state will occur.

In this embodiment, payout error displays such as the out-of-bulb error display 520 and the overflow error display 522 are displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation display 513 ("stopped") so as not to overlap. The operation display 513 may be displayed in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the payout error display so as to stand out, and overlapped with the payout error display, or conversely, the payout error display may be displayed in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the operation display 513 so as to stand out, and overlapped with the operation display 513. Alternatively, only the payout error display may be displayed, and the operation display 513 may not be displayed, until the payout error is resolved.

In addition, even in the operation notice state, the error display such as a payout error will be displayed as operation notice display 5.
11 ("Ending soon") can be displayed on the display device 41, and the operation warning state (
See Figure 101) also shows the operation warning display 512 ("The game will end after the winnings are over").
The error message can be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation notice message 51.
1 or the operation warning display 512 and may be displayed on a layer in front of it.

In the game stop state, each error (especially each payout error) will be displayed in addition to the error message.
The notification may be made by outputting a sound from the speaker 19, or by making the performance LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 emit light in a specific light-emitting mode. For example, this specific light-emitting mode may be such that some or all of the performance LEDs emit red light, and the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 (the L of the frame) emit red light.
Only the LED of the frame decoration device 18 (LED of the game board 30) may be illuminated, or only the LED of the board decoration device 46 (LED of the game board 30) may be illuminated, or the LEDs of both the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 may be illuminated.

For example, for a shot ball out error and an overflow error, an error message (ball out error message 520 or overflow error message 522) is displayed and a sound indicating the error content (such as "ball out" or "remove the ball") is output from the speaker 19.

In both the game stop state and states other than the game stop state (in game or waiting for customers state, non-operation state, operation notice state, operation warning state), each error (especially each payout error) may be notified in the same notification manner (notification method) so that it can be recognized that it is the same error, or may be notified in different notification manners (notification methods) so that it can be recognized separately from the game stop state and states other than the game stop state, or so that it is appropriate for each state. Note that, unlike the above, errors such as payout errors can be notified without displaying an error on the display device 41.
It is also possible to configure the system to notify the user only by sound from the speaker 19 and/or by lighting up an LED for performance purposes.

When different notification modes are used, for example, a shot ball out error may be notified by the ball out error display 520 on the display device 41 and a voice output from the speaker 19 in the game stop state, and by the ball out error display 520 and the illumination of the LED for effect in states other than the game stop state. Also, for example, in regard to an overflow error, in consideration of the need for emergency action, the overflow error display 52 may be displayed in common in both the game stop state and states other than the game stop state.
The notification is made by the display 2 and the audio output, but the volume or pitch of the audio output may be different between these two states. Also, when different notification modes are used, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 may light up in the game stop state, and the LED of the board decoration device 46 may light up in states other than the game stop state.

The screen transition has been explained above, but the safety device counter value of 190000 (90000
After the safety device counter value reaches the difference in the number of balls (the difference in the number of balls), and the safety device is in an operation notice state, if the safety device counter value decreases (if the difference in the number of balls decreases), the operation notice display 511 ("The game will end soon") may be erased and hidden. For example, if the safety device counter value is 1900
After reaching 00, if it decreases to 189000, the operation notice display 511 may be hidden.

For example, in this case, if a difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, the performance control device 300 will
When the safety device counter value is determined to be 0, the activation notice display 511 is hidden. Alternatively, in this case, a new command related to the activation of the safety device corresponding to the non-activated state is provided, and the value is set to 189000.
The safety device counter value of this value may be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, and the presentation control device 300 may hide the activation notice display 511. Note that the safety device activation-related commands transmitted in the above-mentioned safety device-related processing include an activation notice command corresponding to an activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to an activation warning state, and an operating command corresponding to an activated state, but the safety device-related processing makes it possible to transmit a safety device activation-related command (an inactive command) corresponding to an inactive state to the presentation control device 300.

[Screen transition example 2]
101 is another example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, after (H), there is no small win or big win, and when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 at (J), the safety device is immediately activated and the game is stopped. However, in Example 2, after (H), there is a small win or big win, and during the small win or big win, the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000, entering the activation warning state, and after the end of the small win or big win state (end of the activation warning state), the game is stopped.

In (Ke 1), after (K), the special chart change display game (here, the special chart 1 change display game)
This results in a small win or a big win, and the small win or big win symbol is displayed as a decorative stop symbol in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. Here, an example is shown in which the big win symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed. The safety device counter value is 194278, which is greater than the warning start value 190000 at which the activation warning state begins, and an activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon") is displayed as a safety device-related display. Similar to (d) and (f) in FIG. 100A, the activation warning display 511 is displayed small so as not to overlap with other displays or other image objects.

The variable pending display 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are displayed as "x". The mode display 679 shows "A mode" corresponding to the normal mode as the performance mode.
The number of changes display 677 displays "170G". The special chart 1 hold number display section 650 and the special chart 2 hold number display section 660 display "3" and "0", respectively. Three hold displays 682a are displayed in the first hold display section 630a, and nothing is displayed in the second hold display section 630b.

Next, in (K2), a round of play (play during a jackpot or small jackpot) for a small or large jackpot is being played in the first round. In the case of a small jackpot round, a V win occurs here, and the jackpot state begins with the V win in the second round. The display screen displays a round effect using video or other means. In addition, a right-hit instruction indicator 502 is displayed instructing the player to hit the ball to the right in response to the opening of the large prize slot. Because the large prize slot is open, a large number of prize balls (number of balls won, number of safe balls) can be obtained by winning the large prize slot. The safety device counter value has increased from (K1) to 194318, and the safety device-related activation warning indicator 511 ("Playing will end soon") continues to be displayed.
The activation notice display 511 does not have to overlap with the round performance so as not to get in the way, but it may overlap.

In (Ke2), the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may change according to the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation from the normal game (normal game state, normal mode) of (Ke1) to the round game (special game state, round presentation), and may be different from (Ke1). For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed smaller than in (Ke1), in an inconspicuous color, or may be hidden (the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may include hiding) so as not to interfere with the round presentation. This allows the activation notice display 511 to be displayed appropriately in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation.
In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed according to the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display device 41, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

After that, in (K3), the round effect is executed in the third round.
Although the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value of 195,000, the safety device has not yet been activated because a jackpot is currently being hit, and the device enters an activation warning state, with activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the jackpot ends") displayed on display device 41. Note that activation warning display 512 is larger and more conspicuous than activation notice display 511, and more strongly suggests the possibility of the safety device being activated (the occurrence of a game stop state) than the activation notice state. The activation warning display 512 may or may not overlap the round effect so as not to be intrusive.

Then, in (K4), the safety device counter value remains at the counter reference value of 195,000, but the ending effect for a big win is executed, and the activation warning display 512 is displayed as in (K3). The activation warning display 512 may or may not overlap the ending effect so as not to be in the way. Furthermore, the ending effect in the activation warning state differs from the ending effect in states other than the activation warning state (non-activation state, activation notice state) in that it occurs immediately before the activation of the safety device, and therefore may be a dedicated ending effect that suggests the activation (end of play) of the safety device. Note that the same applies to (K4) when the ending effect for a small win is executed in the activation warning state.

Furthermore, in (I4), the display mode of the activation warning display 512 may change depending on the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation from the round play (round presentation) in (I3) to the ending (ending presentation), and may be different from (I3). For example, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed smaller than in (I3), in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (the display mode of the activation warning display 512 may include being hidden) so as not to interfere with the ending presentation. This allows the activation warning display 512 to be displayed appropriately in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation. In particular, changing the display mode of the activation warning display 512 depending on the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display device 41 can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, the activation warning display 512 can notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of a small win or a big win, and warn the player that he or she will suffer a disadvantage such as the end of a winning streak. In addition, the activation warning display 512 can surprise someone who is cheating and encourage them to stop cheating.

Next, in (Ko1), the ending time has passed and the big win ending has ended,
That is, the big win state ends, the safety device is activated, and the game is stopped (the same applies to the ending of a small win). In the game-stop state, the performance control device 300 displays an operation display 513 ("play stopped") on the display screen in response to receiving an operation command. The operation display 513 is larger and more noticeable than the operation notice display 511 and the operation warning display 512, and strongly suggests that the safety device is activated (game is stopped) to prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10.

In addition, in (K1), a two-dimensional code 524 such as a QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the display screen. Furthermore, a reading recommendation display 525 (reading promotion display) recommending (encouraging) the player to read the two-dimensional code 524 with a camera-equipped information terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone, and text display (e.g., "Please continue reading on your smartphone" or "Please read with your camera") are also displayed on the display screen. By reading and inputting the two-dimensional code 524 with the camera of the camera-equipped information terminal, this information terminal can access a server outside the gaming facility and store the results of the game on the server, allowing the player to use linked services (linked services) such as so-called smartphone-linked services (mobile-phone-linked services).

In addition, when a game is stopped due to the activation of a safety device (limit), the effect control device 300 may increase (add) the effect points by a larger amount than that obtained through normal effects in response to receiving an activation command or a special ending effect (K4) (B0012). This can alleviate the player's discomfort caused by the game being stopped. The information on the large effect points is encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code 524 and stored on an external server. The effect point information indirectly indicates the limit, but the limit information itself may also be encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code 524. A player can access the external server at any time using an information terminal or the like to display the effect point information and limit information on the information terminal. This allows the player to show off the large effect point information and limit information to others, resulting in a sense of satisfaction.

Instead of the two-dimensional code 524, a one-dimensional code such as a barcode may be used.
Similarly, a two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed in (K) of FIG. 100B.

Next, in (K), similar to (K) in Fig. 100B, an error message is displayed, such as a bulb out error message 520 or an overflow error message 522. The two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two minutes) and then erased from the display screen.

The order of (K1) and (K) may be reversed, and the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen after the error display. Alternatively, in (K1), the error display and the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen after the error display.
Both the error display and the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen. In this case, the error display may be displayed in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the operation display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524 to make them stand out, and may be overlaid on the operation display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524. When the error display is displayed on a layer (foreground layer) in front of the two-dimensional code 524 and overlaid on the two-dimensional code 524, the two-dimensional code 524 can be made unreadable to indicate that addressing the error is more important than reading the two-dimensional code 524. Note that, while the error display is being displayed, the performance control device 300 may stop or suspend updating of the display timer (updating the timer value), which measures a predetermined time (e.g., two minutes) for displaying the two-dimensional code 524. If the update of the display timer is suspended, when the error is resolved and no longer exists, the display timer may resume measuring the predetermined time by restarting updating from the timer value at the time of suspension, or may restart measuring the predetermined time by starting updating from the initial timer value.

As described above, with respect to FIG. 101, the activation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon"), the activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win ends"), and the activation display 513 ("Play is currently stopped") are displayed in large letters in this order, and the text displayed in letters is different, so the display modes are different. Note that the text displayed in letters may also be included in the display modes. However, the display modes of the safety device-related displays (specific image, specific text image) of the activation notice display 511 (first display mode of specific image), the activation warning display 512 (third display mode of specific image), and the activation display 513 (second display mode of specific image) may be different overall but may have commonality. For example,
The activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, and activation display 513 all share the character string "stop" and are displayed in the same font (typeface), so that at least some of the display format is the same (part of the display format may be the same color or character size). This allows the various safety device related displays to have a common display format and be aligned to a certain extent, making it easier to impress upon the user that they are all displays related to the safety devices (complete function, stop function), and also making it possible to prevent them from being mistaken for other types of displays other than safety device related displays. Activation notice display 5
11, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513 are error displays (bulb out error display 520
In order to avoid mistaking the error display for an error message (such as an overflow error message 522), the error display may be displayed in a font (typeface), character size, or color different from that of the error display, so that the display format does not have any similarities with the error display.

[Example of different activation notice displays depending on the game status]
FIG. 102 shows the fourth embodiment, in which different operation notice displays 511a-
100A and 100B, the game state is (Ki).
The display mode of the activation notice display 511 ("Playing will end soon") differs between when the machine is waiting for customers and when a variable display such as (O) or (K) is being displayed. However, in FIG. 102, the display mode differs as shown in activation notice displays 511a-511d so that the activation notice display can be displayed appropriately among (A) the normal gaming state, (B) the time-saving state, (C) the probability variable state, and (D) the special gaming state. Note that in FIGS. 102(A)-(D), the safety device counter value is a value (e.g., 190055) that is greater than the notice start value 190000 at which the activation notice state begins and less than the counter reference value 195000.

FIG. 102(A) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the normal game state (normal mode), and it shows that there is a left-hit instruction display 503 and an operation notice display 511a, and a variation number display 677.
100A (A) except for the display content "170G". In the normal game state, the number of winning balls (number of winning balls, number of safe balls) is not so high, so there is little possibility that the safety device will be activated and the game will be stopped. For this reason, the operation notice display 511 in the normal game state
The left-hand hit instruction display 503 is displayed in a small size on the left edge of the display screen so as not to interfere with other displays such as variable displays. When the left-hand hit instruction display 503 instructing the player to hit to the left is displayed, the operation notice display 511a is displayed in a small size on the left-hand hit instruction display 503 to increase the chances that the player will notice it.
It may be displayed opposite (adjacent to) the left-hit instruction display 503 in the vicinity (for example, next to or below) of the left-hit instruction display 503.

Figure 102 (B) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), which is the same as (K) in Figure 100B. In the time-saving state, it is easier to obtain prize balls than in the normal game state due to the normal power support, and there is a higher possibility of hitting a jackpot and significantly increasing the number of safe balls compared to the normal game state, making it more likely that the safety device will be activated. For this reason, the activation notice display 511b in the time-saving state is displayed larger and more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511a in the normal game state, more strongly warning of the possibility of the safety device being activated.

Figure 102 (C) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the probability variable state (probability variable mode) when the probability variable state (probability variable mode) exists, but it is the same as (K) of Figure 100B, except for the activation notice display 511c, mode display 679, and variation count display 677. In the probability variable state, there is a higher possibility of a jackpot being hit, a significant increase in the number of safe balls, and even an activation of the safety device, than in the time-saving state. For this reason, the activation notice display 511c for the probability variable state is displayed larger and more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511b for the time-saving state, more strongly warning of the possibility of the safety device being activated.

FIG. 102(D) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the special game state (during a big win or a small win), and the round effect is being executed on the display screen as in FIG. 101(K2). In the special game state, the number of safe balls increases significantly due to the opening of the big prize opening, so the safety device is more likely to be activated than in the probability change state. For this reason, the activation notice display 5 of the special game state
The activation notice display 511d is displayed larger and more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511c in the probability variable state, and more strongly notifies the player of the possibility of the safety device being activated. The activation notice display 511d is displayed in the vicinity of the right hit instruction display 502 (for example, to the left of the right hit instruction display 502) facing the right hit instruction display 502 in order to increase the chances of the player noticing it.
adjacent to each other).

As described above, in FIG. 102, the sizes of the operation notice displays 511a-511d increase in size and become more noticeable in the order of normal gaming state, time-saving state, probability variable state, and special gaming state.
As another example, the normal game mode, time-saving mode, probability change mode, and special game mode are arranged in this order to make them stand out.
The color and font of the activation notice displays 511a-511d may be different depending on the game state. In this way, the activation notice displays 511a-511d can effectively notify the player of the activation of the safety device.

[Example of activation warning display before and after reaching the limit]
FIG. 103 shows the fourth embodiment, in which the operation notice display 511 before and after the reach during the variable display is displayed.
FIG.

(K1) is the same as (K) in Figure 100B, but shows the state before the decorative special pattern reaches a reach state, and the operation preview display 511 is displayed from the bottom center to the bottom left edge of the display screen.

Next, in (Q2), the reach state starts, and the left symbol 611 appears in the left variable display area 610A.
a temporarily stops (for example, swings and fluctuates), and the right pattern 611b temporarily stops (for example, swings and fluctuates) in the right variable display area 610B. As a reach effect, the word "reach" may be displayed on the display screen, or the sound "reach" may be generated from the speaker 19. The operation notice display 511 is (Q1) so as not to interfere with the temporarily stopped left pattern 611a or right pattern 611b, or so as not to interfere with the reach effect that will be displayed large in the center of the display screen in the future.
For example, it is moved to the left edge of the display screen and displayed vertically in a smaller size than before the reach. At this stage, the SP reach has not been reached, in which a movie (video) is displayed or the upper performance unit 40c moves downward, so the operation notice display 51
1 may be displayed in the same manner as (Q1).

Next, in (Q3), the N reach state of (Q2) develops into an SP reach. Here,
The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are reduced in size and move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively. As a SP reach effect, a movie (video) is displayed large in the center of the display screen. Also, as a SP reach effect, the upper effect unit 40c as a movable role piece moves downward from the initial position and is placed in an operating position in front of the display screen. Here, the operation notice display 511 is
In order not to interfere with the movie in the center of the display screen or the upper performance unit 40c in the operating position, it is already displayed in a different manner from before the reach in (K1) at the (K2) stage, for example, moved to the left edge of the display screen and displayed vertically in a smaller size than before the reach. Note that the operation notice display 511 may be hidden in (K2) (the display manner of the operation notice display 511 may include not displaying it).

In addition, at the SP Reach stage of (K3), the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in a different manner from before the Reach. Also, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in accordance with the SP Reach performance,
The display mode may change from before the SP Reach of (K2). For example, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed smaller than (K2) or in an inconspicuous color so as not to interfere with the SP Reach performance. When the SP Reach performance appears in (K3), the operation notice display 5
11 may be hidden because it interferes with the SP reach performance (the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may include not displaying it).

103, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change and differ depending on the progress of the game (here, the variable display game) or the progress of the presentation. This allows the operation notice display 511 to be displayed appropriately in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation. In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed depending on the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display device 41, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of an operation warning display while waiting for passengers]
104 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an operation notice display 511 during customer waiting in the fourth embodiment. The performance control device 300 changes the customer waiting screen of the display device 41 during customer waiting by the customer waiting demo editing process (B0015) or the hall/player setting mode process (B0011),
The screens may be switched cyclically in the following order: (K1) Stop screen → (K2) Player setting screen → (K3) Customer waiting demo movie screen → (K4) Model name display screen → (K5) Caution display screen → (K1) Stop screen → (K2) Player setting screen → (K3) Customer waiting demo movie screen, etc. Note that the customer waiting screen may include a game explanation screen that explains the game and the details of the effects, or a manufacturer display screen that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10.

The (K1) stop screen is the stage where the stop display time (set in the special game processing timer) during which the (K) decorative stop pattern is displayed as "3, 7, 8" has elapsed. At this point, the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3212), a customer waiting demo command is sent to the performance control device 300 (A3213, B1307), and the display device 41 becomes the customer waiting screen, but here (
From (f), the screen changes to a stop screen with no apparent change. Note that the appearance may also be changed by erasing the mode display 679 and the number of variations display 677 from (f). On the stop screen, decorative stop patterns are displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to interfere with the decorative stop patterns, etc.

Next, the player setting screen (K2) is displayed after the stop screen is displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 20 seconds). The player setting screen displays a volume adjustment image 527, which is a meter image for adjusting the volume, and a brightness adjustment image 528 (light intensity adjustment image), which is a meter image for adjusting the brightness (light intensity). The hall/player setting mode process (B0011) adjusts the volume of the speaker 19 in response to operation of the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, causing the meter in the volume adjustment image 527 to rise or fall, and adjusts the brightness of the effect LED in response to operation of the cross key switch 450, causing the meter in the brightness adjustment image 528 to rise or fall.

In the player setting screen of (K2), the volume adjustment image 527 and the brightness adjustment image 528 are on the layer (foreground layer) in front of the decorative stop pattern and the operation notice display 511, and are displayed in the variable display area 6
10 and/or may be displayed superimposed on the decorative stop pattern or operation notice display 511 in the variable display area 615.

Next, on the customer waiting demo movie screen (K3), a customer waiting demo movie 535 like a shooting star is displayed. Here, other displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535 (decorative stop pattern, special chart 1 reserved number display unit 650, special chart 2 reserved number display unit 660, first predetermined image 675)
, the second predetermined image 676, the mode display 679, the number of times of change display 677, etc.) are erased and hidden. As a result, the operation notice display 511 does not interfere with other displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535, so the display mode is changed so that it is larger than the stop screen (K1) and the player setting screen (K2).

Next, on the model name display screen (K4), the model name of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the model (official name) "P Tora Tora Tora") is displayed as a model name display 519. Furthermore, on the model name display screen, it may be displayed that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function) by a specific model display 541 consisting of the text display "equipped with complete function", for example. A player who sees the specific model display 541 as an indication that the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a safety device (complete function) can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function). Operation notice display 51
1 may be displayed on a layer (top layer) in front of the model name display 519 and the specific model display 541, superimposed on them. The specific model display 541 may also be displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen (K3).

Next, on the warning display screen (K5), a warning display 543 to warn the player not to become addicted is displayed together with the operation notice display 511 and the specific model display 541. (K5
), the warning display 543 and the operation notice display 511 do not overlap, but if they do overlap, either the warning display 543 or the operation notice display 511 may be displayed on the front layer (foreground layer).

After that, the customer waiting screen becomes (K1) the stop screen again, and then switches (transitions) to (K2) the player setting screen and (K3) the customer waiting demo movie screen in that order.

As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 during customer waiting is changed depending on the display state of the image other than the operation notice display 511, that is, the type of customer waiting screen that is cyclically switched (stop screen, player setting screen, customer waiting demo movie screen, model name display screen, warning display screen).
Furthermore, while waiting for customers, the display screen of the display device 41 may display a specific model display 54 indicating that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function).
It may be denoted by 1.

[Example of the setting confirmation screen]
FIG. 105 illustrates an example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in the fourth embodiment.

(A) is the display screen that is first displayed when the setting confirmation state is entered, and is the display screen of the performance control device 30.
0, the setting confirmation display 545 which notifies that the setting is being confirmed is displayed as "setting confirmation"
on the display screen (B1328). The effect control device 300 also displays a text display "setting history list" and an operation prompt image 546 that imitates an operation unit (in this case, the effect button 25) on the display screen. The operation prompt image 546 prompts the player to operate the operation unit, and may imitate the cross key switch 450.

(B) is a display screen that is switched from (A) and displayed when the operation unit (here, the effect button 25) is operated, and displays a setting history list 548.
In 48, whether or not there has been a setting change or setting confirmation is displayed in order from the past to the present, and the probability setting value at the time of the setting change or confirmation and the duration of the changed probability setting value are displayed.
An operation prompt image 546 is displayed, urging the user to return to screen (A) by performing a predetermined operation (pressing operation) on the operation unit (effect button 25). In addition, an operation prompt image 547 is also displayed, urging the user to scroll through setting history list 548 to view past history by performing another predetermined operation (swipe operation) on the operation unit (effect button 25). Note that operation prompt image 546 and operation prompt image 547 here may be modeled after cross key switch 450.

Furthermore, in the setting history list 548, a predetermined mark (here, a star) is displayed in the same row as the probability setting value so that the probability setting value when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped can be recognized. This allows hall personnel to confirm whether a large number of balls (a large number of safe balls) was generated as intended at a high setting probability setting value (e.g., 5 or 6) that increases the probability of winning, such as the probability of a big hit or a small hit, and the safety device was activated (the game was stopped). The results of this confirmation can then be used to change the probability setting value in the future.

[Example 1 of specific model display]
Fig. 106 is a diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a specific model display 541 (complete function display) displayed by something other than an image, in relation to the fourth embodiment. In Fig. 106, the specific model display 541 is displayed by printing, printing out, painting (painting), etc. Note that in Fig. 104, the specific model display 541 is displayed as an image on the display screen of the display device 41.

106 shows the collective display device 50 and its surroundings provided on the gaming board 30. Around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50, specification displays relating to the specs (specifications) of the gaming machine 10 are displayed. The specification displays include a display 85a of the jackpot probability at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), "1/300 and 1/200";
The display 85b of the number of prize balls is "3 & 2 & 10 &14", and the display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds is "3, 6,
9", model (official name) display 85d "Pxxxxx", in the case of a machine with a probability variable state, display 85e of whether there is a limit on probability variable jackpots (here "no limit")
is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of prize balls, the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning hole 35,
The number of prize balls of the special variable prize winning device 39 is displayed so that it can be recognized in order, for example, 3, 2, 10, 14. The limit on the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutive probability variable jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number (a predetermined limit number in one jackpot (
(This makes it possible to win a jackpot of the same number of consecutive wins).

106, the specific model display 541 always displays that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function), for example, by printing, imprinting, painting, or the like, the words "equipped with complete function."
It is always displayed even if the power of the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and furthermore, it is not displayed as an image on a specific screen as shown in FIG. 104, but is always displayed.
Since the specific model display 41 is always easily recognizable to the player, it is more convenient for the player than the specific model display 541 displayed as a video image. The specific model display 541 may be displayed in association with the display 85d of the model (official name) of the gaming machine 10, for example, by displaying it adjacent to the display 85d of the model (official name) of the gaming machine 10 or by displaying it opposite and nearby, in order to impress upon the player that the gaming machine 10 is a model equipped with a safety device.

The specific model display 541 shown in FIG. 106 by printing, printing, painting, etc. is the same as that shown in FIG.
106 is the same as the character string "Complete function installed" (same display content) as the specific model display 541 in the image, but is not limited to this and may be a different character string (different display content). If the character string of the specific model display 541 in FIG. 106 is shortened by, for example, omitting a part of it to "Complete function", the periphery of the collective display device 50, which has little free space, can be used effectively.

[Example 2 of specific model display]
107 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a specific model display 541 (complete function display) displayed by something other than an image, in accordance with the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 107, the specific model display 541 is also displayed by printing, printing-out, painting, or the like.

In FIG. 107 , the specific model display 541 is displayed on the generally flat front surface 456 of the decorative device 18a (top unit). The decorative device 18a protrudes diagonally upward and forward from the top of the glass frame 15 (or the opening/closing frame). A model name display 456a indicating the model name (here, "Tora-Tora-Tora") is provided on the front surface 456 by printing, lettering, painting, or the like. The model name display 456a may have a different display format or content from the model name display 519 displayed on the display screen as an image. The model name display 456a may omit the letter "P" and not necessarily indicate the model type (official name). Also, a character 456b related to the model name and capable of appearing on the display screen of the display device 41 is provided on the front surface 456 by printing, painting, or the like.

The specific model display 541 is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like near the end of the front surface 456, for example, at a position adjacent to or facing the character 456b.

The front surface 456 may be fixed to the decoration device 18a at all times, or may be detachable from the decoration device 18a for convenience and replaceable depending on the model.
A sheet or film with a fixed marking 41 printed on it can be inserted, and the sheet or film can be visible from the front through a transparent member (transparent plastic, etc.). The sheet or film can be replaced depending on the model, which is convenient.

[Other configuration examples]
In order to simplify the control of the performance control device 300, unlike FIG. 102, the operation notice displays 511a-511d ("Playing will end soon") may be displayed in the same manner (same size and same font) among the normal game state, time-saving state, probability variable state, and special game state.
Unlike in 03, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the variable display.
Unlike 4, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner while waiting for passengers.

It is also possible to change the warning start value (190000 in the above example) at which the safety device activation warning state begins, i.e., the timing at which the activation warning display 511 starts to be displayed. For example, in a normal power support state (probability variable state, time-saving state), the activation warning display 511 may start to be displayed at a warning start value that is smaller than that in a normal gaming state, so that a warning can be given at an earlier timing in a gaming state where a jackpot is more likely to occur.

A switch that can be operated by a hall official to turn on and off the safety device (complete function) is provided on the back of the gaming machine 10, and only when this switch connected to the gaming control device 100 is turned on,
The game control device 100 may be configured to activate a safety device.

[Actions and Effects of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is capable of executing a game, and includes a game stopping means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state (a game stopped state, a game prohibited state) in which the game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition (an operating condition) is met, and a notification means (e.g., a game control device 100, a presentation control device 30) that can notify an error related to the payout of gaming media in the game-disabled state.
0, display device 41, etc.

In such a gaming machine 10, when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to prevent a player from playing the game and take appropriate countermeasures against fraud. Furthermore, by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it is possible to prevent a player from becoming addicted to the game. By preventing addiction, a player can play with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making it possible to notify an error even in a state where a game cannot be played, it is possible to take appropriate countermeasures against fraud while preventing any disadvantage or inconvenience to players or hall personnel.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and includes a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which the game cannot be executed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition (activation condition), and a display control means (e.g., the performance control device 300) capable of displaying a warning display (e.g., an activation warning display 511) that warns of the upcoming game-disabled state on a display means (e.g., the display device 41). The display control means changes the display mode of the warning display depending on the game state (e.g., waiting for customers, displaying a variable display).

In such a gaming machine 10, when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to take appropriate measures against cheating by disabling play, and it may also be possible to suppress player addiction. A warning display (e.g., the operation warning display 511) notifies the player in advance of the possibility of being unable to play, urging the player to end the game and preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. Furthermore, the warning display can surprise someone who is cheating and encourage them to stop cheating. Furthermore, the display mode of the warning display can be changed depending on the game status (e.g., while waiting for customers, while a variable display is being performed), allowing for effective warning display.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is equipped with a payout control means (for example, a payout control device 200) capable of paying out gaming media, and a first counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) capable of counting the number of payouts (for example, the total number of winning balls or the number of safe balls) which is the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) or the number of gaming media decided to be paid out in a predetermined period. The gaming machine 10 is also equipped with a second counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100 or an out ball detection switch 7) capable of counting the number of uses (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls) which is the number of gaming media used in a predetermined period.
4). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is equipped with calculation means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) that can calculate a calculation value (e.g., a safety device counter value or a difference ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses. When the calculation value reaches a reference value (e.g., a counter reference value, a difference ball reference value), the game stop means (e.g., a safety device) can generate a game unplayable state by determining that a predetermined condition (activation condition) has been met. The display control means (e.g., the presentation control device 300) can display a predetermined display (e.g., an operating display 513) on the display means to indicate that the game is unplayable.

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to create a state where play is not possible based on a calculated value that is based on the number of gaming media paid out and the number of gaming media used (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls ejected), and it is possible to display a predetermined display (e.g., the in operation display 513) that indicates that play is not possible, so that it is possible to effectively take measures against fraud and also effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when a calculated value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference in the number of balls) reaches a predetermined value (notification start value) smaller than a reference value, the display control means can display a notifying display (for example, an operation notifying display 511) on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify in advance that a game will become unplayable.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when a calculated value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference in the number of balls) reaches a reference value but a predetermined condition (an activation condition) is not met, the display control means (for example, the presentation control device 300) can display on the display means a display (for example, an activation warning display 512) that is different from the predetermined display (for example, an activation in progress display 513) and the advance notice display (for example, an activation advance notice display 511). Therefore, the player can be notified in advance that the game will be stopped after the predetermined condition is met (for example, after the end of a small win or a big win), and can be warned that he or she will suffer a disadvantage.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a display control means (for example, a performance control device 300
) may change the display mode of a warning display (for example, the operation warning display 511) that warns of an impossibility of playing depending on the progress of the game. This allows the warning display to be appropriately displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41) in accordance with the progress of the game. Also, the display mode of the warning display can be changed depending on the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the adjustment of the gaming machine 10 (
The gaming machine 10 is provided with an adjustment means (e.g., the presentation control device 300) that can perform adjustments such as brightness adjustment and volume adjustment. The adjustment means does not perform adjustments even if a player operates the device in a game-disabled state. Therefore, since various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not performed even if a player operates the device in a game-stopped state, it is easier for the player to recognize that the game is stopped, and since the player cannot freely adjust the gaming machine 10, it may be possible to save power in a game-stopped state.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a game control unit (game control device 100) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control unit (presentation control device 300) for controlling presentations related to the game. The game control unit includes a first counting unit capable of counting the number of payouts (e.g., the number of safe balls), which is the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from power-on to the present) or the number of gaming media determined to be paid out during the predetermined period; a second counting unit capable of counting the number of uses (e.g., the number of fired balls or the number of discharged balls), which is the number of gaming media used during the predetermined period; and a game stop unit (e.g., a safety device) capable of generating a non-playable state in which the game cannot be executed based on the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (e.g., the difference in the number of balls). The game control unit includes a start memory unit capable of storing a start memory as a right to execute the game, and a pre-determination unit (e.g., a special symbol reservation information determination process) capable of determining the outcome of the game before the game based on the start memory is executed. When the performance control means (performance control device 300) receives the judgment result of the advance judgment means from the game control means (for example, information contained in a look-ahead stop symbol command or a look-ahead change pattern command), it can execute a preview performance (for example, a look-ahead performance, a look-ahead preview performance) based on the judgment result, and if the difference between the payout number and the number of uses is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 94,500), it will not execute a preview performance even if it receives the judgment result. This makes it possible to prevent the player from having unnecessary expectations when the difference between the payout number and the number of uses reaches a predetermined value that is close to the occurrence of an unplayable state, and reduces the player's discomfort when an unplayable state occurs.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming control means (gaming control device 100)
Regardless of the difference between the payout number and the number of used balls (for example, the difference in the number of balls), before the game based on the start memory is executed, the result of the game is determined in advance, and the determination result (for example, information included in the pre-read stop symbol command or the pre-read change pattern command) is transmitted to the performance control means (performance control device 30
When the performance control means receives the determination result from the game control means, the performance control means
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead notice effect). As a result, regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls (for example, the difference in the number of balls), a notice effect can be executed even when the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls reaches a predetermined value (for example, 94,500) at which a game-unplayable state is imminent, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of controlling performances related to a game. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a movable member (movable gadget) operable as a performance, and a game stop means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (a game stop state, a game prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition is met.
If the movable member is in an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled, the presentation control means returns the movable member from the operating position to the initial position. This prevents the movable member from being maintained in the operating position in a game disabled state in which the game cannot be played, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstandings such as that the movable member is broken.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, if the movable member is in an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled, the presentation control means may not return the movable member from the operating position to the initial position. In this case, the movable member remains in an unnatural position, and the game is disabled (game stopped, game prohibited) in which game play cannot be performed, so it is possible to emphasize to the player that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state (a state in which game play is possible, a state in which game play is enabled).

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a game stop means capable of generating a game-disabled state in which game execution is disabled when a first condition (e.g., condition (1): the difference in the number of balls reaches a reference value of 95,000) and a second condition (e.g., condition (2): neither a big win nor a small win) are met. The presentation control means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., an activation notice display 511) on the display means to warn of the upcoming game-disabled state before the first condition is met. When the first condition is met but the second condition is not met, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a second display (e.g., an activation warning display 512) on the display means (e.g., the display device 41) that shares at least a partial display aspect with the first display. This makes it easier to impress upon the user that both the first display (e.g., the activation notice display 511) and the second display (e.g., the activation warning display 512) are related to the activation of the game stop means or the occurrence of a game-disabled state, and also prevents them from being mistaken for other types of displays other than safety device-related displays.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
The device is provided with a presentation control means capable of displaying a specific image (safety device related display) on the display means, and when the game results in a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state (big win or small win) advantageous to the player. The game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a game stop means (stop means) capable of generating a game disabled state in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is met. The display modes of the specific image (safety device related display) related to the operation of the game stop means include a first display mode (operation notice display 511) and a second display mode (operation display 513). The presentation control means is
In a game resulting in a special result, when the second display mode of the specific image (operating display 513) is displayed, predetermined images different from the specific image (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, hold displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, hold number display, mode display 679, number of changes display 677, right hit instruction display 502, decorative special patterns, characters, and other effect images) are not displayed.

In such a gaming machine 10, when the second display mode of the specific image (operation display 513) is displayed, a predetermined image different from the specific image is hidden, so that the second display mode of the specific image (operation display 513) is easily recognized by players, hall staff, etc. Furthermore, even in a game resulting in a special result (win), if the special game state has not occurred (before the special result has been derived), the second display mode of the specific image (operation display 513) is preferably displayed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition for activating the game stop means, for example.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 108 to 140. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to instructions (codes) and programs.

[CPU Configuration]
108A is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 according to the fifth embodiment.
2. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80-based CPU.

The CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) shown in FIG. 108A includes a W register 1201A, an A register 1202A, a B register 1204A, a C register 1205A, a D register 1207A, an E register 1208A, an H register 1210A, and ... D register 1207B, each of which has a width of 8 bits.
It is provided with an L register 1211A.

These general-purpose registers are a 16-bit wide WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) that combines a W register 1201A and an A register 1202A.
Similarly, the B register 1204A and the C register 1205
It is also possible to use a BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) that combines the D register 1207A and the E register 1208A, a DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) that combines the D register 1207A and the E register 1208A, and a HL register 1212A (pair register, register pair) that combines the H register 1210A and the L register 1211A.

Furthermore, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) has a width of 16 bits.
The IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a are provided.
The IY register 1232a is used as an index when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 accesses data. The IY register 1232a can also be used as a start address specification register for setting the start address of the RAM 111c (update information storage means) in the address space (or memory space).

Note that a register with a width (capacity) of 8 bits (1 byte) may be referred to as the first register, and a pair of registers with a width (capacity) of 16 bits (2 bytes), the IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a, may be referred to as the second register.

These general-purpose registers form one general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. Meanwhile, the CPU core 102 has another general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 1) 1220B that has the same (or similar) configuration as the general-purpose registers included in the register group of register bank 0 1220A.

The register group 1220B of this register bank 1 includes the W register 1 of register bank 0.
The register bank 1 includes a W register 1201B to an L register 1211B, which have the same functions as the WA register 1203B to the HL register 1212B. These registers can also be used as 16-bit registers, as in the register bank 0, as WA register 1203B to HL register 1212B. The register bank 1 includes a IX register 1231b, an IY register 1232a, and an IX register 1231b.
It is provided with an IY register 1232b.

Furthermore, the CPU core 102 includes a flag register 1200 having a width of 8 bits.

The flag register 1200 stores the results of operations using registers. A register bank selector (RBS), which is a bit of the flag register 1200, selects which of two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is to be used as the target of the operation.

Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) is used for calculations by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. On the other hand, each register belonging to the unselected register group retains its value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) is changed and it becomes a target for selection.

The CPU core 102 also includes a DP register 1230.
0 can be used, for example, to store the starting address of the game control data area of ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space).

Furthermore, the CPU core 102 includes an SP register 1233 that functions as a stack pointer and a PC register 1234 that functions as a program counter, each having a width of 16 bits.

The stack pointer 1233 indicates the location of the area when data is stored in the stack area (or when data is retrieved).
This indicates the address where the instruction being executed is stored.

The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets a program (a program within a domain or a program outside a domain)
and performs arithmetic processing using each register in the CPU core 102. Specifically,
The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 reads data stored in the ROM 111b at the address indicated by the program counter 1234, regards the read data as code, and executes the instruction corresponding to the code. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes instructions included in a predetermined instruction set.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is exemplified as the arithmetic processing means, but inside the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 mainly performs the function of the arithmetic processing means. The RAM 111c serves as update information storage means that stores information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102), and also serves as storage means that can retain stored information even if a power outage occurs due to a backup power source.

The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 executes the access circuit 12 in response to the instructions of the program.
43, an address bus 721, and a data bus 722, and
The address bus 721 is configured with a 16-bit signal line, and the CPU core 102 may exchange data with the OM 111b, RAM 111c, and other circuits.
A designated address is output to an address bus 721, and data stored at a designated address (address of the ROM 111b, RAM 111c, etc.) is input/output via a data bus 722.

Furthermore, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 executes each instruction in the ROM 111b one by one.
The address where the next instruction is stored is stored in the program counter 1234. In this way, the program is executed sequentially by repeatedly executing instructions and updating the program counter 1234. When an interrupt signal is received from the interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to the value of a preset address for interrupt processing.

Data is exchanged between the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 and each register provided in the CPU core 102 via an internal bus 1235 .

The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit that sets initial values in the registers provided in the CPU core 102 in a hardware manner.

When the built-in reset circuit 1240 receives a reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it activates the initial value setting circuit 1241,
After initial values are set in the registers of the core 102, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242
Start the program.

When the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operating upon power-on or upon receiving a reset signal, it sets an initial value ("29FFh" in this embodiment) to the stack pointer 1233 and sets initial values (the start address of the RAM 111c,
In this embodiment, the initial value ("2800h") is set in the DP register 1230.
1b, the start address of the data area (in this embodiment, "5000h") is set, and HL
A reset address ("4000h" in this embodiment) is set in the register 1212A, the value of the reset address (the start address of the ROM 111b, "4000h" in this embodiment) is set in the program counter 1234, and the value of "00h" is set in other registers (the value of "0000h" for 16-bit registers).
0h" may also be used.

[Flag register]
Fig. 108B is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a flag register 1200 according to the fifth embodiment. The value of each bit of the 8-bit flag register 1200 is set by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in Fig. 108A. The 8-bit data (value) stored in the flag register 1200 is called a program status word (PSW).

The interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag that sets whether or not interrupt processing by an interrupt signal is permitted; when set (value is "1"), it is permitted, and when cleared (value is "0"), it is prohibited.

The register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag that selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is to be used when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 108A performs arithmetic processing. When set (value is "1"), the register group 1220B of register bank 1 is selected, and when cleared (value is "0"), the register group 1220B of register bank 0 is selected.
A is selected.

An overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (value "1") when an overflow occurs in the general-purpose register that is the target of a given operation, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise.

The sign flag (SF) 1303 is set (value is "1") when the most significant bit of the general-purpose register to be operated on becomes "1" by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is "0") otherwise.
will be done.

The half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (value is "1") when a carry or borrow occurs in the fourth bit of the general-purpose register being operated on as a result of an 8-bit operation, and is cleared (value is "0") in all other cases.

The carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (value is "1") when a carry or borrow occurs in a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is "0") otherwise.
will be done.

The zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (value is "1") in certain cases, such as when the result of a certain operation is "0" or when the data (value) to be transferred is "0", and is cleared (value is "0") in other cases.

The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (value is "1") when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 and the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set.
Therefore, the jump status flag (JF) 1307 can become the same value as the carry flag (CF) 1305 or the zero flag (ZF) 1306 by a predetermined calculation. Or, even if no calculation processing is performed, if the value of the general-purpose register becomes "00h", it is set (value is "1"). If none of these conditions are met, it is cleared (value is "0"). The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is
It can be used to determine the operating conditions of branch and call instructions.

When the CPU core 102 is reset, all bits of the flag register are set to 0.

[Memory Map]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a memory map (memory configuration) relating to the memory used by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) in the fifth embodiment. As in the first embodiment,
The memories used by the CPU 111a include a RAM 111c and a ROM 111b. In the address space of the memory, addresses are assigned as serial numbers for each byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the starting address of the RAM 111c is "2800h".
The start address of the ROM 111b is "4000h" and the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b is "5000h", but these addresses are just examples and other addresses may be used.

As in the first embodiment, the internal work area, unused area, internal stack area, unused area, external work area, unused area, external stack area, and unused area are arranged in this order in the address space starting from the starting address "2800h" of RAM 111c. The unused area between the internal work area and internal stack area, and the unused area between the external work area and external stack area do not have to be present. The internal work area, unused area, and internal stack area, which are continuous in the address space, become the first RAM area. The external work area, unused area, and external stack area, which are continuous in the address space, become the second RAM area.

The area of the program in the area from the top address "4000h" of the ROM 111b (the first R
OM area, first program storage area), unused area, area for out-of-area programs (second R
The OM area, second program storage area, unused area, and program management area are arranged in this order in the address space. The area for the program in the area starts at address 5000h.
The ROM 111b includes a data area (area for game control data) and an area for game control programs other than the data area. An unused area may be sandwiched between the area for game control programs and the data area. The area for out-of-area programs may also include a data area. The program management area located at the end of the address space of the ROM 111b stores hardware (HW) parameters, vector tables, etc. This vector table is a table used by the CALLT instruction (third call instruction) described below.

In this embodiment, the ROM's in-area program (first program) consists of game control programs and game control data, etc., and includes a main program corresponding to main processing (Figures 5A-5C) and a timer interrupt processing program corresponding to timer interrupt processing. Subroutines (including subroutines of subroutines) in the main program or timer interrupt processing program are generally in-area programs (unless otherwise specified), but may exceptionally be out-of-area programs. In this embodiment, the out-of-area program (second program) for non-game control not directly related to game control includes a safety device information initialization program corresponding to safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to performance display editing processing, and an out-of-area integration processing program corresponding to out-of-area integration processing. In addition, the out-of-area program (second program) includes, as subroutines called by the out-of-area integration processing program, a test signal output processing program corresponding to test signal output processing, a performance display device control processing program corresponding to performance display device control processing, a ball difference confirmation processing program corresponding to ball difference confirmation processing, and a safety device activation monitoring processing program corresponding to safety device activation monitoring processing. The above-described processing programs that handle various coherent processes are also called program modules.

[Instructions of the CPU of the gaming control device]
110 to 119 show the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control device 100.
In this example, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes a typical instruction (
1 is an instruction table showing an example of a program code for the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242).
Dedicated logic circuitry may be provided to execute each instruction in the instruction table.

In the instruction table, instructions are represented by assembly language instructions (source code) compatible with the Z80 8-bit microprocessor, and correspond one-to-one to the machine language instructions (machine code) stored in ROM 111b. Instructions are divided into an "opcode" (or "mnemonic") indicating the operation (calculation) and an "operand" that is the target of the instruction. There may be multiple "operands," such as a first operand, a second operand, etc.

In addition, in the instruction table, the change of flags that occurs depending on the execution result of an instruction or the result of an operation by an instruction, how many cycles (periods) of the CPU's operating clock it takes to execute an instruction (i.e., the number of operating clock cycles required to execute an instruction), the word length of the instruction in machine language (instruction size,
The number of cycles corresponds to the execution time of the instruction, and the shorter the number of cycles, the shorter the execution time of the instruction and the faster the program will run. If the instruction word length is short (small), the capacity (size) of the program can be reduced.

Note that there are special cases where the number of cycles and/or word lengths in the instruction table are exceptionally smaller than normal, as shown in parentheses, depending on the type of register used in the instruction, the combination of registers, etc. The more types of registers that can be used in instructions, the easier it is to develop a program, but if a program uses as many instructions with small number of cycles and/or small word lengths as possible, the program execution speed can be increased and/or the program size can be reduced.

The instruction table also shows the changes in flags due to the execution of instructions. The zero flag (ZF) has a value Z, the carry flag (CF) has a value C, and the half carry flag (HF) has a value H.
The value S of the sign flag (SF) and the value V of the overflow flag (VF) are written to indicate that they can be changed. Also, "-" indicates that the flag remains unchanged, and "U" indicates that the value is undefined.

The instructions in the instruction table are shown in the general format: In the instruction, n is an 8-bit (=1
byte). Depending on the instruction, n exceptionally indicates a 4-bit immediate value.
In the instruction, mn indicates a 16-bit (=2-byte) immediate value. Note that in the program list described later, immediate values n and mn are used to represent labels corresponding to numerical values or hexadecimal numbers (...
h, etc.) or decimal numbers. d and k indicate 5-bit or 8-bit offset values (displacement values, immediate values) that can be used when specifying a memory address.
indicates a 16-bit (= 2 bytes) direct address value (immediate value) that can be used when directly specifying a memory address. ( ) indicates the area in memory at the address specified within the ( ), or the contents stored or to be stored in the area at that address (memory area). If the area is 2 bytes, the ( ) indicates the starting address of the area. $
indicates the start address of the instruction (i.e., the value of the PC register 1234).

In the instructions, r, g, p, q, f, k, s, and t represent 8-bit (1-byte) registers. For more details, as shown in Figure 110, r and g represent the W register,
Indicates any of the A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register. p indicates any of the W register and A register. q indicates any of the B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register.
f indicates one of the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, or E register. k indicates one of the H register or L register. s indicates the A register. t indicates one of the W register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, or L register.

In the instructions, rr, gg, jj, uu, zz, ss, ff, and kk indicate 16-bit (2-byte) registers or pair registers (register pairs).
As shown in 0, etc., rr and gg respectively indicate the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, or IY register. jj indicates the DE register, HL register, IX register, or IY register. uu and zz respectively indicate the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, SP register, or DP register. ss indicates the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, or SP register. ff indicates the WA register, BC register, DE register, or HL register. kk indicates the IX register, IY register, SP register, or DP register.

[Transfer command (example 1)]
A transfer instruction (load instruction) is an instruction to transfer data. In this embodiment, a transfer instruction transfers data (value, content) corresponding to a second operand to a first operand.
Transfer (copy, load)

The transfer command is executed by setting six flags (R
Among the flags other than BS and IMF, the jump status flag (JF) and zero flag (
The zero flag (ZF) may be changed, but the carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF) remain unchanged. If the value transferred by the move instruction is "0", the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "1", and if the value transferred is not "0", the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "0". The jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value Z (1 or 0) as the zero flag (ZF).

[Example 1-1]
Example 1-1 in FIG. 110 is an instruction table illustrating an LD instruction that transfers one byte of data among transfer instructions. Here, the LD instruction is expressed in assembly language as "LD first operand, second operand"
It is written as "operand" and transfers (copies, loads) the data (value, content) corresponding to the second operand to the one corresponding to the first operand. Note that LD is the opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

"LD r, g" is an instruction to transfer the value of the g register to the r register. The number of operating clock cycles required to execute the instruction is basically two cycles, and the word length (instruction size) of the instruction is basically two bytes. However, there are exceptional cases where the register combinations of (r, g) are (W, A), (A, W), (A, B), (A, C), (A, E), (B, A), (
In the case of a special combination of (C, A), (E, A), the number of cycles for the instruction is one cycle, the instruction execution time is short, and the word length of the instruction is one byte.

"LD f,n" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that stores the direct value n (
"LD k,n" is a 3-cycle, 3-byte instruction.
Transfers the immediate value n to the k register. "LD f,n" and "LD k,n" have different cycle counts and word lengths depending on the destination register. Using both instructions increases the number of destination registers, but if more "LD f,n" are used in a program than "LD k,n", the program size can be reduced and the program execution speed can be increased.

"LD s, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction, and stores the following in the s register:
This transfers the value stored in the direct address area (memory area) specified by the direct value vw (2 bytes). "LD t, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the direct address area (address area corresponding to the direct value vw) specified by the direct value vw to the t register. The number of destination registers increases by using both instructions, but "
"LD s, (vw)" and "LD t, (vw)" differ depending on the destination register.
The word lengths are different. If "LD s, (vw)" is used more often in a program than "LD t, (vw)", the program size can be reduced.

"LD r, (jj)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the area (memory area) of the address specified by the jj register to the r register. The number of cycles for the instruction is basically 3 cycles, and the word length of the instruction is basically 2 bytes. However, there are exceptions, such as jj
When the register is the DE register and the r register is the W register or the A register, or when the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, the A register, the B register, the C register, or the E register, the number of cycles for the instruction is 3 cycles.
The instruction word length is one byte.

"LD r, (jj+)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register to the r register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the transfer. Since 1 byte of data is transferred to the 1-byte (8-bit) r register, the address is incremented by 1. Note that "JJ+" means that the address stored in the jj register is updated to the next address after the transfer. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 2 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W register or the A register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, A register, B register, C register, or E register, it will be 3 cycles and 1 byte long.

"LD r, (jj + d)" is the r register, jj register and offset value (direct value)
This is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the address area (memory area) specified by "
"jj+d" means the added address obtained by adding the offset value d (relative address) to the value of the address (base address) stored in the jj register. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, there are exceptions where the jj register is the DE register or the HL register, the r register is the W register or the A register, and the value of d is between 1 and 7.
, the length is 4 cycles and 2 bytes.
If it is a register, and it is the W register, A register, B register, C register, or E register, it will be 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD r, (jj+p)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj and p registers to the r register. "jj+p" means the added address obtained by adding the address value stored in the jj register to the address (offset address) stored in the p register. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (vw), n" is an 8-cycle, 5-byte instruction that transfers a direct value n (1 byte) to a direct address area (in RAM) designated by a direct value vw (2 bytes).

"LD (jj), n" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value n to the area (in RAM) of the address specified by the jj register. This instruction is basically 6 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register or the HL register,
cycle and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+), n" is the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register.
This instruction transfers a direct value n to the jj register, and after the transfer, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since 1 byte of direct value n data is transferred, the address is incremented by 1 and updated to the next address. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+d), n" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value n to the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register and the offset value (immediate value). "jj+d" means the added address obtained by adding the offset value d to the address value stored in the jj register. This instruction is basically 7 cycles and 4 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register, it becomes 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p), n" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value n to the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj and p registers. "jj+p" means the address value stored in the jj register plus the address value (offset address) stored in the p register. This instruction takes 7 cycles and is 3 bytes long.

"LD (vw), s" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that transfers the value of the s register to the area (in RAM) of the direct address specified by the direct value vw.
"LD (vw), s" and "LD (vw), t" are 7-cycle, 4-byte instructions that transfer the value of the t register to the area of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw. The number of source registers increases when both instructions are used, but the number of cycles and word length differ between "LD (vw), s" and "LD (vw), t" due to the difference in the source register.
If you use more of them in a program, you can reduce the size of the program and make the program run faster.

"LD (jj), r" is an instruction that transfers the value of the r register to the area (within RAM) at the address specified by the jj register. This instruction is basically five cycles and two bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE or HL register and the r register is the W or A register, it becomes four cycles and one byte long.

"LD (jj+), r" is the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register.
This instruction transfers the value stored in the r register to the jj register, and after the transfer, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since one byte of data is transferred from the 1-byte (8-bit) r register, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction basically takes six cycles and is two bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE or HL register and the r register is the W or A register, it takes four cycles and is one byte long.

"LD (jj+d), r" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the r register to the area of the aforementioned added address "jj+d". This instruction is basically 6 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, there are exceptional cases where the jj register is the DE register or the HL register,
If the r register is the W or A register and d is a value between 1 and 7, then:
Exceptionally, when the jj register is the IY register and the r register is the W register or the A register, the operation takes 5 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p), r" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the r register to the area of the aforementioned added address "jj+p." This instruction is 6 cycles and 2 bytes long.

[Example 1-2]
Example 1-2 in Figure 111 is an instruction table that illustrates the LD instruction, which transfers 2 bytes (16 bits) of data (value) among transfer instructions. Here, since this is a transfer instruction that handles 2 bytes of data, the address specified in ( ) indicates the starting address of the 2-byte area of the transfer destination or transfer source.

"LD uu, zz" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction, and stores z in the uu register.
Transfers the value of the z register.

"LD ff,mn" is a 3-cycle, 3-byte instruction that transfers a direct value mn (2 bytes) to the ff register. "LD kk,mn" is a 4-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers a direct value mn to the kk register. "LD ff,mn" and "LD kk"
, mn" differs in the number of cycles and word length depending on the destination register. Although the number of destination registers increases when both instructions are used, "LD ff, mn" can be used as "LD kk, mn".
If you use more of them in a program, you can reduce the size of the program and make the program run faster.

"LD ss, (vw)" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw to the ss register. Here, the immediate value vw is the starting address of the 2-byte area where the 2-byte value to be transferred is stored.

"LD ss, (jj)" transfers the value stored in the area (memory area) at the address specified by the jj register to the ss register. This instruction is basically four cycles and two bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the HL register and the ss register is the WA register, it becomes four cycles and one byte long.

"LD ss, (jj+)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register to the ss register, and after the transfer,
The address stored in the register is increased by 2. Since 2 bytes of data are transferred to the 2-byte ss register, the address is increased by 2.

"LD ss, (jj+d)" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d" to the ss register. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 3
However, as an exception, when the jj register is the IY register and the ss register is the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, or the HL register, the operation takes 5 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"LD ss, (jj+p)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p" to the ss register.

"LD (vw), ss" is an 8-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value of the ss register to the area (in RAM) of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw.

"LD (jj), ss" is a 6-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value of the ss register to the area (in RAM) at the address specified by the jj register.

"LD (jj+), ss" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the ss register to the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register, and after the transfer, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since 2 bytes of data are transferred from the 2-byte ss register, the address is incremented by 2. This instruction takes 7 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+d), ss" is the area of the added address "jj+d" (in RAM),
This instruction transfers the value stored in the ss register. This instruction is generally 7 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register and the ss register is the WA register, DE register, or HL register, it will be 6 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p), ss" is the area of the added address "jj+p" (in RAM),
This instruction transfers the value stored in the ss register. This instruction takes 7 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"LD A,PSW" is an instruction to transfer the 8-bit data PSW stored in the flag register 1200 to the A register.
"LD RBS,1" is an instruction to transfer a value of "0" to the register bank selector (RBS), which is a bit of 00. "LD RBS,1" is an instruction to transfer a value of "1" to the register bank selector (RBS). These instructions are two cycles and two bytes long.

[Example 1-3]
Example 1-3 in FIG. 112 is an LD that transfers 2 bytes (16 bits) of direct value in a transfer command.
This is an instruction table showing an example of the W instruction. Since this is a transfer instruction that handles 2-byte data,
The address specified in ( ) indicates the start address of the 2-byte area of the transfer destination or source. The LDW instruction is written in assembly language as "LDW first operand, second operand."
It transfers (copies, loads) the data (value, contents) corresponding to the second operand to the one corresponding to the first operand. Note that LDW is the opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

"LDW (vw), mn" is a 10-cycle, 6-byte instruction, and is a direct value vw
The direct value mn (2 bytes) is transferred to the area (in RAM) of the direct address specified by .

"LDW (jj), mn" is an 8-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers a direct value mn to an area (in RAM) at an address specified by the jj register.

"LDW (jj+), mn" is a 9-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register, and after the transfer, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Because 2-byte immediate value mn data is transferred, the address is incremented by 2 and updated to the next address.

"LDW (jj+d), mn" is an instruction to transfer a direct value mn to the area (in RAM) of the added address "jj+d". This instruction is basically 9 cycles and 5 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register, it becomes 6 cycles and 4 bytes long.

"LDW (jj+p), mn" is a 9-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers a direct value mn to the area (in RAM) of the added address "jj+p."

[Example 1-4]
Example 1-4 in FIG. 112 is an instruction table illustrating other transfer instructions (LDD instruction, LDY instruction).

"LDD HL, mn" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that transfers the sum of the value stored in the DP register and the immediate value mn to the HL register.

"LDY jj,n" is the 8th to 15th bits of the jj register (jj[15:
The 8th to 15th bits of the IY register (IY[15:8]) are transferred to the 8th to 15th bits of the IY register (IY[15:8]).
This instruction transfers an 8-bit immediate value n to the 0th to 7th bits (jj[7:0]) of the jj register. This instruction is basically 3 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, there are some exceptions, such as
If the register is the DE register or the HL register, it takes two cycles and is two bytes long.

[Compare instruction (example 2)]
A compare instruction is an instruction to compare multiple data (values) by subtraction or the like. In this embodiment, the compare instruction subtracts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and changes a flag according to the subtraction result. Conversely, a compare instruction may also subtract the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand.
Alternatively, the flag may be changed according to the subtraction result by subtracting the value of the input signal from the output signal.

The comparison instruction is performed by comparing six flags (R
It can change all of the flags (except for BS and IMF), namely, the jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF). Note that the half carry flag (HF) may become an undefined value (U) in a comparison instruction of 2-byte data.

If the data (value) corresponding to the first operand and the data (value) corresponding to the second operand match, that is, if the result of the subtraction is zero, the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is "1".
If they do not match (if the subtraction result is not zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "0". If the subtraction result is less than zero (-, negative), the carry flag (CF)
The value C of the register becomes "1", and if it is greater than or equal to zero (0 or + (positive)), the carry flag (CF)
The value C of the jump status flag (JF) becomes "0." The jump status flag (JF) is generally set to the same value C (1 or 0) as the carry flag (CF), but exceptionally, in the case of a specific comparison instruction (the CPJ instruction described later), the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value Z (1 or 0) as the zero flag (ZF).

[Example 2-1]
Example 2-1 in FIG. 113 is an instruction table illustrating a CP instruction, which is a comparison instruction that compares one byte of data. The CP instruction is written in assembly language as "CP first operand, second operand", and subtracts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and compares the two data (values). CP is an opcode,
The operand before the comma is the first operand, and the operand after the comma is the second operand.

By executing the CP instruction, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the carry flag (
If the result of the subtraction in the CP instruction is less than zero (negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "1", and if the result is zero or greater (0 or positive), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "0". Therefore, the CP instruction is often used to determine the magnitude of a value immediately before a branch instruction is executed.

Note that the CP instruction and the LD instruction may have the same number of cycles and/or word length if the first and second operands are the same, which may make program design easier.

"CP r, g" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value of the g register.

"CP p,n" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value of the p register with the immediate value n (1 byte). "CP q,n" is a three-cycle, three-byte instruction that compares the value of the q register with the immediate value n. "CP p,n" and "CP q,n" have different cycle counts and word lengths due to the difference in the registers they compare to. Using both instructions increases the number of registers to compare to, but using more "CP p,n" than "CP q,n" in a program can reduce the program size and increase the program execution speed.

"CP r, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw.

"CP r, (jj)" is a three-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the address specified by the jj register.

"CP r, (jj+)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since one-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction is four cycles and two bytes long.

"CP r, (jj+d)" is the value of the r register and the aforementioned added address "jj+d"
This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, there is an exception where the jj register is the IY register and the r register is the W register.
If it is a register or the A register, it will take four cycles and be two bytes long.

"CP r, (jj+p)" is the value of the r register and the aforementioned added address "jj+p"
This instruction is four cycles long and two bytes long.

"CP (vw), n" is a 6-cycle, 5-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the direct address designated by the direct value vw with the direct value n.

"CP (jj), n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value n. This instruction is basically four cycles and three bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the HL register, it becomes three cycles and two bytes long.

"CP (jj+), n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value n, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since one-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 1 and updated to the next address. This instruction takes 5 cycles and is 3 bytes long.

"CP (jj+d),n" is the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+d" and
This instruction compares the immediate value n. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 4 bytes long.
However, as an exception, when the jj register is the IY register, it takes four cycles and is three bytes long.

"CP (jj+p), n" is the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+p" and
This instruction compares the immediate value n. This instruction is 5 cycles long and 3 bytes long.

"CP (vw), r" is a 6-cycle, 5-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw with the value of the r register.

"CP (jj), r" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value of the r register. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, there are exceptions where the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W register.
When the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, the A register, the B register, the C register, the H register, or the L register, or when the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, the A register,
If it is the B register, C register, D register, or E register, it takes 4 cycles and 2
It will be byte long.

"CP (jj+), r" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value stored in the r register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since one-byte values are compared, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, there are exceptions, such as j
If the j register is the DE register and the r register is the W register, A register, B register, C register, H register, or L register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, or E register, it will take 4 cycles and be 2 bytes long.

"CP (jj+d), r" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d" with the value stored in the r register.

"CP (jj+p), r" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p" with the value stored in the r register.

[Example 2-2]
Example 2-2 in Figure 114 is an instruction table illustrating a CP instruction that compares two bytes of data (values). Since this is a comparison instruction that handles two bytes of data, the address specified in () indicates the start address of the two-byte area. Note that by executing a comparison instruction that compares two bytes of data, the value of the half carry flag (HF) becomes an undefined value "
It becomes "U".

"CP rr,gg" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value in the gg register.

"CP rr, mn" is a 4-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the immediate value mn (2 bytes).

"CP rr, (vw)" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw, where the immediate value vw is the starting address of the 2-byte area storing the 2-byte value to be compared.

"CP rr, (jj)" is a four-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register.

"CP rr, (jj+)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since two-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 2.

"CP rr, (jj+d)" is the value stored in the rr register and the added address "j
This instruction basically takes 5 cycles and is 3 bytes long.

"CP rr, (jj+p)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p."

"CP (jj), rr" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value of the rr register. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 2
It is byte long.

"CP (jj+), rr" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value stored in the rr register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since two-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 2. This instruction takes five cycles and is two bytes long.

[Example 2-3]
Example 2-3 in FIG. 115 is an instruction table illustrating the CPJ instruction among the comparison instructions. The CPJ instruction is written in assembly language as "CPJ first operand, second operand" and the first
The data (value) corresponding to the second operand is subtracted from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and the two data (values) are compared. Note that CPJ is the opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

Note that the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction have the same function and operation of comparison as long as the first and second operands are the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. For example, "CPJ r, g" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value of the g register, just like "CP r, g". Also, "CPJ p, n" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value of the g register, just like "CP p, n".
This is an instruction to compare the value of the p register with the immediate value n.
Like "q, n", this is an instruction to compare the value of the q register with the immediate value n.
, (vw)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the direct value vw, just like "CP r, (vw)".

Similarly, regarding the function of comparison itself or the operation of comparison itself, "CPJ r, (jj)
" and "CP r, (jj)", "CPJ r, (jj+)" and "CP r, (jj+)"
, “CPJ r, (jj+d)” and “CP r, (jj+d)”, “CPJ r, (jj+
p)” and “CP r, (jj+p)”, “CPJ (vw), n” and “CP (vw),
n”, “CPJ (jj),n” and “CP (jj),n”, “CPJ (jj+),n
” and “CP (jj+),n”, “CPJ (jj+d),n” and “CP (jj+d)
,n'', ``CPJ (jj+p),n'' and ``CP (jj+p),n'', ``CPJ rr
,gg" and "CP rr,gg", "CPJ rr,mn" and "CP rr,mn" are
It's the same.

However, when the CP instruction is executed, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value C as the carry flag (CF) and changes in the same manner, whereas when the CPJ instruction is executed, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value Z as the zero flag (ZF) and changes in the same manner. Note that when the comparison results in the CPJ instruction match (when the subtraction result is zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1", and when they do not match (when the subtraction result is not zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is not set to "0".
Therefore, the CPJ instruction is often used to check whether values match immediately before a branch instruction (jump instruction) is executed.

In this way, even if the comparison result (subtraction result) is the same, the two types of comparison instructions, the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction, change the jump status flag (JF) in different ways. By providing two types of comparison instructions, the CPJ instruction that prioritizes the zero flag and the CP instruction that prioritizes the carry flag, and using them depending on the type of branch instruction (jump instruction) that follows the comparison instruction, program development becomes easier.

Furthermore, if the first and second operands of the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction are the same, they basically have the same number of cycles and the same word length.
Both "P (vw), n" are instructions that compare the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the direct value vw with the direct value n, and both are 6 cycles and 5 bytes long.
For example, "CPJ r, (jj+p)" and "CP r, (jj+p)" are both instructions that compare the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p."
Both are four cycles and two bytes long.

However, as an exception, "CPJ r, (jj+d)" differs from "CP r, (jj+d)" in that it takes four cycles and is three bytes long regardless of the type of jj register.

[Example 2-4]
Example 2-4 in FIG. 116 is an instruction table illustrating a CPW instruction that compares two bytes of data (values) among comparison instructions. The CPW instruction is written in assembly language as "CPW first operand,
The data (value) corresponding to the second operand is subtracted from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and the two bytes of data (values) are compared.
CPW is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand. Here, the address specified in ( ) indicates the start address of a 2-byte area.

Execution of the CPW instruction sets the jump status flag (JF) to the same value C as the carry flag (CF). If the subtraction result of the CP instruction is less than zero (negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "1", and if it is zero or greater (0 or positive), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "0". Therefore, the CPW instruction is often used to determine the magnitude of a value immediately before a branch instruction (jump instruction) is executed.

In addition, if the first and second operands of the CPW and LDW instructions are the same,
Basically, the word length is the same, which may make it easier to design programs.

"CPW (vw), mn" is an 8-cycle, 6-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the direct address designated by the immediate value vw with the immediate value mn (2 bytes).

"CPW (jj), mn" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the address area designated by the jj register with the immediate value mn.

"CPW (jj+), mn" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value mn, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2.

"CPW (jj+d), mn" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d" with the immediate value mn. This instruction is 7 cycles and 5 bytes long.

"CPW (jj+p), mn" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+p" with the immediate value mn.

The comparison instructions have been explained above, but the instruction "CP rr, gg" that compares the values of different 2-byte registers (different second registers) and the instruction "CP rr, mn" that compares the value of a 2-byte register with a direct value are sometimes called first comparison instructions. The first comparison instruction changes the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value.

The instructions "CPJ p,n" and "CPJ q,n" that compare the register value with a direct value (1 byte) and change the jump status flag (JF) and zero flag (ZF) to the same value are sometimes called second comparison instructions.

"CP p,n" and "CP q,n" which compare a register value with a direct value (1 byte) and change the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value are sometimes called third comparison instructions.

"CP" compares the register value with the value (1 byte or 2 bytes) stored in the memory area and changes the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value.
r, (vw)” “CP r, (jj+d)” “CP rr, (vw)” “CP rr, (
jj+d) is sometimes referred to as the fourth comparison instruction.

[Branch instruction (example 3)]
A branch instruction (jump instruction) is an instruction that causes the address of the instruction (process) to branch (jump, move) from the address of the branch instruction (branch source) to a predetermined address (in ROM) of the branch destination. In this embodiment, the branch instruction unconditionally causes the address of the instruction to be executed next to jump to the branch destination address (in ROM) corresponding to the operand, or, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is met, causes the address to jump to the branch destination address (in ROM) corresponding to the second operand. Note that, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not met, the instruction proceeds directly to the instruction following the branch instruction (no branch).

A branch instruction is executed by setting six flags (R
Among the flags other than BS and IMF, the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1", but the zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), and half carry flag (HF)
, the sign flag (SF), and the overflow flag (VF) are left unchanged.

[Example 3-1]
Example 3-1 in Fig. 117 is an instruction table illustrating a JRR instruction, which is a branch instruction that causes processing to jump from the address of the branch instruction at the branch source to an address close to the branch destination.
It jumps to an address (number) that is closer in the address space than the JR instruction described below.
Here, the JRR instruction is "JRR first operand, second operand" in assembly language.
If the condition corresponding to the first operand is met, the process (next instruction to be executed) jumps (conditional branch) to the address corresponding to the second operand. If the condition corresponding to the first operand is not met, the process proceeds directly to the instruction following the branch instruction (no branch).
Note that JRR is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand. Note that the branch conditions of the JRR instruction include only the condition related to the state (T or F) of the jump status flag (JF), and do not include other conditions such as the zero flag (ZF),
It does not include conditions regarding the states of the carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF).

"JRR T, $+1+k" is a four-cycle, one-byte instruction. When the jump status flag (JF) is "1" (JF = 1 (true, T)), processing jumps to the jump destination address "PC+1+k.""PC+1+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter, plus 1+k. The range of k in the JRR instruction is a narrow range (a range of smaller absolute values) from -12 to -2 or +1 to +15, which is narrower than the range of k in the JR instruction (-128 to +127), which will be described later. Therefore, the word length of this JRR instruction is one byte shorter. Note that because the word length is one byte, 1 is added to k in the jump destination address "PC+1+k."

"JRR F, $+1+k" is the same instruction as "JRR T, $+1+k", but
If the jump status flag (JF) is "0" (JF=0 (false, F)), the process jumps to the jump destination address "PC+1+k". Similarly, k is in the range of -12 to -
2 or a narrow range of +1 to +15.

As described above, the range of k is -12 to -2 or +1 to +15, so the JRR instruction causes the jump destination address to be an address that is -11 bytes to +16 bytes away from the address of the JRR instruction. Addresses outside this range are jumped to using the JR instruction, which will be described later.

[Example 3-2]
Example 3-2 in Figure 117 is an instruction table illustrating a JR instruction, which, among branch instructions, allows processing to jump from the address of the branch instruction at the branch source to an address farther away in the branch destination. The JR instruction allows jumping to an address farther away in the address space than the JRR instruction described above. Here, when the JR instruction is written in assembly language as "JR operand," processing (the next instruction to be executed) unconditionally jumps to the address corresponding to the operand (unconditional branch). When written as "JR first operand, second operand," processing jumps to the address corresponding to the second operand (conditional branch) if the condition corresponding to the first operand is met. Furthermore, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not met, processing proceeds directly to the instruction following the branch instruction (no branch). JR is an opcode, and the operand before the comma is the first operand and the operand after the comma is the second operand. The branch condition for the JR instruction does not include a condition related to the state (T or F) of the jump status flag (JF).

"JR $+2+k" is a 3-cycle, 2-byte instruction that unconditionally jumps to the jump destination address "PC+2+k". "PC+2+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter, plus 2+k. Here, JR
The range of k in this instruction is a wide range from -128 to +127 (a range of larger absolute values), which is wider than the range of k in the JRR instruction (-12 to -2 or +1 to +15). Therefore, this JR instruction can jump to addresses farther away than the JRR instruction, and the word length of this JR instruction is 2 bytes, which is longer than the JRR instruction. Note that because it is 2 bytes long, 2 is added to k.

“JR Z, $+2+k” “JR NZ, $+2+k” “JR C, $+2+k” “J
"R NC, $+2+k" is a 3-cycle, 2-byte instruction, and when a specific condition corresponding to the first operand (ZF=1, ZF=0, CF=1, CF=0, respectively) is met,
As with "JR $+2+k", processing jumps to the jump destination address "PC+2+k".

"JR LE, $+3+k""JR GT, $+3+k""JR M, $+3+k""
JR P, $+3+k""JR SLT, $+3+k""JR SGE, $+3+k""
JR SLE, $+3+k""JR SGT, $+3+k""JR VS, $+3+k"
"JR VC, $+3+k" is a 4-cycle, 3-byte instruction that satisfies specific conditions corresponding to the first operand (CF=1 or ZF=1, CF=0 and ZF=0, SF=0, respectively).
=1, SF=0, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 1, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 0, SF
The exclusive OR of SF and VF is 1 or ZF=1, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 0 and ZF=0
, VF=1, VF=0) is satisfied, the process jumps to the jump destination address "PC+3+k". "PC+3+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter.
Here, k is a large absolute value between -128 and +127, so these JR instructions can jump to addresses farther away than the JRR instruction, and the word length of these JR instructions is 3 bytes, which is longer than the JRR instruction.
Since it is 3 bytes long, 3 is added to k.

The branch instructions have been explained above, but a two-byte JR instruction that can cause processing to jump to an address farther from the address of the branch instruction is sometimes called a first branch instruction. A one-byte JRR instruction that causes processing to jump to an address closer to the address of the branch instruction is sometimes called a second branch instruction. The branch conditions are as follows: The first branch instruction (JR instruction) does not include a condition regarding the state (T or F) of the jump status flag, but the second branch instruction (JRR instruction) does include a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag.

[Call command (example 4)]
A call instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine at a specified address in a call destination program from a call source program. In this embodiment, the call instruction calls a subroutine at an address corresponding to an operand, or calls a subroutine at an address corresponding to a second operand when a condition corresponding to a first operand is met.

The call instruction sets six flags (from the second bit to the seventh bit of the flag register 1200)
flags other than RBS and IMF) are left unchanged.

[Example 4-1]
Example 4-1 in Figure 118 is an instruction table illustrating a CALL instruction that can call a subroutine at any address (address in ROM) among the call instructions. Here, when the CALL instruction is written as "CALL operand" in assembly language, it unconditionally calls a subroutine at the address (address) corresponding to the operand, and is written as "CALL first operand,
When "second operand" is written, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is met, the subroutine at the address corresponding to the second operand is called. Note that CALL is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

"CALL mn", "CALL rr", and "CALL" can be used to call subroutines unconditionally.
(vw)” “CALL (jj)” “CALL (jj+)” “CALL (jj+d
) and "CALL (jj+p)" are instructions that change the value of the address (top address in ROM) of the called subroutine to the immediate value mn, the value stored in the rr register, the value stored in the area of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw, the value stored in the area of the address specified by the jj register, the value stored in the area of the address specified by the jj register, the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d", and the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p". These CALL instructions are, in the above order, 7 cycles and 4 bytes long, 6
cycles and 2 bytes long, 9 cycles and 4 bytes long, 7 cycles and 2 bytes long, 8 cycles and 2 bytes long, 8 cycles and 3 bytes long, and 8 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CALL T, mn""CALL F, mn""CALL Z, mn""CALL
"NZ,mn","CALLC,mn", and "CALL NC,mn" are instructions that call a subroutine at the address of the immediate mn when the following conditions are met: JF=1, JF=0, ZF=1, ZF=0, CF=1, and CF=0, respectively. The word length of these CALL instructions is 4 bytes. The number of cycles for these CALL instructions is 7 cycles when the conditions are met, and 5 cycles when the conditions are not met.

[Example 4-2]
Example 4-2 in FIG. 118 is an instruction table illustrating CALLT and CALLR instructions that cannot call a subroutine at an arbitrary address. Here, the CALLT and CALLR instructions are respectively expressed as "CALLT operand" and "CALL" in assembly language.
It is written as "R operand" and unconditionally calls a subroutine derived based on the operand or at the address corresponding to the operand. CALLT and CALLR are operation codes.

"CALL n" is a 7-cycle, 1-byte instruction that unconditionally calls the subroutine registered (address registered) at the nth position in the vector table.
indicates a value from 0 to 15 in 4 bits (n=0 to 15). The vector table is stored in ROM.
It is located in the program management area at the end of the address space of 111b (see FIG. 109).
In the vector table, the addresses (starting addresses) of the subroutines are registered (defined) and stored in order. Because the vector table can be used, the operands are immediate values m
n is a literal value (4 bits) instead of n, and the word length of "CALLT n" is shortened to 1 byte. However, there is an upper limit (16) to the number of addresses (subroutine addresses) that can be registered in the vector table.

"CALLR mn" unconditionally calls a subroutine at the address (address) of the literal mn. The address of the subroutine that can be called by this instruction is limited to a predetermined range (for example, 4000h to 53FFh). "CALLR mn" is, for example, a literal mn
If the range of mn is from 4000h to 4BFFh, it takes 6 cycles and is 2 bytes long, and if the range of mn is from 4C00h to 53FFh, it takes 7 cycles and is 3 bytes long. Thus, if the immediate mn is large, the number of cycles and word length of this instruction will be large. Note that if the immediate mn is large, it may also be possible to call a subroutine in the second ROM area (outside program area) with a larger address.

When the operand related to the callee address is a direct value mn or direct value n, the CALLT instruction, CALLR instruction, and CALL instruction are 1 byte long, 2 bytes (or 3 bytes long), and 4 bytes long, respectively. That is, when the operand related to the callee address is a direct value, the smaller the number of addresses (subroutine addresses) that can be called (the more limited the number), the shorter the word length of the call instruction (the smaller the instruction size). Note that the CALLT instruction uses a vector table, the CALLR instruction has a limit on the range of addresses that can be called, and the CALL instruction can call any address, so the number of addresses that can be called is CALLT instruction < CALLR instruction < CALL
It's the order of the commands.

The above explains the call instruction, but there are some specific CALL instructions (4-byte long "CALL mn" and "CALL
T, mn” “CALL F, mn” “CALL Z, mn” “CALL NZ, mn” “
The "CALL C,mn" and "CALL NC,mn" are sometimes called the first call instruction.
In the first call instruction, the address of the call destination is specified by the literal value mn. Among these CALL instructions, only "CALL mn" which can call a subroutine unconditionally is specified as the first call instruction.
It may also be called a call instruction. Also, a 2-byte or 3-byte CALLR instruction, which has a shorter word length than the first call instruction but has a limit on the address of the subroutine (callee) that can be called, is sometimes called a second call instruction. Furthermore, a 1-byte CALLT instruction, which can only call subroutines registered (addresses registered) in the vector table and has a shorter word length than the second call instruction, is sometimes called a third call instruction.

[Return command (Example 5)]
A return instruction is an instruction to return from a subroutine, an interrupt process, etc. In this embodiment, the return instruction returns unconditionally, or returns when a condition corresponding to an operand is met.

The return command is executed by setting six flags (R
Flags other than BS and IMF) are left unchanged or set to the specified value.

[Example 5-1]
Example 5-1 in FIG. 119 is an instruction table illustrating a RET instruction, among the return instructions, that does not involve the restoration of the program status word PSW, which is data in the flag register 1200. Here, when the RET instruction is written as "RET" in assembly language, it returns from a subroutine unconditionally, and when written as "RET operand", it returns when the condition corresponding to the operand is met. RET is an opcode. When the condition is not met, it proceeds directly to the instruction following the return instruction (does not return).

"RET" is a 6-cycle, 1-byte instruction that returns unconditionally from a subroutine.

"RET T""RETF""RETZ""RETNZ""RETC""RE
"TNC" indicates a specific condition corresponding to the operand (JF=1, JF=0, ZF=1, respectively).
, ZF=0, CF=1, CF=0) is true, the program returns. The word lengths of these RET instructions are 2 bytes, 2 bytes, 1 byte, 1 byte, 1 byte,
The number of cycles for "RET T" and "RET F" is 7 cycles if the condition is met, and 4 cycles if the condition is not met.
The number of cycles for "RET NZ", "RET C", and "RET NC" is six if the condition is met, and three if the condition is not met.

[Example 5-2]
Example 5-2 in FIG. 119 is an instruction table illustrating the RETI instruction and the RETN instruction that are associated with the restoration of the program status word PSW among the restoration instructions.
The TN instruction is written in assembly language as "RETI" or "RETN" without an operand, and returns unconditionally. RETI and RETN are opcodes.

"RETI" and "RETN" are 7-cycle, 2-byte instructions.
is an instruction that restores the PSW from the stack and returns from interrupt processing or a subroutine of the CALLI instruction. Here, the CALLI instruction (not listed in the instruction table) is a call instruction that saves the PSW to the stack, disables interrupts (IMF = 0), and then calls a subroutine. "RETN" is an instruction that restores the PSW from the stack and returns from NMI interrupt processing. NMI interrupt processing (non-maskable interrupt processing) is an interrupt processing that cannot be disabled and is therefore forcibly executed.

[Output processing]
120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process according to the fifth embodiment. The output process according to the fifth embodiment is a process similar to the output process according to the first embodiment (FIG. 10) through steps A1619-A1620.
120, the same steps as those in the output process of the first embodiment (FIG. 10) are assigned the same step numbers, and therefore their explanations are omitted. Note that the test signal output process is executed in the outside-area integration process other than the output process.

[Out-of-area integration processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the outside area integration process according to the fifth embodiment.
The outside area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment is the outside area integration processing (FIG. 57) of the first embodiment with the addition of test signal output processing (A10001). In FIG. 121, the same processes as those in the outside area integration processing (FIG. 57) of the first embodiment are assigned the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof will be omitted. The outside area integration processing is an outside area processing like the first embodiment, and is executed as an outside area integration processing program that is part of the outside area program.

After switching the stack pointer (A9501 and A9502) and saving the register (A9503), the game control device 100 executes a test signal output processing program corresponding to the test signal output processing (A10001) as part of the out-of-area program. In this way, by calling the test signal output processing (A10001) as a subroutine from the out-of-area integration processing, the processing time required for switching the stack pointer and saving and restoring the register can be saved.
If the test signal output processing, which is an external program, is configured to be called as a subroutine from the output processing program, which is an internal program, it may be necessary to save the flag register in the output processing, switch the stack pointer in the test signal output processing, and save and restore the general-purpose registers.In the first embodiment, the test signal output processing is executed as part of the output processing program, which is an internal program, so there is no need to save the flag register, switch the stack pointer, or save and restore the general-purpose registers.

[Test signal output processing]
122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the test signal output process according to the fifth embodiment. The test signal output process is executed as a subroutine of the outside-area integration process (FIG. 121).

The game control device 100 first loads and synthesizes data to be output to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (A10101). Then, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (A10
102).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (A10103).Furthermore, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (A101
04). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing device, is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (A10105).

The processing of steps A10101 to A10105 is the same as step A of the output processing of the first embodiment.
1619-A1623. However, in this embodiment, the test signal output processing is executed as a test signal output processing program, which is part of the out-of-area program corresponding to the out-of-area processing. On the other hand, the output processing is executed as an output processing program, which is part of the in-area program corresponding to the in-area processing. In the processing of steps A10101-A10105, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 1-5 is read (loaded) from the in-area work area of RAM.

[Program List]
123 to 139 show the CPU 111a (C
123 to 139 are program lists showing examples of the program structure of a program executed by the PU core 102. Figures 123 to 139 are merely examples of program structure, and can be modified as needed by deleting or adding instructions (code). Each program list contains instructions (source code) in assembly language compatible with the Z80, an 8-bit microprocessor.
This is a list of instructions that correspond one-to-one to the machine language instructions (machine code) stored in the ROM 111b, excluding pseudo-instructions (instructions for the assembler). All of the instructions are included in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 as machine language instructions.

Each line in the program listing is numbered from the left for convenience.
It consists of an "assembly language instruction (code)", "instruction word length (instruction size, instruction length)", and "comments" added for convenience of explanation. The number to the right of the semicolon ";" is the "word length", and the number to the right of that is the "comments". An "assembly language instruction (code)" is,
As mentioned above, there is an "opcode" that indicates the operation (calculation), and an "operand" that is the target of the instruction.
In assembly language instructions (code), labels and hexadecimal numbers (...h,
...h, etc.) means a direct value n or a direct value mn. The instructions in the program list are as follows:
Unless there is a call instruction that calls a subroutine or a branch instruction (jump instruction), execution is basically performed from top to bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from smallest to largest line numbers).

Note that the programs from Figures 123 to 135 are included in the in-area programs of the first ROM area (first program storage area), and the programs from Figures 136 to 139 are included in the out-area programs of the second ROM area (second program storage area).

[Main processing program]
FIG. 123 is a program list showing the program structure of a part of the main processing program corresponding to the main processing (FIG. 5A) according to the fifth embodiment.

At line number 0510, interrupts are prohibited (code "DI") in response to A1001 of the main process.

At line number 0520, in response to A1002 of the main process, the value "29FFh" is transferred to the SP register as the stack pointer (code "LD SP, 29FFH").

In line number 0530, the register bank selector (
RBS) (code "LD RBS,0"), thereby setting register bank 0.

In line number 0540, corresponding to A1004 of the main process, the IY register is set to RAM11.
Transfer and set "2800h" as the start address of 1c (code "LD IY,2
800H). In this embodiment, not only the upper address but also the entire starting address (including the lower address) is set.

In line number 0550, it may be included in the processing of A1004 of the main processing, but the DP register is set to "5000" as the start address of the data area (for user programs) of the ROM 111b.
h" is transferred and set (code "LD DP, 5000H").

Line numbers 0560 and 0570 correspond to A1005 in the main process.
In 60, the immediate value n (a value indicating that firing has stopped) corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG is set to A
Transfer to register (code "LD A,C_SHOT_NG").

In line number 0570, the value in the A register is output to port C_OUT01 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to the label C_OUT01) (code "OUT (C_OUT0
1), A").

On line number 0580, port C_INPUT1 (
In other words, a numerical value is input to the A register from port C_INPUT2 (i.e., the port with the numerical value corresponding to label C_INPUT1) (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1)"). The port here is the first input port 122 that takes in a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112. Although omitted, in the next line number 0590, similarly, in correspondence with A1006 of the main processing, a numerical value is input to register A from port C_INPUT2 (i.e., the port with the numerical value corresponding to label C_INPUT2) that is the second input port 123 that takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93.
The value may be input to the B register or the like.

In line number 0610, in response to A1052 of the main process, the program status word PSW, which is the data (value) of the flag register 1200, is saved to the internal stack area (P
(code "PUSH PSW").

At line number 0620, in response to A1053 of the main processing, a subroutine for safety device information initialization processing that initializes safety device information related to the safety device is called and executed (code "CALL P_SAFINI"). Note that the code described as "CALL label" corresponds to "CALL mn" in the instruction table. The subroutine for safety device information initialization processing is an external program, and has an address in ROM (start address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of label P_SAFINI in the second ROM area (external program area). In this way, when an external program is called from an internal program (main processing program), a specific CALL command is used, which is different from when an internal program is called.

At line number 0630, the program status word PSW is restored (POP) in response to A1054 of the main process.

Line numbers 0640 and 0650 correspond to A1055 in the main process.
40, a data table (RNDSET) required for starting or using the random number generating circuit is stored.
) address (label D_RNDSET) to the relative address "D_RNDSET-500
0h" and transfer it to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_RNDSET
-5000h). The relative address is an address in the ROM based on the top address "5000h" of the data area for the user program.
"D_RNDSET-5000H" corresponds to "LDD HL, mn" in the instruction table.

The LDD instruction uses the absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as the second operand.
Since a relative address (effectively 1 byte) is used instead of a normal LD instruction ("LD ff, mn"), the word length of the instruction is reduced by 1 byte (reduced from 3 bytes to 2 bytes) compared to a normal LD instruction ("LD ff, mn").

At line number 0650, a subroutine for setting a device (here, a random number generating circuit) is called and executed (code "CALLR P_DEVSET").
The code described as "Label" corresponds to "CALLR mn" in the instruction table. This subroutine has an address (starting address) in ROM that corresponds to the immediate value mn of the label P_DEVSET.

At line number 0670, interrupts are prohibited (code "DI") in response to A1056 in the main process.

Line numbers 0680 and 0690 correspond to A1057 of the main processing.
In step 80, a subroutine corresponding to a game stop determination process for determining whether or not a game is stopped is called and executed (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK").
The code written as "CALLT label" corresponds to "CALLT n" in the instruction table.
The value of the label P_MSSTA_CHK becomes n, and the RO of the subroutine called here
The address within M is registered as the nth address in the vector table.

At line number 0690, the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0".
In this case (JF=0: when the game is stopped), jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label MAIN80 and execute the instructions from line number 0740 onwards (code "JRR F,
MAIN80"). The jump destination (label MAIN80) is the code "JRR F, MAI
It is a nearby address that is +9 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of "N80". The code written as "JRR F, label" is the same as "JRR F, $+1+k" in the instruction table.
If the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (J
If F=1 (if game play is not stopped), proceed to the next command at line number 0700.

In line number 0700, in response to A1058 of the main process, the program status word PSW, which is the data of the flag register 1200, is saved (PUSHed) to the internal stack area.
) (code "PUSH PSW").

In line number 0710, in response to A1059 of the main process, a subroutine of the performance display editing process that calculates performance information such as base values is called and executed (code "CALL P
_SHKSHM"). The subroutine for the performance display editing process is an external program, and has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of the label P_SHKSHM in the second ROM area (external program area). In this way, when an external program is called from an internal program (main processing program), a specific CALL command is used, which is different from when an internal program is called.

At line number 0720, the program status word PSW is restored (POP) in response to A1060 of the main process.

At line number 0740, an interrupt is permitted (code "EI") in response to A1061 of the main process.

On line 0750, the values of the W registers are exclusive ORed together to obtain the following:
The value of the W register is cleared to 0 (code "XOR W, W").

Line numbers 0770 to 0830 correspond to A1062 of the main process, and determine whether a power outage has occurred.
Input a value from INPUT1 into the A register (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1
)).

In line number 0780, the value of the A register and the value C_P indicating that the power failure monitoring signal is off are
DWNSW (for example, 00000001B in negative logic) (code "AND
A, C_PDWNSW"). The result of the logical AND operation on line number 0810 is zero if the power outage monitoring signal is on (for example, negative logic 00000000B) indicating a power outage has occurred.
If the operation result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1", and if the operation result is not zero, the zero flag (ZF) is not set to "0" (NZ).

In line 0790, if the result of the operation in line 0780 is not zero but NZ (i.e., if a power outage has not occurred), the program jumps to the address in ROM (branch destination) corresponding to label MAIN70 and executes the instructions from line 0670 onward (code "JR NZ, MAIN70").
"). The code written as "JR NZ, label" is the same as "JR NZ, $" in the instruction table.
+2+k". The jump destination (label MAIN70) corresponds to the code "JR NZ,M
This is an address that is -17 bytes (less than -12 bytes) away from the address of "AIN70", and it is an address that cannot be jumped to by the JRR instruction. However, with this JR instruction,
It can jump a greater distance in the address space than the R instruction (for example).
If the calculation result is zero (i.e., a power outage has occurred), the process proceeds to the instruction at line number 0810. If no jump is made, the process proceeds to the next instruction at line number 0810.

In lines 0810 to 0830, it is determined whether the power outage monitoring signal has been kept on for the number of checks.

In line number 0810, when the power failure monitoring signal is in the ON state (power failure occurrence state), the value of the W register, which indicates the number of times the ON state has been detected, is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code "INC W"
).

On line 0820, the value of the W register is compared with the check count "2" (code "CP W,2"). This code corresponds to "CP p,n" in the instruction table. If the value of the W register is smaller than the check count "2", the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set to "1" as the result of the comparison.

In line number 0830, if the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (if the number of times the ON state has been detected has not reached the number of checks), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label MAIN90, and the instructions from line number 0770 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, MAIN90"). The code written as "JRR T, label" corresponds to "JRR T, $+2+k" in the instruction table. Jump status flag (JF
) is not set and is "0" (the number of times the ON state has been detected has reached the number of checks), the process moves to line number 0840. If no jump is made, the process moves to the instruction at the next line number 0840.

At line number 0840, interrupts are prohibited (code "DI") in response to A1063 of the main process.

At line number 0850, a subroutine that outputs off data to all output ports is called and executed in response to A1064 of the main process (code "CALL P_OUTCLR
"). This subroutine has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_OUTCLR.

[Timer interrupt processing program]
FIG. 124 is a program list showing the program structure of a timer interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) according to the fifth embodiment.

At line number 1000, in response to A1301 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) (code "LD RBS, 1"), thereby setting register bank 1.

In line 1010, a predetermined register (D
Set the upper address (28h) of the RAM start address in the LD register (code "LD
D, 28H").

In line 1020, similar to line 0540, the entire starting address of the RAM 111c, "2800h", is transferred and set in the IY register.

At line 1030, in response to A1303 of the timer interrupt process, a subroutine corresponding to input processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_INPUT"). The subroutine corresponding to input processing has an address (starting address) in ROM corresponding to the label P_INPUT.

Line numbers 1040 and 1050 correspond to A1304 of the timer interrupt process. In line number 1040, the value indicating that the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (the value stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SETMODE") is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SETMODE)"). Addition address "IY+R_SETMODE"
"LD r, (jj+d)" is the sum of the value of the IY register "2800h" (the start address, base address of RAM 111c) and the offset value (direct value, relative address) corresponding to the label R_SETMODE. The added address "IY + label" indicates an address in RAM. This code corresponds to "LD r, (jj+d)" in the instruction table. When the probability setting is not being changed or confirmed, "0" is transferred to the A register, and the jump status flag (JF
) is set to "1" (JF = 1) and the probability setting is being changed or confirmed,
A value other than "0" is transferred to the register, and the jump status flag (JF) is set to "0" (JF=0).

In line number 1050, the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF = 1: neither the probability setting is being changed nor the probability setting is being confirmed), and the label TINT
It jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to 10 and executes the instructions from line number 1090 onwards (code "JRR T, TINT10"). The code written as "JRR T, label" corresponds to "JRR T, $+1+k" in the instruction table.
T10) is +5 bytes (+1
If the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: probability setting is being changed or probability setting is being confirmed),
The process moves to the next instruction at line number 1060.

Line numbers 1060 and 1070 correspond to A1305 of the timer interrupt process. Line number 1060 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to the probability setting change/confirmation process (code "CALLR P_SET_DISP"). The subroutine corresponding to the probability setting change/confirmation process has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_SET_DISP.

At line number 1070, a jump is made unconditionally to the address in ROM corresponding to label TINT30, and the instructions from line number 1310 onwards are executed (code "JR TINT30").
The code written as "JR label" corresponds to "JR $+2+k" in the instruction table. The jump destination (label TINT30) is an address that is +40 bytes (+17 bytes or more) away from the address of the code "JR TINT30," and is an address that cannot be jumped to with the JRR instruction.

Line numbers 1090 to 1110 each describe output processing (
A1306), payout command transmission process (A1307), and prize slot switch/error monitoring process (A1308) are called and executed by the CALLR command (
Code “CALLR P_OUTPUT” “CALLR P_PAYCOM” “CALL
R P_PRZERR”).

Line numbers 1120 and 1130 correspond to A1309 of the timer interrupt process. Line number 1120 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to a game stop determination process that determines whether or not a game is stopped (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK"). This subroutine has an address in ROM (the first address) that is associated with the value n of the label P_MSSTA_CHK in the vector table (the nth registered address).

In line 1130, the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is set to "0".
In this case (JF=0: when the game is stopped), jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TINT20 and execute the instructions from line number 1190 onwards (code "JRR F,
TINT20"). The jump destination (label TINT20) is this code "JRR F,T
It is a nearby address that is +9 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of "INT20". If the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF=1: game play is not stopped), the program moves to the next instruction on line number 1140.

In line numbers 1140 to 1170, there are special game processing (A1310), special game processing (A1311), normal game processing (A1312),
The subroutine corresponding to the segment LED editing process (A1313) is called and executed by the CALLR command (code "CALLR P_TGAMEPRC""CALLR
P_YGAMEPRC""CALLRP_FGAMEPRC""CALLR P_SE
GEDIT").

Line numbers 1190 to 1240 respectively include safety device related processing in timer interrupt processing (A1314), magnet irregularity monitoring processing (A1315), and panel radio wave irregularity monitoring processing (A13
16), vibration irregularity monitoring process (A1317), abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), and external information editing process (A1319) are called and executed by the CALLR instruction (codes "CALLR P_SAFSET", "CALLR P_MAGERR", "
CALLR P_JAMERR” “CALLR P_VIBERR” “CALLR P_
PAYERR""CALLRP_INFEDIT").

Line numbers 1250 and 1260 correspond to A1320 of the timer interrupt process. Line number 1250 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to a game stop determination process that determines whether or not a game is stopped (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK").

In line 1260, the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is set to "0".
In this case (JF=0: when the game is stopped), jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TINT30 and execute the instructions from line number 1310 onwards (code "JRR F,
TINT30"). The jump destination (label TINT30) is this code "JRR F,T
It is a nearby address that is +9 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of "INT30". If the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF=1: game play is not stopped), the program moves to the next instruction on line number 1270.

At line number 1270, in response to A1321 of the timer interrupt process, the program status word PSW is pushed to the internal stack area (the code "PUSH PS
W").

In line number 1280, in response to A1322 of the timer interrupt process, a subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process that updates the safety device counter value (calculates the difference in the number of balls) and controls the display of the performance display device 152 is called and executed (code "CALL P_OUTAREA").
The subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process is an out-of-area program, and is labeled P_OU.
The ROM address (starting address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of TAREA is stored in the second ROM area (outside area program area). In this way, when an outside area program is called from an inside area program (timer interrupt processing program), a specific CALL instruction is used, which is different from when an inside area program is called. This improves the efficiency of program development.

At line number 0630, the program status word PSW is restored (POP) in response to A1323 of the timer interrupt process.

At line number 1310, the timer interrupt processing program returns (the code "RET
I").

In addition, the numerous subroutines called from the timer interrupt processing program in Figure 124, such as input processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing, output processing, payout command sending processing, prize slot switch/error monitoring processing, game stop determination processing, special game processing, bonus game processing, regular game processing, segment LED editing processing, safety device related processing, magnet fraud monitoring processing, board radio wave fraud monitoring processing, vibration fraud monitoring processing, abnormal discharge monitoring processing, and external information editing processing, are in-area programs located in the first ROM area within the address space.
These subroutines included in the program within the area are called from the timer interrupt processing program included in the program within the area by a CALLT instruction or a CALLR instruction, which has a limited call destination address but a short word length. This reduces the program size. Furthermore, by using a CALLR instruction (second call instruction) or a CALLT instruction (third call instruction), which has a shorter number of cycles or word length than the specific CALL instruction, rather than using a specific CALL instruction (first call instruction) which requires 7 cycles and is 4 bytes long and whose call destination address is specified by a direct value mn, the process of calling these subroutines included in the program within the area is made more efficient and faster.

On the other hand, the subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process, which is a subroutine called from the timer interrupt processing program, is an out-of-area program located in the second ROM area in the address space. The subroutine that becomes the out-of-area program (the subroutine for the out-of-area integration process) is distinguished from the subroutine that becomes the in-area program by a specific CALL instruction (the first
It is called from a program in the area (here, a timer interrupt processing program) by a call instruction. This improves the efficiency of program development.

As will be described later, when a subroutine included in an out-of-area program (out-of-area integrated processing program) calls a subroutine included in an out-of-area program (test signal output processing program, performance display device control processing program, difference ball confirmation processing program, safety device operation monitoring processing program), the subroutine can be called by using the CA without using the CALLT command and the CALLR command.
Only the LL instruction is used to distinguish from calls to subroutines included in the program within the area, which also improves the efficiency of program development.

[Special game processing program]
The upper part of Fig. 125 is a program list showing the program structure of a special symbol game processing program corresponding to the special symbol game processing (Fig. 16) according to the fifth embodiment. The special symbol game processing program has a leading address (in the ROM) corresponding to the label P_TGAMEPRC, and in step A1310 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 9), a CALLR instruction (line number 114) is executed.
0).

In line numbers 1510 to 1530, subroutines corresponding to the start gate switch monitoring process (A2600), the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601), and the upper large winning gate switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game process are called and executed by the CALLR command (codes "CALLR P_SIDOSW", "CALLR P_VSW", "CALLR P_VSW").
ALLR P_CNTUSW”).

Line numbers 1540 and 1550 correspond to A2603 of the special game process. In line number 1540, "R_TGAME+1" (immediate value n) is used as the lower address, and the 8th to 15th bits of the IY register are used as the upper address (28h), and the code is transferred to the HL register (code "LDY HL, R_TGAME+1").
"AME+1" corresponds to "LDY jj,n" in the instruction table. Here, the label R_TGA
ME indicates the offset address (offset value based on "2800h") of the special game processing number area that stores the special game processing number (A2606), and the address "R_TGAME+1" obtained by adding 1 to this address indicates the starting address of the special game processing timer area, which is a 2-byte area (here, the offset value based on "2800h"). Therefore, the value of the HL register is the absolute address of the special game processing timer area.

Line number 1550 calls and executes a two-byte decrement processing subroutine (code "CALLT P_DECWORD"). This two-byte decrement processing subtracts 1 from the value of the address area (special game processing timer area) specified by the HL register if it is not 0. In this way, if the special game processing timer has not timed out and is not 0, it is updated by -1. The address in ROM of the subroutine called here is registered as the nth in the vector table, with the value of label P_DECWORD set to n.

In line number 1560, in response to A2604 of the special game processing, if the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: the special game processing timer has not timed out and is not 0), the ROM corresponding to label TGAMEPRC10
Jump to the address in the program and execute the instructions from line number 1620 onwards (code "JRR F
, TGAMEPRC10"). The jump destination (label TGAMEPRC10) is a nearby address that is +6 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRR F, TGAMEPRC10". The jump status flag (JF) is set,
In the case of "1" (JF = 1: special game processing timer is 0), the next line number 1570
The command is transferred to.

In line number 1570, in response to A2605 of the special game processing, the top address D_TGAMEPRC of the special game sequence branch table is transferred to the HL register (code "
LD HL,D_TGAMEPRC"). This code is "LD ff,mn" in the instruction table.
The special game sequence branch table is an address table that registers (lists) branch destination addresses.

The code from line number 1580 to line number 1600 is A2606 and A26
Corresponds to 07.

In line number 1580, the value (special game processing number) stored in the special game processing number area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_TGAME" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_TGAME)"). The label R_TGAME is the offset address of the special game processing number area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register.

At line number 1590, a subroutine for 2-byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (
Code "CALLT P_GETWORD"). The address in ROM of the subroutine called here is registered as the nth in the vector table, with the value of label P_GETWORD set to n. This 2-byte data acquisition process acquires the branch destination address from the value of the HL register (the top address of the special game sequence branch table) and the value of the A register (the special game processing number) and stores it in the HL register. In other words, the HL register stores the branch destination address acquired from the special game sequence branch table in accordance with the special game processing number.

In line number 1600, a subroutine call is made to the subroutine at the branch destination address stored in the HL register (code "CALL HL"). The subroutine call executes one of the processes A2608 to A2613 of the special game process.

In line number 1620, in response to A2614 of the special chart game processing, the address (label D_TZ1CTL) of the special chart 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special chart 1 display 51 is
Convert it to the relative address "D_TZ1CTL-5000h" and transfer it to the HL register (
Code "LDD HL,D_TZ1CTL-5000H").

In line number 1630, in response to A2615 of the special game processing, a subroutine of the pattern change control processing that controls the change of the pattern on the special game display is called and executed (code "CA
LLR P_ZGRCTL). The subroutine for the symbol variation control process is labeled P_ZGR
It has an address (starting address) in the ROM corresponding to the CTL.

In line number 1640, in response to A2616 of the special chart game processing, the address (label D_TZ2CTL) of the special chart 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special chart 2 display 52 is
Convert it to a relative address "D_TZ2CTL-5000h" and transfer it to the HL register (
Code "LDD HL,D_TZ2CTL-5000H").

In line number 1650, in response to A2617 of the special symbol game processing, a subroutine of the symbol variation control processing (address in ROM corresponding to label P_ZGRCTL) is called and executed (code "CALL P_ZGR_CTL").

In line number 1660, in response to A2618 of the special game processing, the lever solenoid 86
The subroutine for the lever solenoid control process that controls the opening operation of b is called and executed (code "CALLR P_LEV_SOL"). The subroutine for the lever solenoid control process has an address (start address) in the ROM that corresponds to the label P_LEV_SOL.

At line number 1660, the special game processing program returns to the timer interrupt processing program (code "RET").

[Special Game Sequence Branching Table]
The lower part of Figure 125 is a program list explaining the special game sequence branch table according to the fifth embodiment. As described above, the special game sequence branch table has a starting address in ROM corresponding to the label D_TGAMEPRC and is referenced for calling the subroutine for special game processing. Branch tables used in conjunction with the in-area program (here, the special game processing program), such as the special game sequence branch table, are treated as programs and are located in the game control program area outside the data area within the in-area program area (first ROM area). Branch tables used in the regular game processing and bonus game processing are also located in the game control program area outside the data area.

The code contains the mnemonic "DW," which is a pseudo-instruction that specifies to the assembler that one row of the table is two bytes of data.

The special game sequence branch table is shown as a group of pseudo-instructions for associating subroutine names (labels) with branch destination address values, but in reality, the special game sequence branch table is set in order in the ROM 111b by these instruction groups (
It is a list of branch destination address values (start addresses of subroutines) that are stored in the table.
_TSOPEN, P_TSZAN) are replaced with the value of the branch destination address.
This is the special game sequence branching table in 1b.

The pseudo-instruction at line number 2010 corresponds to setting the value of the branch destination address of the subroutine (special game normal processing) of A2608 of the special game processing, and the pseudo-instruction at line number 2020 corresponds to setting the value of the branch destination address of A2609
The pseudo-instruction at line number 2030 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2610 (processing during special chart change), and the pseudo-instruction at line number 2040 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2611 (processing before opening small wins). The pseudo-instruction at line number 2050 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2612 (processing during opening small wins),
The pseudo-instruction on line number 2060 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2613 (processing remaining balls for small hits).

[2-byte decrement processing program]
The first row of Fig. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of a 2-byte decrement processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 2-byte decrement processing program is the nth (n = label P_DECW
ORD value), and for example, the code "CALLT P_DECW" such as line number 1550
ORD”.

At line number 2110, the value stored in the area (2-byte area) of the address specified by the HL register is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

In line 2120, the value transferred to the WA register is "0" and the zero flag (ZF) is
is set to "1" (ZF=1), the 2-byte decrement processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET Z").

At line number 2130, the value of the WA register is decremented by 1 (the code "DE
C WA"). This code will be executed if the value of the WA register is not "0".

In line 2140, the value of the WA register is transferred to the address area (2-byte area) specified by the HL register (code "LD (HL), WA").
The value stored in the address area specified by the L register is updated by subtracting 1 from the value before the 2-byte decrement process. The address specified by the HL register is the starting address of the 2-byte area. If the value stored in this 2-byte area is "0", the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1".

At line 2150, the 2-byte decrement processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET"). Note that the zero flag returned to the calling processing program makes it possible to determine whether the value stored in the 2-byte area whose top address is the address specified by the HL register is "0" or not.

[2-byte data acquisition processing program]
The second row of Fig. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of a 2-byte data acquisition processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 2-byte data acquisition processing program is the nth subroutine in the vector table (n = label P_GETWOR
D value), and for example, the code "CALL P_GETWORD" at line number 1590, etc.
It is called by D.

In line 2210, the value of the A register is doubled and stored in the WA register (code "M
UL A,2").

In line 2220, the value of the WA register is added to the value of the HL register (the code "AD
D HL, WA"). As a result, if the value of the HL register is the top address of a data table (for example, a special game sequence branch table) at the start of execution of the 2-byte data acquisition process, the value of the HL register added here functions as a pointer that points to data (for example, an address value) in the data table.

In line 2230, the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register is
The HL register is transferred (code "LD HL, (HL)"). As a result, one of the data (for example, the value of the branch destination address) registered (defined) in the data table (for example, the special game sequence branch table) is ultimately stored as 2-byte data in the HL register.

At line number 2240, the 2-byte data acquisition processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

The reason for doubling the value of the A register in line number 2210 is that when the value of the HL register is the first address of an address table (e.g., a special game sequence branch table), the address value (e.g., the value of the branch destination address) registered (defined) in the address table is 2 bytes, so an even value needs to be added (e.g., the special game processing number includes an odd value).

[1-byte data acquisition processing program]
The third row in Fig. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of a 1-byte data acquisition processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 1-byte data acquisition processing program is the nth (n = label P_GETBYT) in the vector table.
E value), and for example, the code "CAL
It is called by "LT P_GETBYTE".

In line 2310, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register (the code "ADD
HL, A"). The value of the HL register after the addition functions as a pointer to the address.

In line 2320, the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (HL)"). As a result, the 1-byte data to be used finally is stored in the A register.

At line number 2330, the 1-byte data acquisition processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

[Special drawing status check processing program]
The fourth row of FIG. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of the special drawing state check processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the special drawing state check processing program is registered in the nth position (n = value of label P_TGMCHK) in the vector table, and for example, the code "CALL" such as line number 2540 or line number 4080 described later.
It is called by "P_TGMCHK".

In line 2410, the address area corresponding to the label R_TGMFLG (R_TGM
Bit 0 of the LD CF field is copied to the carry flag (CF) (code "LD CF").
, (R_TGMFLG). 0"). This code stores the inverted value of CF in the jump status flag (JF). For example, bit 0 of the R_TGMFLG area
If is "1", then CF=1, and furthermore, since the value to be transferred is "1", JF=0.
For example, if bit 0 of the R_TGMFLG area is "0", CF=0,
Furthermore, since the transferred value is "0", JF=1.

As a result of executing the subroutine for the special drawing status check process, CF = 0 and JF = 1
If CF = 1 and JF = 0, it can be determined that the time is not shortened (no time is shortened). In addition, the determination itself can be made by either CF or JF.

At line number 2420, the special drawing status check processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

[Start switch monitoring processing program]
FIG. 127 is a program list showing the program structure of a part of the start port switch monitoring processing program corresponding to the start port switch monitoring processing (FIG. 17) according to the fifth embodiment. The start port switch monitoring processing program starts at the start address (
In step A2600 of the special game processing (FIG. 16),
This is a subroutine called by the R command (line number 1510).

In line number 2510, in response to A2701 of the start port switch monitoring process, the address of the start port 1 winning monitoring table (label D_SIDCHK1) is set to the relative address "D_SIDC
HK1-5000h" and transfer it to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_S
IDCHK1-5000H"). This prepares the start slot 1 winning monitoring table.

At line number 2520, in response to A2702 of the start port switch monitoring process, the subroutine of the hardware random number acquisition process is called and executed by the CALLR instruction (code "CALL
The subroutine for the hard random number acquisition process is labeled P_HRN.
It has an address (starting address) in the ROM corresponding to DGET.

In line number 2530, in response to A2703 of the start port switch monitoring process, if there is no start port winning in the target start port winning port 36 (start port 1) and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC), a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOSW20 (code "JR NC, SIDOSW20"). The code written as "JR NC, label" corresponds to "JR NC, $+2+k" in the instruction table. Note that the carry flag (
CF) is set to "1" if there is a winning entry in the starting port in the hardware random number acquisition process. If there is no jump, the process moves to the instruction on the next line number 2540.

Line numbers 2540 and 2550 correspond to A2704 of the start switch monitoring process. In line number 2540, a subroutine of the special symbol state check process is called and executed to determine whether or not the game state is a right-hit state (code "CALLT P_TGMCH
In this embodiment, the game state to be played on the right side is the time-saving state (specific game state A-C), but when the specific game state C (c time-saving) is set as the middle support as shown in FIG.
If the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1) by executing the subroutine of the special chart state check process, the game is in a time-saving state, that is, a right-hitting game state.

In line number 2550, if the game state is right-hitting, that is, if the special time-saving mode is in progress, jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to label SIDOSW10, and
The following instruction is executed (code "JR C, SIDOSW10"). If no jump is made, the program moves to the instruction at the next line number 2560.

Line number 2560 corresponds to A2705 of the start port switch monitoring process, and transfers a right-hit instruction notification command to the BC register (code "LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM").
The right hit instruction notification command is represented by a numerical value corresponding to the label C_RIGHTCOM.

Line number 2570 corresponds to A2706 of the start port switch monitoring process, which calls and executes a subroutine of the performance command setting process (code "CALLT P_COMSET").
The subroutine for the effect command setting process is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n=value of label P_COMSET).

In line number 2590, corresponding to A2707 of the start port switch monitoring process, the start port 36
Address of the table (label D_T1HOIN) that sets the reservation information by (start port 1)
F) is converted into the relative address "D_T1HOINF-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H").

In line number 2600, corresponding to A2708 of the start port switch monitoring process, a subroutine of the special start port switch common process is called and executed (code "CALLR P_TSID
The subroutine for the special start switch common processing is labeled P_TSIDOSW
The address (starting address) in the ROM corresponds to the address.

[Hardware random number acquisition processing program]
Figure 128 is a program list showing the program structure of a hard random number acquisition processing program corresponding to the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) according to the fifth embodiment.
The hard random number acquisition processing program starts from the start address (
ROM), and for example, in step A2702 of the start port switch monitoring process,
This is a subroutine called by the LLR instruction (line number 2520).

In line number 3010, the carry flag (CF) is cleared to zero (code "CLR CF") as information indicating that there is no winning at the starting port.

Lines 3020 to 3040 determine whether or not an input has been made to the target switch. In line 3020, the value currently stored in the address area (for example, in the data area of a ROM) designated in the HL register is transferred to the A register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (code "LD A, (HL+)").
"LD r, (jj+)" corresponds to "LD A, (HL+)" in the instruction table.

The address currently stored (memorized) in the HL register is set at line number 2510 of the program for the start port switch monitoring process. The value stored in the area of this address is the switch bit data (a non-zero determination value) of the target switch, for example, "00000001B." Note that the target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

In line 3030, the area of the added address "IY+R_SWCTL3+2" (R
The rising edge information is acquired from the A register (inside AM) and the switch bit data (determination value) is
A logical AND is taken and it is determined whether the switch is turned on or not (code "AND A,
(IY+R_SWCTL3+2)). The addition address "IY+R_SWCTL3+2" is the sum of the IY register value "2800h" and the offset value corresponding to R_SWCTL3+2. The switch control area is a storage area that stores the detection status of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and in this embodiment is provided in the RAM 111c. The rising edge information is information that indicates that the target switch has changed from off to on.

R_SWCTL3 is the start address of the switch control area (a relative address from the start address "2800h" of RAM 111c), and logic level information is stored in the first address from the start address, R_SWCTL3+1, and rising edge information is stored in the second address from the start address, R_SWCTL3+2. When the target switch changes from off to on, the target bit of the 8-bit data at address R_SWCTL3+2 changes from 0 to 1.

If there is no winning (ball entry) in the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) and the target switch is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, the calculation result (logical product) is zero, and the zero flag is set (ZF = 1). If the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (determination value) (for example, if the bit of the target switch is on with "00000001B"), the calculation result (logical product) is other than zero (for example,
"00000001B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set (ZF=0).

In line 3040, if the calculation result is zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine ends and the program returns from the hardware random number acquisition program to the start port switch monitoring program (code "RET Z"). In other words, if there is no winning combination in the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) and the target switch is off, the program returns to the start port switch monitoring program.

In line 3050, the random number latch register status is input to the A register from port C_HRDCNT (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to the label C_HRDCNT) (
Code "IN A, (C_HRDCNT)".

Line numbers 3060 and 3070 determine whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register. Line number 3060 takes the logical product of the judgment value (judgment data) currently stored in the address area (for example, in the data area of the ROM) stored in the HL register and the value of the A register (code "AND A, (HL+)"). After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL+"). The judgment value is a value other than zero, for example, "0
The operation result (logical product) of line number 3060 is "0000010B", and if the random number latch register status, which is the value of register A, does not match the judgment value, it becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, and if the random number latch register status matches the judgment value, it becomes non-zero (for example, "00000010B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. Note that if there is no latch data in the target random number latch register, the bit of the random number latch register status corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, the random number latch register status does not match the judgment value, and the operation result (logical product) becomes zero.

In line number 3070, if the calculation result of line number 2060 is zero (Z) (i.e., if there is no latched data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine is terminated and the program returns from the hard random number acquisition processing program (code "RET Z").

In line 3080, in order to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register, the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM)
The value stored in (the address of the target hard random number latch register) is transferred to the E register (code "LD E, (HL)").

In line 3090, the value stored in the 2-byte area from the address stored in the E register (the address of the target hard random number latch register) (2-byte jackpot random number,
16-bit fixed-length random number #0) is input to the WA register (code "INW WA, (E)
").

In line 3100, the value of the WA register (a 2-byte jackpot random number) is transferred to the IX register (code "LD IX, WA").

In line number 3110, the carry flag (CF) is set (code "SET CF") as start port winning information indicating that a start port winning has occurred.

At line number 3120, the subroutine ends and the program returns from the hardware random number acquisition processing program (code "RET").

[Special diagram start switch common processing program]
Figure 129 is a program list showing the program structure of the special chart start port switch common processing program corresponding to the special chart start port switch common processing (Figure 18) in the fifth embodiment.
The special diagram start port switch common processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TSIDOSW, and is a subroutine that is called by the CALLR command, for example, in step A2708 (line number 2600) or A2715 of the start port switch monitoring processing.

In line number 3510, in response to A2901 of the special start port switch common processing, the number of start port signal outputs stored in the start port signal output count area of the addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG" is transferred to the A register (code LD A, (IY+R_SIDOSIG))).

In line number 3520, in response to A2902 of the special start port switch common processing, the value of the A register (number of start port signal outputs) is increased by 1 and updated by +1 (code "INC A").
.

In line 3530, if the number of start port signal outputs in the A register has overflowed and returned to zero (ZF = 1), corresponding to A2903 of the special start port switch common processing, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TSIDOSW10, and the instructions from line 3560 onwards are executed (code "JR Z, TSIDOSW10"). The code written as "JR Z, label" corresponds to "JR Z, $+2+k" in the instruction table. If no jump is made, the program proceeds to the instruction on the next line 3540.

In line number 3540, in response to A2903 of the special diagram start port switch common processing, if the number of start port signal outputs in the A register has not overflowed, the updated value of the A register (number of start port signal outputs) is transferred to the start port signal output number area of the addition address "IY + R_SIDOSIG" (code "LD (IY + R_SIDOSIG), A").

Lines 3560 to 3590 correspond to A2905 in the special start port switch common processing. In line 3560, the value stored in the reservation information table (the address area specified in the current HL register) is transferred to the W register as the offset address of the reservation number area (code "LD W, (HL+)"). The code "LD W, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table. The address in the current HL register is then updated by +1 to the next address. For example, if the target start port is start port 1, the address in the current HL register (e.g., in the ROM data area) is the value loaded (transferred) in line 2590. The hold information table (A2707, A2714) is a table (for example, in the data area of the ROM) that sets information about the hold (start memory) due to winning at the start winning port 36 (start winning port 1) or the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37, start winning port 2).
is.

In line 3570, the value (reserved number) stored in the area of the addition address "IY+W" is added to A
Transfer to register (code "LD A, (IY+W)"). Add address "IY+W"
is the sum of the value stored in the W register (offset address of the reserved number area) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM start address "2800h"). The added address "IY+W" is the absolute address of the reserved number area. That is, in line number 3570, the current reserved number in the reserved number area is stored in the A register, but the current reserved number (start memory number)
is the number of reserved tickets before being updated by +1 due to this winning in row number 3600 (A2906).

In line 3580, the reserved number in the A register is compared with the upper limit (here 4), and if it is less than the upper limit, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1), and if it is greater than or equal to the upper limit, the carry flag (CF) is not set (CF=0) (code "CP A, 4").

In line number 3590, if the number of reserved positions reaches the upper limit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the special start port switch common processing program returns to the start port switch monitoring processing program (code "RET NC").

Line number 3600 corresponds to A2906 of the special drawing start port switch common processing.
In 00, the reserved number, which is the value of the reserved number area corresponding to the address "IY+W" in RAM, is updated by +1 as the reserved number of the target special drawing (reserved number of special drawing 1 or reserved number of special drawing 2) (code "INC
(IY+W)". The RAM address IY+W is the address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

Line numbers 3610 to 3640 correspond to A2907 of the special start switch common processing. In line number 3610, the reserved number stored in the A register (the reserved number before updating +1) is
Transfer to register (code "LD C, A").

In line number 3620, the value (starting gate winning flag) stored in the address area of the current HL register is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, (HL+)"). The code "LD B, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table. That is,
The starting gate winning flag (value indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) is obtained from the reserved information table. Then, the value in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address.

In line number 3630, the area of the addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" (in RAM)
The value stored in register B (starting gate winning flag) is transferred to
+R_SIDOFLG), B". The addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" is the value stored in the IY register (RAM start address "2800h") plus the label R_SIDOFLG.
The value corresponding to G is added. The addition address "IY+label" is
Indicates the address within

At line number 3640, the value of the BC register is saved to the stack area of RAM (the code "
PUSH BC").

Line numbers 3650 to 3690 correspond to A2908 of the special start switch common processing. In line number 3650, the value stored in the address stored in the current HL register (1
The number of bytes (8) for each reservation is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (HL
+)) That is, the number of bytes (8) for one reservation is obtained from the reservation information table.
After that, the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address.

In addition, the random number storage area of each reservation in the special chart 1 reservation memory area or the special chart 2 reservation memory area contains a 2-byte jackpot random number, a 1-byte jackpot pattern random number, a 1-byte support pattern random number, a 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1, a 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 2, and a 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 3.
is stored, and the number of bytes (number of reserved bytes) allocated to each special chart reservation (each start memory) is 8 bytes.

In line 3660, the reserved byte count (8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the reserved count stored in the A register (the reserved count before updating +1, which is 0 to 3), and the result (reserved count x reserved byte count (8)) is stored in the WA register (code "MUL W, A"). Since the result of the operation is 0 to 24, the result is actually stored in the lower byte of the A register.

In line 3670, the value stored in the address currently stored in the HL register (address of the random number storage area) is transferred to the L register (code "LD L, (HL)"). That is, the address (starting address) of the random number storage area is obtained from the reserved information table. For example, the starting address of the random number storage area (reserved memory area) is 2830h in the reserved memory area of Special Figure 1.
and in the special chart 2 reserved memory area it is 2850h.

In line 3680, the value stored in the A register (reserved number x reserved bytes) is added to the starting address of the random number storage area stored in the L register (code "ADD L, A").
As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number (the reserved number before updating by +1), that is, the starting address of the reserved random number storage area generated by this winning.
For example, if the reserved number generated by this winning is reserved 3, the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number in the special drawing 1 reserved memory area is the offset address (lower byte) for the starting address "2800h" of RAM 111c, which is 30h + 2 x 8 = 40h, and in the special drawing 2 reserved memory area, the offset address (lower byte) for "2800h" is 50h + 2 x 8
=60h.

In line 3690, the value "28h" is transferred to the H register as the upper address of the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number (code "LD H, 28H").

In line number 3700, in response to A2909 of the special start switch common processing, the 2-byte jackpot random number stored in the IX register is transferred to the area (in RAM) of the address specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +2 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), IX"). Note that the code "LD (HL+), IX"
corresponds to "LD (jj+), ss" in the instruction table.

Line numbers 3710 and 3720 correspond to A2910 of the special symbol start switch common processing. In line number 3710, a 1-byte jackpot symbol random number (8-bit variable-length random number #0) is input from port C_RNSV0 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RNSV0) to register A (code "IN A, (C_RNSV0)").

In line number 3720, the jackpot symbol random number in the A register is transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), A").
A" corresponds to "LD (jj+), r" in the instruction table.

Line numbers 3730 and 3740 correspond to A2912 of the special start switch common processing. In line number 3730, a 1-byte random number per support (8-bit variable-length random number #1) is input from port C_RDSV1 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to label C_RDSV1) to register A (code "IN A, (C_RDSV1)").

In line number 3740, the random number of the support symbol in the A register is transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), A").

Line numbers 3750 to 3780 correspond to A2913 of the special start switch common processing. In line number 3750, a 2-byte variable pattern random number 1 (16-bit fixed length random number #
1) is input to the WA register from port C_RDLF1 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to the label C_RDLF1) (code "INW WA, (C_RDLF1)").

In line 3760, the WA
The register fluctuation pattern random number 1 is transferred, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +2 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), WA").
L+), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj+), ss" in the instruction table.

On line number 3770, 1-byte variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 (8-bit variable-length random numbers #2 and #3) are input to the WA register from port C_RDSV2 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDSV2) (code "INW WA, (C_RDSV2)").

In line 3780, the WA
Transfer register fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 (code "LD (HL), WA"). The code "LD (HL), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj), ss" in the instruction table.

In line number 3790, in response to A2914 of the special drawing start port switch common processing, a subroutine for special drawing reservation information determination processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_THOI
NF"). The subroutine for the special drawing reservation information determination process has an address (starting address) in the ROM corresponding to the label P_THOINF.

Line numbers 3800 to 3820 correspond to A2915 of the special starting gate switch common processing. Line number 3800 restores the value of the BC register from the stack area of RAM (code "POP BC"). The value of the B register is the starting gate winning flag (a value indicating special gate 1 or special gate 2), and the value of the C register is the reserved number (the reserved number before updating by +1).

In line number 3810, the value of register B is added with the value corresponding to label C_THOMD (the value indicating the special chart reservation mode) (code "ADD B, C_THOMD").

On line 3820, 2 is added to the value of the C register (code "ADD C, 2").

In line number 3830, in response to A2916 of the special drawing start port switch common processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the performance command setting processing is called and executed (code "CA
LLT P_COMSET). The subroutine for the effect command setting process is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n = value of label P_COMSET). The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of registers B and C.

At line number 2840, the subroutine ends and returns from the special chart start port switch common processing program (code "RET").

[Special drawing reservation information determination processing program]
130 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special drawing reservation information determination processing program corresponding to the special drawing reservation information determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. The special drawing reservation information determination processing program has a leading address (in the ROM) corresponding to the label P_THOINF, and for example, in A2914 (line number 3790) of the special drawing start port switch common processing,
This is a subroutine called by the LLR instruction.

In line number 4010, the address (label R_
T2HORYU) to the DE register (code "LDY DE,R_T2HORY
R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value "2800h" of the IY register, and it is sufficient to specify only the lower address of the reservation number storage area as R_T2HORYU.

In line number 4020, the value " obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes of the special chart 2 reservation) from the starting address (label R_T2RNDMEM) of the random number storage area (special chart 2 reservation memory area) of the special chart 2 reservation is
R_T2RNDMEM-8" is transferred to the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for special figure 2 (code "LDY HL, R_T2RNDMEM-
8").

At line number 4030, the number of reserved bytes "8" for the special drawing 2 reservation is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, 8").

In line number 4040, the area of the addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" (in RAM)
The starting gate winning flag stored in is compared with the value indicating special chart 1 (label C_SIDO1) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1"). Note that the code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1" is the same as "CPJ (
jj + d), n". If the starting port winning flag indicates special chart 1 and the comparison result is a match, the zero flag is set (ZF = 1), and if the starting port winning flag indicates special chart 2 and the comparison result is not a match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0).

In line 4050, if the start gate winning flag indicates special number 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF10 and executes the instructions from line 4150 onwards (code "JR NZ, THOINF10"). In other words, if the start gate 1 is not a winning entry, the program branches. If the jump does not occur, the program moves to the next instruction in line 4060.

In line number 4060, the address of the reserved number storage area for the reserved number of special chart 1 (label R_T1HO
RYU) to the DE register (code "LDY DE,R_T1HORYU").

In line number 4070, the value " 8 (the number of reserved bytes of special chart 1 reservation) is subtracted from the starting address (label R_T1RNDMEM) of the random number storage area (special chart 1 reservation memory area) of special chart 1 reservation
R_T1RNDMEM-8" is transferred to the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for special figure 1 (code "LDY HL, R_T1RNDMEM-
8").

In line number 4080, as in line number 2540, a subroutine for checking the special symbol state is called and executed to determine whether the game state is a right-hit state (code "C
ALL P_TGMCHK"). In this embodiment, the gaming state in which the right hand is hit is the time-saving state (
Specific game state A-C). When the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1) by executing the subroutine of the special game state check process, it is a time-saving state, that is, a game state in which the player hits the right.

In line number 4090, if the game state is to hit right (if CF = 1), the subroutine is terminated and the special chart reservation information determination processing program is returned (code "RET C
"). As a result, in a game state where the player hits the right side, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is not determined in advance. Note that, according to the code of line number 4050, when the start port winning flag indicates special chart 2, the code of line number 4060 to line number 4130 is not executed, and therefore, even in a game state where the player hits the right side, the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is determined in advance.

In line number 4100, the special game processing number area (addition address "IY+R_TGAME
" area) (in RAM) is compared with the value of the label C_TSFAN indicating that a small win is occurring (code "CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_
TSFAN"). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME is IY
The register value "2800h" is used as the base to indicate the special game processing number area. Label C_
The value of TSFAN is the special game processing number "3" of the small win opening pre-processing. The code "CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TSFAN" is the same as "CP (jj + d
), n". If there is a small win and the special game processing number is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), and if there is no small win and the number is less than 3, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

In line number 4110, if the carry flag (CF) is not set during a small win (NC, CF = 0), the special chart reserve information determination processing program returns (code "RET NC"). As a result, during a small win, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is not pre-determined.

In line number 4120, the bonus game processing number area (addition address "IY+R_YGAME
") area (in RAM) is compared with the value of the label C_YFAN indicating that a jackpot is being won (code "CP (IY + R_YGAME), C_Y
Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_YGAME indicates the bonus game processing number area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register.
The value of AN is the special game processing number "1" during the fanfare processing. If there is a jackpot and the special game processing number is 1 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (N
If the value is less than 1 and not during a jackpot, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1).

In line number 4130, if the carry flag (CF) is not set during a jackpot (NC, CF = 0), the special chart reserve information determination processing program returns (code "RET NC"). As a result, during a jackpot, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is not pre-determined.

In line number 4150, the reserved number (special drawing 1 reserved number or special drawing 2 reserved number) stored in the reserved number storage area corresponding to the address of the DE register is transferred to the A register (code "LD
A, (DE)) The code "LD A, (DE)" corresponds to "LD r, (j
j)).

In line number 4160, the reserved byte number (8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the reserved number (special drawing 1 reserved number or special drawing 2 reserved number) (here, 1 to 4) stored in the A register, and W
Store the calculation result (reserved number x reserved byte number) in the A register (code "MUL W, A"
) Since the operation result is between 8 and 32, the operation result is actually stored in the lower byte of the A register.

In line number 4170, the latest reserved jackpot random number, which is the value of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the addition address "HL+A", is transferred (loaded) to the IX register (code "LD IX,
(HL+A)) The code "LD IX, (HL+A)" corresponds to "LD s" in the instruction table.
s, (jj+p)". The value of this address to be added is the sum of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (reserved number x reserved byte number). The value of the HL register is the value obtained by subtracting the reserved byte number from the start address of the random number storage area, and is a value related to the random number storage area. A
The value in the register is Pending Number x Pending Bytes, which is a value based on the Pending Number (the number of starting stores) multiplied by the number of bytes allocated per pending.

The value of the HL register is the starting address of the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is (
It is also possible to configure it as (number of reserved bytes - 1) x number of reserved bytes.

Here, the addition address "HL+A" is the top address of the most recently generated latest reserved random number storage area. The area corresponding to the addition address "HL+A" stores the latest reserved jackpot random number, and the latest reserved jackpot random number is acquired by the IX register (
(The data is read out.)

Line number 4180 calls and executes a subroutine for determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred (code "C
ALLR P_BHITJUD"). The subroutine for the jackpot determination process is labeled P_BH
It has an address in ROM (first address) corresponding to the ITJUD. In the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot based on the latest reserved jackpot random number.

In line 4190, if the result of the jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (if the carry flag is not set (NC)), a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to label THOINF30 (code "JR NC, T
If no jump is made, the program proceeds to the instruction at the next line number 4200.

In line number 4200, the address D_ZC of the jackpot pattern random number check table for special chart 1
Transfer HKTBL1 (starting address) to the DE register (code "LD DE,D_Z
CHKTBL1”).

Line number 4210 is the same code as line number 4040, and the added address "IY+R_S
The starting gate winning flag stored in the "IDOFLG" area (in RAM) is set to the value indicating special chart 1 (
Label C_SIDO1) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG),
C_SIDO1”).

In line number 4220, the starting gate winning flag indicates special chart 1, and the jump status flag (J
If JF=1 or T, the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF20 and executes the instructions from line number 4250 onwards (code "
"JRR T, THOINF20"). In other words, if there is a win in starting gate 1, it branches. The jump destination (label THOINF20) is a nearby address that is +4 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRR T, THOINF20". If the starting gate win flag does not indicate special drawing 1, it moves to the command on the next line number 4230.

In line number 4230, the address D_ZC of the jackpot pattern random number check table for special chart 2
HKTBL2 (starting address) is transferred to the DE register and overwritten (code "LD D
E, D_ZCHKTBL2”).

On line number 4250, 2 is added to the value of the A register (code "ADD A, 2").
The value stored in the A register is (reserved number x reserved byte number) plus "2".

In line 4260, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the added address "HL+A" is
Transfer to A register (code "LD A, (HL+A)").
, (HL+A)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+p)" in the instruction table. Currently, the value of the address to be added is the sum of the value of the HL register (the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area) and the value of the A register (number of reserved bytes x number of reserved bytes + 2). The value of the HL register is a value related to the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is a value based on the product of the number of reserved bytes and the number of bytes allocated for each reserved number. Here, the value of the address to be added is "2" added to the start address of the most recently generated random number storage area for the latest reserved number. And,
The area corresponding to this addition address stores the most recently generated reserved jackpot pattern random number, and the most recently generated reserved jackpot pattern random number is acquired by the A register.

In line 4270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the added address "DE+A" is
Transfer to A register (code "LD A, (DE+A)").
, (DE+A)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+p)" in the instruction table. The value of the address to be added is the value stored in the DE register (the top address of the jackpot symbol random number check table).
and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot random number). Since the area corresponding to this added address value stores the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot random number, the latest reserved stop symbol information is acquired in the A register. In this way, the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot random number is acquired.

At line number 4280, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to the label THOINF100 (code "JR THOINF100").

[Jackpot determination processing program]
131 is a program list showing the program structure of the jackpot determination processing program corresponding to the jackpot determination processing (FIG. 25A) according to the fifth embodiment. The jackpot determination processing program has a leading address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_BHITJUD, for example,
This is a subroutine that is called by a call command such as a CALL R command in the special chart pending information determination process (line number 4180), jackpot flag 1 setting process, jackpot flag 2 setting process, etc.

At line number 4510, the value of the HL register is saved to the stack area of RAM (code "
PUSH HL").

Line numbers 4520 to 4540 correspond to A3800 of the jackpot determination process. In line number 4520, the address of the data table to be used (label D_BHITJUD) is
This is converted into a relative address "D_BHITJUD-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_BHITJUD-5000H"). Note that this data table stores data for each probability setting value (equivalent to the upper limit judgment value in Figure 25A plus 1).

On line 4530, the probability setting value stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SETNUM" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SETNUM)").
.

At line number 4540, a subroutine for 2-byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (
(The code is "CALLT P_GETWORD"). This 2-byte data acquisition process acquires data from the data table from the value of the HL register (the address of the data table) and the value of the A register (the probability setting value), and stores it in the HL register. The data (value) acquired from the data table is the value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit judgment value (= upper limit judgment value + 1), and is stored in the HL register.

Line numbers 4550 and 4560 correspond to A3801 and A3802 in the jackpot determination process. In line number 4550, the jackpot random number in the IX register and the lower limit determination value (label C_BHI
The code "CP IX, C_BHIT_MIN" is compared with the " IX, C_BHIT_MIN" in the instruction table. Note that the register in which the jackpot random number is stored may be a pair register instead of the IX register, as long as it has a 16-bit width (capacity).
This corresponds to the "first comparison instruction" (CP rr, mn), and can properly determine the magnitude relationship between the jackpot random number and the lower limit judgment value. If the jackpot random number in the IX register is less than the lower limit judgment value C_BHIT_MIN, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF
= 1, JF = 1 (T)), if the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value C_BHIT_MIN, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (C
F=0, JF=0(F)).

In line number 4560, if the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (in the case of T), the label BHI
Jump to the address in ROM corresponding to TJUD10 and execute the instructions from line number 4600 onwards (code "JRR T, BHITJUD10").
JUD10) is a nearby address that is +4 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRR T, BHITJUD10". If the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, the process moves to the next instruction on line number 4570.

Line numbers 4570 and 4580 correspond to A3803 of the jackpot determination process. In line number 4570, the jackpot random number in the IX register and the value currently stored in the HL register (=
The code "CP IX, HL" is used to compare the upper limit judgment value + 1.
"X,HL" corresponds to "CP rr,gg" (first comparison command) in the instruction table, and can properly determine the magnitude relationship between the jackpot random number and the upper limit judgment value. The jackpot random number in the IX register is the upper limit judgment value + 1
If it is less than the upper limit judgment value, that is, if the jackpot random number is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1, JF=1(T)). Here, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1) as jackpot information indicating a jackpot.

In line number 4580, if the jackpot random number is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value (in the case of T), the label BHI
Jump to the address in ROM corresponding to TJUD20 and execute the instructions from line number 4620 onwards (code "JRR T, BHITJUD20").
JUD20) is a nearby address that is +3 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRR T, BHITJUD20". If the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value, the process moves to the next instruction on line number 4600.

In line 4600, the carry flag (C
F) is cleared to zero (CF=0) (code "CLR CF").

At line number 4620, the value of the HL register is restored from the stack area in RAM (code "POP HL").

In line number 4630, the program returns from the big win determination process (code "RET"
).

The jackpot determination processing program described above is a subroutine that includes only the JRR instruction (second branch instruction) as a branch instruction. On the other hand, for example, the special chart reservation information determination processing program,
The special chart normal processing program (described below) and the special chart display processing program (described below) are subroutines that use a mixture of JR (first branch instruction) and JRR (second branch instruction) branch instructions. The 20-byte jackpot determination processing program (second subroutine) has a smaller program size than the first subroutines, such as the special chart hold information determination processing program (52 bytes or more), the special chart normal processing program (59 bytes), and the special chart display processing program (89 bytes or more). Furthermore, because the 1-byte JRR instruction has a shorter word length than the 2-byte JR instruction, the program size of the jackpot determination processing program can be rationally reduced. This allows for more rational program design and improved program development efficiency.

The jackpot determination processing program (second subroutine) is commonly called from multiple processing programs such as the special chart reservation information determination processing program, the jackpot flag 1 setting processing program, and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing program. This reduces the overall capacity (size) of the program.

[Special chart normal processing program]
132 is a program list showing the program structure of a special game game normal processing program corresponding to the special game game normal processing (FIG. 20) according to the fifth embodiment. The special game game normal processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TUSUL, and is a subroutine called by a CALL command at line number 1600 of the special game game processing program.

Line numbers 5010 to 5040 correspond to A3200 of the special normal processing. In line number 5010, the bonus game processing number stored in the area of the added address "IY + R_YGAME" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY + R_YGAME)").

In line number 5020, if the bonus game processing number is not "0", that is, if bonus normal processing is not in progress (NZ), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL30, and the instructions from line number 5310 onwards are executed (code "JR NZ, TUSUL30"). If no jump is made, the process moves to the instruction of the next line number 5030.

In line 5030, the value of the remaining ball counter stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_ZANZON" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_ZANZON
ON)).

In line 5040, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not "0", the label TUSUL30
and executes the instructions from line number 5310 onwards (code "JR NZ, TUSUL30"). If no jump is made, the process moves to the instruction at the next line number 5050.

Line numbers 5050 and 5060 correspond to A3201 of the special drawing normal processing.
In 050, the number of reserved special figures 2 stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_T2HORYU" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_T2HORYU)").

In line number 5060, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (in the case of T, JF = 1), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL10, and the instructions from line number 5150 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, TUSUL10").
UL10) is a nearby address that is +13 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, TUSUL10". If the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (J
If F=0, the program proceeds to the next instruction at line number 5070.

In line number 5070, in response to A3202 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine for the special chart 2 variation start processing is called and executed (code "CALL P_T2START"). The subroutine for the special chart 2 variation start processing has an address in ROM (start address) corresponding to the label P_T2START.

Line numbers 5080 to 5100 correspond to A3203 of the special drawing normal processing. In line number 5080, the number corresponding to the label C_THOMD2 (the number indicating the special drawing hold mode) is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, C_THOMD2").

In line number 5090, the reserved number of special figures 2 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T2HORYU" is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, (IY+R_T2HORYU
U)).

In line number 5100, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (the code "IN
C C").

In line number 5110, in response to A3204 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the performance command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALL P_C
The performance command setting process is executed based on the values of the B register and the C register.

In line number 5120, in response to A3205 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine of the special chart variable processing transition setting processing of the special chart 2 is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T2HE
N_SET"). The subroutine for the transition setting process during special chart fluctuation of special chart 2 is labeled P_T
It has an address (starting address) in the ROM corresponding to 2HEN_SET.

At line number 5130, the special chart normal processing program returns (code "RET")
.

Line numbers 5150 and 5160 correspond to A3206 of the special drawing normal processing.
In 150, the number of reserved special figures 1 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T1HORYU" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_T1HORYU)").

In line number 5160, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (in the case of T, JF = 1), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL20 and execute the instructions from line number 5250 onwards (code "JRR T, TUSUL20"). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0", proceed to the next line number 5170.

In line number 5170, in response to A3207 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine for the special chart 1 variation start processing is called and executed (code "CALL P_T1START"). The subroutine for the special chart 1 variation start processing has an address in ROM (start address) corresponding to the label P_T1START.

Line numbers 5180 to 5200 correspond to A3208 of the special drawing normal processing. In line number 5180, the number corresponding to the label C_THOMD1 (the number indicating the special drawing hold mode) is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, C_THOMD1").

In line number 5190, the reserved number of special figures 1 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T1HORYU" is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, (IY+R_T1HORYU
U)).

In line 5200, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (the code "IN
C C").

In line number 5210, in response to A3209 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the performance command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALL P_C
OMSET").

In line number 5220, in response to A3210 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine of the special chart variable processing transition setting processing of the special chart 1 is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T1HE
N_SET").

At line number 5230, the special chart normal processing program returns (code "RET")
.

Line numbers 5250 and 5260 correspond to A3211 of the special drawing normal processing.
In step 250, the customer waiting demo flag stored in the customer waiting demo flag area (in RAM) at the addition address "IY+R_DEMO" is set to the value (label C_DEMO) indicating that the customer waiting demo has started.
) (code "CPJ (IY+R_DEMO), C_DEMO"). If the customer waiting demo in progress flag indicates that the customer waiting demo has already started and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF=1 and JF=1), and if the comparison results in a mismatch, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

In line 5260, if the customer waiting demo in progress flag indicates that the customer waiting demo has started and the jump status flag (JF) is set (if JF = 1, if T), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL30, and the instructions from line 5310 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, TUSUL30"). If the customer waiting demo in progress flag does not indicate that the customer waiting demo has started, the process moves to the next instruction in line 5270.

In line number 5270, the added address "IY + R
The value corresponding to the label C_DEMO (the value indicating that the customer waiting demo has started) is transferred to the customer waiting demo in progress flag area of the code "LD (IY+R_DEMO)" and set.
, C_DEMO”).

In line number 5280, in response to A3213 of the special normal process, the value corresponding to the customer waiting demo command (label C_DEMOCOM) is transferred to the BC register (code "LD B
C, C_DEMOCOM”).

In line number 5290, in response to A3214 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the performance command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALL P_C
OMSET").

In line number 5310, corresponding to A3215 and A3216 of the special game normal processing, the value of the label C_TUSUL is transferred as the special game processing number "0" to the special game processing number area (in RAM) of the addition address "IY+R_TGAME" (code "LD (IY+R_
TGAME), C_TUSUL”).

In line number 5320, the address to be added is "IY+R" corresponding to A3217 of the special normal processing.
_TZINF" variable symbol discrimination flag area to clear it (code "LD
(IY+R_TZINF), 0'').

In line number 5330, the address to be added is "IY+R" corresponding to A3218 of the special normal processing.
The value (
Label C_CNTNG) is transferred (code "LD (IY+R_DAIERR), C_
CNTNG").

At line number 5340, the special chart normal processing program returns (code "RET")
.

[Special drawing display processing program]
133A and 133B show the process during special chart display according to the fifth embodiment (FIGS. 36A and 36B
16 is a program listing showing the program structure of a part of the special display processing program corresponding to the special display processing program. The special display processing program has a leading address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TDISPLAY and is a subroutine called by the CALL command at line number 1600 of the special display game processing program.

On line 6010, the values of the A registers are exclusive ORed together to obtain
The value of the A register is cleared to 0 (code "XOR A, A").

Line numbers 6020 and 6030 correspond to A5101 of the special pattern display process. In line number 6020, the variable pattern discrimination flag area (RA
The information on the variable pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) stored in the memory (inside M) is compared with the value (label C_TZ1HEN) indicating the variation of special pattern 1 (code "CPJ (IY + R_TZINF), C_
If the variable symbol discrimination flag area indicates special symbol 1 and the comparison result is a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison result is not a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF
=0).

In line number 6030, when the variable symbol discrimination flag area indicates special symbol 2 and the jump status flag (JF) is not set (when JF = 0, when F), the label TDISP
Jump to the address in ROM corresponding to LY10 and execute the command from line number 6090 onwards (code "JRR F, TDISPLY10").
If so, the process moves to the next instruction at line number 6040.

In line number 6040, corresponding to A5102 and A5103 of the special chart display processing, the value stored in the jackpot flag 1 area of the addition address "IY + BHITFLG1" is exchanged with the value of the A register by the exchange command XCH and loaded into the A register (code "XCH A,
(IY+BHITFLG1)). Before the exchange, the value of the A register was cleared to 0, so after the exchange, the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared to 0.

Line numbers 6050 to 6070 correspond to A5104 of the special chart display process. In line number 6050, the value of the jackpot flag 1 in the A register and the value indicating the jackpot (label C_BH
IT (for example, 1)) is compared (code "CPJ A, C_BHIT"). The code "CPJ A, C_BHIT" corresponds to "CPJ p, n" (second comparison command) in the command table, and can appropriately determine whether the value of the jackpot flag 1 matches the number indicating a jackpot. Jackpot flag 1
If the comparison result indicates a jackpot, the jump status flag is set (
If the comparison result is no match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

In line 6060, if the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot and the jump status flag is set (T, JF = 1), the program jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TDISPLY20 and executes the instructions from line 6130 onwards (code "JRR T, TD").
If the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot, the process proceeds to the next instruction at line number 6070.

At line number 6070, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY40, and the instructions from line number 6180 onwards are executed (code "JR TDISPLY40").
.

In line number 6090, corresponding to A5107 and A5108 of the special chart display processing, the value stored in the jackpot flag 2 area of the addition address "IY + BHITFLG2" is exchanged with the value of the A register by the exchange command XCH and loaded into the A register (code "XCH A,
(IY+BHITFLG2)). Before the exchange, the value of the A register was cleared to 0, so after the exchange, the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared to 0.

Line numbers 6100 and 6110 correspond to A5109 of the special chart display process. In line number 6100, the value of the jackpot flag 2 in the A register and the value indicating the jackpot (label C_BHI
T) is compared (code "CPJ A, C_BHIT"). If the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot and the comparison result is a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1
and JF=1), if the comparison result is no match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

In line number 6110, if the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot and the jump status flag is not set (F, JF=0), a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TDISPLY40, and the instructions from line number 6180 onwards are executed (code "JRR F,
TDISPLY40”).

In line number 6130, in response to A5105 and A5110 of the special diagram display processing, the condition device operation information (value of label C_SADO) indicating that the condition device is operating is transferred to the condition device operation information area of the added address "IY + JOSADO" (code "LD (IY +
JOSADO), C_SADO”).

In line number 6150, in response to A5106 of the special chart display processing, a subroutine for the special chart normal processing transition setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_TUSUL_SE
T"). The subroutine for the special normal processing transition setting process has an address (starting address) in ROM corresponding to the label P_TUSUL_SET.

At line number 6160, the special drawing display processing program returns (code "RET"
).

Line numbers 6210 and 6220 correspond to A5122 of the special chart display process. In line number 6210, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area (R
The value stored in the code "CPJ (IY+R_TNJ)" is compared with the value of the label C_TNJON (a value indicating that the ceiling time-saving activation flag is set (for example, "1")).
FLG), C_TNJON). If the ceiling time-saving activation flag is set and the comparison result is a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison result is not a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0
and JF = 0).

In line number 6220, the ceiling time reduction activation flag is not set and the jump status flag (
If JF is not set (JF=0, F), label TDISPLY70
The process jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to the line number 6270 and executes the instructions from line number 6270 onwards (code "JRR F, TDISPLY70"). If the ceiling time reduction activation flag is set, the process moves to the next instruction in line number 6230.

Line numbers 6230 and 6240 correspond to A5123 of the special diagram display process. In line number 6230, the initial value "704" of the time reduction change count 1 is transferred to the time reduction change count 1 area of the addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1" (code "LDW (IY+R_J
TNCNT1), 704). The code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCNT1),
704" corresponds to "LDW (jj+d), mn" in the instruction table.

In line 6240, the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 2, "700", is transferred to the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area of the addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2" (code "LDW (IY
+R_JTNCN2), 700). The code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCN
T2), 700" corresponds to "LDW (jj+d), mn" in the instruction table.

At line number 6250, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY110, and the instructions from line number 6530 onwards are executed (code "JR TDISPLY110").
").

Line numbers 6270 and 6280 correspond to A5124 of the special drawing normal processing.
In 270, the support hit flag 2 flag stored in the support hit flag 2 flag area of the addition address "IY+R_SAPFLG2" is set to a numerical value indicating a support hit (label C_SAPON).
(Code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG2), C_SAPON"). The code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG2), C_SAPON" is compared with "
CPJ (jj+d), n". If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit and the comparison result is a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1)
), if the comparison result is not a match, the jump status flag is not set (F,
ZF=0 and JF=0).

In line 6280, if the support hit flag 2 is a support hit and the jump status flag is set, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to the label TDISPLY80, and the instructions from line 6320 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, TDISPLY8").
0"). If the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit, the process moves to the next instruction at line number 6290.

Line numbers 6290 and 6300 correspond to A5125 of the special drawing normal processing.
In 290, the support hit flag 1 flag stored in the support hit flag 1 flag area of the addition address "IY+R_SAPFLG1" is set to a numerical value (label C_SAPON) indicating a support hit.
(Code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG1), C_SAPON"). If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit and the comparison results in a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison results in a mismatch, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line number 6300, if the support flag 2 is not a support flag and the zero flag is not set (in the case of NZ, ZF=0), the RO corresponding to the label TDISPLY120
Jump to the address in M and execute the instructions from line number 6550 onwards (code "JR N
Z, TDISPLY120"). If the support flag 2 is support, the next line number 6
Go to command 320.

Line numbers 6320 to 6510 correspond to A5126 of the special diagram normal processing. In line number 6510, the address of the required data table (label D_SAPCNT) is converted to the relative address "D_SAPCNT-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "
LDD HL, D_SAPCNT-5000H”).

In line 6330, the time reduction determination data stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SAPNUM" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SAPN
UM)).

On line 6340, the value of the time reduction determination data in the A register is multiplied by four and stored in the WA register (code "MUL A, 4").

At line number 6350, a subroutine for 1 byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (
(Code "CALLT P_GETBYTE") As a result, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register, and the added value of the HL register functions as a pointer indicating the address of the storage area for the new time-shortening fluctuation count 1 (initial value).

In line number 6360, the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCN
The time reduction variation count 2 stored in the WA register (code "LD T2") is transferred to the WA register.
WA, (IY + R_JTNCNT2)). Here, the time-shortened variation number 2 is the remaining number of times the special chart 2 variation display game is executed in the time-shortened state.

In line number 6370, the time reduction variation count 2 in the WA register is compared with the time reduction variation count 1 stored in the time reduction variation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)"). The time reduction variation count 1 here is the remaining number of executions of the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the time reduction state. Note that the code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNC
NT1) corresponds to "CP rr, (jj+d)" (fourth comparison instruction) in the instruction table. If the time reduction variation count 2 is less than the time reduction variation count 1, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1, JF=1(T)). If the time reduction variation count 2 is equal to or greater than the time reduction variation count 1, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF=0, JF=0(F)).

In line 6380, if the time reduction change count 2 is less than the time reduction change count 1 (in the case of T), the program jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TDISPLY90, and executes line 64.
Execute the instructions from line 40 onwards (code "JRR T, TDISPLY90"). If the time reduction variation count 2 is equal to or greater than the time reduction variation count 1, the process moves to the instruction at the next line number 6390.

In line 6390, the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (value of the HL register) set in line 6350 is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)"). Note that the code "LD WA, (HL)" corresponds to "
LD ss, (jj)".

In line 6400, the new time reduction fluctuation count 1 (initial value) in the WA register is compared with the time reduction fluctuation count 1 (remaining count) stored in the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1")
)) The code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)" corresponds to "CP
rr, (jj+d)" (fourth comparison instruction) and is used for various judgments.
This allows for an appropriate determination of the magnitude relationship regarding the number of time-saving fluctuations (number of games) that need to be read directly from the area. If the new time-saving fluctuation number 1 (initial value) is less than the time-saving fluctuation number 1 (remaining number of times), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1, JF=1(T)). If the new time-saving fluctuation number 1 (initial value) is equal to or greater than the time-saving fluctuation number 1 (remaining number of times), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF=0, JF=0(F)).

In line 6410, if the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) is equal to or greater than the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count) (in the case of F), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to the label TDISPLY100, and the instructions from line 6480 onwards are executed (code "JRR F, TD
ISPLY100). If the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) is less than the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count), the process proceeds to the instruction at the next line number 6420.

At line number 6420, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY120, and the instructions from line number 6550 onwards are executed (code "JR TDISPLY120").
").

In line 6440, the new time reduction variation count 2 (initial value) stored in the area of the addition address "HL+2" is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL+2)").
).

In line 6450, the new time reduction fluctuation count 2 (initial value) in the WA register is compared with the time reduction fluctuation count 2 (remaining count) stored in the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT2")
If the new time reduction change count 2 (initial value) is less than the time reduction change count 2 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (
CF=1, JF=1 (T)). If the new time reduction change count 2 (initial value) is equal to or greater than the time reduction change count 2 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set.
F) is not set (CF=0, JF=0(F)).

In line 6460, if the new time reduction change count 2 (initial value) is less than the time reduction change count 2 (remaining count) (in the case of T), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to the label TDISPLY120, and the instructions from line 6550 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, TD
ISPLY120”).

In line 6480, the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (HL register value) set in line 6350 is transferred to the WA register, and the address stored in the HL register after the transfer is incremented by 2 (code "LD WA, (HL+
")"). The code "LD WA, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD ss, (jj+)" in the instruction table.
" corresponds to

In line number 6490, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCN
The new time reduction fluctuation count 1 (initial value) of the WA register is transferred to the
LD (IY+R_JTNCNT1), WA). Note that the code "LD (IY+R_J
TNCNT1), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj+d), ss" in the command table. In this way, when a support hit occurs, if the new time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the current remaining number of time reductions, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 is updated to the new time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the initial value. On the other hand, if the new time reduction fluctuation count 1 is less than the current time reduction fluctuation count 1, it is not updated. This prevents the time reduction fluctuation count 1 from suddenly decreasing.

In line 6500, the new time reduction variation count 2 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (value of the HL register) updated in line 6480 is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

In line number 6510, the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCN
The new time reduction fluctuation count 2 (initial value) of the WA register is transferred to the
LD (IY+R_JTNCNT2), WA"). In this way, when a support hit occurs, if the new time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the current remaining number of time-savings, the time-saving fluctuation count 2 is updated to the new time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the initial value, and on the other hand, if the new time-saving fluctuation count 2 is less than the current time-saving fluctuation count 2, it is not updated. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving fluctuation count 2 from suddenly decreasing.

In line number 6530, in response to A5127 of the special chart normal processing, a subroutine for the support operation setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_SAPSET").

In line number 6550, in response to A5128 of the special chart normal processing, a special chart normal processing transition setting process (code "CALLR P_TUSUL_SET") is performed.

At line number 6560, the special drawing display processing program returns (code "RET"
).

In this embodiment, unlike A5126 in FIG. 36B, even if a support hit occurs, under certain circumstances, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area are not updated to their initial values. Specifically, if the time reduction fluctuation count 2 as the remaining number is smaller than the time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the remaining number, and further, if the new time reduction fluctuation count 2 as the initial value is smaller than the time reduction fluctuation count 2 as the remaining number, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area are not updated to their initial values, and the support operation setting process is not executed (A5126 and A5127 are not executed). In this way, when the time reduction fluctuation count 2 as the remaining number is smaller than the time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the remaining number (for example, in the case of high support), since the special chart 2 fluctuation display game is executed as the main fluctuation display game during the time reduction, the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 2 and the remaining number are compared, and the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area are updated to their initial values.
It is appropriate to determine whether to update the region to its initial value.

Specifically, even if a support hit occurs, if the remaining number of time-saving fluctuations 1 is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving fluctuations 2, and if the new initial value of the time-saving fluctuations 1 is smaller than the remaining number of time-saving fluctuations 1, the time-saving fluctuations 1 area and the time-saving fluctuations 2 area are not updated to their initial values, and the support operation setting process is not executed (A5126 and A5127 are not executed). In this way, when the remaining number of time-saving fluctuations 1 is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving fluctuations 2 (for example, in the case of a medium support), the special chart 1 fluctuation display game is executed as the main fluctuation display game during the time-saving, so it is appropriate to compare the initial value of the time-saving fluctuations 1 with the remaining number and determine whether to update the time-saving fluctuations 1 area and the time-saving fluctuations 2 area to their initial values.

In order to reduce the program capacity and simplify the control, line numbers 6360, 6370, and 63
By eliminating the instructions 80 and 6420, it is not necessary to compare the remaining number of time reduction fluctuations 1 with the remaining number of time reduction fluctuations 2. As a result, if the new time reduction fluctuation number 1 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the current remaining number of time reduction fluctuations 1,
Alternatively, if the new time-shortening variation count 2 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the time-shortening variation count 2 as the current remaining number of time-shortening times, the time-shortening variation count 1 area and the time-shortening variation count 2 area will be updated to their initial values.

In addition, to reduce the program capacity and simplify the control, line numbers 6360, 6370, and 63
Remove the command 80 and change the code on line number 6410 to "JRR F,TDISPLAY9
0" and the jump destination may be the address in ROM corresponding to TDISPLY90. As a result, if the new time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the time reduction fluctuation count 1 as the current remaining number of time reductions, and if the new time reduction fluctuation count 2 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the time reduction fluctuation count 2 as the current remaining number of time reductions, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area will be updated to their initial values. In this way, it is possible to prevent a sudden decrease in both the time reduction fluctuation count 1 and the time reduction fluctuation count 2.

[Starting gate signal editing processing program]
134 is a program list showing the program structure of a start gate signal editing processing program corresponding to the start gate signal editing processing (A9324) according to the fifth embodiment. The start gate signal editing processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SIDOINF, and is a subroutine called in step A9324 of the external information editing processing.

On line 7010, the values of the W registers are exclusive ORed together to obtain
Clear the value of the W register and set it to 0 (off data) (code "XOR W, W
").

In line 7020, the lower byte (R_S
Transfer the value of R_SIDOSIG+1 to the E register (code "LD E,R_SIDOSIG+1"
1). The value of the DE register is the address of the start port signal output control timer area.

In line number 7030, if the value of the start port signal output control timer, which is the value of the start port signal output control timer area, is not 0, a subroutine is called and executed to update it by -1 (code "CALL
The subroutine that is the processing program for this -1 update process (countdown) is the nth subroutine in the vector table (n=label P_DECBYTE).
This subroutine stores the value of the start port signal output control timer after updating by -1 in the A register.

In line 7040, when the start port signal output control timer is 0 (T, ZF=JF=1
), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF10, and go to line number 70
Execute the instructions from line 90 onwards (code "JRR T, SIDOINF10"). If the start port signal output control timer is not 0, proceed to the instruction at the next line number 7050.

In line 7050, the value of the start port signal output control timer in register A is set to a predetermined value (64/
T+1) (code "CP A, 64/T+1"). Here, T is 4, which corresponds to the timer interrupt period (4 msec). Therefore, the predetermined value (64/T+1) is 17. The code "CP A, 64/T+1" is compared with "CP p, n" (
The countdown processing program (subroutine P
If the value of the start port signal output control timer is updated and stored in register A, this code allows the start port signal output control timer to be properly compared with a predetermined value. If the start port signal output control timer is less than the predetermined value,
The carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1
, JF=1(T)). When the start port signal output control timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF=0, JF=0(
F)).

In line 7060, if the start port signal output control timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (ON timing) and the jump status flag (JF) is not set (JF=0, F), a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOINF20, and line 71
Execute instructions from 60 onwards (code "JRR F, SIDOINF20").

At line number 7070, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF30, and the instructions from line number 7180 onwards are executed (code "JR SIDOINF30").
.

On line number 7090, the value of the DE register is decremented by 1 to obtain the address of the start port signal output count area (code "DEC DE").

In line 7100, the value of the start gate signal output count field (start gate signal output count) of the address currently specified in the DE register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (DE)
").

In line number 7110, if the number of times the start signal is output is "0" because there is no output request (if ZF=JF=0, in the case of T), the ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF30
Jump to the address in the program and execute the instructions from line number 7180 onwards (code "JRR T
,SIDOINF30'').

In line number 7120, the start port signal output count is decreased by 1 and updated by -1 (code "D
EC (DE)).

On line number 7130, the value of the DE register is incremented by 1 to obtain the address of the start port signal output control timer area (code "INC DE").

In line 7140, the initial value (128/T+64/T) is transferred to the start gate signal output control timer area of the address currently specified by the DE register (code "LD (DE), 12
The initial value (128/T+64/T) is 48.

At line number 7160, the on data of the start gate signal (value of label C_SIDO_INF) is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, C_SIDO_INF").

In line 7180, the ON or OFF data of the start gate signal is transferred as the value of the W register to the external information output data area (addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG+2") (code "LD (IY+R_SIDOSIG+2), W"). As a result, the ON or OFF data of the start gate signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device (such as a hall computer).

At line number 7190, the start gate signal editing processing program returns (code "RE
T").

By the above start gate signal editing processing program, unless the start gate signal output count becomes zero, the initial value is set to the start gate signal output control timer, and the initial value (128/T + 64/T)
During the on timing from when the value of the start gate signal reaches a predetermined value (64/T+1), on data of the start gate signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device (such as a hall computer).

[Safety device related processing program]
135 is a program listing showing the program structure of a safety device-related processing program corresponding to the safety device-related processing (FIG. 56) according to the fifth embodiment. The safety device-related processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SAFSET, and is a subroutine called by the CALLR instruction (line number 1190) in step A1314 of the timer interrupt processing.

Line numbers 7510 and 7520 correspond to A9401 of the safety device related processing. In line number 7510, the safety device operation flag in the safety device operation flag area (addition address "IY+R_SAFFLG") included in the in-area work area is compared with the value (label C_SAFON) indicating that the safety device is in operation (code "CPJ (IY+R_SAFF
If the safety device activation flag indicates that the safety device is activated and the comparison result is a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF=1), and if the comparison result is not a match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF=0).

At line number 7520, if the safety device activation flag indicates that the safety device is activated and the comparison result is a match (Z), the subroutine ends and the process returns from the safety device-related processing program (code "RET Z").

Line numbers 7530 to 7550 correspond to A9402 and A9403 of the safety device related processing. In line number 7530, the safety device activation information and the previous activation information are transferred to the WA register from a 2-byte area (having the top address of the label R_SAFINF1) included in the external work area and including the safety device activation information area and the previous activation information area (code "LD WA
, (R_SAFINF1))). The old operation information is transferred to the W register, and the safety device operation information is transferred to the A register.
" corresponds to "LD ss, (vw)" in the instruction table.

In line 7540, the safety device operation information in the A register is compared with the old operation information in the W register (code "CPJ A, W"). The code "CPJ A, W" is the same as "C" in the instruction table.
PJ r, g". If the safety device operation information is the same value as the old operation information and remains unchanged, and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison results in a mismatch, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line 7550, if the safety device operation information is the same as the old operation information and the jump status flag (JF) is set (JF=1, T), the label SAFS
The program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to ET10 and executes the instructions from line number 7640 onwards (code "JRR T, SAFSET10"). If the safety device activation information has changed and is no longer the same value as the old activation information, the program proceeds to the next instruction at line number 7560.

In line number 7560, in response to A9404 of the safety device related processing, the address of the safety device operation related command table that associates safety device operation information with commands (label D_SAF
COM) is set to the relative address "D_SAFCOM-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_SAFCOM-5000H").

On line number 7570, in response to A9405 of the safety device related processing, a subroutine for 1 byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_GETBYTE"
). As a result, the value of the safety device activation information in the A register is added to the address of the safety device activation-related command table in the HL register, and the value stored in the address area specified in the HL register after the addition is transferred to the A register. Therefore, the command (ACTION portion) obtained from the safety device activation-related command table corresponding to the safety device activation information is stored in the A register.

Line numbers 7580 and 7590 correspond to A9406 of the safety device related processing. In line number 7580, the command (ACTION part) of the A register is compared with a value (label C_NONCOM) indicating no command definition (code "CPJ A, C_NONCOM"
If the command (ACTION section) has no command definition and the comparison result is a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF=1 and JF=1), and if the comparison result is a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).
=0).

In line 7590, if the safety device operation information does not have a command definition and the jump status flag (JF) is set (JF=1, T), the label SAFSE
A jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to T10, and the instructions from line number 7640 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, SAFSET10").

At line number 7600, the command (ACTION portion) in the A register is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, A").

In line number 7610, in response to A9407 of the safety device related processing, a safety device operation related command (MODE part) is prepared as a performance command.
MODE part) value (label C_SAFMD) is transferred to the B register (code "LD B
, C_SAFMD”).

At line number 7620, in response to A9408 of the safety device related processing, a subroutine of the performance command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET").
The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B register and the C register.

Line numbers 7640 and 7650 correspond to A9409 of the safety device related processing. In line number 7640, the safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is compared with the safety device operation information (value 3) of label C_SAFSADO (code "
CPJ (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO). Note that the code "CPJ (
R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO) is "CPJ (vw), n" in the instruction table
If the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) and the comparison result is a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF=1), and if the comparison result is a mismatch, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF=0).

At line number 7650, if the safety device operation information is not safety device operation information (value 3) and the zero flag (ZF) is not set (in the case of NZ), the safety device related processing program returns (code "RET NZ").

On line number 7660, in response to A9410 of the safety device related processing, a value indicating that the safety device is in operation (label C_SAFON, for example, "1") is transferred to the safety device operation flag area (addition address "IY+R_SAFFLG") and saved as the safety device operation flag (code "LD (IY+R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON").

At line number 7670, the safety device related processing program returns (code "RET
").

As described above, in FIGS. 123 to 135, the in-area program (first program) allocated in the first ROM area (first program storage area) in the address space has been described.
In the program inside the area, a specific CALL instruction (first call instruction, specific call instruction) with a 4-byte length, in which the address of the callee is specified by the literal mn, appears to call an outside program at three locations: line number 0620, line number 0710, and line number 1280. The number of times that a specific CALL instruction appears in the program inside the area is determined by the number of times that a specific CALL instruction appears in the program outside the area (
136 to 139), the number of occurrences of a specific CALL instruction is less than the number of occurrences (four or more).

In this way, the specific CALL instruction has a large word length of 4 bytes, so it is stored in the first ROM area (the area of the program in the area, the first program storage area) with a small address, and in the second ROM
The first ROM area is used less than the area for out-of-area programs, the second program storage area. This allows for more space in the first ROM area, improving the efficiency of developing the game control program, which is the in-area program.

In addition, a subroutine can be called from a predetermined processing program that is part of the program in the area by either a CALLR instruction (second call instruction) or a CALLT instruction (third call instruction). In the subroutine, a JRR instruction (a predetermined branch instruction,
At least a second branch instruction (JRR instruction) is executed. A JRR instruction does not branch to another subroutine called from a specific processing program. In this way, the boundary between one subroutine and another subroutine is clearly defined, improving the efficiency of program development.

An example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine is a combination of a timer interrupt processing program and a special game processing program, where the JRR command (line number 1560) of the special game processing program does not branch into the special game processing program or the regular game processing program, which are other subroutines of the timer interrupt processing program. Another example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine is a combination of a special game start switch common processing program and a special game hold information determination processing program, where the JRR command (line number 4220) of the special game hold information determination processing program does not branch into the effect command setting processing program (P_COMSET), which is another subroutine of the special game start switch common processing program. Another example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine is a combination of a special game hold information determination processing program and a jackpot determination processing program, where the JRR command (line numbers 4560 and 4580) of the jackpot determination processing program does not branch into the special game status check processing program, which is another subroutine of the special game hold information determination processing program.

[Out-of-area integrated processing program]
136 is a program listing showing the program structure of an outside-area integration processing program corresponding to the outside-area integration processing (FIG. 121) according to the fifth embodiment. The outside-area integration processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_OUTAREA, and is a subroutine called by the CALL instruction (line number 1280) in step A1322 of the timer interrupt processing.

At line number 8010, in response to A9501 of the out-of-area integration process, the value of the stack pointer in the SP register is stored in the stack pointer storage area (label R_ESTC) of the out-of-area work area.
The code "LD (R_ESTCKPT), SP" is the same as "LD (vw), s" in the instruction table.
corresponds to "s".

In line 8020, in response to A9502 of the out-of-area integration process, the top address value (label C_S_STKTOP) indicating the top of the out-of-area stack area is transferred to the stack pointer of the SP register as the value of the out-of-area stack area (code "LD SP, C_S_STKTOP").
TKTOP). The final address (maximum address) of the external stack area is the top address (start address), and the external stack area ranges from the maximum address to the minimum address.

Line numbers 8030 to 8060 correspond to A9503 of the outside-area integration process. In line number 8030, to select register bank 0, a value "0" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of the flag register 1200 (code "LD RBS
, 0").

In line 8040, the values of all the general-purpose registers in register bank 0 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) are pushed to the external stack area (the code "PUSH WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").
Y").

In line 8050, to select register bank 1, a value "1" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of the flag register 1200 (code "LD
RBS, 1").

In line 8060, the values of all the general-purpose registers in register bank 1 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) are pushed to the external stack area (the code "PUSH WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").
Y").

In line numbers 8070 to 8100, there are test signal output processing (A10001),
The subroutines (out-of-area programs) corresponding to the performance display device control process (A9504), the ball difference confirmation process (A9505), and the safety device operation monitoring process (A9506) are called and executed. The call is executed by a specific CALL instruction (first call instruction) of 4 bytes in length, in which the address of the called subroutine is specified by the direct value mn (label) (code "CA
LL P_SOUTPUT” “CALL P_SHYMT” “CALL P_DEFCH
K""CALLP_SAFCHK").

Regarding the call of the test signal output process, a specific CALL instruction (1 byte length) or a CALLR instruction (2 or 3 bytes length) that can call a subroutine at any address is used instead of using a CALL instruction (1 byte length) or a CALLR instruction (2 or 3 bytes length) that has a smaller number of cycles or word length than the specific CALL instruction.
This allows for versatility in calling the test signal output process, independent of the address of the test signal output process program, and makes it easy for developers to understand.

Lines 8110 to 8130 correspond to A9507 of the out-of-area integration process, and restore the saved registers. In line 8110, all the general-purpose registers in register bank 1 (
The values of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are restored (POP) from the external stack area (code "POP WA, BC,
DE, HL, IX, IY”).

In line 8120, to select register bank 0, the value "0" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of the flag register 1200 (code "LD
RBS,0").

In line 8130, the values of all the general-purpose registers in register bank 0 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) are restored (POP) from the external stack area (code "POP WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").
").

At line number 8140, in response to A9508 of the out-of-area integration process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer storage area (address of label R_ESTCKPT) of the out-of-area work area is transferred to the SP register (code "LD SP, (R_ESTCKPT
T)).

At line number 8150, the outside area integration processing program returns (code "RET"
).

The above has been described about the out-of-area integration processing program. However, as subroutines called from the out-of-area integration processing program, subroutines corresponding to the test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, difference ball confirmation processing, and safety device operation monitoring processing are stored in the second ROM in the address space.
These are out-of-area programs placed in the area. When these subroutines contained in the out-of-area programs are called from the out-of-area integration processing program contained in the out-of-area programs, only a specific CALL instruction is used, without using the CALLT and CALLR instructions, to distinguish them from calls to subroutines contained in the in-area programs. This improves the efficiency of program development.

Furthermore, even if a subroutine included in a program within the domain is called from a program outside the domain, the program outside the domain can be distinguished from the program within the domain by using only the CALL instruction in the program outside the domain and not using any other calling instructions.
Program development efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, even when a subroutine included in an outside program is called from a subroutine (part of an outside program) corresponding to test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, difference ball confirmation processing, or safety device operation monitoring processing, the calling of a subroutine included in an inside program can be distinguished from calling a subroutine included in an inside program by using only the CALL instruction, without using the CALLT instruction and the CALLR instruction, thereby improving program development efficiency.

[Test signal output processing program]
137 is a program list showing the program structure of a test signal output processing program corresponding to the test signal output processing (FIG. 122) according to the fifth embodiment. The test signal output processing program has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SOUTPUT, and executes a CALL command (line number 807) in step A10001 of the outside area integration processing (FIG. 121).
0) and is included in the out-of-domain program.

Line numbers 8510 to 8560 are A10101 and A1010 for test signal output processing.
2. In line 8510, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+0" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SKNBF+0)").
The code "LD A, (R_SKNBF+0)" corresponds to "LD s, (vw)" in the instruction table.

In line 8520, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+1" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+1)”).

In line 8530, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+2" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+2)”).

In line 8540, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+3" is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (R_SKNBF+3)").
W, (R_SKNBF+3) corresponds to "LD t, (vw)" in the instruction table.

In line 8550, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+4" and the value of the W register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the W register (code "OR
W, (R_SKNBF+4)”).

In line 8560, the value in the WA register is output to port C_OUT05 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to the label C_OUT05) (code "OUTW (C_OUT
T05), WA). This causes WA to be connected to test terminal output ports 1 and 2 on the relay board 70.
The value in the register is printed.

Line numbers 8570 to 8620 are A10103 and A1010 for test signal output processing.
4. In line 8570, the value stored in the area of address "R_TZ1STP" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_TZ1STP)").
The "R_TZ1STP" area stores the bit signal of the pattern data of Special Chart 1.

In line 8580, the value stored in the area of address "R_T1HENSKN" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "O
RA, (R_T1HENSKN)). In the area of the address "R_T1HENSKN", a special symbol 1 changing signal, which is a signal regarding the start of the special symbol 1 changing display game, is stored.

In line 8590, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+5" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+5)'').

In line 8600, the value stored in the area of address "R_TZ2STP" is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (R_TZ2STP)").
The "TP" area stores the bit signal of the pattern data of Special Chart 2.

In line 8610, the value stored in the area of address "R_T2HENSKN" and the value of the W register are ORed together and stored in the W register (code "O
R_W, (R_T2HENSKN)). In the area of the address "R_T2HENSKN", a special symbol 2 changing signal, which is a signal regarding the start of the special symbol 2 changing display game, is stored.

In line 8620, the value in the WA register is output to port C_OUT07 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to the label C_OUT07) (code "OUTW (C_OUT
T07), WA). This causes WA to be input to the test terminal output ports 3 and 4 on the relay board 70.
The value in the register is printed.

Line numbers 8630 to 8660 correspond to A10105 of the test signal output process.
In line number 8630, the value stored in the area of address "R_FZSTP" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_FZSTP)"). The area of address "R_FZSTP" stores the bit signal of the regular pattern data.

In line 8640, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+6" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+6)”).

In line 8650, the value stored in the area of address "R_SKNBF+7" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+7)'').

In line 8660, the value in the A register is output to port C_OUT09 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to the label C_OUT09) (code "OUT (C_OUT0
9), A"). This causes the value of the A register to be output to the test terminal output port 5.

At line number 8670, the test signal output processing program returns (the code "RET
").

[Difference ball confirmation processing program]
138 is a program list showing the program structure of a part of the difference ball confirmation processing program corresponding to the difference ball confirmation processing (FIG. 59) according to the fifth embodiment. The difference ball confirmation processing program has a leading address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_DEFCHK, and is a subroutine called by the CALL command (line number 8090) in step A9505 of the outside area integration processing (FIG. 121), and is included in the outside area program.

Line numbers 9010 and 9020 correspond to A9701 of the difference ball confirmation process.
In 010, the safety device operation flag area (address R_SA
FFLG) to a value (label C) indicating that the safety device is in operation.
_SAFON) (code "CPJ (R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON"
). The address of the safety device operation flag area is shown as an absolute address in the out-of-area program (here, the difference ball confirmation processing program), unlike the in-area program, without using the offset value d (relative address). This increases the independence of the out-of-area program, making it easier to use the out-of-area program in common with various gaming machines, and increasing versatility.
If the safety device activation flag indicates that the safety device is activated and the comparison result is a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1), and if the comparison result is not a match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0).

In line number 9020, if the comparison result of line number 7510 is a match (Z) (i.e., if the safety device is activated), the subroutine is terminated and the program returns from the difference ball confirmation processing program (code "RET Z").

Line numbers 9030 and 9040 correspond to A9702 of the difference ball confirmation process.
In step 030, the value of the old operation information stored in the old operation information area (address R_SAFINF2) is compared with the value (2) of the label C_SAFWRN (code "CP (R_SAFIN
F2), C_SAFWRN"). If the value of the previous operation information is 2 or more, the carry flag (
If the carry flag (C CF) is not set (NC, CF=0) and is less than 2,
F) is set (CF=1).

In line number 9040, if the value of the old operation information is 2 or more and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the program returns from the difference ball confirmation processing program (code "RET"
If the value of the old operation information is less than 2 and the carry flag (CF) is set, the process moves to the instruction at the next line number 9050.

Line numbers 9050 and 9060 correspond to A9703 of the difference ball confirmation process.
In step 050, the rising edge information of the out ball detection switch 74 is obtained from the address "R_SWCTL4+2" and the switch bit data (determination value) corresponding to the label C_OUTSW is stored.
and to determine whether the switch is turned on (code "TEST (
R_SWCTL4+2), C_OUTSW). The area at address "R_SWCTL4+2" stores rising information from the switch control area that stores information about the out ball detection switch 74.

When no game ball passes and the out ball detection switch 74 is off (when no game ball is detected), the rising edge information (target bit) corresponding to the out ball detection switch 74 is zero, the calculation result (logical product) is zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising edge information is the same as the switch bit data (determination value) (for example, "00001000"
When the switch bit is turned on in "B", the operation result (logical AND) is non-zero (for example,
"00001000B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set.

In line 9060, if the out ball detection switch 74 is off and the zero flag (ZF) is set, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to the label DEFCHK10, and the instructions from line 9150 onwards are executed (code "JR Z, DEFCHK10").
If a gaming ball passes and the out ball detection switch 74 is on (if a gaming ball is detected), the process moves to the next command in line number 9070.

Line numbers 9070 to 9130 correspond to A9704 and A9705 of the difference ball confirmation process. In line number 9070, the lower two bytes of the safety device counter value stored in the safety device counter area (address R_SAFCNT) are transferred to the HL register (code "LD H
L, (R_SAFCNT)"). As mentioned above, the safety device counter area is a 3-byte area (3-byte size), and the safety device counter value consists of the lower 2 bytes and the upper 1 byte. The start address of the lower 2 bytes is the value of the label R_SAFCNT, and the start address of the upper 1 byte is R_SAFCNT+2.

At line number 9080, the most significant byte of the safety device counter value is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SAFCNT+2)").

On line number 9090, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lowest 2 bytes of the safety device counter value (value of the HL register) to update it by -1 (code "SUB HL, 1").

In line 9100, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the borrow caused by the subtraction of the lower two bytes is subtracted from the value of the upper byte (value of the A register) (code "SBC A,0
").

In line 9110, the result of the subtraction in line 9100 is negative and the carry flag is "1".
If (CF=1), that is, if the safety device counter value becomes negative (if it reached the lower limit "0" before updating by -1), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label DEFCHK10 and execute the instructions from line number 9150 onwards (code "JR C, DEF
If the safety device counter value is not negative, the process proceeds to the next instruction at line number 9120.

In line number 9120, the updated value of the lower two bytes (value of the HL register) is transferred to the lower two bytes of the safety device counter area and returned (code "LD (R_SAFCNT)
,HL").

In line number 9130, the value of the most significant byte after updating (value of A register) is transferred to the most significant byte of the safety device counter area and returned (code "LD (R_SAFCNT+2
), A").

[Safety device operation monitoring processing program]
139 is a program list showing the program structure of a safety device activation monitoring processing program corresponding to the safety device activation monitoring processing (FIG. 60) according to the fifth embodiment. The program for the safety device activation monitoring processing starts at the start address (in the ROM) corresponding to the label P_SAFCHK.
In step A9506 of the outside-area integration process, a CALL command (line number 8100) is executed.
is a subroutine called by and is contained in an out-of-domain program.

Line numbers 9510 and 9520 correspond to A9801 of the safety device operation monitoring process.
At line number 9510, the value of the safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is compared with the value (2) of the label C_SAFWRN (code "CP (R_
SAFINF1), C_SAFWRN). If the value of the safety device operation information is 2 or more,
If the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF=0) and is less than 2, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1).

At line number 9520, if the value of the safety device operation information is less than 2 and the carry flag (CF) is set (C), the process returns from the safety device operation monitoring processing program (code "RET C").

Line numbers 9530 to 9560 correspond to A9802 of the safety device operation monitoring process. In line number 9530, the area (R
The special game processing number stored in the AM) and the label C_TS indicating that it is a small win
The value of FAN is compared (code "CP (R_TGAME), C_TSFAN"). The value of the label C_TSFAN is the special game processing number "3" of the small win opening pre-processing.
Unlike the program inside the area, the address of the special game processing number area is shown as an absolute address in the program outside the area (here, the safety device operation monitoring processing program), and does not use the offset value d (relative address). This increases the independence of the program outside the area, making it easier to use the program outside the area in common with various gaming machines and increasing versatility. If there is a small win and the special game processing number is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), and if there is no small win and the number is less than 3, the carry flag (CF) is set (NC, CF = 0).
F) is set (CF=1).

In line number 9540, if there is a small win and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), the safety device operation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET NC"). If there is no small win and the carry flag (CF) is set, the program moves to the instruction in the next line number 9550.

In line number 9550, the area (R
AM) and the label C_YF indicating that a jackpot is being won.
Compare the values of AN (code "CP (R_YGAME), C_YFAN"). Label C
The value of _YFAN is the special game processing number "1" for fanfare processing. Note that the address of the special game processing number area is shown as an absolute address in the program outside the area (here, the safety device operation monitoring processing program), unlike the program inside the area, without using the offset value d (relative address). This increases the independence of the program outside the area,
This makes it easier to use the out-of-area program in common with various gaming machines, increasing its versatility. If there is a jackpot and the bonus game processing number is 1 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), and if there is no jackpot and the bonus game processing number is less than 1, the carry flag (CF
) is set (CF=1).

In line number 9560, if there is a jackpot and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), the safety device operation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET NC"). If there is no jackpot and the carry flag (CF) is set, the program proceeds to the instruction in the next line number 9570.

Line numbers 9570 and 9580 correspond to A9803 of the safety device operation monitoring process.
At line number 9570, the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SAFINF1)").

In line number 9580, the safety device operation information in register A is stored in the old operation information area (address R
_SAFINF2) (code "LD (R_SAFINF2), A").

In line number 9590, in response to A9804 of the safety device operation monitoring process, the safety device operation information (value 3) with label C_SAFSADO is transferred to the safety device operation information area (address R_SAFINF1) (code "LD (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO").
").

At line number 9600, the safety device operation monitoring processing program returns (code "R
ET").

As described above, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the out-of-area program (second program) allocated in the second ROM area (second program storage area) within the address space has been described.
In an out-of-area program, the address of the callee is specified by the literal mn.
The ALL command is in the four lines 8070, 8080, 8090, and 8100.
Of course, the specific CALL instruction may appear in more than four places in the program outside the region. In this way, the number of times (four or more) that the specific CALL instruction (first call instruction, specific call instruction) appears in the program outside the region is the same as the number of times (three) that the specific CALL instruction appears in the program inside the region (FIGS. 123 to 135).
As described above, the word length of a particular CALL instruction is as large as 4 bytes, so the first R
A second ROM area (second ROM area) having a larger address than the ROM area (first program storage area)
This is often used in the external program memory area (ROM area). This allows for ample capacity in the first ROM area, improving the development efficiency of the game control program, which is an internal program. Also, by using only specific CALL commands in the external program, which can call a subroutine at any address without being affected by the location of various processing programs (program modules) in the address space, it becomes easier to share external programs between different models of gaming machines, improving the development efficiency of the program.

As shown in FIG. 109, the second ROM area is located on the side of the larger address.
Because there is a large unused area between the area and the program management area, certain CAs with long word lengths
There is no problem even if many LL instructions are used. Also, when a call is made to a subroutine in the second ROM area with a high address, it may be difficult to use a command such as CALLR, which has an upper limit on the address of the called subroutine.

In addition, the out-of-area program described in Figures 136 to 139, the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines (e.g., test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, difference ball confirmation processing, safety device activation monitoring processing) are subroutines called by the CALL instruction (e.g., line number 1280, line numbers 8070-8100). In these subroutines, the JRR instruction (second branch instruction) whose branch condition includes a condition related to the state of the jump status flag is not executed, and the JR instruction (first branch instruction) whose branch condition does not include a condition related to the state of the jump status flag is executed. In the example program list, the JR instruction is executed in the difference ball confirmation processing (line numbers 9060 and 9110), but the JR instruction may also be executed in the out-of-area integration processing program itself, the performance display device control processing, etc.

The meaning of the jump status flag changes depending on the situation, sometimes matching the zero flag and sometimes matching the carry flag, depending on the instruction used. However, the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines called by this CALL instruction do not use the JRR instruction, which includes a branch condition related to the state of the jump status flag, making them easier to understand when viewed by multiple developers. This makes it easier to share the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines across multiple models, improving program development efficiency. Furthermore, it is easier to distinguish between subroutines called by the CALL instruction and subroutines called by other call instructions (e.g., the CALLR instruction) by whether only the JR instruction is present or whether JR and JRR instructions are mixed, improving program development efficiency.

[Instructions from the CPU of the performance control device]
140 is an instruction table illustrating comparison instructions from a set of instructions (instruction set) that are used in a program and that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit in the CPU 311 of the performance control device 300. A dedicated logic circuit for executing each comparison instruction may be provided in the CPU core (instruction interpretation and execution circuit). Note that in this embodiment, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 may be configured together as a single VDP.

The CPU 311 has 15 4-byte (32-bit) general-purpose registers (R0 to R14).
It has.

The number of cycles of the operating clock required for the CPU 311 of the performance control device 300 to execute the comparison command is one cycle, and the word length (instruction size) of the comparison command is a fixed length of 2 bytes.
The number of cycles is smaller and the word length is shorter than the executable comparison command of 111a, making it simpler. Also, because it is a fixed length, the CPU 311 does not need time to determine the instruction length, and the time required to execute the processing corresponding to the rendering command is short. Because the number of cycles is one, the comparison command can be executed quickly, and the time required to execute the processing corresponding to the rendering command is short.

In the comparison command executable by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, the flag register 12
The six flags (JF, ZF, CF, HF, SF, VF) in the second to seventh bits of 00
) can be changed, whereas the comparison instruction executable by the CPU 311 of the performance control device 300 is simplified in that only the TF flag at the 0th bit of the 32-bit flag register can be changed.

The comparison instructions in the instruction table are divided into an "opcode" (or "mnemonic") that indicates the operation (calculation) and an "operand" that is the target of the instruction. There can be multiple "operands" such as a first operand, a second operand, etc.

"CMP/EQ #imm,R0" compares the value of the R0 register with the immediate imm value, and if both values match, the TF flag is set to "1".
"0" is set.

"CMP/EQ Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If both values match, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/HS Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If the value of the Rn register is unsigned (absolute value) and is equal to or greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", and otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/GE Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If the value of the Rn register is signed and is equal to or greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", and otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/HI Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If the value of the Rn register is unsigned (absolute value) and is greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", and otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/GT Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If the value of the Rn register is signed and is greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/PL Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with zero, and if the value of the Rn register is greater than zero, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/PZ Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with zero, and if the value of the Rn register is greater than or equal to zero, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/STR Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register, and if any of the bytes are equal, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

The comparison instructions that can be executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 are different machine language instructions, and include at least 47 types (=
In contrast, the number of executable comparison commands by CPU 311 of performance control device 300 is nine, as listed in the command table (FIG. 140), which is fewer and simpler than that of CPU 111a, making program development easier and simplifying the circuit configuration inside the CPU.

For example, the CPU 311 has only one comparison instruction, "CMP/EQ #imm,R0," that compares an arbitrary immediate value with a register value, which is simpler than the six instructions in the CPU 111a. Also, the CPU 311 does not have a comparison instruction that directly references data (values) stored in memory and compares them with immediate values or register data (values).

Another feature of the program executed by the CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300 is that the program capacity of the safety device processing program corresponding to the safety device processing (B1330) is smaller than the total program capacity of the safety device processing programs (safety device information initialization processing program, safety device related processing program, outside area integration processing program, difference ball confirmation processing program, safety device operation monitoring processing program) executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100. In the safety device processing (B1330) of the presentation control device 300,
This is because it is only necessary to execute the processing related to the display of the operation notice display 511, operation warning display 512, and operation display 513. In this way, most of the processing related to the safety device is executed by the game control device 100, so the burden of processing related to the safety device on the performance control device 300 is reduced.

Conversely, the processing related to the safety device executed by the performance control device 300 may be increased, and the load of the processing related to the safety device executed by the game control device 100 may be reduced.
The program capacity of the safety device processing program executed by the CPU 311 of the performance control device 300 may be larger than the program capacity of the safety device processing program executed by the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 .

[Actions and Effects of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a variable display game), and can award a gaming value to a player depending on the outcome of the game. The gaming control means comprises a program storage means (e.g., a ROM) for storing a program, an arithmetic processing means (e.g., a CPU) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing according to the program, a plurality of registers for storing values when performing arithmetic processing, and an update information storage means (e.g., a RAM) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The plurality of registers include a first register (e.g., a register with a width of 1 byte) and a second register (e.g., a register with a width of 2 bytes: a pair register, an IX register, an IY register) having twice the capacity of the first register. The arithmetic processing means compares the values of different second registers, or calculates the value of the second register.
A first comparison instruction (e.g., "C") that can compare a register value with a direct value and change the carry flag.
a second comparison instruction (e.g., "CPJ p,n" or "CPJ q,n") that compares the value of the first register with a direct value and changes the zero flag;
The first comparison instruction can determine a random number value related to the outcome of the game (e.g., a jackpot random number) (line number 4550 or line number 4570), and the second comparison instruction can determine a flag value corresponding to the outcome of the game (e.g., 6050).

In such a gaming machine 10, when determining a random number value related to a game result, the carry flag can be changed by the first comparison instruction, making it possible to properly determine whether the random number value is larger or smaller than the lower limit judgment value or the upper limit judgment value. When determining a flag value corresponding to a game result, the zero flag can be changed by the second comparison instruction, making it possible to properly determine whether the flag value corresponding to the game result matches a predetermined value. Therefore, by effectively combining the first comparison instruction or the second comparison instruction with a conditional branch instruction executed after the first comparison instruction or the second comparison instruction, programs such as game control programs can be properly configured, and the program capacity (program size) can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate a specific gaming state different from the special gaming state advantageous to the player depending on the result of the game.
A third comparison instruction (e.g., "
CP p,n" and "CP q,n"), and a storage means for storing the value of the first register and update information (for example, R
A fourth comparison instruction (e.g., "CP r, (vw)" and "CP AM") compares the value stored in the
r, (jj + d),""CP rr, (vw),""CP rr, (jj + d)." The third comparison instruction can determine whether the timer value (or counter value) is greater than or less than a predetermined value (for example, line number 7050). The fourth comparison instruction can determine whether the remaining number of games in the specific game state that is currently occurring is greater than or less than the number of games (initial value) in the specific game state that can be newly occurred (for example, line number 6400 or line number 6450). A comparison instruction is not used to determine whether the timer value (or counter value) is zero (for example, determining whether the special game processing timer has timed out (line numbers 1550 and 1560)).

Therefore, the countdown and countup processing programs are updated in common.
The third comparison instruction can be used when determining whether a timer value or counter value (e.g., 1 byte) stored in a register is larger or smaller than a predetermined value. The fourth comparison instruction can also be used when determining whether a game count is larger or smaller and is used for various determinations and needs to be read directly from an area in update information storage means (e.g., RAM). This allows programs such as game control programs to be appropriately configured, reducing program size. Furthermore, the process of determining whether a timer value (or counter value) is zero can be replaced with a process other than a comparison instruction, allowing for flexible program development.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program storage means (for example, ROM) has a first program storage area (for example, first ROM area) and a second program storage area (for example, second ROM area).
The program storage area includes an M area, and an unused area between the first program storage area and the second program storage area. When a first program in the first program storage area (for example, an in-area program) calls a second program in the second program storage area (for example, a subroutine of an out-area integration process included in an out-area program), the calculation processing means executes a first call instruction (for example, a specific CALL instruction in which the address of the call destination is specified by a literal mn, a specific CALL instruction in which the address of the call destination is specified by a 4-byte length
When calling a subroutine from the second program in the second program storage area, the arithmetic processing means uses only the first call instruction (e.g., CALL), and does not use the second call instruction (e.g., CALLR) or the third call instruction (e.g., CALLT), which are smaller in instruction size than the first call instruction.

In such a gaming machine 10, a first call instruction (e.g., a specific CALL instruction) is used when calling a second program from a first program, and since there are no call instructions in the second program other than the first call instruction that call a subroutine, the second program can be distinguished from the first program, thereby improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program storage means (for example, a ROM) includes a first program storage area (for example, a first ROM area) and a second program storage area (for example, a second ROM area).
and an unused area between the first program storage area and the second program storage area. The number of specific call instructions that appear in the program of the first program storage area to call a subroutine (e.g., three) is less than the number of specific call instructions that appear in the program of the second program storage area to call a subroutine (e.g., four or more).

In such a gaming machine 10, a specific call command (e.g., a first call command, a specific CAL
L instruction) is stored in the first ROM area (
This allows for a smaller amount of memory being used in the first program storage area. This improves program development efficiency. In particular, when the word length (instruction size) of a specific call instruction is large, the first ROM area has more capacity to spare, improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (e.g., a CPU) does not use a specific call instruction (e.g., a first call instruction, a specific CALL instruction) that can call a subroutine at any address when calling a process related to game execution (e.g., a special game process, a bonus game process, or a regular game process) (line numbers 1140-1160). The arithmetic processing means does not use a specific call instruction when calling a process related to the output of external information to the outside of the gaming machine (e.g., an external information editing process) (line number 1240). The arithmetic processing means uses a specific call instruction when calling a process related to the output of a test signal related to the gaming machine (e.g., a test signal output process) (line number 8070).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the word length or cycle count of a specific call instruction is large because it can call a subroutine at any address, the specific call instruction is not used to call processing related to game execution or processing related to the output of external information, but is used to call processing related to the output of a test signal. This enables more efficient and faster program processing. Furthermore, when calling processing related to the output of a test signal related to the gaming machine (e.g., test signal output processing), a specific call instruction that can call a subroutine at any address is used. This makes the call of processing related to the output of a test signal versatile and independent of the address of the subroutine related to that processing, and makes it easier for developers to understand.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a first branch instruction (e.g., JR instruction) and a second branch instruction (e.g., JRR instruction) that jump the address of an instruction to be executed in the program storage means, and in a subroutine called by a specific call instruction (e.g., first call instruction, specific CALL instruction), a second branch instruction (
For example, the first branch instruction (e.g., the JRR instruction) is not executed, and the first branch instruction (e.g., the JR instruction) is executed.
The subroutines called by specific call instructions are the out-of-area program, the out-of-area integration process, and its subroutines (e.g., test signal output process, performance display device control process, differential ball confirmation process, safety device operation monitoring process) (line number 1280, line numbers 8070-8100).
.

In such a gaming machine 10, the efficiency of program development is improved. For example, if the branch condition of a second branch instruction (e.g., JRR instruction) includes a condition related to the state of a jump status flag (JF), then if the second branch instruction is not used in a subroutine called by a specific call instruction, the jump status flag, whose meaning changes depending on the situation (may match the zero flag or the carry flag depending on the instruction used), is not referenced, thereby preventing confusion when multiple developers look at the program. Therefore, it becomes easier to share a subroutine called by a specific call instruction across multiple models, improving the efficiency of program development. In addition, if a specific call instruction (e.g., first
It becomes easier to distinguish between a subroutine called by a call instruction (e.g., a specific CALL instruction) and a subroutine called from another call instruction (e.g., a CALLR instruction) by whether only a first branch instruction exists or whether a first branch instruction and a second branch instruction are mixed, thereby improving the efficiency of program development.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a plurality of call instructions (for example, a second call instruction and a third call instruction)
A subroutine can be called from a predetermined processing program (for example, a part of a program within an area) by one of the following commands: a call command, a second branch command (JRR command), and the subroutine executes at least a predetermined branch command (for example, a second branch command (JRR command)), and does not branch to another subroutine called from the predetermined processing program by the predetermined branch command. For example, combinations of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine include a combination of a timer interrupt processing program and a special symbol game processing program, a combination of a special symbol start port switch common processing program and a special symbol hold information determination processing program, and a combination of a special symbol hold information determination processing program and a jackpot determination processing program.

In such a gaming machine 10, the division between one subroutine and another subroutine is clearly defined, thereby improving the efficiency of program development.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program executes the first branch instruction (
The program includes a first subroutine (for example, a special chart normal processing program, a special chart display processing program, a special chart hold information determination processing program) that contains a mixture of a first branch instruction (for example, a JR instruction) and a second branch instruction (for example, a JRR instruction), and a second subroutine (for example, a jackpot determination processing program) that contains only the second branch instruction as a branch instruction. Of the first and second subroutines, the second subroutine has a smaller program capacity.

In such a gaming machine 10, the second subroutine, which has a smaller program capacity (program size) than the first subroutine, contains only the second branch instruction.
When the word length of the second branch instruction is shorter than the word length of the first branch instruction, a program can be designed rationally, improving the efficiency of program development.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the second subroutine (for example, the jackpot determination processing program) is called from multiple processing programs (for example, the special symbol reserve information determination processing program, the jackpot flag 1 setting processing program, and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing program). This reduces the overall capacity (size) of the program.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 141A to 148. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The sixth embodiment is mainly related to the presentation on the display device 41. The presentation in the sixth embodiment can be set by the presentation control device 300, for example, through a predictive variable command process (Figure 66), a variable presentation setting process (Figure 69), a winning command process (Figure 70), or the like.

[Example of a production screen]
141A to 141F are examples (example 1) of screen transition diagrams showing display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment.

In (A), in the normal game state, the mode display 6 corresponding to the normal mode of the presentation mode is
79, "A mode" or the like is displayed. The variation count display 677 indicates the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed after the power is turned on or after the end of a jackpot, and here, for example, "170G" indicates that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed after the power is turned on. Note that, in the case of a machine capable of generating a probability variable state, the variation count display 677 may indicate the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed after the power is turned on or after the end of a jackpot, excluding the number of times in the probability variable state, in order to make it easy to understand that the ceiling number of times is being approached. Furthermore, the variation count display 677 may indicate the number of games remaining until the ceiling (ceiling number of times - number of times executed).

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special symbol 1 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "×" indicating that the special symbol 2 variable display game is stopped. The symbol "○" may be flashed to cause a fourth symbol change as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a, a right pattern 611b, and a middle pattern 611c can be displayed in a variable manner as decorative special patterns (large patterns).
The variable display of c is displayed in the left variable display area 610A, the right variable display area 610B, and the center variable display area 610C in the variable display area 610. In this embodiment, the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the center pattern 611c are displayed by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

At the bottom of the display screen, the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed is displayed.
A first hold display section 630a (waiting area) that displays a hold display (first start memory display, specific image), and a second hold display section 630b that displays the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as a second hold display (second start memory display, specific image) are displayed.
Note that the first start memory and the second start memory have not occurred here, and no first hold display or second hold display is displayed. Also, in the hold consumption area 640, a hold display 682b indicating the hold in progress (the start memory and specific image that were the execution right of this special chart change display game) related to the currently running special chart change display game is displayed in the form of a character's face. Note that the hold consumption area 640 may be indicated by a pedestal.

The special chart 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen respectively display the number "0" indicating the special chart 1 reservation number (special chart 1 start memory number) and the number "0" indicating the special chart 2 reservation number (special chart 2 start memory number).

In (b), after (a), the special chart variable display game (here, the special chart 1 variable display game) results in a small hit or a big hit, and a small hit or big hit pattern is displayed as a decorative stop pattern in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. Here, an example is shown in which the jackpot pattern "3, 3, 3" by pattern A1 is displayed as a decorative stop pattern. The jackpot pattern A1 is the jackpot pattern of the special chart 1 variable display game in a state without normal power support (mainly a jackpot in normal gameplay). In addition, the jackpot pattern A1 is not a jackpot due to a V win, but is a stop pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number. Note that pattern A1 may also be configured as a jackpot stop pattern related to a V win in a small hit in the special chart 1 variable display game.

The pending change display 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are "x". In (b), as in (a), the mode display 679 continues to display "A mode", and the change count display 677 continues to display "170G". In addition, the special chart 1 pending number display section 650 and the special chart 2 pending number display section 660 are "0" and "0", respectively.
continues to be displayed.

Next, (U) is the round play of small or big hits (play during big hits or small hits)
is executed in the first round (ROUND 1). In the case of a round game with a small win, a V win occurs here, and the big win state due to the V win begins from the second round. On the display screen, the round effect is executed using a video or the like. In addition, in response to the opening of the big prize opening, a right hit instruction display 502 is displayed instructing the player to hit to the right. Because the big prize opening is open, a large number of prize balls (number of won balls, number of safe balls) can be obtained by winning into the big prize opening.

After that, in (e), the ending effect of the big win is executed, and the game explanation of the effect (time-saving effect #1, challenge effect) executed in the time-saving mode #1 after the ending effect (the effect mode when the number of time-saving times is ≦ 5 (for example, the number of time-saving times is 4), challenge mode) is displayed on the display screen, for example, "If you can defeat it, you will enter RUSH." In addition, when the ending effect of the small win is executed, the time-saving effect #1 can be executed in the time-saving mode #1 after the ending effect, and the game explanation of the time-saving effect #1 can be displayed during the ending effect. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 502 continues to be displayed during the ending effect. In addition, in the time-saving mode #1
(Challenge mode) may be executed as a presentation mode consisting of a variable display game for four time-saving times, or may be executed as a presentation mode consisting of a variable display game for four time-saving times plus four times after the time-saving state ends (a total of eight times).

Then, in the ending effect (O), following the game explanation of time-saving effect #1 in (E), the game title (effect title, effect name) of time-saving effect #1 is displayed, for example, as "Dragon Battle." In addition to the characters displayed on the display screen, a sound corresponding to the displayed characters can also be output (for example, the sound "Dragon Battle" can be output).

Then, in the ending performance (ka), the right-hit instruction display 502 moves slightly from the upper right corner of the display screen toward the center of the screen. The right-hit instruction display 502 can be displayed at a position to the side of the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) (see FIG. 2) or the passage through which the game ball flows down toward the second start winning opening, so that the arrow instructing the player to hit right points toward the second start winning opening or the passage.

As the right hit instruction display 502 moves, a right hit explanation display 703 that explains the content (intention) of the right hit to the player is displayed, for example, "Aim for the electric chute."
The font of the letters can be displayed gradually smaller from left to right so that the player can easily focus on the right hit instruction display 502 and the second start winning slot.
An effect 704 can also be displayed to draw attention to the passage above the starting winning opening.

Along with the right-hand play instruction display 703, a winning hole image 702 showing the area around the second start winning hole and an emphasis image 701 emphasizing the winning hole image 702 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen. The winning hole image 702 may display an image corresponding to the open state of the movable member (movable piece) 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and the display mode may switch to an image corresponding to the closed or open state in accordance with the rotation of the movable member 37b. The emphasis image 701 may display, for example, an image consisting of a row of multiple arrows pointing at the winning hole image 702 to more easily direct the player's gaze toward the winning hole image 702. Furthermore, to more easily draw attention to the winning hole image 702, the multiple arrows in the emphasis image 701 may be illuminated in sequence toward the winning hole image 702, or the illumination colors of the multiple arrows may change sequentially or gradually (gradationally). After that, the ending performance ends, the time-saving mode #1 (challenge mode) starts, and the display screen transitions to the display mode of (ki) in Figure 141B.

In (K), the time-saving mode #1 is started after the ending performance, and the game ball enters the second start winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) that has been opened by the normal power support, and the first special chart 2 variable display game is executed. The first special chart 2 variable display game in the time-saving mode #1 is executed with a relatively long variable time (for example, 60,300 ms in the case of a win, 40,200 ms in the case of a miss) compared to the second and third special chart 2 variable display games described below. Therefore, while the first special chart 2 variable display game is being executed, it is easy to accumulate (reserve) the second start memory. While the large symbol in the variable display area 610 is hidden, the small symbol is displayed in the variable display area 615, so the player can easily recognize that the variable display game is being executed by checking the small symbol that is displayed. Note that from (K) to FIG. 10
Up to (ha) on 8E is the screen transition in the first special chart 2 variable display game in time-saving mode #1.

The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "◯" indicating that the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "X" indicating that the special chart 1 variable display game is stopped. In addition, there are no waiting special chart 1 reserved numbers (special chart 1 start memory number) or special chart 2 reserved numbers (special chart 2 start memory number), and the number "0" is displayed in the special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right of the display screen. In addition, in response to the first execution of the special chart 2 variable display game, the number of executions of the special chart variable display game after the end of the jackpot is displayed as "1G" in the number of variations display 677.

Also, when the time-saving mode #1 starts at (ki), for example, a preparation image 710 with the words "Preparing for battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen, and "24:30" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.
A timer 708 is displayed that displays a countdown (in seconds: milliseconds) saying "Preparing for battle." The text display of the preparation image 710, "Preparing for battle," is displayed during the first special chart 2 variable display game (the first game during the time reduction).
In response to the pending change related to the first change, only the character display "戦" (single character) is displayed in a bright illuminating mode (highlighted mode). On the other hand, the character display "戦前" is displayed in a dim unlit mode (non-highlighted mode). In the highlighted mode of the preparation image 710, the characters may be displayed larger or bolder than in the non-highlighted mode, or may be displayed in a different color to make them stand out.

At the bottom right of the display screen, a right-hit instruction small window image 706 is displayed, which instructs the player to hit the ball to the right by reducing the display mode of all or part of the display screen just before the ending performance ends. The right-hit instruction small window image 706 is displayed in front of the winning slot image 702 (player side, upper layer).
It can be displayed overlaid on.

(K) is the display state of the display screen when three second start memories are reserved in the first special chart 2 variable display game in time-saving mode #1. The timer 708 in the upper left of the display screen is "2
A countdown of "1:40" is displayed, and the number "3" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 is displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660.

Furthermore, the character display "Preparing for battle" in the preparation image 710 corresponds to the pending change and the three reserved second start memories, and only the character display (four characters) of "Preparing for battle" is displayed in a bright illuminating mode (highlighted mode). On the other hand, the character display "Medium" in the preparation image 710 is displayed in a dim unlit mode (non-highlighted mode). In this way, each time the number of second start memories increases, the display mode of the preparation image 710 is switched to a highlighted mode, one character at a time.

Then, as shown in (K), when four second start memories are reserved in the first special chart 2 variable display game in time-saving mode #1, the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 is displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display unit 660, and all (five characters) of the character display "Preparing for battle" in the preparation image 710 are displayed in a bright luminous state (highlighted state). The number of reserved special charts 2 becomes the maximum number of 4, and the preparation image 7
In response to the fact that all the character displays of the preparation image 7 are in a highlighted state (lighting up completed),
10 may be displayed in flashing (blinking) form to make it more noticeable.
An effect image such as a flame may be added around the timer 70 in the upper left corner of the display screen.
8 becomes "20:11", and the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 is displayed in the reserved special chart number display section 660.
" will be displayed.

Next, in (k), the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen shows "17:82", and three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are displayed side by side on the display screen.
As will be described later in FIG. 144, 713b and 713c can notify the probability of winning by color arrangement. Also, still images or moving images may be displayed in the panels 713a, 713b and 713c (for example, three moving images can be displayed). Also, for example, the panel 713a is displayed in blue, the panel 713b is displayed in green, and the panel 713c is displayed in blue. Also, the panel 713a corresponds to the first special chart 2 variable display game, and the panel 7
Panel 713b corresponds to the second special chart 2 variable display game, and panel 713c corresponds to the third special chart 2 variable display game. Note that these panels 713a to 713c may not correspond to the first to third special chart 2 variable display games.

Furthermore, images (still images or videos) of enemy characters corresponding to the battle effects may be displayed in the panels 713a to 713c, respectively, and the battle effect may develop into a battle effect with the selected enemy character (a selection effect in which an opponent for the battle effect is selected). Furthermore, in the selection effect, an opponent enemy character may be displayed according to the expected probability of winning (expected probability of a big win or expected probability of a small win), and the player may be able to select the opponent by operating the effect button 25, the cross key switch 450, or the like. In this case, panels other than the selected panel (panels not selected) among the panels 713a to 713c may be displayed in a smaller size or may be hidden.

Then, in (sa), the timer 708 in the upper left of the display screen becomes "16:57", and the word "Ready" is displayed in front of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c (front, upper layer). Therefore, the player is informed that the battle preparation is complete, that is, the special drawing 2
This makes it easier for users to recognize that the number of reserved items has reached the maximum of four.

After that, in (i), the timer 708 in the upper left of the display screen becomes "15:59", and the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are hidden, while the word "not yet" is displayed in the center of the display screen. When the word "not yet" is displayed, an effect such as an explosion may be added. In addition, the word "not yet" may be displayed on the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c.
, 713b, and 713c (in the front, upper layer).

Next, in (S) of Fig. 141C, the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen reaches "11:54", and the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are displayed on the display screen again.
From the bottom right, light ball-shaped (or light circle-shaped) effects 716a, 716b, 716c fly towards at least one of the three panels 713a, 713b, 713c, and spread and grow in size (second effect (light ball effect)). In the light ball effect, for example, after reaching the maximum reserved value (here, 4) of the special chart 2, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole (
When the over win occurs, a light sphere effect can be generated.
The occurrence of 716a, 716b, and 716c makes the over-winning more interesting, and the interest in the game increases.
By illuminating D (a part of the board decoration device 46) and generating a light ball effect from the lower right of the display screen, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that a light ball effect of the light ball performance is being generated in response to an over-winning.

In (Se), the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen shows "11:48" and the panel 7 at the right end
A panel change effect (first effect) is executed in which the color of panel 713a-713c changes, for example, from blue to red. The panel change occurs in response to an over-winning win. Therefore, to the player, the light ball effect and the panel change effect appear to be executed consecutively on the right-most panel 713c, which can heighten anticipation for a jackpot and increase the enjoyment of the game. The light ball effect and the text display "Not yet" also function as effects suggesting the occurrence of the subsequent panel change effect. In addition to the color change (e.g., from blue to red), the panel change effect (first effect) may also change the shape, pattern, size, display position, and still or video content of panels 713a-713c.

In addition, by hiding the effect 716a on the leftmost panel 713a and the effect 716b on the center panel 713b, which are not the target of the panel change effect, the rightmost panel 71
The light sphere effect 716c on the screen 3c can be made to stand out, making it easier for the player to see.
The light ball effect 716c becomes more noticeable as it spreads and grows larger over time. Even if an over-winning effect does not occur and the light ball effect is not executed, the panel change effect can be executed as time passes. This increases the interest in the game even if the player does not actively cause an over-winning effect. In addition, when the panel change effect is executed over time and, for example, the rightmost panel 713c changes to red, and when the panel change effect is executed after the light ball effect and, for example, the rightmost panel 713c changes to red, the special chart 2
The degree of expectation that the displayed game will stop resulting in a special result (big win or small win) can be made the same, and the player's expectations for the color red can be unified. Also, in conjunction with the panel change effect, a moving effect can be executed in which a movable member (not shown) is moved to the front side of the display screen (toward the player) and overlapped with the display screen.

Furthermore, even if a weak error (abnormality) such as a shot ball out error or an overflow error occurs, the panel change effect (first effect) can be executed as is after the light ball effect (second effect) occurs. Note that, if a weak error occurs, the panel change effect (first effect) can be executed only if a certain amount of time has passed without the light ball effect (second effect) occurring. In this way, since the panel change effect can be executed even if an error (abnormality) occurs, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game while an error (abnormality) is occurring.

(So), the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen turns red and shows "3:59".
A countdown display 719 of "3" indicating the number of seconds remaining in the countdown is displayed in front of the panels 713a, 713b, and 713c (front, upper layer). The countdown display 719 changes from 3 to 2 to 1 to 0 each time the timer 708 decreases by one second from "3:59."
(4 counts including 0) is displayed for 4 seconds.
As the time decreases by one second, the countdown display 719 may be displayed over three seconds, going from 3 to 2 to 1 (a count of three not including zero).

(T) shows the display mode of the display screen when the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen reaches "0:00." The timer 708 maintains the display of "0:00" for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) not only during the countdown but also after the countdown has ended. By using this mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the timer 708 has reached "0:00."

In (c), the timer 708 is hidden and the ally character 721 (for example, the main character) is displayed large on the display screen. Three hand (gear) icons 723a, 723b, and 723c are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The three hand (gear) icons 723a, 723b, and 723c are in display modes corresponding to the colors of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c displayed in the previous (ta). That is, the icon 723a is blue, the icon 723b is green, and the icon 723c is red. Therefore, the panel change effect determines the display mode of the hand (gear) icons, which can increase the excitement of the game. In addition, the display mode of the panels and the hand (gear) icons are displayed in a similar manner.
Since the display modes of the corresponding icons are the same color, even if the player misses one of the panel and hand (gear) icons, he or she can see the display mode of the other by looking at the other, which is beneficial to the player. Note that, as will be described later in FIG. 144, the winning expectation of the series of variable display games in time-saving mode #1 changes depending on the combination of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c, but the winning expectation of each of the first to third variations during time-saving mode may be notified as a pre-reading effect on each of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c.

(T) shows the display mode of the display screen when the words "Battle START" are displayed in front of the ally character 721. By displaying the words "Battle START" in this way, the player can be notified that the game will progress to a battle performance, and the player's expectations for a big win can be increased.
3c, the small symbols in the variable display area 615, and the right-hit instruction display 502 are "Battle START
" can be displayed in front of the text (in the front, upper layer).

141D (te), a meter 728 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and an enemy character 726 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The meter 728 has, for example, a 40-level meter (gauge, meter scale) and a frame 728d surrounding it. For example, the 40-level meter is displayed with levels 1 to 10 indicated by a red meter 728a, levels 11 to 20 indicated by an orange meter 728b, and levels 21 to 40 indicated by a purple meter 728c.

In (and), the characters 729 "1st ATTACK" are displayed on the display screen. The characters 729 and characters described below may be displayed superimposed on the enemy character 726, for example, or the enemy character 726 may be hidden and only the characters 729 may be displayed independently. Also, an effect may be applied to the surroundings of the characters 729 to emphasize them.

In conjunction with the display of the words "1st ATTACK," an effect (icon movement effect) is executed in which the left (first) hand (gear) icon 723a moves to the center of the display screen.
When the icon movement effect is performed, the moving icons (for example, icons 723a, 723b, 72
3c) may be displayed larger.

In (Na), the word "1st ATTACK" 729 is hidden, and the blue hand (
A blue technique name display 731 of "punch" is displayed corresponding to the gear icon 723a.

In (2), the technique name display 731 "punch" is hidden, and a light gathering effect 733 in which light gathers in the center of the display screen is displayed. For example, an ally character 721 may be displayed behind the light gathering effect 733 (behind the back, lower layer), so that the player perceives the ally character 721 as gathering light.

In (nu), the light gathering effect 733 in the center of the display screen is switched to an effect button image 735a that resembles the effect button 25. A gauge 735b that indicates the effective time for button operation of the effect button 25 is displayed below the effect button image 735a.
The effect button image 735a and the gauge 735b constitute the operation prompt display 735.
In addition to displaying the effect button image 735a and the gauge 735b as the operation prompt display 735, the LED of the effect button 25 may be illuminated to prompt operation.

Furthermore, if the player presses (operates) the effect button 25 within the valid time for button operation (i.e., before the gauge (meter) in the gauge 735b runs out), an operation effect is executed.

The operation performance is a performance related to the operation, and includes the display performance on the display device 41 and the board performance device 44.
The operation effects may include the operation effects of the movable role objects included in the game machine, the light-emitting effects of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the sound effects from the speakers, and a combination of these. In addition, the operation effects include a display including either or both of an operation prompting display 735 (pre-operation effect, pre-operation processing) for prompting the player to perform an operation and an operation-responsive effect 737 (post-operation effect, post-operation processing) that is executed in response to the operation being performed.

In (n), in response to the player pressing (operating) the effect button 25, an operation-responsive effect (cut-in effect) is executed by a cut-in or the like, and an ally support character 737 is displayed on the display screen as an operation-responsive image. The content of the support provided by the support character 737 (operation-responsive effect content, cut-in effect content) can be changed, for example, according to the expected probability of winning, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of a big win. Note that if the player does not operate the effect button 25, the operation-responsive effect may or may not be performed after the valid time for button operation has expired (i.e., after the gauge in the gauge 735 has run out).

Next, in (n) of FIG. 141E, for example, "12 HIT" and the meter reduction number 738 are displayed over the enemy character 726 displayed in the center of the display screen.
In accordance with the number 38, the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also changes from 40 to 28 (12
Therefore, the meter 728 displays a red meter 728a for stages 1 to 9, an orange meter 728b for stages 10 to 20, and a purple meter 728c for stages 21 to 28.

And, at (ha), the first change during the time limit (the first special chart 2 change display game) ends,
The small symbols (decorative miniature symbols) in the variable display area 615 stop changing, and a losing symbol such as "2, 3, 9" is displayed as a decorative stop symbol. The second predetermined image 676 then becomes an "x" symbol, indicating that the special symbol 2 variable display game is stopped. When the time-saving change ends, an ally character 739 is displayed, but an enemy character 726 may also be displayed.

Next, in (hi), the second change during the time reduction (the second special chart 2 change display game) starts, and the small pattern (decorative reduced pattern) in the change display area 615 starts to change. The second special chart 2 change display game has a relatively short change time (small change time,
For example, it is executed in 33,800 ms in the case of a hit, and 13,700 ms in the case of a miss). With the start of the second change during the time reduction, the second predetermined image 676 becomes the symbol "◯" indicating that the special chart 2 change display game is being executed (changing). Also, the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 displays the number "
" is displayed, and the number of times of variation display 677 indicates that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed after the end of the jackpot is two, as shown by "2G".

Furthermore, the word "2nd ATTACK" 729 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and in accordance with the display of the word 729, an effect (icon movement effect) is executed in which the central (second) hand (gear) icon 723b moves to the center of the display screen.
The battle presentation during the second variation is executed in the same manner as the presentation of the battle presentation during the first variation described above in (na) to (no) of Figure 141E.

(F) is the display mode of the display screen when the battle performance during the second change ends and the second change during the time reduction (the second special chart 2 change display game) ends. When the second change during the time reduction ends, the small symbols in the change display area 615 stop changing, and for example, a losing symbol such as "5, 8, 4" is displayed as a decorative stop symbol. Then, the second predetermined image 676 is the special chart 2
The symbol "x" indicates that the variable display game is stopped. In addition, in the battle performance during the second variable, if the meter decrease number 738 is, for example, "8 hits" (not shown), the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also decreases from 28 to 20 levels (8 scales). Therefore, the meter display of the meter 728 is a red meter 728a of levels 1 to 9.
In the second fluctuation during the time reduction, the number of reserved special figures 2, which was reduced to "3" at the start of the fluctuation, reaches the maximum value of "4" by winning the second start winning slot.
The return to Special Chart 2 reservation number display section 660 is displayed.

Next, at (e), the third variation during the time-saving period (the third special symbol 2 variation display game) begins, and the small symbol (decorative reduced symbol) in the variation display area 615 begins to vary. The third special symbol 2 variation display game can be executed for the same variation time as the second special symbol 2 variation display game (small variation time, for example, 33,800 ms for a win and 13,700 ms for a miss). With the start of the third variation during the time-saving period, the second predetermined image 676 becomes the symbol "◯," indicating that the special symbol 2 variation display game is currently being executed (changing). Additionally, the number "3" is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserved number display section 660, and the variation count display 677 indicates "3G," indicating that the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been executed since the end of the jackpot.

In addition, the words "FINAL ATTACK" 729 are displayed in the center of the display screen, and along with the display of the words 729, a hand (gear) icon 723 appears on the right (third eye).
The effect of moving the icon c to the center of the display screen (icon movement effect) is then executed. After that, the battle effect during the third variation is executed in the same manner as the battle effect during the first variation and the second variation described above.

(Ho) is the display mode of the display screen when the battle performance during the third change ends and the third change during the time reduction (the third special chart 2 change display game) ends. When the third change during the time reduction ends, the small symbols in the change display area 615 stop changing, and for example, a losing symbol such as "6, 8, 7" is displayed as a decorative stop symbol. Then, the second predetermined image 676 is the special chart 2
The symbol "x" indicates that the variable display game is stopped. In addition, in the battle performance during the third variable, if the meter decrease number 738 is, for example, "14 HITs" (not shown), the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also decreases from 20 to the 6th stage (14 scales). Therefore, the meter display of the meter 728 is the red meter 728 of the 1st to 6th stages.
It will just be a.

Next, in (Ma) of FIG. 141F, the fourth change (fourth special chart 2 change display game) starts during the time reduction, and the small pattern (decorative reduced pattern) in the change display area 615 starts to change. The fourth special chart 2 change display game is longer than the second and third special chart 2 change display games, and has a shorter change time than the first special chart 2 change display game (for example, 48,000 ms in the case of a hit during the change time).
When the fourth variation starts during the time-saving mode, the second predetermined image 676 displays the symbol "◯" indicating that the special chart 2 variation display game is being executed (changing).
In addition, the number "2" is displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660, and the number of changes display 67
7 indicates that the number of times the special chart change display game has been played after the jackpot has ended is 4, as shown by "4G."

Also, in the center of the display screen, large letters 741 reading "JUDGEMENT" are displayed.

Next, as shown in (M), a large right-hit instruction display 743 is displayed in the center of the display screen, instructing the player to hit right. The right-hit instruction display 743 is displayed larger than the right-hit instruction display 502 displayed on the right side of the display screen, making it easier for the player to recognize that hitting right offers an opportunity to accumulate remaining reserves (second start memory that is consumed in the normal game state (remaining reserve consumption mode) after the time-saving mode). In addition, an effect such as lightning may be added as appropriate to the large right-hit instruction display 743, and by displaying only the effect related to the right-hit instruction display 743, it is possible to more easily encourage the player to hit right.

After that, a spiral effect 745 is displayed in the center of the display screen at (mu), and the right-hit instruction display 743 and the meter 728 are displayed in a reduced size on the right side of the display screen. Also, a time gauge 748 indicating the time until the transition to the next effect is displayed, and the time gauge 748
The gauge (meter) in 48 decreases. Also, a preparation image 747 called "Preparing for battle" is displayed above the time gauge 748. As with the preparation image 710 called "Preparing for battle" in Fig. 141B (ki) to (ke), the preparation image 747 can also be switched to an emphasized mode one character at a time in order to correspond to the reserved second start memory (special image 2 start memory). Note that if the second start memory is reserved in advance before the display of the spiral effect 745, the characters can be switched to an emphasized mode one character at a time at a predetermined interval (for example, one second interval) in accordance with the decrease in the gauge of the time gauge 748, up to the character corresponding to the reserved second start memory. Also, the characters that have been reserved (
In response to the second starting memory, a hand icon or an ally character may appear overlaid on the spiral effect 745.

When the time gauge 748 runs out, the word "Ready" 750 is displayed in large letters in the center of the display screen. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the battle preparation is complete, that is, that the number of reserved special figures 2 has reached the maximum of four.

In (also), the effect button 25 is displayed in the center of the display screen as an operation prompt display 735.
and a gauge 735b indicating the effective time for button operation of the effect button 25 are displayed.
The word "Break Through" 735c is displayed at the top of 5a. The word 735c suggests the action of the ally character 739 in the subsequent battle performance, but can also function as a character that encourages a player who wants to enjoy the battle performance to operate the performance button 25.

In (Ya), after the effect button 25 is operated (pressed), a battle effect is executed by the ally character 729 and the enemy character 726 (not shown), and then the fourth change (4
The fourth variation during the time reduction (fourth special chart 2 variation display game) ends. With the end of the fourth variation during the time reduction (fourth special chart 2 variation display game), the small symbols in the variation display area 615 stop varying, for example, "6, 8
The losing symbol "7" is displayed as a decorative stopping symbol.
becomes the symbol "x" indicating that the special chart 2 variable display game is stopped. When the fourth variation during the time reduction ends, the time reduction mode #1, which is the number of time reductions of four, also ends, and the performance mode shifts to the remaining reserve consumption mode. In the remaining reserve consumption mode, the second start memory (remaining reserve) reserved during the time reduction mode #1 (maximum of four) is consumed in order. Note that the variation time can be set appropriately, but for example, if there are four remaining reserves, the variation time in the case of a loss in the special chart 2 variable display game that consumes the first to third remaining reserves can be relatively short (small variation time, for example, 400 ms in the case of a loss),
The fluctuation time in the case of a loss in the special chart 2 fluctuation display game that consumes the fourth remaining reservation can be relatively long (large fluctuation time, for example, 2000 ms in the case of a loss). Also, the fluctuation time in the case of a hit in the first to fourth remaining reservations can be the same (large fluctuation time, for example, 10,000 ms in the case of a hit).
).

[Another example of the production screen]
Next, another example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 142A to 142C.

Figures 142A to 142C are another example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the sixth embodiment. Note that the same configurations and effects as those in Figures 141A to 141F can be implemented in the same way, and explanations of these same configurations and effects will be omitted where appropriate. For example, (Se 1) in Figure 142A to (No 1) in Figure 142C are only partially different from (Se) in Figure 141C to (No) in Figure 141E, respectively, and explanations of the same configurations and effects will be omitted where appropriate.

(Su) in Figure 142A is a screen transition diagram when the second effect (light ball effect) is performed, in which light ball (or light circle) effects 716a, 716b, and 716c, the same as (Su) in Figure 141C, fly and spread. In other words, after the screen transitions from (A) to (Shi) as described above, time-saving effect #1 can transition to the screen transition diagram of another example (Example 2) shown from Figure 142 (Su) onwards.

After that, in another example (Example 2), the screen transitions to (Se1), and the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen displays "
At this time, the time becomes "11:48", and a panel change effect (first effect) is executed in which the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are changed into one large rainbow-colored panel 713a. The panel change effect causes one large panel 713a to be displayed in rainbow colors, which increases the player's anticipation for a big win, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Note that if there is no over-winning in (su), the light sphere effects 716a, 716b, and 716c are displayed.
Even if the second effect (light ball effect) in which the panel 713a flies does not occur, a panel change effect in which the panel 713a is switched to a large rainbow-colored panel 713a over time may be performed. Note that the rate at which the panel change effect in which the panel 713a is switched to a large rainbow-colored panel (probability of the rainbow-colored panel change effect) occurs can be made higher if the rainbow-colored panel change effect occurs after the second effect (light ball effect) occurs than if the rainbow-colored panel change effect occurs over time. This encourages the player to try to trigger the second effect (light ball effect) by winning an over-win, increasing the excitement of the game. Also, "1st" is displayed in the bottom right of the panel 713a, and it is determined that the panel 713a is the left panel 713a among the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c.
For example, a moving image (image) of a friendly character 721 or the like can be displayed within the panel 713a, and the moving image and the panel 713a can be recognized as corresponding to the character 721.
The frame a may be vibrated separately and independently (for example, in the direction of the arrow).

Then, in (1), as in (2), the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen turns red and shows "3:59," and a countdown display 719 showing the number of seconds remaining in the countdown is displayed in front of the large panel 713a (front, upper layer).

(Ta1) shows the display state of the display screen when the timer 708 in the upper left corner of the display screen reaches "0:00". A countdown display 719 from "3" to "0" is displayed on the large panel 7.
By adopting such an embodiment, the sense of unity between the large panel 713a and the countdown display 719 can be improved, resulting in a countdown display with good visibility.

In (Chi 1), the timer 708 is hidden, and the ally character 721 (for example, the main character) is displayed large on the display screen, and a large rainbow-colored hand (gear) is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen.
Only one icon 753 (large hand icon) is displayed. The hand (gear) icon 753 is displayed in a rainbow color that corresponds to the rainbow color of the single large panel 713a that was displayed immediately before (Ta1). Therefore, if the player selects the rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753,
By visually recognizing 53, the expectation of hitting the jackpot can be greatly increased, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In (1), the words "Battle Start" are displayed in front of the ally character 721, informing the player that the game will progress to a battle performance. The large rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753, the small symbols in the variable display area 615, and the right-hit instruction display 502 can be preferentially displayed in front of the words "Battle Start" (on the front, upper layer).

In (te1) of FIG. 142B, a meter 728, for example a 40-level meter (gauge), is displayed at the top of the display screen, and an enemy character 726 is displayed in the center of the display screen.

In (and 1), the words "1st ATTACK" 729 are displayed on the display screen.
In sync with the display of the words "1st ATTACK," an effect (icon movement effect) is executed in which a large rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753 moves to the center of the display screen. During the icon movement effect, the moving icon 753 may be displayed even larger, rotated, or the icon itself may be animated and moved (for example, the movement of closing the fingers and making a fist). Note that the panels 713a (Se1) to (Ta1) may be replaced by panels 713b (2nd) in the bottom right corner and "
In the case of the panel 713c that displays "3rd", for example, in the second fluctuation during the time reduction, "2n
d ATTACK" is displayed, or "FINAL ATTACK" is displayed on the third change during time reduction.
The icon movement effect of the large rainbow colored hand (gear) icon 753 can be prevented from being executed until "ACK" is displayed.

In (Na1), the words "1st ATTACK" 729 are hidden, and a rainbow colored technique name display 753, "Hit until you fall down," appears in response to a large rainbow colored hand (gear) icon 753.
31 is displayed. Therefore, the player's visual recognition of the rainbow-colored technique name display 731 can further increase the player's sense of expectation of hitting a jackpot, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In (21), the technique name display 731 "Hit until knocked down" is hidden, and a light gathering effect 733 in which light gathers in the center of the display screen is displayed.

In (Nu1), the light gathering effect 733 is switched to an effect button image 735a that resembles the effect button 25 in the center of the display screen. That is, as the operation prompt display 735, the effect button image 735a and a gauge 735b that indicates the effective time for button operation of the effect button 25 are displayed below the effect button image 735a. In addition to displaying the effect button image 735a and the gauge 735b as the operation prompt display 735, the LED of the effect button 25
If a button is operated within the valid time, or if no button is operated, after the valid time has elapsed, an operation-responsive effect can be executed.

In (1), an operation-responsive effect (cut-in effect) is executed by a cut-in or the like, and an ally support character 737 is displayed on the display screen as an operation-responsive image.

Next, in (1) of FIG. 142C, the enemy character 726 displayed in the center of the display screen
For example, "100 HIT" and the number of meter reductions 738 are displayed on top of the display screen. In accordance with the number of meter reductions 738, the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also decreases from 40 to 0 (4
0 (0 divisions) meter decreases. Therefore, the meter display of meter 728 becomes red meter 7
28a, etc., disappear. Also, when the meter 728 disappears (returns to level 0), instead of displaying the number of hits for the remaining scale in the meter decrement number 738 (for example, "40 hits" when there are 40 levels remaining), a large value of "100 hits" can be displayed. Therefore, when there are hits that greatly exceed the remaining scale of the meter 728,
By allowing the player to visually recognize the number (overkill), the player can have a stronger sense of expectation that the ally character 721 will win the battle performance and get a big win, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In (Yu), the word "Defeat" 755 is displayed in large letters in the center of the display screen. The word "Defeat" 755 can be displayed in rainbow colors, for example. The background image displayed behind the word 755 and the effects applied around the word 755 may also be displayed in rainbow colors. By displaying the word "Defeat" which suggests that the player has won the battle effect, the player can sense that a big win will occur, which increases the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by displaying the word 755 etc. in rainbow colors, the player's sense of expectation of a big win can also be increased, which increases the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, a movable device (not shown) may be moved to overlap the front of the display screen in accordance with the display of the word "Defeat" 755. Furthermore, the word "Defeat" 755
After this is displayed, a victory effect may be displayed in which the ally character 721 defeats the enemy character 726.

In (Y), after the word "Defeat" 755 is displayed, the gold word "RUSH Confirmed" 757 is displayed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to more clearly notify the player that a jackpot game will be played after this. The word "RUSH Confirmed" 757 may be displayed in other colors such as rainbow colors.

In (wa), the first change during the time reduction (the first special chart 2 change display game) ends, and the decorative special pattern (large pattern) in the change display area 610 and the small pattern (decorative reduced pattern) in the change display area 615 are displayed.
stops varying, and a small win symbol (which may also be a big win symbol) with the symbol S1 "7, 7, 7" is displayed as a decorative stop symbol. The small win symbol S1 is the small win symbol of the special symbol 2 variable display game when normal power support is available (mainly a big win in specific game states A-C with normal power support). The small win symbol S1 is also a stop symbol determined by a small win symbol random number. Note that the symbol S1 may also be configured as the big win stop symbol of the special symbol 2 variable display game. The second predetermined image 676 then becomes the symbol "x" indicating that the special symbol 2 variable display game is currently stopped.

After that, the display screen transitions to (C), and a round game of small or big win (a game during a big win or small win) is executed. (C) is the display mode of the display screen when the first round of the round game is executed (ROUND 1). If a V win occurs during a round game of small win, a big win occurs, and the big win state due to the V win starts from the next second round.

[Example of fluctuation time depending on fluctuation pattern]
Next, referring to Figure 143, an example of the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern in time-saving mode #1 will be described. Figure 143 is a table that explains the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern in time-saving mode #1. Note that the fluctuation time in Figure 143 coincides with the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern in Figure 141A to Figure 142C. In addition, the fluctuation time is not limited to the example in Figure 143, and can be set appropriately within a range that does not change the magnitude relationship (relationship of inequality) of each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 143, the various fluctuation patterns in time-saving mode #1 include fluctuation patterns due to the 1st to 4th time-saving fluctuations (1st to 4th fluctuations during time-saving, 1st to 4th special chart 2 fluctuation display games) and fluctuation patterns due to the 1st to 4th remaining reserved special chart 2 fluctuation display games.

For example, the fluctuation time of the first time-saving fluctuation is 60,300 ms in the case of a hit, and 40,200 ms in the case of a miss (large fluctuation time).
If you win, it will be 33,800 ms, and if you lose, it will be 13,700 ms (small fluctuation time).The fluctuation time of the fourth time-saving fluctuation will be 48,000 ms if you win, and 35,000 ms if you lose (medium fluctuation time).Therefore, the fluctuation time of the fourth time-saving fluctuation will be longer than the fluctuation time of the second and third time-saving fluctuations, and shorter than the fluctuation time of the first time-saving fluctuation (second and third time-saving fluctuations < fourth time-saving fluctuation < first time-saving fluctuation).

By setting the first time of time-saving to a longer time, it is possible to easily save up to a maximum of (4) reserved (special chart 2 start memory) during the first time of time-saving to a longer time display game, which can increase the interest of the game. Also, since the fourth time of time-saving to a longer time is set, it is possible to easily save up to a maximum of (4) reserved that will be consumed in the remaining reserved consumption mode after that.
On the other hand, by setting the time for the second and third time-saving fluctuations to be shorter, the time-saving effect #1, which does not require the player to accumulate reserves, can be performed at a good tempo.
This can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the remaining reserved 1 to 3 special chart 2 variable display game fluctuation time is 400m in case of miss.
s, and the remaining reserved fourth special chart 2 variable display game fluctuation time is 2000m in case of miss
The variable time of the remaining reserved 1 to 4 special chart 2 variable display games is 100 in the case of a hit.
It becomes 00ms.

In this way, by setting the change time of the special chart 2 variable display games for the first to third remaining reserves to be shorter in the case of a loss, the remaining reserve consumption mode can be played at a good pace, increasing the interest in the game. Also, since the change time of the special chart 2 variable display game for the fourth remaining reserve is set to be longer, time can be secured to display the results when all the remaining reserves are losses in the remaining reserve consumption mode, and an easy-to-understand display can be provided. On the other hand, since the change time of the special chart 2 variable display games for the first to fourth remaining reserves is set to be the same and longer in the case of a win, sufficient time can be secured to perform the effects when a win occurs, making it easier to highlight the jackpot effects, increasing the interest in the game.

[Example of expected winning probability based on panel combination]
Next, referring to Figure 144, an example of the probability of winning (probability of big win or small win) according to the combination of panels 713a to 713c in the panel change effect (first effect) of (Se) in Figure 141C or (Se1) in Figure 142A will be described. Note that the example of the probability of winning in Figure 144 can also be applied to the probability of winning according to the combination of panels before the panel change effect ((Ko) to (Su)).

FIG. 144 is a table showing the probability of winning according to the combination of panels 713a to 713c. "1st" corresponds to the left panel 713a, and "2nd" corresponds to the center panel 713b.
13b, and "3rd" corresponds to the right panel 713c.

The rainbow panel shown at the bottom of the table corresponds to the single large rainbow-colored panel 713a after the panel change effect (Se1), and if it becomes a rainbow panel, the win expectancy is 100% (a win is guaranteed). Instead of a 100% win expectancy, a value closer to 100% (such as 99.9%, which means a win is almost guaranteed) may be used. The rainbow panel is not displayed before the panel change effect, but is instead a dedicated panel (premium panel (very unlikely to appear)) for the panel change effect. Therefore, by changing into a rainbow panel, which is rarely displayed, a special effect can be created, which can heighten the player's anticipation for a big win and increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gold panel is not displayed before the panel change effect, and is an exclusive panel (semi-premium panel (low probability of appearance)) for the "3rd" (left panel 713c) due to the panel change effect, and by changing into a gold panel it is possible to indicate a high probability of winning (medium to high probability of winning), and similarly create a special feeling in the effect.

In addition, if all three panels 713a to 713c are the same color, the expected winning probability is 10
Specifically, if the panels 713a to 713c are all blue panels, all green panels, or all red panels, the expected probability of winning is 100% (guaranteed win).

On the other hand, when the panels 713a to 713c are a combination of "blue panel, blue panel, green panel," the expectation is lowest (expectation (low)), and as the proportion of green panels and red panels increases, the expectation of winning is set to gradually increase as shown in Figure 144. For example, when the panels 713a to 713c are a combination of "red panel, red panel, green panel," the expectation of winning is highest (expectation (high)), except when all panels are the same color or exclusive panels. In this way, when the colors of the panels 713a to 713c are not the same, the expectation of winning is set to increase in the order of blue panel < green panel < red panel.

It should be noted that when a panel with a high probability of winning, such as a red panel, is displayed as the "1st" panel (left panel 713a), it is more likely to be displayed as the "2nd" (center panel 713b) or "3rd" panel.
As shown in FIG. 144, the expected probability of winning can be set higher when a panel with a high expected probability of winning is displayed as the "2nd" panel (center panel 713b) than when it is displayed as the "3rd" panel (right panel 713c). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 144, the expected probability of winning can be set higher when a panel with a high expected probability of winning is displayed as the "2nd" panel (center panel 713b) than when it is displayed as the "3rd" panel (right panel 713c).

[Example of effect production]
Next, referring to Figure 145, an example of the expected probability of winning (expected probability of a big win or small win) due to the effect presentation when a win (over win) is won after reaching the maximum reserved value (4 balls) of (su) (se) in Figure 141C or (se1) in Figure 142A will be explained.

Figure 145 is a table explaining the expected probability of winning due to the effect presentation when an over-winning combination is achieved.

The content of the effect presentation can be selected from, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, a light ball presentation (second presentation) using a light ball-shaped effect with no promotion (effect occurs (no promotion)), a panel change presentation (first presentation) occurs (effect occurs → panel promotion), or air is activated in conjunction with the light ball presentation and panel change presentation (effect occurs + air activated).

If the effect effect is an effect occurrence (no promotion), the winning expectation (big hit expectation or small hit expectation) is small. Also, if the effect effect is an effect occurrence → panel promotion, the winning expectation is medium, and the corresponding movable accessory can operate so as to overlap, for example, on the front of the display screen.

On the other hand, if the effect presentation is an effect generation + air activation, the probability of winning is 100% (a win is guaranteed), and the air launching device (not shown) of the frame decoration device 18 can send out air (wind) that the player can feel (air activation) to the player. Therefore, the effect presentation can be perceived by players through means other than sight and hearing, which creates an element of surprise and increases the enjoyment of the game.

[Examples of dialogue effects corresponding to the hand icon colors used in the icon movement effects]
Next, referring to FIG. 146, the hand (gear) icon for icon movement effects (icon 72
3a to 723c, 753) will be described.

FIG. 146 shows the hand (gear) icon for icon movement effects (icons 723a to 723c
, 753)。 753) corresponding to the color of the dialogue effects (speech effects) is a table explaining the content.

Specifically, the icon movement effect is shown in (to) of FIG. 141D, (hi) and (he) of FIG. 141E.
142B (and 1) is an effect in which the icon moves to the center of the display screen. Note that the hand (gear) icon (icons 723a to 723c,
The colors of the panels 713a to 713c that were displayed immediately before are respectively corresponding to the colors of the panels 713a to 713c that were displayed immediately before.

For example, if the color of the moved hand (gear) icon is blue, then (Na) in FIG. 141D
The technique name display 731 of the character "Punch" is displayed in blue. In addition, in accordance with the technique name display 731 of the character "Punch" in blue, a line when the technique name appears, such as "Go for it with all your might!", is displayed as text (subtitles) on the display screen, and is also played through the speakers 19 (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).
) can output audio.

When the blue technique name display 731 "punch" is displayed, the probability of success is set low (expectation (low)), the effect button 25 does not vibrate (vibration "x"), and no dialogue is spoken when the effect button image 735a appears ("-"). Furthermore, when the blue technique name display 731 "punch" is displayed, a line such as "Whoa!" from the ally character 721 or the support character 737 during an attack can be displayed on the display screen and output as audio from the speaker 19. Note that these lines and the lines for the following green to rainbow cases may be output as audio only without being displayed on the display screen, or conversely, may be displayed on the display screen without being output as audio.

Next, for example, if the color of the icon of the moved hand (gear) is green, the technique name display 731 of (na) in Fig. 141D will be displayed in green as "Punch," and a line such as "I'm all set!" can be displayed and output as audio when the technique name appears. When the green technique name display 731 of "Punch" is displayed, the expected success rate is set slightly low (a level higher than the expected rate (low)), there is no vibration of the effect button 25 (vibration "x"), and no line is output when the effect button image 735a appears ("-"). Furthermore, when the green technique name display 731 of "Punch" is displayed, a line such as "Whoa!" from the ally character 721 or the support character 737 when attacking can be displayed and output as audio, similar to the blue display.

Next, for example, if the color of the moved hand (gear) icon is red (red), then
The technique name display 731 of "No" (Na) is displayed in red as "Hit Me Hard!", and a line such as "I'll make it flashy!" can be displayed when the technique name appears, and can also be output as a voice. When the technique name display 731 of "Hit Me Hard" is displayed in red, the expected success rate is set to be slightly high (one level lower than the expected success rate (high)), and the effect button 25 does not vibrate (vibration "x"
). When the effect button image 735a appears, the line to be spoken when the button image appears may be, for example, "Take that!" from the ally character 721, and may also be output as a voice. When the technique name display 731 of "Punch me hard" is displayed in red, for example, the line to be spoken when the ally character 721 or the support character 737 says, "Dragon wave!"
" The attack dialogue can be displayed and output as voice.

Also, for example, if the color of the icon of the moved hand (gear) is gold (gold), the technique name display 731 of (na) in Fig. 142B is displayed in gold as "punch at close range", and a line when the technique name appears, for example, "Try and stop it!", can be displayed and output as a voice. When the technique name display 731 of "punch at close range" in gold is displayed, the expectation of a hit is set high (expectation (high)), and there is no vibration of the effect button 25 (vibration "x"). Also, in the line when the effect button image 735a appears, for example, the line "Shoot through!" by the ally character 721 is displayed during the third change (i.e., "FINAL ATTACK
") can be displayed and audibly output only when the technique name display 731 "hits at close range" is displayed in gold. Also, when the technique name display 731 "hits at close range" is displayed in gold, a line at the time of attack, for example, "Ultimate secret technique!" by the ally character 721 or the support character 737 can be displayed and audibly output.

Next, for example, if the color of the moved hand (gear) icon is rainbow (rainbow color), then FIG. 142B
The technique name display 731 of (Na1) is displayed in rainbow colors and reads "Hit until you fall down." For example, a line such as "Protect everyone!" can be displayed and output as voice when the technique name appears. When the technique name display 731 of rainbow color "Hit until you fall down" is displayed, the expected success rate is 100% (
It is set to "Confirm Win" and can generate vibration of the effect button 25 (vibration "
For example, the vibration of the effect button 25 may occur when the operation prompt display 735 is displayed. In addition, when the effect button image 735a appears, the button image appearance dialogue may be, for example, a dialogue of the ally character 721 saying "Press it!" during the first change (i.e., "1
It can be displayed and output as sound only when "st ATTACK" is displayed.
When a rainbow colored technique name display 731 saying "Hit until knocked down" is displayed, for example, the attacking line "Overboost toe!" by the ally character 721 or support character 737 can be displayed and output as voice.

[Example of meter outer effect color corresponding to meter scale color]
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, an example of the meter outer periphery effect color corresponding to the meter scale color will be described.

FIG. 147 is a table for explaining the color of the effect surrounding the periphery of the frame 728d corresponding to the color of the meter scale (40-level meter, gauge) of the meter 728, that is, the content of the meter periphery effect color.

Specifically, as described above in (te) of Figure 141D, the colors of the meter scale (40-level meter, gauge) of meter 728 can be displayed as follows: levels 1 to 9 are displayed in red with a red meter 728a, levels 10 to 20 are displayed in orange with an orange meter 728b, and levels 21 to 40 are displayed in purple with a purple meter 728c.

For example, when the meter scale of the meter 728 is displayed from the 21st to 40th stages of the purple meter 728c as shown in (te) of Figure 141D, that is, when the remaining points (remaining number of meter scale marks) are 40 to 21 pt (stages), the meter outer effect color of the frame 728d will be "none" (transparent).

Also, for example, as shown in (F) of FIG. 141E, the meter scale of the meter 728 is 10 to 20.
When the orange meter 728b is displayed up to the third stage, that is, when the remaining points (number of remaining marks on the meter) are between 20 and 10 points (stages), the effect color around the meter in the frame 728d turns orange. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the enemy character 726 is taking damage as the battle performance progresses, increasing the excitement of the game.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 141E (e), when the meter scale of the meter 728 is displayed from 1 to 9 levels of the red meter 728a, that is, when the remaining points (remaining number of meter scale marks) are 9 to 1 pt (level), the meter outer effect color of the frame 728d is "
Therefore, as the battle performance progresses, the player can easily visually recognize that the enemy character 726 has received considerable damage, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Example of the color of the meter decrease corresponding to the decrease in the meter scale]
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, an example of the color of the meter decrease number corresponding to the decrease number of the meter scale will be described.

FIG. 148 is a table for explaining the color (display color of the decrease number) of the meter decrease number 738 displayed on the display screen in accordance with the decrease number of the meter scale (40-level meter, gauge) of the meter 728. For example, the meter decrease number 738 is "12" as shown in (of) of FIG. 141E.
"HIT" or the like can be displayed on the display screen.

When displaying the meter decrement number 738, the display color of the decrement number is silver (silver, gray) if the meter decrement number is 0 to 9, green (green) if the meter decrement number is 10 to 19, and red (red) if the meter decrement number is 20 to 40. For example, as shown in (no) of Figure 141E, when the meter decrement number 738 is 12 ("12 HIT"), the display color of the decrement number is green. In this way, when displaying the meter decrement number 738, the decrement number is displayed as is with the word "HIT" added ("**HIT"). Note that when the meter disappears (when it becomes 0), the meter decrement number 738 can be displayed as a value larger than the actual decrement number ("100 HIT"), as shown in (no. 1) of Figure 141C.

[Example of the meter decrease corresponding to the hand icon color]
Next, referring to FIG. 149, the hand icon (icon 72) that moves in the icon movement effect is
3a to 723c, 753) will be described.

FIG. 149 shows the hand icons (icons 723a to 723c) that move in the icon movement performance.
141E, the meter decrement number 738 is a table for explaining the contents of the meter decrement number (the decrement number of the meter scale of the meter 728) corresponding to the color of the meter decrement number 738.
When "IT" is displayed on the display screen, the meter scale of the meter 728 also changes by the number of meter decreases (1
The value decreases by 2 scale marks (12 steps).

As shown in FIG. 149, the hand icon (icon 723a) that moves in the icon movement effect
When the color of the hand icon (icons 723a to 723c, 753) is blue (blue), the meter decrement number of the meter 728 is a value selected from the range of 4 to 40.
723c, 753) is green (green), the meter decrement number is selected from the range of 8 to 40, and when it is red (red), the meter decrement number is selected from the range of 14 to 40.
In the case of a rainbow (rainbow colored) the number of meter reductions can be selected from the range of 20 to 40, and in the case of a rainbow (rainbow colored) the number of meter reductions is 40 (a guaranteed hit (defeat)). Except for the rainbow colored, the number of meter reductions can be selected by lottery or the like.

Specifically, for example, when a movement effect is performed by the blue hand icon 723a at (to) in FIG. 141D, the number of meter decreases in the meter 728 is 1 as shown at (no) in FIG. 141E.
142C (1), the number of meter decreases by 40 (fixed value).

In addition, the hand icons (icons 723a to 723c, 75
3) The color of the panel 713a to 713c after the panel change effect (first effect) is the same as the color of the panel 713a to 713c, so the number of meter decreases can also correspond to the color of the panel 713a to 713c.

In the sixth embodiment described above, it has been explained that in the third specific game state (a time reduction, specific game state A) after the special game state, as part of the effects of the time-saving mode #1 (time-saving effect #1, challenge effect), effects such as panel change effect (first effect), light ball effect (second effect), and icon movement effect can be executed. However, these effects can be executed in the first specific game state (b
It may also be executed in a first specific gaming state (c time reduction, specific gaming state B) or a second specific gaming state (c time reduction, specific gaming state C).

[Actions and Effects of Sixth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a plurality of specific images (hand icons 723a-723c, 753, panels 713a-713c) on a display means (display device 41) as effects related to a game (variable display game, special symbol variable display game), and is capable of executing a game and generating a game state advantageous to a player (a special game state (big win or small win), a specific game state). In the gaming machine 10, the display modes of the specific images include a first display mode (a blue display mode) and a second display mode (a rainbow-colored display mode). The effect control means is capable of executing predetermined effects related to the display of the specific images (a rainbow-colored panel change effect (first effect) corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753, and a light ball effect (second effect) using effects 716a-716c) in a game capable of generating a game state advantageous to a player. In accordance with a predetermined effect, when a second display mode (rainbow display mode) of one specific image (hand icon 753, panel 713a) is displayed, other specific images (hand icons 723a to 723c, panels 713b to 713c) are hidden.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when a predetermined effect is executed in a game that can generate a gaming state advantageous to the player and the second display mode of one specific image is displayed, other specific images are hidden, thereby improving the visibility of the one specific image and increasing the expectation that a gaming state advantageous to the player will occur, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the display mode of the specific image further includes a third display mode (red display mode), and one specific image (hand icon 723c, panel 7
13c), other specific images (hand icons 723a to 723c) are displayed.
3b, panels 713a to 713b) can be displayed.

According to this gaming machine 10, when a predetermined effect is executed in a game resulting in a special result and one specific image of the third display mode is displayed, another specific image is also displayed, so that the panel change effect (first effect) can be executed using the other specific image, making it easier to suggest (indicate) the likelihood of a win. Furthermore, by being able to display both the one specific image and the other specific image, it is easy to tell whether the effect being executed (battle effect) corresponds to the one specific image or the other specific image, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, in accordance with a predetermined effect (a rainbow-colored panel change effect (first effect) corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753 and a light ball effect (second effect) using effects 716a to 716c), a second image of one specific image (hand icon 753, panel 713a) is displayed.
When the display mode (rainbow display mode) is displayed, other specific images (hand icons 723a to
723c, panels 713b to 713c) and can execute a change effect (rainbow panel change effect (first effect)) that switches to the second display mode of the one specific image, and the expectation that the game will result in a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of winning) is the same when the change effect is executed as when the second display mode of the one specific image is displayed over time without executing the change effect.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to unify the expectations of the players regarding the second display mode of one specific image, and it is possible to provide a consistent presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a movable means (movable gadget) that can operate in accordance with the effects, and when a second display mode (rainbow-colored display mode) of one specific image (hand icon 753, panel 713a) is displayed in accordance with a predetermined effect (a rainbow-colored panel change effect (first effect) corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753 and a light ball effect (second effect) using effects 716a to 716c), other specific images (hand icons 723a to 723c, panels 713b to 713c) are displayed in accordance with the predetermined effect (a rainbow-colored panel change effect (first effect) corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753 and a light ball effect (second effect) using effects 716a to 716c).
c) is made invisible and the movable means is operable.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the second display mode of one specific image is displayed, the moving means can be operated to enhance the presentation effect, and the player's anticipation of a big win can be increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first to sixth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The seventh embodiment relates to a right-hit instruction display.

Figure 150 shows a case where the stopped pattern becomes a time-saving pattern in the final special pattern change display game (final game of time-saving) of the specific game state, and then the specific game state (time-saving state) of time-saving c is entered.
In Figure 150, the specific game state relating to the final special chart change display game (final game of the time reduction) is a time reduction state due to a time reduction that occurs immediately after a jackpot due to a jackpot, or a time reduction state due to b time reduction that occurs when the number of special chart change display games executed after the jackpot state ends (excluding the number of times in the special chart change state) reaches the ceiling number of times, but it may be any other time reduction state, or a special chart change state instead of a time reduction state.

As shown in Figure 150, when the change display (final change) of the final special symbol change display game of time-saving a or time-saving b ends, the time-saving symbol is displayed on the special symbol 2 display 52 (or special symbol 1 display 51) and the display device 41 during the display time of the stopped symbol (stop display time). Then, after the stop display time has elapsed, the final game of the time-saving ends and time-saving c begins. Note that here, since the start memory is zero and the special symbol change display game of time-saving c has not yet started, the display of the time-saving symbol continues even after the stop display time has elapsed.

As mentioned above, the timing at which time reduction a or time reduction b ends is the timing at which the time reduction end setting process (A4812, Figure 33) is executed within the special chart change process, i.e., the timing at which the final change stops.

The game control device 100 ends the right-hit notification (display notifying that it is time to hit right) state on the first game status display section 57 of the collective display device 50 when the time reduction a or the time reduction b ends, and resumes the right-hit notification state when the time reduction c starts. Therefore, the right-hit notification on the collective display device 50 disappears during the stop display time.

When a presentation command corresponding to the release of normal power is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the presentation control device 300 can display a right-hit instruction display on the display device 41 in response to the release of normal power (solid line). As shown in FIG. 150, if the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is released just before the end of time reduction a or time reduction b, even after time reduction a or time reduction b ends and the right-hit notification state on the collective display device 50 ends, the right-hit instruction display on the display device 41 can be maintained and will continue to be displayed from time reduction a or time reduction b to time reduction c. This prevents the right-hit instruction display from being frequently displayed and hidden on the display device 41 depending on whether or not a specific game state is in effect, preventing player confusion.

As shown by the dotted line, during a specific game state, it is also possible to configure the game control device 100 to display a right-hit notification on the collective display device 50, and the presentation control device 300 to display a right-hit instruction display on the display device 41. Even in this configuration, even if the time reduction a or b ends and the right-hit notification state on the collective display device 50 ends, the presentation control device 300 will maintain the right-hit instruction display on the display device 41 during the time the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed.

As described above, when a specific game state (for example, time reduction a or time reduction b) ends and a specific game state (for example, time reduction c) starts again, the right-hit instruction display does not end after the end of the previous specific game state, but continues until the next specific game state (for example, time reduction c) resumes. Note that, as an indication suggesting a game ball launch mode that is advantageous to the player, the game state (
In this way, the right-hit instruction display will not be frequently displayed and hidden on the display device 41 depending on whether or not a specific game state is in effect, and the player will not be confused.

[Actions and Effects of Seventh Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game, and is capable of generating a specific game state advantageous to the player. The game control means is capable of generating a specific game state (e.g., time reduction c) again after a specific game state (e.g., time reduction a or time reduction b) has ended. The presentation control means is capable of continuing on the display means (e.g., display device 41) a display (e.g., a right-hit instruction display or a mode display) suggesting a game ball launch mode advantageous to the player in the specific game state, without terminating it after the end of the previous specific game state, until the subsequent specific game state (e.g., time reduction c) resumes.

In such a gaming machine 10, displays suggesting the manner in which the gaming ball is launched that will be advantageous to the player in a specific gaming state (for example, right-hit instruction displays and mode displays) are not frequently displayed or hidden on the display means depending on whether or not the specific gaming state is in place, so the player will not get confused.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical concept, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. For example, it is possible to replace the time-saving state with a probability variable state. For example, the presentation control device can execute part of the processing executed by the game control device, and conversely, the game control device can execute part of the processing executed by the presentation control device. For example,
It is also possible to combine multiple embodiments and multiple modified examples in various ways. Furthermore, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and it is intended to include all modifications within the scope of the claims and their equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced by the number of medals paid out. The number of game media used is the number of medals inserted, which is the number of medals inserted into the slot machine. In addition, in a slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is
The ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out through various bonuses to the total number of medals paid out over a specified period.

10 gaming machine 25 effect button 30 gaming board 32 gaming area 34 normal start gate 36 first start winning port (first start winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device (second start winning area)
38 First special variable prize winning device 39 Second special variable prize winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area (V winning entrance)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
511 Operation notice display 512 Operation warning display 513 Operation display 520 Bulb burnout error display 522 Overflow error display 524 Two-dimensional code 541 Specific model display (complete function equipped display)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means capable of executing a game,
The game control means
a calculation processing means for performing predetermined calculation processing according to a program;
a read-only storage means for storing the program;
a rewritable storage means for storing information updated as the predetermined arithmetic processing is executed,
The arithmetic processing means
a first branch instruction and a second branch instruction that branch an execution address of an instruction included in the program;
the first branch instruction is a branch instruction of a predetermined instruction length,
the second branch instruction is a branch instruction that has a shorter instruction length than the first branch instruction and performs a branch with a limited range of branch destination addresses by determining a specific flag,
the read-only storage means includes a first used area set as a used area for storing data, a second used area set as the used area, a third used area set as the used area, a first unused area located between the first used area and the second used area and set as an unused area, and a second unused area located between the second used area and the third used area and set as the unused area;
The program
is stored in the first use area,
A specific processing routine;
a specific subroutine called from the specific processing routine,
The specific processing routine
a first instruction capable of changing the specific flag is placed at a first address, and a second branch instruction capable of branching an execution address to a third address that is later than the second address is placed at a second address that is later than the first address, and the second branch instruction can be executed without going through a process that can change the specific flag after the first instruction is executed;
placing a second instruction for calling the specific subroutine between the second address and the third address;
Gaming machine. the first instruction is an instruction to compare a predetermined register with a specific value and change the specific flag in accordance with the comparison result;
The gaming machine according to claim 1.